The full text on this page is automatically extracted from the file linked above and may contain errors and inconsistencies.
Il
OF T H E
B A S E D ON THE R E S U L T S O FTH Ia
WITH CONTRIBUTIONS FROM MANY EMINENT MEN OF SC IENCE
AND SEVERAL DEPARTMENTS OF THE GOVERNMENT
C O M P I L E D U N D E R A U T H O R I T Y OF C O N G R E S S
BY
F R A N C IS A .'WALKER, M .A .
S U P E R I N T E N D E N T OF THE 9 T.H C E N S U S ,
P R O F E S S O R OF PO LITICA L ECONOMY AND H IST O R Y ,
SHEFFIELD SCIENTIFIC SCHOOL OF YALE COLLEGE.
JULIUS
B I EN, LITH.
1 8 7 4 .
0
. M . Poe.
G !3d I
.& i
U
53
3
X M
\ c
. 1970
,F
Q PT
M
•OL G. M. TOWNSEND
OCT. ? 2 .
1940
Division ul Maps
NOV 301940
Library of Congress
' /i$o
I T " '!
l
I N D E X TO MAPS A N D C H A R T S .
PART
I.— P H Y S I C A L
FEATURES
OF TH E
U N IT E D
P lates
STATES.
P lates
R iver S ystems
..........................................
W o o d l a n d s ...............................................
. .
.......................
S torm C entres, F requency
T emperature (Annual M e a n ) ...................
. .
V
Smithsonian Institution.
U. S. Signal Office.
Smithsonian Institution.
V II
V III
T emperature (Hottest and Coldest Weeks)
. .
. . U. S. Signal Office.
I sobars .......................................................
. .
. .
U. S. Signal Office.
IX, X
H ypsometric S k e t c h ..............................
. A . Guyot and C. A . Schott.
X, A
C oal M e a s u r e s ......................................
...................C. H. Hitchcock.
G eological F ormations
.
.
.
.
XI, XII
C. H. Hitchcock and IV. P. Blake. XIII, X IV
PART
A ge
an d
X X X V II
S ex, L iving P opulation, A g g r e g a t e ......................................
•
X X X V III
x
X X X IX
B irth R a t e ..................................................................................................
XL
«
“
“
and
D ensity
XV
P olitical D ivisions ...................................... S . W . Stocking .
XVI
P opulation, 1790-1820..................................................................
of
“
C onsumption .........................................................................
XLI
X LII
“
“
“
1830-1840...................................................................
X V I, A
“
“
“
1850 .............................................................................
X V II
“
“
“
i8 6 0 ............................................................................
X V II, A
“
1870, with Indian R eservations............................ XV III, X IX
“
“
C onstituent E lements
Population, 1870................................................
of
“
F oreign P arentage, Population
of
( A bsolute)
..................................
X X III
X X IV
F oreign P opulation, G eneral (A bsolute) ...............................................
XXV
“
“
“
“
“
“
( R elative )
“
XXVI
(R elative) ................................................
S pecial, Irish, Germans (A bs.
“
“
“
“
by
M onth
“
from
“
and
Se
x
S ex,
and
and
R el.)
.
.
.
.
X X V II
R el. ) ...........................................
I lliteracy (Total P o p u latio n )...........................................................................
X X IX
and
(Adult White M ales).......................................................................
XXX
C hurch A c c o m m o d a t io n .....................................................................................
XXXI
...........................................................................
X X X II
................................................................................................................
E nteric,
et c ,
Fe v
....................................................................................
X X X IV
e a l t h
D ebt , S t a t e
an d
T a x a t io n , S t a t e
Lo
an d
Pe
o p l e
cal
Lo
N ationality .
.
.
x l iv
.
XLV
ers
XLVI
........................................................
T he A fflicted C lasses :— Blind, Deaf Mutes, Insane, Idiots, by Age and
X L V II-L
S e x ....................................................................................... F H. Wines.
T he A fflicted C lasses, by Race and Nationality, by Color and Na
tionality
L I-L IV
................................................................................ F . H. Wines.
L IS T
OF
M E M O IR S
AND
D IS C U S S IO N S .
P art I.
T he P hysical F eatures
T he W oodlands
an d
T he G eological M ap
T he M ines
and
of t h e
1-4
U. S............... W. H. Brewer.
1-5
of the
U. S............... C. H. Hitchcock and W. P. Blake.
of the
of the
P ages
U nited S t a t e s .................. J .D . Whitney.
F orest S ystems
M ining
T he C oal M easures
of the
6-9
W e s t ..................................R- W. Raymond. 10 -n
U. S ........................................... C. H. Hitchcock. 12-14
P a r t II.
T he Political D ivisions
of the
T he M inor Political D ivisions
X X X III
W
of t h e
and
I ntestinal D is e a s e s ............................................................
X X V III
O ccu patio n s
R ace
also by
British Americans; English and Welsh;
Swedes and Norwegians ( A bs.
“
x l iif
........................................................................
X X II
..................................
“
“
XXI
............................................................
( R elative )
A ge
XX
..................... .... .................................
C olored P opulation ( A bsolute)
«
by
“
“
M alarial D i s e a s e s ............................................................
from
D eaths,
I N D U S T R IA L S T A T IS T IC S .
S T A T IS T IC S .
N ative , F o r e i g n ..............................
“
“
P A R T II.— P O P U L A T IO N , S O C I A L A N D
III.— V I T A L
.....................................................................................
P redominating S e
D eaths
A rea
X X X V I, B
P acific C oast M a p s ............................................................ S. A . Galpin.
VI
. . . .
. . . .
of
proved Land in F a r m s ........................................................................... X X X V I, A
III, IV
...................W. H. Brewer.
R ain-F all (Annual)
Com, Dairy Products, Total Value of Agricultural Product, Im
I, II
. . . . A . von Steinwehr.
XXXVI
C rops:— Wheat, Rice, Tobacco, Hops, Oats, Cotton, Hay, S u gar,...................
c a l
...............................................................................
T he P rogress
of the
1-9
U. S........................... S .A . Galpin. 10-13
N ation .................................................... F . A . W alker.
1-6
P opulation, 1780-1880................................................................... E . B. E lliott.
7-8
of the
P art III.
A n A pproximate L ife-T able
X X X V R elations
F iscal C h a rt (United States G overnm ent)....................................................X X X V , A
U nited S t a t e s .................. S .W . Slocking.
of
R ace
and
for the
U nited S t a t e s ............ E . B. E lliott.
N ationality
to
M ortality
in
the
1-3
U nited
St a t e s ....................................................................................F A . Walker.
1-4
PREFACE AND INTRODUCTION TO THE STA TISTICAL ATLAS.
BY
THE
C O M P IL E R .
PIE present work is a growth from the series of maps introduced into the quarto
I
volumes of the Ninth Census. During the year 1871, the writer, as Superinten-A. dent of Census, had caused to be laid down in color upon outline-maps of the
United States, the proportions disclosed by the enumeration as existing in the several
sections of the country, between the aggregate population and its principal constituent
elements. No originality of design was claimed in this mode of representation. These
maps having been borrowed from the Census Office by Prof. D. C. Gilman, now President
of the University of California, were by him exhibited at a Session of the American
Geographical Society, eliciting expressions favorable to the application of this method to
these and other subjects in connection with the Statistical Tables then about to be published.
In January, 1872, a Memorial was addressed to the Census Office by several Professors
in the Sheffield Scientific School, recommending the graphic illustration of the census
volumes. The subject having been brought to the attention of the Department, a com
munication was addressed, June 5, 1872, by the Secretary of the Interior, to the Speaker
of the House of Representatives [Ex. Doc. No. 9, 42d Cong., 3d Sess.], inviting the atten
tion of Congress “ to the importance of graphically illustrating the three quarto volumes
“ of the ninth census of the United States, by a series of maps exhibiting to the eye the
“ varying intensity of settlement over the area of the country, the distribution among the
“ several States and sections of the foreign population, and of the principal elements
“ thereof, the location of the great manufacturing and mining industries, the range of cul
tiv a tio n for each of the staple productions of agriculture, the prevalence of particular
“ forms of disease, and other facts of material and social importance which have been
“ obtained through said census,” and recommending an appropriation therefor.
A t the same session Congress made an appropriation for the purpose here expressed.
Under that appropriation 24 plates of graphic illustrations were incorporated in the
volumes which appeared during that and the following year. The several subjects taken
for illustration were as follows:
A Hypsometric Sketch of the United States, prepared by Prof. A. Guyot of
Princeton College; with addition of intermediate level curves, by Prof. Chas. A. Schott,
of Washington. (PI. X, A, of the present publication.)
A Temperature Chart and a Rain Chart of the United States, being a reproduction
of charts published by the Smithsonian Institution. (Plates Y and VII.)
A Geological Map of the United States, compiled by Profs. C. H. Hitchcock and
W. P. Blake. (Plates X III and XIV.)
The remaining maps were prepared in the Census Office.
The following were the subjects taken for treatment. [The Arabic letters denote the page of the quarto
volume of the Census, where the map first appeared. The Roman figures denote the Plates of the present
publication, which correspond more or less fully to the maps as they first appeared.]
Volume on Population and Social Statistics. (25,000 copies.)
The density of the Total Population, 1, (X V III— IX .)
X
The Colored Population, 75, (X X I.)
The Foreign Population, 297, (X X V .)
The Germans, the Irish, 327, (X X V II, maps 1 and 3.)
The Swedes and Norwegians, the English and Welsh, the Chinese, the British Americans, 343, (X X V III, in
part.)
Illiteracy, 393, (X X IX .)
Wealth, 393, (X X X III.)
Area and Political Divisions of the U. S , 571, (X V.)
Volume on Vital Statistics.
10,000 copies.)
Deaths from Consumption, 1, (X LI.)
Deaths from Malarial Diseases, 145. (X L II.)
Deaths from Typhoid, Typhus, and Enteric Fevers, 305, (X L V I.)
Deaths from Dysentery, Diarrhoea, and Enteritis, 425, (XLV.)
Hypsometric Sketch, 513, X, A.)
Temperature Chart. 579, (V II.)
Rain Chart, 649, (V.)
Volume on Industry and Wealth. (15,000 copies.)
Wheat, 81, (X X X V I, in part)
Corn, 121, (X X X V I, A, in part.)
Cotton, 161, (X X X V I, in part)
Hay, 217, (X X X V I, in part.)
Tobacco, 289, (X X X V I, in part.)
Dairy Products, 369, (X X X V I, A, in part.)
Geological Map in pocket at end of Vol. , X III-X IV .)
The rudeness of the maps prepared in the Census Office, as thus first published,
hardly requires apology. The writer had only begun to appreciate the capabilities of this
method, which now opens before him, whatever way he turns, so that the hardest task
is that of selection and rejection, while the art of construction and arrangement is one in
which indefinite improvement appears to be possible. The public acceptance of this early
effort at the graphic illustration of the statistics of the United States, was cordial in the
extreme. In his Annual Report for 1872, the Secretary of the Interior recommended—
“ That a Statistical Atlas of the United States, based upon the results of the Ninth
“ Census, to contain a large number of maps, with appropriate text and tables, be
“ authorized, in an edition not exceeding five thousand, to be prepared under the direction
“ of the Superintendent of the Census, for distribution to public libraries, learned societies,
« colleges and academies, with a view to promote that higher kind of political education
“ which has hitherto been so greatly neglected in this country, but toward which the
“ attention of the general public, as well as of instructors and students, is now being turned,
“ with the most lively interest The exact knowledge of our country should be the basis
“ of this education, and it is in the power of Congress, by authorizing such a publication
“ as is here recommended, to practically inaugurate the study of political and social statistics
“ in the colleges and higher schools of the land.” (Report, pp. 15-6-)
In accordance with this recommendation, Congress, by Act of March 3, 1873, made
the appropriation under which the present work is issued. The compilation was under
taken by the writer with a corps of able assistants, immediately upon the passage of the
act cited, and the full results are now presented to Congress and the country. Freedom
from errors in matter, and faults in style, is not claimed for the w ork; indeed, now that it
lies finished, the Compiler can detect many blemishes, and could lightly promise to make
it much better, were it to be done over again; but he trusts that, such as it is, it may be
accepted as justifying the recommendation of the Secretary of the Interior and the action
of Congress.
A ckn ow led gm ents .
In performing the duty with which he was thus charged by Congress, the Compiler
has had the good fortune to secure the co-operation of two of the Scientific Services of
the Government, and of several eminent gentlemen, to whose contributions especially, has
he looked, to give character to this publication. The names of the official and private
contributors to the Atlas will be found recorded in connection with their several Maps
and Memoirs, and also in the Index immediately preceding this page. In addition to such
mention, the Compiler begs to acknowledge his obligations for suggestions bearing on
the general scope of the work, or for specific information and advice on mooted points, or
for valuable Maps and Documents supplied upon request, to the following gentlemen:
Prof. Joseph Henry, Secretary, and Prof. S. F. Baird, Assistant Secretary, Smithsonian
Institution, Washington.
Maj. Gen. A. A. Humphreys, Chief of Engineers, U. S. A.
Brig. Gen. A. J. Myer, Chief Signal Officer, U. S. A., and Prof. Cleveland Abbe
and Lieut. Henry Jackson, U. S. A., of the Signal Office.
Prof. J E. Hilgard, U. S. Coast Survey.
Brevet Col. J. J. Woodward, Surg. Genl’s Office, U. S. A.
E. B. Elliott, Esq., Chief Clerk, Bureau of Statistics.
Prof. W. L. Nicholson, Topographer, Post Office Dept.
Prof. W. H. Brewer, New Haven.
Col. G. D. Harrington, Chief Clerk of the Census Office, has rendered much assistance
by consulting the records of that office for information not contained in the published
Census volumes.
The Assistants employed upon the work, besides those engaged solely in computations
required for the paper on “ The Progress of the Nation ” and therein mentioned, have been
Messrs. S. A. Galpin, formerly of the U. S. Census and Indian Offices, J. J. Skinner, C. E.,
and H. R. Elliot. Mr. Galpin has had charge of the correspondence arising in the
progress of the work, has prosecuted special researches in connection with subjects, histor
ical and statistical, under treatment, and has assisted in the delineation of groups upon the
maps, especially those relating to population. Mr. Skinner has drawn, under the direction
of the Compiler, all the geometrical figures, except those (PI. X L Y I I - L I V ) which were
contributed by Mr. Wines, and has performed a considerable part of the computations
required for these as well as for other graphic illustrations in Parts II and III. Mr. Elliot
has been largely engaged in arithmetical computations, but has also assisted in plotting
groups for the geographical illustrations. To these gentlemen is the Compiler indebted,
not only for zeal and fidelity in the performance of their several parts, but for many
intelligent suggestions respecting the details of the work, as its scope was gradually
developed and its successive difficulties were encountered.
Mr. Julius Bien, of New York, has done all the lithographic work upon the Atlas.
How he has done it, form and color in the result will tell without any words of the
Compiler, who cannot refrain, however, from adding his acknowledgment of the patience
with which Mr. Bien has submitted to frequent modifications and corrections of “ copy,”
and of his zealous interest in the work which has made the Compiler’s task sometimes less
difficult
The Compiler desires, on behalf of the Government and of himself, to acknowledge
much courtesy and material assistance from the Governing Board of the Sheffield Scientific
School, who granted the use of a room for the construction of maps, and afforded, from
time to time, many facilities for this work.
A
n
A cco unt
an d
T e ch n ica l D escription
of th e
M aps
an d
C harts .
The three Parts of the present publication contain together sixty plates, of the full
single-page size. The highest plate-number is, however, the fift\ -fourth, six plates bearing
duplicate numbers. The division of this total between the seveial Parts is shown by
the Index, preceding.
O f the sixty plates, sixteen are devoted to Geometrical Illustrations. In these, the
special configuration of States and Sections is disregarded, and the statistical facts w hich
form the subjects of the several charts are exhibited by lines and plane figures. Twelve
of the sixteen are to be found in Part III, “ Vital Statistics,” the remainder in Part II,
“ Population— Social and Industrial Statistics.” Some of these charts contain many dis
tinct figures, the aggregate number being in excess of 120a
2
PREFACE
AND
IN T R O D U C T IO N
The remaining forty-four plates are occupied by Geographical illustrations, the special
configuration of States and Sections being here observed, and the statistical facts treated
being exhibited by colors and shades of color imposed upon the surface thus presented.
In six cases, maps occupy each two pages. Five o f these are found in Part I, “ Physical Features,” the
sixth beinw the map which shows the Density o f Population at 1870, in connection with Indian Reservations,
Plates X V III and X IX , Part II. In the case of seven plates, viz^ X V I, X V I, A, X X V II, X X V III, X X X V I,
X X X V I, A, X X X V I, B, more than one distinct map is offered on a single page. In the case o f the remaining
twentv-five plates, the entire page is devoted to a single map. The whole number o f maps, whether covering
the United States or some smaller field, is, if we count that a distinct map which completes the representation
o f a separate subject see the first page o f Crop-Maps, PI. X X X V I), sixty-nine. O f these, ten, occupying fifteen
pages, are contained in Part I ; fifty-three, occupying twenty-three pages, in Part I I ; and six, occupying six pages,
in Pan III.
The Map which has been used as the base for all the illustrations (excepting the River
and Coal Maps) which occupy two pages, or one page for the Territory east of the 100th
meridian (for example, those on PL X Y II -X X I X ) , is that prepared in the Office of the
Chief of Engineers of the U. S. Army.
We will first speak of those illustrations embraced in the present publication which
we have termed Geometrical, to distinguish them from the Geographical illustrations, of
which less will require to be said in explanation, whether of method or of result
Mr. Wines has, in the first four of his charts of the afflicted classes (PL X L Y I I -L ),
made use of a method which the Compiler believes to be a novelty in the graphic
illustration of Statistics. With Mr. Wines’ sanction, the method has been applied in the
construction of the Charts, PL X X X V III, X X X IX , X L III, X L I V (Parts 1 and 2). The
limitations of Mr. Wines’ method are obvious, yet, in spite of those limitations, its advan
tages are unquestionable.
The more familiar method of illustration is that made use of in Part 3, PL X L I Y ,
where a series of perpendicular lines are cut at distances above the horizontal base line,
corresponding to the proportions existing between the various statistical subjects to be
represented. Thus, charts are constructed showing to the eve fluctuations in the volume
of currency, in connection with movements occurring simultaneously in the prices of
commodities; or, the changes of temperature and of humidity throughout the year are
brought into contrast with the varying death-rate of the corresponding seasons.
The chief advantage of this method is that it enables the eye to make very minute measurements, at single
points, of the dimensions of the different subjects under treatment. Thus, with a perpendicular of the length
taken for the figure in Part 3, PI. X L IV , a preponderance of one-half of one per cent, is easily shown. The
limitation of this method is found in the fact that but a few subjects can thus be shown together, without the eye
becoming confused and losing its clue, its thread, as it passes across the figure from side to side, l'he use of
alternately light and heavy lines, of continuous, of broken, and of dotted lines, and the printing o f lines in
different colors, will do much to postpone this result; yet, after all is done that can be done to extend the
capabilities of this method, it fails in representing any large number of statistical subjects together.
According to Mr. Wines’ method, whenever a statistical subject consists of two parts
approximately equal, as male and female, a perpendicular is erected, and from this bilateral
ordinates are drawn, at equal distances from each other, the ordinates on one side being
devoted to, say, the male, and the other to the female element, and the several ordinates,
on the one side and on the other, being determined as to length by the statistical propor
tions to be represented. The end of each ordinate (away from the perpendicular), instead
of being left “ out in air,” is connected with the ends of the ordinates next above and
below, and thus a completed and closed figure is formed. A separate figure is devoted to
each statistical subject, and comparison is made between the several figures as to the
general effect only, since nice comparison by the eye, of part with part, is, of course,
impossible. There are few persons who can distinguish differences of 2, 3, or perhaps
even 5 per cent., in the lengths of lines which cannot be laid against each other. But
where preponderances are decided, and it is sufficient for the purposes of the statistician
to convey a general impression, this form of illustration has, the Compiler ventures to say,
an advantage over any other yet proposed. The figures are neat and compact, each strikes
the eye, as a whole, at once, instead of requiring the eye to pass now up and now down
from side to side of a page, much of the impression of what has gone before being lost as
each new portion of the figure is brought into view. And the number of subjects which
can thus be drawn into ready comparison as to their general dimensions or proportions, is
very large. Thus, on PL X L V II , Mr. Wines has presented 73 figures, each of which can be
studied separately, or in turn compared by the eye, as to its main proportions, with any
other.
Although the notes to the charts explain the construction of these figures, the explanations are yet neces
sarily so condensed that a few additional remarks may be o f assistance. Let us speak particularly o f the one
just referred to, PI. X L V II. The subject is, the Distribution of the Blind of the United States at 1870 and
i860, between the two sexes and among the several periods of life. It is known that many persons who are
blind are not so set down in the census returns: while not a few of such persons may be omitted entirely from
enumeration, yet it is believed that when so large a number as twenty thousand is taken, the proportions obtained
therefrom will conform substantially to the law of the whole body.
The upper left-hand figure of all represents the distribution o f this total of 20,313, the Blind of the United
States. Ordinates are drawn on each side the perpendicular, for ten ten-year periods of life. The ordinates on
the left represent the males, those on the right, the females. Each ordinate is drawn of a length corresponding
to the number of persons of that sex and age, who are blind, the total having first been reduced to thousandths
for convenience of expression, and the figures for the appropriate number of thousandths being set down, for
convenience of verification or comparison, opposite the end of each ordinate. Now let us briefly discuss the
figure. We find the lines which stand for the males and the females, severally, under 10 years o f age, to be not
far from equal, the liability of the sexes to blindness from birth being substantially equal, and the perils of the
nursery and the play-ground being nearly the same for both, though still somewhat greater in the case o f the
boy than of the girl. Up to 20 years the same proportion holds, but after this period, the liability to acquired
blindness becomes greater on the part of the male. Perhaps the man goes into the machine-shop, the furnace,
the mine, where his eyes are incessantly exposed to destructive accidents ; perhaps he works all day in the direct
glare of the sun ; perhaps he rides much on the cars, as passenger or as railway employee; perhaps he engages
in riots on the street or fights in the saloon, and, through one or another o f these means, loses his sight.
All the while, the woman is, in a degree, protected by her place, her occupation and her disposition, from
accidents involving loss o f sight But after middle life, say at 45 or 50 years o f age, the liability o f the man
begins to diminish relatively, that of the woman to increase. H e is less actively employed, less adventurous,
less reckless, less quarrelsome. The woman is perhaps no more quarrelsome, reckless, adventurous or actively
engaged, but her patient sewing and darning through long years, trying at the b est and often with insufficient
or unfavorable light, now begin to tell. Moreover, her greater tenacity of life after 50 operates to increase
relatively the number of her sex living at the higher ages, and, by implication, the number of blind women at
such ages. So that, we find the female side of the figure swelling out again after 50 years o f age until at 70 the
number of the two sexes becomes about equal, while after this, the females remain distinctly in excess. Thus
we have, as a consequence, a figure which we may call “ hollow-backed,” as the type o f the blind population, the
males in excess on the whole, and their side being shaded to represent that preponderance.
The other figures on the upper half of this plate represent the blind of each State, by
turns, at the same census, 187a And here we note, together with many irregularities, an
TO
T H E STA T IST IC A L
ATLAS.
almost unfailing intimation of the type. The hollow-back appears in almost even- case,
though generally without the easy curve of the typical figure. W hy these irregularities ?
Two reasons exist The first is that the law of Average operates more effectively, the
wider scope is given it.* The second is that migration within the Union is constantly
tending to destroy the proportions naturally existing between the several classes of the
populatioa For example, Maine and New Hampshire are States from which there is
constant emigration. The blind, however, as a rule, do not emigrate. The birth-rate of
Maine and New Hampshire is also low (see PL X X X IX and X L ) A s the result of these
two causes these States have not only a greater number of blind proportionally to popula
tion than new States, like Wisconsin and Minnesota, but also an unusual proportion of
their blind in the higher ages of life.
In PL X X X V II I this method has been applied to the distribution of the whole living
population by age and sex. Here we see how each 1000 of the inhabitants of the L nited
States, and afterward of each State by turns, is distributed between the two sexes and
among the eight periods of life taken. In a later series, on the Plate next in order (X X X IX ),
the Native and the Foreign populations are separately treated in the same manner.
The striking difference between the type-figures (the figures for the United States, in the upper left-hand
com er of their respective groups) for the Native and the Foreign population is referred to and important use
made of it a little further along in the te x t; but this difference is scarcely more striking than that which exists
between figures of the same series: compare the lines which represent the number o f children under 10 tears
o f age in the Native population o f New Hampshire and Maine with the corresponding lines for Minnesota and
W isconsin; note, too, how the preponderance shifts from the female to the male side as you go westward (cf. PI.
X X X V II). In the figures for the Foreign population, again, compare California with Massachusetts, Arkansas
with Rhode Island. Observe that here the only figures in which the right side is shaded to denote an excess of
Foreign females are those for the cotton-spinning and paper-making States of Massachusetts, Rhode Island, and
New York, for the District of Columbia, where the population is highly exceptional, and for the polygamous
Territory o f U ta h ; and this last remark leads us to refer back to the figure for the Native population of L tah, in
the preceding series. Observe that more than half the population is under 10 years of age. I he study of these
two pages will bring out to the careful observer a hundred points of interest. Observe, for instance, the nick
on the male side at 30—
40, in so many o f the Southern States, telling of the unrepaired losses by the war.
Especially compare the figures for Alabama, Georgia, Mississippi, and Virginia, with that for the United States.
On PL X L III, the same method of illustration is applied to the distribution by age
and sex (1) of the body of deaths for all diseases occurring in the United States, and in
each State, during the Census year, and (2) of the deaths occurring within the L nited
States from each of certain specified diseases and groups of diseases. Here, again, the
upper left-hand figure of each group affords the type, while the conformity to, or divergence
from, the type, in the figures which succeed, becomes significant of causes or conditions
characteristic of the individual State, or of the special disease or group of diseases.
On Plate X L I Y , parts 1 and 2, we have the same method applied to the distribution
of the Deaths occurring during the Census year, by sex and Month o f Death, (1) for the
United States and for the several States, in the aggregate of deaths from all diseases, and
(2) for the United States, in the aggregate of deaths for each specified disease or group of
diseases.
One caution needs to be offered here. A s explained in the paper o f Mr. Elliott, presenting a Life-Table for
the United States (Part III, Vital Statistics), considerable omissions take place in the returns of deaths in a
Census o f the United States taken under existing laws. This tendency to omission is clearly greatest in respect
to those deaths which occur furthest away from the date of enumeration (June 1), which are, of course, the
deaths of the June of the preceding year. Hence there would be anticipated, what the Census actually discloses,
a deficiency in the returns for this month, a deficiency which it is not practicable to supply, or even to measure
with certainty, yet which must be seen to exist. In the study of the figures on PI. X L IV , therefore, the acci
dental deficiency in the deaths for June must always be held in mind. On this account, as well as for the better
guidance of the eye in tracing the monthly ordinates across the page, the line for June has been made heavier
than the others.
Part 3 of PL X L I V , forms the subject of a separate paper by the Compiler (Part III,
Vital Statistics)
On Plates L I - L I V , Mr. Wines has shown the distribution of the afflicted classes
according to sex, race, and nationality. Let us take the Chart of the Blind (LI), for
description. Here the numbers of the Blind in the L nited States and in the several
States are shown by proportional circles. The upper left-hand circle represents the total
number in the United States, and the sectors of that circle show the parts into which that
aggregate is divided by distinctions of sex and nationality.
\
If we may compare the radii of the circle to the hands of a clock (supposing these to be, instead of two, four,
I o f equal length), one hand, in these figures, always stands at six o’clock, and the others are mo\ed around at
rious angles to it and to each other, to represent the distribution indicated above. Thus, to carry out our
1age : one hand standing at 6, another stands at just 11:30, the sector formed by the two hands containing
degrees of the circle, being the share of the Blind of the United States who are Native Males. A third
ind stands at 12M o’ the clock, the sector formed by this radius and the one just mentioned containing 36
sgrees of the circle, which represents the share ( ^ of the total Blind who are Foreign Males. The fourth
ind stands at i#4 o’ the clock, the sector formed by this radius and the one last mentioned, containing 22
agrees of the circle, showing the share of the total Blind who are Foreign Females.
O f course there
mains a sector, to complete the circle, comprised between this last radius and the one that stands fast at 6,
tiich sector contains 137 degrees of the circle, representing the share of the total Blind who are Native
These sectors manifestly can be put together to form larger classes, either without the
distinction of sex, or without that of nationality. Thus, to take the sectors in the order
named, Nos. 1 and 2 represent the Male Blind, Nos. 3 and 4, the Female Blind. Nos. 2
and 3 represent the Foreign Blind; Nos. 1 and 4, the Native Blind.
The first horizontal series of smaller circles are constructed upon precisely the same
principle, with the difference only, that the circles here stand for the blind in each State,
by turns.
. . . . .
The large figure on the upper right-hand comer is constructed upon a similar principle
with that in the left-hand comer, except that the sectors here represent the White Males
and White Females, the Colored Males and Colored Females, while the second horizontal
series of smaller circles showr these classes of facts by States.
* The same principle applies as between the figures for large States and for small States, where the second cause, migra
Note the extreme irregularity of the figure for Delaware. A population
of 125.000 does not afford scope for the law of average to produce symmetry. When the mode of representation is applied to
Territories, like Dacotah, Wyoming, and Idaho, with populations of 9,000-15.000, the figures resulting are of course shock
ingly distorted, a single mining or railway accident serving, in so small a field, to exaggerate or even to reverse the relations
tion. does not come in to disturb natural proportions.
existing in the typical figure.
PREFACE
AND
IN T R O D U C T IO N
For convenience of reference, the two principal figures described are reproduced
here.
TO
T H E S T A T IST IC A L
ATLAS.
o
A square for the United States is added, which is made, for convenience only, four
times the size of the State figures. Here is shown the ratio between the aggregate
sittings of the Churches of the country and the population over 10 years of age; while
the interior square is divided to exhibit the eight largest denominations, three which are
of importance enough to be represented in some one or more of the States not coming
out in the United States figure.
Upon the same plan and on the same scale, the figures on PL X X X II are constructed
to show the ratio between the population over 10 in each State and the number of persons
who are accounted for, either as pursuing gainful occupations (criminal and shameful
occupations being excluded from the census tables), or as attending School. The Interior
Squares are here divided into ten rectangles, as follows:
Engaged in Agriculture................................................
The third horizontal series of circles on PL L I are intended to show, for each State,
the increase of Blindness during the decade i860-’70, the inner circles being proportional to
the number of blind at i860, the outer circles being proportional to the number at 1870,
and the rim between (showing the increase) being shaded for better effect.
The technical description here given of the Chart of Blindness, will apply to the
three following. The Males are shown to be in excess among the Blind, the Deaf Mutes,
and the Idiots; the Females among the Insane. The Foreigners are shown to be in
excess of their proportion among the Blind and the Insane; the Natives among the Deaf
Mutes and Idiots. The Colored are shown to be in excess of their proportion among the
Blind and the Idiots; the Whites among the Insane and the Deaf Mutes.
O f the four remaining plates which are occupied by geometrical illustrations, the first
in order, PL XX, is intended to exhibit the Constituent Elements of Population of the
several States, at 187a The scheme on which the diagrams are constructed, is there
succinctly stated. It may, perhaps, facilitate their use, to show in detail how the figure
for a single State is made up. Let us take that for the State of Missouri.
Here we have a square, proportioned to the population of the State, on the scale o f 350,000 inhabitants to
the square inch. This is divided by perpendicular lines into three rectangles of the full height of the square.
That on the left-hand represents the number of persons living in Missouri who were born outside the United
States. The central rectangle of the three represents the number of Colored persons living in Missouri ; but
this is divided by a horizontal line into two parts, the lower o f which represents the Colored persons now living
in Missouri, who were born in that State; the upper, the Colored inhabitants of Missouri, who were born in
other States of the Union. There remains to complete the square, a rectangle very much larger than the other
two combined, which represents the White inhabitants of Missouri who were born in the United States. This
rectangle, also, is divided by a horizontal line into two parts o f not very unequal size, o f which the lower repre
sents the White Missourians who were Missouri-born ; the upper, those who were natives o f other States.
While, therefore, the square is first divided by perpendicular lines into three rectangles
of the full height of the square, two of these are divided by horizontal lines, so that the
figure is finally constituted of five rectangles, representing the following elements of
population:
Foreign
J Born in the State.
Native Colored
I Bom in other States,
j Born in the State.
Native White .
I Born in other States.
Close by the square thus composed, and on its right, stands a rectangle of equal
height, which, on the same scale (350,000 inhabitants to the square inch), represents the
number of persons Missouri-born, who are found, by the Census, in other States of the
Union. This rectangle, again, is divided by a horizontal line into two, the upper represent
ing the Colored Emigrants, the lower, the White.
Such being the principle upon which these figures are constructed, some of the most important facts relating
to the population of each State may be seen at a glance. Observe the width of the Foreign rectangle in some
States and of the Colored rectangle in others. Observe how largely the Native White population o f Kansas and
Arkansas, o f Iowa and Texas, and other States Northwest and Southwest, is made up of persons born outside
the States in which they now live. On the other hand, note how small has been the Native White emigration
from other States into the Carolinas. Maine and Virginia, and even in comparison with the States first named,
into New York and Pennsylvania. Observe how differently the Colored populations o f the States are made up
in this respect; compare Louisiana, Texas, Arkansas, and Mississippi, with Virginia, the Carolinas, and
Kentucky.
And turning to the rectangles which stand for the emigration from the several States, observe how strongly
they are contrasted. Compare the figures for New York, Ohio, Vermont, New Hampshire, and South Carolina,
with those for Kansas, California and Michigan. And still keeping our attention on these isolated rectangles,
note how largely the emigration from Virginia has been composed of Colored persons; how largely that o f Ten
nessee, of Whites.
In the Charts (PL X X X I and X X X II), devoted to Church Accommodation and the
Occupations of the People, a different principle of representation was adopted. The
States are here taken as equal bodies; that is, equal squares are taken to represent their
population of 10 years of age and over. Inside each square, and symmetrically placed
with respect to it, is another square which represents the proportion of the Chart-subject
to such population. Thus, in the figure for any State, on PL X X X I, the sides of the inner
square are to the sides of the square exterior to it, as the square root of the aggregate
number of sittings in all the Churches of the State is to the square root of the population
of 10 years of age and upwards. The interval between the two squares, which is shaded
in black, is, therefore, in exact proportion to represent the share of the population over 10
for which sittings are not provided. It will be noted that in the figures for the States of
Ohio and Vermont, the shaded margin disappears entirely, the aggregate Church Accom
modation equaling the population over 10 years of age.
Next, the interior square is divided by perpendicular lines into rectangles representing the share of the
total church accommodation which is provided by the churches o f the several denominations. Four denomina
tions, the largest, are separately shown in the figure for each State, and the remaining denominations are thrown
together into a group, “ all others,” to form the right-hand rectangle (in every case but that of Nevada, where the
four denominations separately shown exhaust the list). Ten denominations thus appear in the State figures.
Three figures are added, one for the District of Columbia, one for the Northwest Territories, and one for the
Southwest Territories. On the last appears a denomination not shown elsewhere, the Mormon, making the
number o f denominations appearing separately on the Chart, eleven. O f these, one appears 39 times ; one,
34 times; one, 30 times; one, 22 times; one, 13 times; two, 7 times; one, 4 tim es; three, once.
/
Male Female
Engaged in Manufactures and M in in g ,...................
Male Female
Engaged in Trade and Transportation........................
Male Female
Engaged in Personal and Professional Services, . .
Male Female
Attending Sch o o l,........................................................
Male Female
Upon the principle of these Charts, the rectangles vary in size to represent the vary
ing proportions in which the populations of the several States appear as engaged in the
various occupations. In many cases, however, the females engaged in gainful occupations
are so few as scarcely to be shown upon squares of this size. This is especially true of
females engaged in agriculture in the Northern and Northwestern States; while at the
South, where the negroes are in force, females appear largely in the department of agri
culture.
The last remaining illustration of the geometrical series, the Fiscal Chart, PL X X X V , A,
scarcely needs description. The Compiler will only explain why it was that the revenue
and the expenditures of the several years were taken as equal, and only varied to show the
varying proportions in which the total revenue was made up of receipts from the several
recognized sources, and in which the total expenditure was directed to the several recog
nized objects: in other words, why the Chart does not combine both the absolute and
the relative methods (see the title following, “ Suggestions for the Study of Statistical
Maps and Charts”). The reason was found in the enormous differences in the receipts of
different years within our fiscal history, and still more, the differences in the disbursements
of those years.
Thus, the receipts for 1866 were nearly 170 times those for 1792. If, therefore, the receipts for 1866 had
been represented by the full width o f the page, those for 1792 could have been allowed but one-ninth of an inch.
On the other hand, the expenditures of 1865 were more than 400 times those of the period May, 1789, to Decem
ber, 1791, so that, had the full width of the double page been given to the expenditures for 1865, those of the
earlier periods would have been crowded into less than the fourteenth of an inch. Hence the Compiler felt
constrained to adopt the relative method solely, showing in the figures themselves, only the proportions in which
the Revenue and Expenditures were made up, each year, of the several parts recognized in the Treasury Reports,
but adding the actual figures of receipt and disbursement, opposite the line for each year.
The Geographical illustrations, in general, require no verbal description and explana
tion, beyond what is given on their face. It is not the Compiler’s intention to preach
from them, as a te x t; nor does he assume that attention needs to be directed to their more
obvious or their more recondite suggestions. Certain of these maps will be specially
mentioned in this present paper. Others* form the subjects of separate discussion by their
Compilers. For the rest, the account given on the first page of the paper on the Progress
of the Nation (Part II), of the method adopted in the formation of map-groups, according
to a scale taken, will answer in substance.
There are, however, a few of these maps which, as we have said, require that their
principles of construction be more fully stated and illustrated than it was found possible to
do upon the plates themselves. These are, the Signal Office Maps (PL V I, V II I , IX, X),
the Crop Maps (PL X X X V I, X X X V I, A), and the Pacific Coast Maps (PL X X X V I, B).
The Sign al Office Maps.— The following is the descriptive text furnished by the
Chief Signal Officer of the Army.
1.— C hart S howing the F requency of Storm C entres. (PI. VI.)
This Chart is designed to show the frequency with which the centres of areas of low barometer (assumed to average fifty
miles in diameter) have passed over any given district. It does not include local thunder or hail storms.
The Chart is constructed upon the following principles: supposing it to be divided into squares of one degree each,
the determination of the frequency is arrived at by counting the number of areas of low barometer, as shown by the Signal
Service Reports, to have passed over any designated square, or to have approached within twenty-five miles of it. The Chart
shows the annual average as obtained from the records of the two years ending February, 1873* This chart is of interest in
connection with all statistics bearing on the security of navigation, and on the habitability of a country, and the diseases that
originate in the sudden changes of weather that attend storms.
2.— C hart S howing M ean T emperatures at 4:35 p. m. of the Hottest W eek of 1872, and at 7:35 a . m. of thf
C oldest W eek of the W inter of 1872 and 1873 (PI. VIII.)
The distribution of heat is the controlling influence o f all climates, and the data of temperatures are already well given
in the chart of annual isotherms, published in the second volume of the publication of the Census Office,!
^ knowledge
of extremes of heat and cold at any point, in any one year, is of the greatest importance.
An extremelv hot week, or even a hot day, has a very marked effect on human life; an extremely cold day or week is
equally destructive.
This Chart is designed to show these extremes at any point, and is compiled from data furnished in the Signal Service
Reports of the average of the maximum daily temperature for the hottest week of the year 1S72, and the average minimum
daily temperature for the coldest week of the winter of i 872- ' 73* Thus, at Breckenridge, Minn., the average maximum daily
temperature for the week ending July 13th, was 83' 7 , while the average minimum temperature of the week ending Decembet
21st. was— 22° 4'.
The hot temperatures are shown by red lines, and the cold, by blue ones.
* The Woodland Map, PI. I l l and IV , is particularly discussed in Prof. Brew ers paper. The Coal Map. PI. XI and X II.
is described in Prof. Hitchcock’s paper, and the Geological Map, PI. X III and X IV , in the joint contribution of Profs Hitch
cock and Blake. The Area Map, PI. X V , is explained in Mr. Stocking's Memoir and the tables accompanying. The Eight
Maps, PI. X V 1- X I X , are described and discussed in the paper on “ The Progress of the Nation,
t PI. V n , o f the present publication.
PR E FA C E
4
AND
IN T R O D U C T IO N
3.— C hart Showing A nnual Mean of B arometer and T otal Movement of the A tmosphere, with
Resultant. (PI. IX , X .)
The Isobarometric lines, shown on the Chan, are for the year ending May 30, 1873. and are compiled by an approximate
formula, but are yet sufficiently exact, when the uncertainty of the altitudes and reduction to sea-level is taken into considera
tion. The total movement of the atmosphere is for the year ending May 31, 1873, and is designed to show the total
movement in each recorded direction, as shown by the Signal Service Reports, and the yearly resultant of the same. It is
charted as follow s: T ake the total movement of northerly winds, as measured by the Robinson Aneurometer, and lay it off by
the scale to the south of the initial point, do the same with the movement from the northwest and lay it off from the initial
point to the southeast, and the same with the movements from the west, southwest, south, southeast, east, and northeast ;
connect the points and it gives the figures as shown on the Chart The resultant is obtained by starting from the initial point
and laying off to the south the total movement of north w in d ; from the end of this line to the southeast the same for the
northwest wind ; from the end o f this to the east, the movement of the west wind ; and finally, haring plotted the eight courses,
connect the initial point with’ the point at the end of the last course, and this line gives the resultant o f the total movement
for the year. This chart might be compared with the statistics relating to disease and the rainfall on the coasts.
The Crop Maps.— PI. X X X V I contains maps which exhibit the range, and, within
the range, the degree, of cultivation of eight crops. The process of forming the scale for
these maps is briefly stated at the foot of the page. PL X X X V I, A, contains a map of
the Com Crop constructed upon the same principle. The other maps upon this page
fully explain themselves.
These nine crop-maps, then, are constructed by the following rule. The number of
bushels, bales, tons, or pounds (according to the unit of quantity appropriate to the special
crop) produced in each county, is divided, first, by the number of inhabitants, and second,
by the number of acres of improved land in the county; the two quotients thus obtained
are multiplied together, and the square root of the product is taken as the measure of the
productive power, in respect to that crop, of the county. This method of constructing a
scale for crop-maps must be admitted to be somewhat arbitrary. The Compiler submits it
to the judgment of statisticians; and in doing so, has only to say for it that he knows of no
other scheme against which more objections have not occurred to him than against the
one here adopted. His reflections and tentative computations have satisfied him that no
simple ratio can be taken which will not in many cases grossly exaggerate, and, in other
cases, as unjustly disparage, the importance of the crop to the county, and of the county
to the crop of the country.
The per-capita test is notoriously unjust, as the per-rapitu product may, on the one hand, be brought down by
the prevalence of manufacturing industry or the presence o f commercial towns, and, on the other, may be
enhanced by the mere fact of a partial settlement of a region, population being so scant as to be saved from the
necessity of resorting to inferior soils. Nor does a section sparsely settled and producing an inconsiderable
aggregate, though showing a high average yield, deserve to be ranked quite on terms o f equality with a section
all settled up, and, though with no higher yield for each inhabitant, pouring out each year a vast volume for
export
And yet, on the exact contrary of this, a sparsely settled county of Minnesota which produces 120 bushels
of wheat for each man, woman, and child within its limits, with an undoubted capability of maintaining a rate ap
proaching this with twice and three times as many inhabitants, ought not to be set down as of precisely the same
grade of productive capability, in respect of this crop, as an Eastern county producing, in fact, exactly as many
bushels to the square mile, but with a far greater laboring population. Hence, the test of absolute production
seems not wholly satisfactory.
Even less satisfactory still, is the more usual test applied, that of acreage. Without reference to the breadth
of land sown, the report of average yield per acre often affords a most fallacious representation of the productive
power, in respect to a given crop, or of the actual contribution to that crop, of any region. The cultivation of
any crop as a fancy-crop, or upon the more favorable soils only, may give results very much out of proportion to
what would be, were that crop to be generally cultivated as an essential part of the industry of the people
and extended over a considerable area.
The considerations thus briefly sketched, determined the mind of the Compiler to
the adoption of the mode of constructing a scale for the crop-maps, which has been stated.
It is believed that the two elements taken are those which have most importance in the
connection, and that the plan of compounding them tends to reduce any extravagant
excess of one element over the other, due to exceptional conditions.
The Pacific Coast Maps.— The raison d'etre of FI. X X X V I, B, will doubtless appear
upon the most casual examination of the Atlas. To have extended the maps treating the
various subjects exhibited on PI. X X I to X X X V I, over the vast uninhabited tracts west
of the 100th meridian, in order to take in the narrow areas of settlement on the Pacific
Coast, would have required, either that the maps should be reduced one-half in size, or
that one-half of them should be omitted. It was deemed far more expedient to bring
together on a single Plate, both for economy of space and for readiness of comparison,
such map-subjects as most concerned the Pacific Coast. This has been carefully done by
Mr. Galpin, on PI. X X X V I, B.
T en small maps are here given. The first, counting from the upper left-hand corner, shows the areas of
Pacific Settlement, as by the Census o f 1850; the representation corresponding, therefore, to that given o f the
Atlantic and Mississippi Settlements, on PI. X V II. The map on the right of the first mentioned, shows the
Settlements o f i860 ; corresponding, therefore, to that on PI. X V II, A. The areas of Pacific Settlement at 1870
having been shown on PI. X V III, it was not deemed necessary to repeat the representation here. The areas
correspond substantially, however, to the colored portions of the maps of Foreign Parentage, German Birth and
Preponderating Sex. It will be observed, that on each of those maps just named, the colored areas coincide
exactly in extent, and that, in each, the outside limits of color are shaded off in faint black lines which indicate
that the population outside is less than two to the square mile, which means, generally, no population at all.
Besides the two maps for 1850 and i860, the eight maps o f this’ Plate represent the constituents or the
conditions of the population o f the Pacific Coast at 1870 The map-subjects are in order, counting from left to
ri<dit, as follows:— 1. Foreign Parentage, corresponding to PI. X X IV , for the country east of the 100th meridian.
2° Proportion of Foreign to aggregate population (PI. X X V I). 3 and 4. Proportion of the Irish and the
German elements, severally, to the aggregate population PI. X X V II . 5. Proportion of Chinese to aggregate
population. 6. Preponderating Sex (PI. X X X V II). 7. Illiteracy of the total population (PI. X X IX ). 8. The
Wheat Crop (PI. X X X V I, Map 1).
TO
THE
STA T IST IC A L
The Compiler has noted, in exhibiting those maps to many cultivated persons, that
the tendency was almost universal, on the first glance, to dwell on the outline of all the
groups as a body, without much reference to the distinction between the successive groups.
And after this disposition has been mastered, one has still to acquire the power, not by a
single effort, but by a process of education, of discriminating easily and accurately the
several groups with a due appreciation of their comparative significance, in order to give
the just effect to the stronger tones of the picture. The preservation of the lower grades
will prove a hindrance and not a help to the comprehension of the subject, unless this
caution is observ ed ; but, with due consideration of this, the lower grades of color become
not less interesting and significant in their relation to the uncolored parts, than the higher
grades, in their place.
Let us turn for illustration of these remarks to Plate X X V . We have here first to realize the dense foreign
settlements in the lower New England States, along the Hudson and around the shores o f New York Bay, in
the anthracite regions o f Pennsylvania and at the junction of the Alleghany and Monongahela Rivers, across
the central region of New Jersey, at the head of the Chesapeake Bay, along the shores o f the Great Lakes from
Rochester to Milwaukee, at the junction o f the Missouri with the Kansas, of the Mississippi with the Rock
River, and of the Missouri and the Mississippi with each other, and finally, at various points up the Ohio River.
Anything that defeats this impression impairs the usefulness o f the map, and if the lower grades o f color are to
be allowed to do this, it were better they should not appear. But it is possible, as has been said, to give these
regions as distinct relief from the surrounding regions in color, as the latter receive without any effort of the mind,
by reason of their strong contrast with the unstained page. When once this distinction between the higher and
lower grades is effected, the extensive regions covered by a comparatively sparse foreign population, pursuing
agricultural occupations, become suggestive of many economical and social considerations when viewed in
contrast with tracts which are substantially destitute of foreign settlements.
Another distinction which needs to be held clearly in mind, for the study of most of
the maps dealing with the statistics of population, is that herein drawn between the
A bsolute and the R e la t iv e modes of representation. These are terms made use of for
the highest convenience of expression, though not without liability to philological criticism,
to indicate— the first, the exhibition of an element of the population, by itself, leaving out
of account the general population and showing merely the number of that special element
to the square mile, within the field depicted ; the second, the exhibition of that element, no
longer by itself, but in its proportion to the general population. It will be seen to follow,
from these definitions, that very different regions may be colored, and the same regions be
colored with very different degrees of intensity, in representing an element of the popula
tion by the one and the other method.
Let us refer, for illustration, to Plates X X V II and X X V III. Here are five specific foreign elements, each
shown absolutely and also relatively. Let us select the first of these, the Irish (Maps 1 and 2), and confine our
attention to the State o f Iowa. It will be observed that, on Map No. 2 relative , almost the entire State is
colored. This is because the Irish everywhere constitute, at the least, one to four per cent, of the population,
— not an inconsiderable contribution to be made by one foreign element. On Map No. 1 (absolute), however,
less than one-half of the State is colored. This is because, though the Irish form a noticeable element of the
population, such as that is, everywhere throughout the State, yet, in the northwestern and south-central sections,
the population is so sparse (cf. PI. X V III and X IX ) that the number of Irish to the square mile falls below the
lowest figures taken for representation by the absolute method, 36 of the counties of the State having less than
too Irish each; and some, less than twenty. In the same way, many counties of Kansas are uncolored on
Map 1, because the absolute number of Irish found in them is sm all; while these counties are colored in Map 2,
because, sparse as their population is, it includes this element in a very appreciable degree.*
This distinction between the absolute and relative methods of representing the con
stituent elements of population, must be borne constantly in mind in studying the series,
PI. X X I-X X V III.
On the other hand, in the maps representing illiteracy, PI. X X IX and XXX, the
relative method alone is followed, illiteracy being nowhere shown as, what you might call,
an accumulation or deposit, but exhibited simply as a feature, more or less prominent, of
the actual population, be the same greater or smaller.
Again, in the maps devoted to wealth, public indebtedness, and taxation, PI. X X X III
-X X X V , these facts are only shown as per capita of the population, without reference to
the density thereof.
Thus, on the Wealth Chart, a Western county 30 miles square, having 9000 inhabitants, with a total valua
tion of $4,500,000, would bear the same shading and make four times the show upon the map, as an Eastern
county 15 miles square with a population of 18,000 and a total valuation of $9,000,000. That is, the map, as it
purports to do, only gives the amount of wealth to each man, woman, and child, in each section by turns, without
reference to the number of inhabitants; consequently, it does not assume to show directly where the wealth of
the country is. In the cases taken, the equal per-capita wealth c f the two counties would need to be wrought
with the numbers which represent the respective densities of settlement in the two counties, before we should
have the positive amount o f wealth for a given space upon the map.
It is to facilitate the reference so constantly required, to the density of population,
that the series of “ population-lines” have been introduced upon PI. X X I-X X V I, X X IX X X X , X X X III-X X X V , X X X V II, X L -X L I I , and X L V - V I . The lines thus imposed
upon the maps which show the distribution of the Foreign and Colored elements, the
prevalence of Illiteracy, the predominating Sex, the Birth-Rate, the prevailing Diseases,
etc., are a reduction from the outlines of groups on the eastern half (PI. X IX ) of the map
showing the density of population at 1870. The five groups there shown are consolidated
into three for use in maps whose principal purpose is to show other elements than popula
tion. The consolidation effected is as follows:
O n Density Map, P l . X IX .
G roups.
S uggestions
for th e
S tu d y
of
S t a t ist ic a l M aps
an d
C h arts .
The Compiler trusts that it will not seem presumptuous in him to say, that much study
will be required, even on the part of those most accustomed to observe and discriminate,
before the full significance of these Maps and Charts, even the simplest of them, will be
exhausted.
The first faculty to be acquired, for the use of maps like the most of those presented,
is that of distinguishing readily betw een t h e sh ades of color which mark the compar
ative intensity of the prevalence of the map-subject With the eye uneducated in this
special direction, there is a liability to accept the distinction between the colored and the
uncolored portions of the map, as the great distinction to be observed, the student failing
to realize that the positive difference between the regions where the element under
representation is found in a degree so slight as not to call for coloring on the map, and
regions in the lowest shade of color, is often, and indeed generally, much less than the
difference between two groups next each other in the scale.
ATLA S.
I
II
III
IV
V
F or O ther M aps.
2 to 6 inhabitants to the square mile, j- 2 to 18 inhabitants.
u 18
“
“
“
r
«
<
<
U
18 to 45 inhabitants.
18
45
“
“
“
1 45 and more inhabitants.
45 “ 90
j90 “ and more “
6
U
M
G roups.
I
II
III
* Opinions might easily differ respecting the comparative interest and usefulness of the two methods. In the quarto
volumes of the Census of 1870, the elements of population were treated according to the absolute method only. The London
Saturday Review, of January 26, 1873, intimates its opinion that “ the proportion to population gen erally" should be shown,
and not “ the number on a square mile." The Compiler holds, however, that where a choice must be made between the two
methods (as was imperative in the census volumes, on account of the limited number o f maps), the absolute method is to be
preferred. The 6rst question to be answered by the graphic illustration of any statistical subject is, where is that element Jcm nJ?
This question is answered directly by the absolute method, and only indirectly, and by comparison, through the relative
method. Thus, in 1870 there were five millions and a half o f foreigners in the U. & Where were they? The third map of
the “ Population " volume showed where they were. And in like manner, the Geographical distribution of the specific Foreign
elements and of the Colored element, was shown by the absolute method. Those who wished to ascertain the proportions
which the several elements bore to each other and to the total population, could do so, only generally, it is true, and somewhat
laboriously, by comparing the several maps with each other.
PREFACE
AND
IN T R O D U C T IO N
These population-lines are printed in blue over the maps showing the special elements,
while the figures showing the number of inhabitants to the square mile, 2 - l8 , 18-45,
45 + are stamped at convenient places within the groups so defined.
The advantage o f ready comparison with the general facts of population will be obvious without illustra
tion. Suppose we are examining the map of State, county, and municipal taxation, and our attention is for the
moment attracted to the State of Iowa. \Ve see there a number of counties in the western part o f the State, in
dense color, indicating the highest degree of taxation. The first impression is perhaps unfavorable. But the
blue lines superimposed show that this section is as yet sparsely settled. Those people have come in from the
older States, with sentiments and traditions requiring schools, bridges, and good roads. They believe these to
be the best investment they can make of a considerable portion o f their present earnings. They know the soil
is capable o f supporting ten or twenty times the population now upon i t ; they know that immigration is setting
by tens o f thousands a year into their State, and that those sections will be preferred which have to show, ready
made, these attractive institutions. Consequently, with what we must call a wise prevision, they tax themselves
heavily, through their town-meetings, or their County Boards, knowing well that they wall receive back tenfold
the money they now put into roads, schools, and bridges, through the enhanced value of their lands, in a near
future.
Again, in the examination of the map showing the proportion of deaths from Malarial Diseases, the question
cannot fail to arise, whether the diseases prevail most in regions very sparsely settled, where but little land has
been broken up, where swamps remain undrained, and vast vegetable deposits lie decaying all around, or whether
this prevalence is determined by causes independent of this single condition. For such a comparison, while
reference will sometimes be required to the more minutely delineated groups o f PI. X IX , the population-lines
traced on the special disease-map, will often answer the purpose equally well.
But the highest use of these Maps and Charts is when they are c o m p a r e d w i t h e a c h
o t h e r , so far as their subjects are cognate in any degree, for the discovery of relations
and proportions which can not be made to appear on any one map. The greater the num
ber of maps which can thus be brought into comparison, the larger the result. Let us
take an illustration of this use of the maps. In figure 3 of PI. X L IV , is shown the
distribution of the body of deaths resulting from certain important diseases and groups of
diseases, among the several constituent elements of the population.
By this it appears that while the Blacks are but
o f the population, T<S of the deaths from Intermit
? y sa
tent and Remittent Fevers occur among this element; but while the Foreigners are not less than -jVA o f the
population, only Tjj ftg of the deaths from this class of fevers occur among them. On the other hand, of the
deaths from Consumption only tV s1 occur among the Blacks, and not less than
®
among the Foreigners. At
first this seems to indicate very marked differences between these two elements of the population, as to liability
to one and the other o f these diseases. So it must be considered, if we look only at this plate (X L IV ). But let
us take PI. X L I and X L II, which show the proportion of the total body of deaths, occurring in each section by
turns, which result from Consumption and from Malarial Diseases respectively. Here we note that the range
of these diseases is, to a certain extent, and even in a high degree, complemental. Where Consumption is most
fatal, Malarial Diseases are, as a rule, least fatal, and vice versa.
Now, if the two classes of diseases from which, as we have seen, the Blacks and Foreigners suffer so differ
ently, are thus complemental in their range, the question arises whether these two elements may not themselves
be found to be complemental, in some degree, in their location. An examination of PI. X X I and X X V shows
this to be true, and in a striking degree. Speaking generally, where the Blacks are, Foreigners are not.
Here, then, after bringing together five plates, we reach the explanation of at least
the greater part of the difference discovered in the two elements of the population in
respect to mortality from the causes indicated. The Blacks die so largely of Intermittent
and Remittent Fevers, because almost the entire Colored population is found within the
fields where these are the prevailing forms of disease. The Foreigners do not die of these
fevers for the best of reasons, because they keep away from the regions where these
prevail. In respect to Consumption, the geographical relations of the two elements are
reversed. Whether there still remains a difference in liability to one or the other form
of disease, due to differences of stock, breeding, or occupation, is a question too large to
be discussed here. W e adduce this solely as an instance in illustration of the method
to be employed in studying the maps and charts herewith presented*
Still keeping our attention fixed on figure 3, PI. X L I V , we note that the lines repre
senting the several Foreign elements all rise rapidly on the right of the figure, and almost
run out at the top before they reach the last perpendicular line. What can be the reason
of this ? Are there anv diseases from which the Foreign population have such marked
exemption ? Examining the titles on this figure, we find that the diseases on the right are
children’s diseases. Why do the Foreign nationalities represented among us make such
slight contribution to the body of deaths from these diseases ?
I f we turn back to PI. X X X IX we shall not fail of an explanation. In the series of figures numbered 3, it
will be seen that in every State but Maine and New Hampshire, the line which represents the portion of the
Native population under ten years of age, is longer, and generally much longer, than any other line in the
figure. Such should be the case in respect to every community, if population is to be kept good. But when we
look at the series of figures numbered 4, on the same Plate, devoted to the Foreign population, we find the line
representing the first decade of life to be shorter, generally, than any other up to the period 60-70, and some
times, as in Louisiana, South Carolina, and the District of Columbia, than even the line for the period 70-80;
while the lines representing the period 20-30, and that 30-40, exceed that for the first decade sometimes in the
ratio of 10 to 1, sometimes in a much larger ratio.
* This and other of the questions suggested by the proportions disclosed in fig. 3, PI. X L I V . are discussed in the paper on
The Relations of Race and Nationality to Mortality (Part III. Vital Statistics).
TO
T H E S T A T IST IC A L
ATLAS.
5
Here we have a substantial reason for the vanishing of the “ Foreign” lines towards
the right of fig. 3, PI. X L IV . Fewer Foreign children die of the diseases there repre
sented, because there are but few Foreign children, comparatively, to die of them.
Whether, over and above the proper effect of this cause, there is found in the proportions
herein disclosed, any greater or any less constitutional liability to these diseases on the
part of Foreign children, taking equal numbers, is a question not to be dismissed thus in
a few words, but calling for a very careful analysis and comparison of the several charts
Again, turning to PL X L I 11, we note the surprising length of the lines which, in the
figures for the New England States, particularly Maine, New Hampshire, and Vermont,
represent the deaths occurring above the age of 80 years. W hy is this? Is it a proof of
greater longevity in a population of natural growth, or is it due to some disturbance in the
relative numbers of persons in the several periods of life?
By turning to Plate X X X V III, we have our answer in the figures which show, for the same States, the
number o f living inhabitants of corresponding ages. More people die above 80 years in these States because
there are more people above that age to die. But why is the number above 80 greater, relatively, here than
elsewhere ? Again, other Plates, together with what is of common fame, must furnish the answer. PI. X L shows
the Birth-Rate prevailing at the present time in this section to be, as an average, the lowest known in the United
States, while PI. X X shows by the width of the rectangles placed by the side o f the squares which represent
these States) that the emigration to other States out o f the Native population has been very great. Thus while
the earliest period o f life is recruited very inadequately by birth, the attractions o f new States are constantly
drawing off the young and active, leaving the old in excess of the natural proportion.
Still again, just as a comparison of PL XXI and X X V shows the Colored and the
Foreign elements to be in a high degree complemental in their location, comparison of the
several small maps contained in PL X X V II and X X V I 11, will show (if due regard be had,as
has been explained, to the relative significance of the successive shades of color), that some
of the special Foreign elements are also in a degree complemental in their location. Thus,
a north and south line drawn through Buffalo will clearly leave about two-thirds of the
Germans to the west and an equal proportion of the Irish to the east. A north and south
line drawn through Lake Michigan will leave four-fifths of the British Americans to the
east, but nine-tenths of the Swedes and Norwegians to the west.
Again, while PL X X III and X X V both refer to the same period, 1870, a comparison
of them brings a past generation vividly up to view.
Examine the uncolored space northwest of Harrisburg on PI. X X V . On no considerable portion of this
tract are there Foreigners enough to average 1 to the square mile. Y et PI. X X III shows that here are a suffi
cient number of persons o f Foreign parentage to bring the whole tract up into the group “ 2-5 to the square mile.”
— Twenty, thirty, forty years ago, there was a considerable Foreign immigration into this region. Since then,
the Foreign population has not been kept up and increased by fresh arrivals, while many of the first comers
have been lost by death; but there still remain,to witness o f the original immigration, a large number of Amer
ican-born persons who are Foreign by one remove. Take, in the same way, the Group IV, southeast from
St. Louis, on PI. X X III, and compare it with the Group II over the same tract on PI. X X V . Forty and fifty
years ago this region swarmed with Foreigners, French, Scotch, and English employes of fur and trading com
panies. Even the floods of recent immigration have not served to bring the number of Foreigners here above
4-8 to the square mile, but there are still found not less than 20-33 persons of Foreign parentage to the square
mile, to testify of the old settlers and rovers, of trapping and trading days. But even more instructive will be
found the comparison of PI. X X IV and X X V I which show the proportion borne to the aggregate population, by
persons o f Foreign parentage and of Foreign birth, respectively. Compare the valleys of the Shenandoah, the
Arkansas, and the Mississippi, as represented on the two maps, to bring out the still existing effects of a Foreign
immigration in the past. The whole field of the Southern States is, indeed, a most interesting study in this
view.
The above are intended merely as suggestions for the use of these maps and charts,
and as illustrations of the relations which will often be found to subsist between them.
In many cases, the connection of maps is obvious on the first mention of their titles; in
others, the connection must be sought through a careful consideration of the reason of the
case, and often by a series of tentative comparisons.
N o reference has been made to the use of the Physical Maps in Part I, in explaining
the facts of vital, social, and industrial concern which are represented graphically in Parts
II and III. To exhaust this subject would require a volume ; only to open it, an extended
article. The relations to animal life and health, to vegetable growth and reproduction, and
even to industrial development, which are sustained by temperature and humidity, both in
their mean and in their extreme range and variability, by the pressure of the atmosphere
and the movement of the air, by the character of the soil, its drainage and the extent of its
tree-covering; these relations do not so much as need to be alluded to here, in justification
of the inclusion, in a Statistical Atlas, of Maps illustrative of the physical features and
meteorological conditions of the country. The Compiler trusts, not only that this juxta
position of the two orders of facts will afford the true explanation of a vast number of
phenomena seeming most strange and even contradictory of recognized causes in the
political and moral constitution, but that an illustration, so large and varied, of the effects
of physical influences upon the progress of population and the condition of society, may
even serve to suggest to the physical geographer some possible modifications of his own
generalizations.
THE PHYSICAL FEATU RES OF THE UNITED STATES.
B Y PR O F. J. D. W H I T N E Y , C A M B R ID G E , M ASS.
N describing the physical features of a country, we have first to consider the skeleton
or frame-work of mountains to which its plains, valleys, and river system are subor
dinate, and on the direction and elevation of whose parts its climate is in a very
I
large degree dependent
The skeleton of the United States is represented by two great systems of mountain
ranges, or combinations of ranges— one forming the eastern, the other the western, side of
the frame-work by which the central portion of our continent is embraced. These two
systems are the Appalachian ranges and the Cordilleras.*
These systems are of very
different magnitude and extent
The Cordilleras are a part of the great system or chain of mountains which borders
the Pacific coast of both divisions of the American continent, and forms its dominating and
most imposing feature. In South America, however, the chain— there called the Andes—
is comparatively narrow, but, on the other hand, exceedingly elevated : it is also remark
able in the way in which it hugs the coast, forming a lofty wall, as it were, on the Pacific
edge of the continent, and being thus the cause that there are neither harbors nor navi
gable rivers on that side; and, besides, giving rise to extraordinary peculiarities of climate
at its western base. The chain is also remarkable for the grandeur of its volcanic manifes
tations; its highest points being sublime volcanoes— which, however, are gradually losing
their power, and approaching the dormant, or even the extinct, condition.
The Andes sink at the Isthmus, and almost disappear, so that a railroad of little less
than 48 miles in length, and having an elevation of only 262.4 feet at its summit, there unites
the two oceans. From the Isthmus north, the ranges gain rapidly in elevation, and
through Central America and Mexico become more and more complex in character, while
the volcanic cones which are sentineled along their crests again increase in altitude, and
in the activity of their manifestations. Two of these cones— Popocatepetl and Orizabaf
— are the culminating points of North America, being the only summits which surpass
r 7,000 feet in altitude.
From Mexico the system of the Cordilleras enters our territory, still widening and
gaining in complexity. Just above the southern border of Arizona, along the parallel of
320 occurs the greatest depression of the Cordilleras existing anywhere north of southern
,
Mexico ; here the continent may be traversed without rising to an elevation of over 4000
feet. The country along this line is a table-land, with many short and broken ranges of
no great altitude built upon it, but deeply excavated by numerous canons, as the narrow
valleys of the streams are, in the Cordilleras, universally called, and of which that of the
Colorado river may be taken as the type. On this plateau, in latitude 350, there is a trans
verse east and west line of volcanoes, similar to that which traverses M exico; these
grand volcanic cones, of which San Francisco Mountain is the loftiest and best known,
rise to nearly double the altitude of the plateau on which they are built up.
The greatest width of the Cordilleras is along the line passing from the vicinity of
San Francisco, by Great Salt Lake, to Fort Laramie, or between latitudes 38° and 420;
here the mass of mountains attains a breadth of fully a thousand miles, and if the Black
Hills, an outlier of the Rocky Mountains, in latitude 440, are included— as they may
properly be— the total breadth of the complex of ranges will be, in its maximum, over
1100 miles. The whole area embraced within the mountainous belt which we call the
Cordilleras is but very little, if any, short of a million of square miles; hence it may, with
propriety, be called the greatest physical feature of our territory.
To roughly indicate the shape of the mass of the Cordilleras, we may consider it as
having a lozenge-shaped figure, bounded by two parallel north and south and two north
west and southeast sides. The length of each side is approximately 600 miles. The west
ern edge of the figure corresponds in trend to the line of the Pacific coast, which, as a
glance at the map will show, is northwest and southeast as far as Cape Mendocino, and
from there to Vancouver Island north and south nearly. The north and south trending
portion of the Pacific edge of the Cordilleras is known as the Cascade range ; the north
west and southeast range, as the S ’ erra Nevada. Here, bordering on the Cascade and
.
Sierra Nevada ranges, but still nearer the ocean, are the Coast ranges, parallel with the
loftier masses on the east, and inosculating with them, at various points, in such a manner
that a distinct separation between coast and interior ranges seems hardly possible, either
on geographical or geological grounds.
* The name " Cordilleras” has been proposed by ihe writer, and is gradually coming into use, as a comprehensive term for
the vast complex of ranges west of the 104th meridian, which are so connected together as to demand a name which shall in
clude them all.
f It does not yet appear to be definitely settled which of these two volcanic masses is the higher. The most recent measure
ments give the palm to Orizaba, but we have no means of ascertaining how trustworthy they are.
The Rocky Mountains proper, with their continuations southward in New Mexico,
form the north and south trending portions of the eastern rim of the Cordilleras, and in
latitude 430, nearly, the change from a northern to a northwestern direction of the ranges
takes place, the Big Horn, Wind River, Bitter Root, and other subordinate ranges of which
the chain is here made up, having the same northwesterly trend as the Sierra Nevada.
The lozenge-shaped figure thus indicated, framed in, as it were, by the Cascade range
and Sierra Nevada on the west, and the Rocky Mountains on the east, encloses a high
plateau, which, through its centre, east and west, has an elevation of from 4,000 to 5,000 feet
above the sea-level, and which falls off in height toward the north and south from that
central line. This plateau has built upon it a great number of ranges of mountains, the
waters finding their way down whose slopes are discharged into the Pacific, chiefly by the
Columbia and the Colorado, or else they lose themselves in the desert, and do not run
to the sea at all, but evaporate and disappear. But before noticing the remarkable pecu
liarities of the drainage of this vast plateau, the ranges which traverse it, with their com
plicated network, must first be briefly described.
There is no one of these ranges which can fairly be considered the dominant one ; but
the Wahsatch comes nearest to occupying that position. This chain forms the eastern
edge of the “ Great Basin,” or the region without drainage to the ocean, and it extends,
with a nearly north and south course, through six degrees of latitude, rising very precipi
tously from the plateau, as seen from the western side, to an elevation of from 4,000 to
6,000 feet above it. Right through the centre of the Wahsatch passes the Union Pacific
Railroad, by means of one of those deep gorges which cut the range almost to its base, and
without the aid of which it would have been almost impossible to traverse the continent,
anywhere near this latitude, except by an immense detour either to the north or the
south.
Between the Wahsatch and the Rocky Mountains is the most elevated portion of
the great continental plateau, which embraces the series of the “ Parks,” beginning with the
San Luis Park, and ending with the so-called Laramie Plains, which, with the South,
Middle, and North Parks, form a plateau, traversed by spurs of the Rocky Mountains, and
having an elevation of from 8,000 to 10,000 feet above the sea-level, the highest portion
being in latitude 390 along the northern edge of the South Park, from which there is a
,
gentle decline in both directions. The great fresh-water Tertiary plains of southwestern
Wyoming belong to the same lofty plateau, and it is over these that the railroad passes,
keeping always at an elevation about equal to, or in places even greater than, that of the
summit of the Sierra Nevada on the line of the Central Pacific Railroad.
The only well-defined range between the Wahsatch and the Rocky Mountains is the
Yuintah ; and this is the only high and well-marked chain in the Cordilleras which has an
cast and west trend. South of the Yuintah is a region of tremendous cafions, ragged and
almost inaccessible where the streams— branches of the Colorado— have worn down their
beds in the soft, horizontally-stratified rocks, in the most surprising manner, so that the
region is one which almost entirely forbids all passage through it.
Between the Wahsatch and the Sierra Nevada are a great number of nearly parallel
ranges, which have a direction a little east of north and west of south, and are generally
long, narrow, and precipitous. These ranges rise from a base of 5,000 feet high, or nearly
that, and run obliquely across from the Sierra Nevada to the Humboldt River, which
marks the limit of their extension toward the north. Beyond this, we strike the southern
edge of the stupendous volcanic plateau which covers so large a portion of eastern Ore
gon and Washington Territory, as well as of southwestern Idaho, northern Nevada, and
northeastern California. Rising to a considerable height above this volcanic plateau is
the range of the Blue Mountains, which lies to the west of Snake River, in eastern Ore
gon, and which is perhaps less known than any other chain of mountains within our limits.
To the west of Snake River are groups of broken ranges, which have hardly yet received
names, and which have been but little explored, although they have been for years the
scene ot more or less successful gold-mining.
Here it may be remarked, that the central portion of the Cordilleras, or that em
braced in the belt of States and Territories lying between, and including, Colorado and
California, has become very much better known than the regions to the north and south.
With the publication of the work of the various State and United States surveys which
have been going on adjacent to the line of the Overland railroad, we shall soon be placed
in possession of quite detailed maps of the region in question, while the extreme northern
and southern portions of the Cordilleras, within our limits, have, as yet, received bnt a
scanty share of attention.
The height above the sea-level of the various ranges of mountains indicated above
2
T H E P H Y S IC A L FEATU RES OF T H E U N IT E D STATES.
now demands a brief notice. The most elevated portion of the ranges is on the highest
region of the plateau, or in the belt which stretches from California to Colorado. The
highest part of the Sierra Nevada is near the parallel of 36°3o\ and here the peaks rise to
over 14,000 feet, while the passes have an elevation of not far from 12,000. The culmina
ting point of the Sierra, Mount Whitney, falls a little short of 15,000 feet, the latest meas
urement giving 14,887 feet as its height. From here towards the north the range declines
gradually in altitude, and, where the railroad crosses, the pass is only 7,000 feet above the
sea. A t Lassen’s Peak there is a great break in the range, which may, indeed, there be
said to have an end. Beyond this, the Sierra and the Cascade range assume rather the
form of a plateau, on which, however, several grand volcanic cones have been built, be
ginning with Shasta and continuing with Pitt, Hood, Adams, St. Helens, Rainier, and
Baker. O f these, Shasta and Rainier are the highest, and of almost exactly the same ele
vation, if the results of the latest measurement of the latter by the United States Coast
Survey are to be depended on, differing as they do by more than 2,000 feet from the
former one by the Wilkes United States exploring expedition.
The highest points in the Rocky Mountains are none of them, so far as known, quite
equal in altitude to the highest in the Sierra Nevada; but while there are only a few
peaks in the last-named chain which exceed 14,000 feet, there are in the Rocky Mountains
a very large number which range between 14,000 and 14,300, their differences of altitude,
in fact, falling within the limits of barometric error of measurement, so that a long time
must elapse before they can be arranged according to their relative rank. It is, indeed,
one of the most curious facts, in connection with the different mountain groups of the
Cordilleras, that the dominating peaks are so nearly of the same height*
The culminating points of the Wahsatch, Yuintah, and East Humboldt ranges will, it
is believed, not exceed 13,000 feet in elevation ; but no definite statements have yet been
published in regard to these mountains by the chief of the “ Fortieth Parallel Survey,”
under whose directions they have been examined and measured.
The drainage of the region enclosed between the Rocky Mountains and the Sierra
Nevada is very remarkable. Owing to the great elevation of the central portion of the
plateau, the streams rising on the western slope of the ranges which crown the eastern
edge of the mass of the Cordilleras have to find their way to the sea by means of long
detours to the north and south. The sources of these streams are in the Wind River range,
where the Colorado, the Columbia, and the Missouri head.
In the higher portion of the vast triangular area embraced between the two great
rivers that drain the western slope of the Rocky Mountains lies the Great Basin, which
includes almost all the State of Nevada, as well as the western portions of Utah. Here
the amount of the rain-fall is very small, and the evaporation rapid, so that the streams
grow “ small by degrees and beautifully less” as they leave the mountains, finally disappear
ing altogether in the valleys at their base. There are many of these “ sinks,” as they are
called, each the place where the drainage of some particular range or group of ranges dis
appears. By far the most important of these, however, is the sink of the Carson and
Humboldt, the former stream coming down the eastern flank of the Sierra Nevada, the
latter preserving its existence for more than 300 miles, and running across the whole of
northern Nevada, transverse to the general direction of the ranges in that State, and thus
affording the only practicable railroad route from east to west. It also marks, as before
suggested, an important change in the geology, since its course is along the southern edge
of the great volcanic plateau of the West.
Want of navigability is a characteristic of all the streams which drain the Cordilleras to
the west. Instead of the vast stretches opened to steam navigation by the Mississippi and
all its tributaries, allowing access to points two and three thousand miles away from the
mouth of that mighty river, we have the Colorado, which is hardly of any account at all
for the purposes of navigation ; the Columbia, with two portages by railroad before the
Cascade range is crossed ; the Sacramento, navigable for moderate-sized boats for about
sixty miles only ; and, with these exceptions, no stream of any importance as opening
access to the interior, along our whole Pacific coast— while, it may be added, the same
drawback to commercial prosperity marks the entire coast of South America
The number of water-falls within the Cordilleras is no doubt large, although 'few, if
any, have yet attained celebrity. The most important are those of the Snake River, called
the Shoshone Falls, and these are worthy to be ranked as but little inferior to Niagara in
grandeur, all the features of the adjacent country being, in each case, taken into account.
Situated in the midst of the volcanic region, with stupendous over-hanging cliffs of
basaltic lava, the Shoshone Falls may be classed with the- Niagara, the Zambezi, and the
Kaieteur, the cataracts which are typical, when volume and elevation are both taken into
account. The Yosemite Falls, on the other hand, are perhaps equal, or even superior, to
anything yet discovered, when vertical height and grandeur of surrounding scenery are
considered, without reference to the volume of the water falling.
Leaving now the Cordilleras, we have next to consider the eastern border of our
territorv— the northeast and southwest trending mass of ranges, known as the Appala
chians; and in this portion of our little risum t of the physical features of the United
States, we shall have to rely less on our own observations, and more on the labors of
others, and especially on those of Professor Guyot and of Professor J. P. Lesley, of
the Pennsylvania Geological Survey, who have both labored with zeal and ability in
* It may be mentioned here, that the statement continually repeated in the test-books of j^eotfraphyin regard to the great
elevation of Mt. Brown. M l Hooker, and Ml. St. Elias, all north of our borders, have no basis of fact on which to rest. Mt.
Brown and Mt. Hooker have never been measured at all. and the height of M l St. Elias has never been definitely ascertained,
the different measurements differing nearly 3,000 feet from each other.
making the topography of our eastern border intelligible, when State and United States
help has been but sparingly bestowed.
A glance at the map shows that the central portion of North America, from the Gulf
of Mexico to the Arctic Ocean, is a region of great rivers and lakes, and not of mountains,
A sinking of the land of less than 1,000 feet would open a water-way through from north
to south ; 2,000 feet of such a sinking— or an equivalent rise of the ocean— would divide
our territory into two distinct and remote portions. On the east we should have a com
paratively narrow belt of land extending in a northeast and southwest direction from Penn
sylvania to Georgia, with groups of outlying islands on the north, especially in about lati
tude 440, where the tops of the Green, White, and Adirondack mountains would rise in
the form of lofty and precipitous islands above the waste of waters. On the west, the mass
of land remaining uncovered would be of grand, almost continental dimensions, for its
breadth would be fully equal to 1,500 miles, narrowing as we follow it northward, while in
length, north and south, it would extend entirely across our territory. The breadth of the
ocean separating these masses of land would be not far from a thousand miles. And after
first sketching the topographical peculiarities of the Appalachian range, we will then
briefly consider this lower region, which includes the great valley of the Mississippi and its
tributaries.
The Appalachian chain extends from the promontory of Gaspe, in a general south
westerly direction, for a distance of about 1,300 miles, into Alabama, where it dies out,
and becomes lost under the horizontal strata of more recent geological formations which
cover nearly the whole surface of that State. The base from which this chain rises, on the
eastern side, is the Atlantic sea-board, which, in the early history of the United States,
seemed to be the whole country, and which is still commercially the most important, and the
seat of its largest cities. This plain is slightly inclined towards the Atlantic, and its eleva
tion above the sea is inconsiderable. In New England it hardly exceeds 300 to 400 feet;
but towards the south, after passing the Bay of New York, where it is nearly at the sealevel, it gains in altitude and also in width, finally attaining a height of a thousand feet and
a breadth of some two hundred miles. The western base of the Appalachian range is
the great plateau region, which descends gradually towards the Great Lakes and the
tributaries of the Ohio, having a general elevation of a thousand feet or more, but deeply
cut into by the streams which traverse it, and which run in valleys depressed from 300 to
500 feet below the general level of the country.
The Appalachian chain presents, in many of its features, a most marked contrast to
the Cordilleras just described. In many respects the relations of the two systems of eleva
tions are like those borne by the Alps and the J ura. The Cordilleras, however, are vastly
grander in dimensions and more complicated and less a unit than the A lps; while, on
the other hand, the Appalachians and the Jura have several striking points of resemblance.
O f these the most characteristic is, the presence in both chains of numerous nearly parallel
lines of elevation— wrinkles of the surface or folds of the strata, as they may be called—
which preserve their regularity of form, parallelism, and equality of height over long dis
tances, so that they seem almost like artificial walls, in this respect differing most wonder
fully in character from the ranges of the Cordilleras, which seem to delight in irregularity
of outline and in lack of persistency of form. It is especially in the middle portion of the
Appalachian chain that these peculiar characters arc well developed. Towards the north,
and again at the opposite extremity, in the southern region, the parallelism of the subordi
nate members is almost lost, the structure of the range becoming more irregular and com
plicated. According to Professor Guyot, there is one feature which distinguishes the
Appalachian system from that of the Jura : this is, the well-marked division of the former
into two longitudinal zones of elevation, one turned towards the shores of the Atlantic, in
which the form of parallel chains just spoken of predominates, and the other towards the
interior, and made up of elevated and continuous plateaus descending from the summit of
their eastern escarpment, in the centre of the system, in gentle stages towards the basins
of the lakes and the valley of the Ohio. Thus, in reality, there are two somewhat distinct
regions traversed in crossing the chain through its central portion, from east to w est; one
a zone of parallel ranges and longitudinal valleys, the other a region of plateaus with occa
sional irregular and quite subordinate chains wrinkling their surface. Thus, therefore, there
is lacking in the Appalachians that almost entire uniformity of structure which prevails in
the Jura.
Professor Guyot calls attention to a conspicuous feature of the most folded portion of
the Appalachians, characterizing the chain through its entire length. This is, the exist
ence of a great central valley running through the system from northeast to southwest,
which can be traced without difficulty, although not perfectly uniform in its development.
It is the Lake Champlain and Hudson River Yalley in New \ ork, the Kittatinny \ alley
of Pennsylvania, the Great Yalley of Virginia, and, finally, still further south, the Yalley
of East Tennessee. The chain, or system of chains, bordering this central depression on
the southeast is also a persistent feature of the Appalachian system, for it extends with but
few interruptions from Vermont to Alabama, being known by a variety of names, as it
passes from one State into another. It is the Green Mountain range of \ ermont, the
Highlands of New York, the South Mountains of Pennsylvania, the Blue Ridge of V ir
ginia, and, finally, the Iron, Smoky, and Unaka Mountains of North Carolina and Ten
nessee.
Possessing these features in common, as a whole, the chain of the Appalachians pre
sents three subdivisions, each exhibiting its own well-marked peculiarity of structure.
These are the northern, extending from Gaspe to the Hudson ; the middle, from New
THE
P H Y S IC A L
FE A TU R E S OF T H E
York to the Kanawha or New River in V irginia; the southern, from New River to
the southwestern extremity of the system. Each of these subdivisions has its peculiar curva
ture and general direction. The northern trends to the north from the Hudson River to
near the Canada line, then bends to the eastward, sweeping a great curve, so as to present,
on the whole, its concavity to the southeast; the middle subdivision also curves quite
regularly, the ridges trending from east and west around to southwest, so that the concavity
faces the Atlantic shore, while the most southern portion of the range, from New River
southward, bends to the west again, so as to form a gentle curve concave towards the north
west
The most northern division of the three is quite distinct from the next one south, both
geographically and geologically. It includes all the mountain groups and ranges north and
east of the Mohawk and Hudson valleys, which make a complete break through the sys
tem, both vertically and longitudinally, forming the great natural highway between the
East and the West, or the Great Lakes and the Atlantic sea-board. This was the first route
across the country which was traversed by canal and railroad. So complete is the physical
break here, that a rise of the ocean of 400 feet only would separate all the extensive region
included between the St. Lawrence, the Atlantic Ocean, and the Hudson and Mohawk
valleys, into a great island entirely detached from the rest of the continent A rise of
140 feet only would detach all that country which lies east of the Hudson and Lake
Champlain.
The subdivisions of this eastern group of the Appalachians are necessarily rather artifi
cial, for the mass of elevations is very irregular in its development. The most continuous
range is that of the Green Mountains; but this is flanked on each side by higher groups:
on the east, the White Mountains; on the west, the Adirondacks. O f the first-named
group, Mount Washington is the culminating point, and it is 6,288 feet high ; of the lastmentioned, Tahawus, with an altitude of 5,379 feet, is the dominating peak. Greylock, in
Massachusetts (3,505 feet), and Mount Mansfield in \ ermont ( 4> ®feet), are the highest
43
points in those States.
The line of summits extending through Massachusetts and New Hampshire, be
ginning with Wachusett on the south, and extending up to the White Mountains, through
Monadnock, Sunapee, Kearsarge, and other peaks, is broken and irregular. Both the
White Mountains and the Adirondacks are rather isolated masses, while the Green Moun
tains proper are in more intimate connection with the Canadian range which terminates
in Gaspe.
The central division of the Appalachian chain extends from the Hudson River to
the Kanawha, which makes an almost complete cut across the chain, heading in the Blue
Ridge and marking an important change in the character of the topography. This central
division of the Appalachians is about 45®milcs
length. It is very narrow towards its
northern end, but widens out in Pennsylvania, decreasing again in Virginia. It is com
posed of a considerable number of subordinate chains, much curved toward the west, and
remarkable for their regularity, their parallelism, their abrupt declivities, and their moderate
elevation, both relative and absolute; they rarely rise to 2,500 feet above the sea-level.
West of this division of the Appalachian chain is the great plateau, which occupies all
that part of New York which lies south of the Mohawk, and also the northwestern part
of Pennsylvania, and reaches an elevation near Lake Erie of 2,000 feet.
brom this
table-land the drainage descends by the Great Lakes to the St. Lawrence, to the Gulf of
Mexico by the Ohio, and to the Atlantic by the Susquehanna, which breaks across the
whole chain, finding its way in the most unexpected manner through gaps in the different
ranges.
The topography of the Appalachians in Pennsylvania has been carefully worked out
by the State Geological Survey, and it is so remarkable in its character that some addi
tional details may with propriety be given in regard to that portion of the chain.
According to Professor H. D. Rogers, the mountain-zone of Pennsylvania may be
divided into five well-marked parallel belts, which are as follows, when enumerated in order
from the east toward the west: 1st The South Mountains, already mentioned as being
the continuation of the Highlands of New York, and the equivalent of the Blue Ridge of
Virginia; 2d. The Great Appalachian V alle y; 3d. The Central Appalachian Ridges, or
the Appalachian chain proper; 4th. The Sub-Alleghany \ alley; 5th. The Alleghany
Mountain, or the southeast escarpment of the Alleghany Plateau.
The South Mountains have already been alluded to as part of the system of ranges
bordering the great central depression of the Appalachians on the east. In Pennsylvania
this belt consists of two quite detached ranges of hills, one of which is the prolongation of
the New York Highlands, the other the northeastern termination of the Blue Ridge:
both these groups of hills have a moderate elevation in Pennsylvania, hardly exceeding 600
or 700 feet.
The Appalachian Valley, or Kittatinny Valley, as it is usually called, stretches across
the State from the Delaware to Maryland, forming a part of the great central valley pre
viously mentioned. In Pennsylvania this has an elevation of from 200 to 600 feet, and it
forms a broad, moderately undulating plain, having a width of from ten to eighteen miles.
This valley is, beyond a doubt, one of the most favored parts of our country ; climate, soil,
mineral resources, and scenery all combine to lend it charms.
The third division, or the Appalachian chain proper, may be thus described, using
nearly the language of Professor H. D. Rogers:— It is a complex chain of long, narrow,
very level mountain ridges, separated by long, narrow, parallel valleys. These ridges
sometimes end abruptly in swelling knobs, and sometimes taper off in long, slender points.
U N IT E D
STATES.,
3
Their slopes are singularly uniform, being in many cases unvaried by ravine or gully for
many miles; in other instances they are trenched at equal intervals with great regularity.
Their crests are, for the most part, sharp, and they preserve an extraordinarily equable ele
vation, being only here and there interrupted by notches or gaps, which sometimes descend
to the water-level, so as to give passage to the rivers. The whole range is the combined
result of an elevation of the strata in long, slender, parallel ridges, wave-like in form, and of
excessive erosion of them by water; and the present configuration of the surface is one
which demonstrates that a remarkable, and as yet little understood, series of geological
events has been concerned in its formation. The ridges, which are but remnants of the
eroded strata, are variously arranged in groups with long, narrow crests, some of which
preserve remarkable straightness for great distances, while others bend with a prolonged
and regular sweep. In many instances, two narrow, contiguous, parallel mountain crests
unite at their extremities, and enclose a deep, narrow, oval valley, which with its sharp
mountain sides bears not unfrequently a marked resemblance to a long, slender, sharppointed canoe. There are two classes of these boat-shaped valleys, one possessing a syn
clinal structure, or having geologically higher strata in the middle of the trough, the lower,
harder rocks forming the steep, narrow, enclosing mountains; the other having the anti
clinal form, being valleys scooped longitudinally out of the summits of the arches by an
excessively energetic erosive force of water cutting through the harder upper strata, down
into the softer, lower ones. Both classes, though thus begirt by steep, sharp, and very
strong ridges, are usually entered by more than one notch or gap, affording pass-ways to
the streams. These gorges constitute a most important feature in the hydrography of the
country, as they permit a ready transit, at the general level of the country, through and
among crowded and steep mountain-ridges, which, when these are absent, are found to be
difficult of passage even for common roads. It is through these gaps that the rivers of
Pennsylvania find their way to the sea, almost the entire drainage of that State being
across the whole breadth of the chain. Interspersed among the narrow ridges and valleys
are wide tracts of table-land, of the same general elevation as the ridges themselves. Some
of these are formed by the merging together of two or more ridges, which flatten out before
uniting; others are broad synclinal plateaus, or high flattened mountain basins, subdivided
at their ends into a series of spurs projecting like fingers.
The other two divisions of the Pennsylvania mountain-zone, namely the Sub-Alle
ghany Valley and the Alleghany Mountains, are of subordinate importance and need not
here be dwelt on farther. The latter is indeed only the escarpment of the great plateau
which, properly, forms the western base of the Appalachian system.
Greater diversity of structure and increased altitude mark the southern division of the
Appalachians, or that part of the chain which extends from New River towards the south
west Here, however, we have no such careful studies of the topography as have been
made in Pennsylvania, and for our knowledge of the relations of the different groups of
ranges we have to depend chiefly on the investigations of Professor Guyot. A s before
remarked, the main chain which borders the Great Valley on the east, and which separates
it from the Atlantic sea-board, bears off more to the southwest, leaving a considerably
wider space between it and the ocean, and in this southern extension it assumes the name
of the Blue Ridge. This eastern chain now becomes the divide between the waters flowing
into the Atlantic and those which run to the Mississippi, the New or Kanawha River
having its source on the extreme eastern border of the mountains, crossing all the ridges
in a northwesterly direction, or just the opposite of what we have previously noticed as
occurring in the case of the Susquehanna. There are marked peculiarities of structure
which accompany this complete reversal of the lines of direction of the drainage of the
chain. That remarkable looped structure of the ranges which we have observed as occur
ring in Pennsylvania gradually disappears as we go southward, and instead of it we have
straight outcrops cut off by oblique faults, and a general broadening and increased clc\ation of the mountain masses. In the high regions comprised between the Blue Ridge and
the great chain of the Iron, Smoky, and Unaka Mountains, separating North Carolina
from Tennessee, we have the culminating portion of the whole chain of the Appalachians.
Here, for an extent of more than 150 miles, the mean elevation of the valley from which
the Mountains rise is more than 2,000 feet, scores of summits reaching 6,000 feet, while the
loftiest peaks rise to a height of 6,700 feet To the west of this high region is the valley of
the Tennessee, the continuation of the Great Central Valley previously noticed as a
marked feature of the whole chain. This valley rises as wre go south, and attains its greatest
elevation in the basin of the New River, where it reaches a height of 2,600 feet. Along
the Tennessee it widens out to nearly sixty miles, and has here a mean height of not more
than about 1,000 feet, which is only one half of that of valleys in the high mountain region
to the east, in North Carolina
Beyond this, still farther to the west, is the plateau of Tennessee, knowm as the Cum
berland Mountains, which are indeed but the escarped edges of a table-land some thirty or
forty miles wide, which stretches along between the Cumberland and Tennessee ri\ ers.
Between the Appalachians and the Rocky Mountains there are, within our borders,
no connected masses of mountain ranges; isolated hill ranges rise, like islands, at \ arious
points, as in Missouri and Arkansas; and there are a few short ranges on the south shore
of Lake Superior.
North of the Great Lakes and the St. Lawrence, however, there is the dividing range
which separates the waters flowing into the last-named stream from those which run into
Hudson’s Bay. This is an imperfectly known region, wonderfully cut up by rivers and
dotted with lakes. The highest points of the Laurentian range, as these mountains are
4
THE
P H Y S IC A L
FE ATU RE S
called, is supposed to be where the Saguenay cuts the chain, and 4,000 feet is given as the
approximate elevation, while peaks in the parallel ridges nearer the S t Lawrence exceed
half that height Among the summits seen with such picturesque effect from Quebec, M t
S t Anne is the highest, and is given by Bayfield at 2,687 feet.
This range falls off in elevation as we follow it west, and in the country between the
Ottawa and Lake Huron the highest summits do not appear to exceed 1,500 to 1,700 feet
The range is made up of rounded hills, densely wooded, almost exclusively with coniferous
trees on its higher portions. Its valleys are very' wide and full of great ponds and lakes, so
that one may traverse almost the whole region with the aid of the birch canoe. A s Sir
William Logan remarked, in 1863, over a thousand lakes have already been laid down on
the maps of the Canadian portion of the Laurentian Mountains, although the region has
been as yet only imperfectly explored.
W e have thus rapidly sketched the most striking features of the great ranges of
mountains which form the frame-work of our territory, and have now to say something of
the interior regions thus enclosed. And the most noticeable facts in regard to this vast
area are its slight elevation above the sea-level and the general plain-like character of its
surface. These conditions are well illustrated by the statement that at Cairo, the junction
of the Ohio and the Mississippi, we are 1,100 miles from the mouth of the last-named river,
and yet only 322 feet above the sea-level. A t Pittsburg, the head of the Ohio proper, 975
miles further up, we have attained an elevation of only 699 feet. Going in the opposite
direction, or following up the tributaries of the Mississippi and Missouri, which come in
from the west, we have a similar condition of things. One may travel up the Platte or
Kansas for hundreds of miles, rising so gradually and imperceptibly that the country seems
all the time a level plain. From Council Bluffs to the source of Lodge Pole Creek— along
the line of the Union Pacific Railroad— the ascent averages only five feet to the mile.
From St. Paul, which is 828 feet above the sea only, we travel for 670 miles westerly before
the mouth of the Yellowstone is reached, and here we have attained an altitude of only
2,010 feet, with an average rise of only two feet to the mile.
The Great Lakes, those vast expansions of the upper waters of the St. Lawrence, arc
among the grandest of the geographical features of the North American continent. They
are remarkable for their immense area and uniformity of elevation above the sea-level, and
the consequent facilities which they afford for commercial intercourse among the States
which are near them. Their combined area is equal to a little more than 90,000 square
miles, Lake Superior having over 30,000, and Michigan and Huron each over 20,000
square miles of surface. Erie, Huron, and Michigan arc nearly on the same level, the ex
treme difference between the first and last named being only about nineteen feet, while
Superior is only twenty-two feet higher than Michigan, or forty-one above Erie. The
divide between the Great Uikcs and the waters flowing into the Mississippi and its tribu
taries is also everywhere low, and at the lower end of Lake Michigan it is so trifling that
only a small amount of excavation has been required to cause the waters which formerly
flowed into that lake to run towards the Gulf of Mexico. Lake Ontario is, indeed, 331
feet lower than Lake Eric, about half the descent from one to the other being made in one
single plunge of the vast body of water, forming a cataract which has, in all probability, not
more than one rival in the world.
The level and fertile region of the Mississippi Valley is prolonged towards the far
OF
THE
U N ITE D
STATES.
southwest, around the Gulf of Mexico, and far into the interior of Texas, where it finally
passes into the elevated, barren plateau of the Llano Estacado.
From such facts as those above mentioned it may with propriety be inferred, that
there is a great uniformity of character over the vast area enclosed between the Appala
chians and the Rocky Mountains ; so far as its availability for settlement and cultivation
are concerned, the most important differences seem to result from the unequal distribution
of rain upon it Between the Appalachians and the Mississippi, and for some distance west
of this river, the annual precipitation is ample for the purposes of agriculture, and, in con
sequence, this region is pre-eminently the agricultural portion of our territory; its gently
undulating surface is abundantly wooded, and hardly anywhere too rough for cultivation,
while a very large portion of it is covered by a soil of unequaled fertility.
But as we leave the Mississippi and the Missouri behind us, traveling westward, we
gradually enter a region of diminished rain-fall; the trees decrease in number, and finally
become exclusively limited to the banks of the streams, while the general surface of the
country is covered by a heavy growth of nutritious grasses; and this continues until the base
of the mountains is reached, when moisture from the melting snows on the higher summits
is sufficient to nourish and support a forest vegetation. This pastoral, rather than agricul
tural region of our territory extends from about the 98th meridian west until we have
risen so high on the slope of the Cordilleras that the elevated and mountainous character
of the country forbids all cultivation.
W e have, viewing our territory in the most general way possible, four great divisions
of its surface :— 1st. The eastern sea-board, and the Appalachian ranges which press so closely
upon i t ; this is the commercial and manufacturing region. 2d. The Great Central Valley,
pre-eminently the agricultural region. 3d. The pastoral, or the region of the plains. 4th.
The mining region, or the Cordilleras.
The nearness to Europe, the abundance of its water-power, the variety and value of its
forests, its inexhaustible resources in coal and iron, the excellence of its harbors— these arc
the conditions which determine the east as the leading commercial and manufacturing
region. Wonderful richness of soil, natural facilities for internal commerce, afforded by
an unrivaled system of rivers and the ease with which railroads may be constructed,
vast deposits of coal and iron ore— these are the gifts of nature to our Central Valley, and
such as will enable it, while surpassing the east in agriculture, to vie with it in commerce.
The mineral and metallic wealth of the Cordilleras has within the past twenty-five years
brought that previously unknown region within the pale of civilization, and it is already
opened to commercial intercourse with the East and the Orient. Portions, indeed, of the
extreme western border of our territory arc to be classed among the most fertile districts
of the country; but this fact would probably have remained long unknown had not the
discovery of gold in that region drawn thither a numerous and energetic population. And,
as if to render more and more feasible the at first doubtfully mooted project of an over
land railway, the existence of rich deposits of silver, in various parts of the Great Basin,
became a well-ascertained fact, after the most productive gold-fields had begun to fall off
in their yield; and it was thus clearly demonstrated that the natural difficulties of a central
route across the Continent must be overcome, however great they might be, in order that
the East and the farthest West should come into close connection with each other.
THE WOODLANDS AND FOREST SYSTEM S OF THE UNITED STATES.
B Y PR O F . W IL L IA M
^
H. B R E W E R . N E W H A V E N , C O N N .
^ H E map showing the distribution o f woodlands relates to areas merely. It exhibits
the relative proportions of surface occupied by woodlands and by lands not occupied
by trees, so far as the scale chosen will allow. It takes no account of the species
which make up the tree-covering of the soil, nor of the density of the forests— that is, of
the relative numbers of trees per acre— nor of their size or economic value, or their fitness
for sawing or other use or manufacture. The census of 1870 returned the number of acres
of “ Woodland" and the number of acres “ improved ” and “ unimproved other than wood
land ” in each farm. The ratio of woodland to other land in farms, was calculated for each
county, and made the first basis for the map. For some regions that were covered with
farms, these data were reasonably satisfactory, but for other large areas were very imperfect
and had to be modified by estimates. These data ceased with the first tier of States west
of the Mississippi River, and for the region west of the 96th meridian the map was com
piled entirely from estimates. In this work, light has been sought from all available sources,
various reports and documents, from the General, State, and Territorial Governments,
reports of surveys of every kind, public and private, journals and narratives of travel, reports
of various expeditions, explorations and voyages, various journals, reports and works of
botanists, the publications of learned societies, scientific periodicals, journals devoted to
special industries dependent on wood and lumber, and other published information not
necessary here to be enumerated. More than all this, was information given by those
having personal knowledge of particular regions. These embrace private citizens resident
in the different localities, travelers, persons connected with various national expeditions
and surveys, with State geological surveys, and with land surveys of various kinds, railroad
engineers, naturalists, botanists, persons connected with trades and industries that gave
them peculiar facilities for information, many officers of the United States Army, U. S.
engineers, and members of the Coast Survey, local engineers, etc., etc., in all a large number
of persons who have kindly and cordially given what assistance they could, and whose
names I would wish to here insert and thank publicly were it not that the list is entirely
too long to be allowed here. The detached and scattered data from all these sources have
been carefully worked over, and the general results are given on the map.
It is evident that for large areas the value of the map depends upon the accuracy of
„ the estimates of intelligent observers. No published map of any considerable area in our
country is known to us, on which the woodlands are laid down from actual surveys. The
extensive and valuable information in the U. S. Land Office is largely accessible, but it is
scattered through the thousands of books of original notes of the surveys. There has been
no attempt to incorporate it in the maps of that office, and it is curious to see how much
more care has been shown in locating the mineral districts than the woodlands, on the
maps of that office.
Regarding the value of estimates, it is sufficient to say, that usually the information
relating to particular regions, has been derived from several independent sources. Over
considerable areas in the southern Rocky Mountain region, I had independent estimates
of from three to seven scientific observers connected with various explorations and surveys;
and here the estimates agreed with unexpected closeness. Sometimes they all agreed,
while they rarely differed more than by one degree of density as given on the map, and
such disagreements apparently arose from the different standards in the minds of the
different observers. It is probable that as a whole, the amount of woodland as exhibited
on the maps is underrated east of the Mississippi River and overrated west of it.
It is not possible to portray on one map all the characters of woodlands. The scale
of this map is too small to show more than very general distribution. Nor is it possible
to convey the same idea to all persons by shades of density, especially not to persons
whose observations have been restricted to limited areas widely separated. Nor is it
possible to convey by this means a correct idea of the character of the forests themselves.
\Ve cannot thus satisfactorily compare the grand forests of Puget Sound and Mendocino
with the oak openings of Texas and the mesquit groves of Arizona; the hills clothed with a
dense growth of small hard-wood trees in New England, with the open forests of the pine
barrens farther south; the fringe of willows and cottonwoods skirting a river of the plains,
with the tangled growth of the coast ranges of the Pacific; or the scattered cedars on the
ridges of Dakota, with the intricate forests of Florida. The map, therefore, is a com
promise, on which I have tried to show as far as is possible what is known of our woodlands.
A s it is the first, it is to be hoped that the work will ultimately be more satisfactorily done
from fuller data and in a series of maps (perhaps by some future U. S. Commissioner of
Forests), each to illustrate some separate character.
Considered botanically, the flora of the United States is very rich in woody plants.
The actual number of species is not known, but 800 is perhaps not too high an estimate.
There is no dividing line in nature between trees and shrubs; the arbitrary rule adopted by
most botanists is to call trees only such species as grow to thirty or more feet high ; less
than that are shrubs. Sometimes, however, the habit of the plant will place among the
trees a plant which from size alone would be called a shrub.
A n examination of various authorities shows that upwards of 300 indigenous species
of trees are known to botanists, growing within the limits of the United States, which
attain the height of thirty feet About 250 of these are somewhere in the United States
tolerably abundant, or at least, not rare.
If for our purpose we exclude all the smaller trees that never attain a height of fifty
feet, also those tropical species, however large, which occur with us only in extreme southern
Florida, also a few Mexican trees found only along our extreme southern border, also such
rare species as may occur only in Alaska, also all those very rare species nowhere common,
and consider only the larger trees which are somewhere in our territory tolerably abundant,
we have still about 120 species, of which about twenty species attain a height of 100 feet,
twelve a height of 200 feet, while perhaps five or six may attain a height of 300 feet and
over. O f the 120 species indicated, about fifty belong to the Coniferee. How many of
these species are of special importance in commerce, or in the home industries (of other use
than for fuel) it is impossible to say, but it is a very large proportion of the whole number.
Many of the smaller species, however, and of the larger shrubs, give special character
to large areas of woodlands and cannot be ignored in any discussion of American trees,
whether considered botanically or economically.
A glance at the map shows large regions either treeless or very sparsely wooded. It
is possible to cross the continent, from the Pacific to the Gulf of Mexico, without passing
through a forest five miles in extent, or large enough to be indicated on the map. Then,
again, the woodlands of the east arc separated from those of the west by a broad treeless
plain from six to fifteen degrees wide. The forests and woodlands on the two sides of this
gap, are entirely unlike in their aspect and in their botanic characters. On the eastern
side broad-leaved, hard-wood species predominate, both in abundance of individuals and
in number of species, the forests of large areas consisting entirely of such kinds. On the
west, the forests are entirely of coniferee ; other species occur, some of great value, but they
nowhere (or at most in only rare cases in the extreme west) form a conspicuous or even
noticeable element in the forests. Not a single species forms a noticeable element in the
forests of both sides; the nearest approach to it is the aspen {Populus tretuuloidcs) which
is a common tree in the north from the Atlantic to the Pacific. Two species of cotton
wood are also abundant in some localities, and form an important element in the fringe of
wood bordering streams, but are never otherwise a conspicuous element in the forests of
the west. These three species of poplar are the only broad-leaved trees that figure as
trees both sides of the central treeless plains; but others stray across as mere shrubs on
one side. Among the Coniferee one cedar is found on both sides as an abundant wood in
places, but it is a low crabbed growth west, a large shrub oftener than a tree. Neither
beech, nor elm, nor hickory, nor mulberry, nor basswood, nor tulip-tree, nor magnolia, nor
sassafras forms an element in the forests of the Rocky Mountains and westward.
For convenience in discussing the kinds of wood, we may divide our domain into ten
geographical divisions, v iz :— 1st New England; 2d. The Middle States; 3d. The South
Eastern region ; 4th. The Northwestern region ; 5th. The Southwestern ; 6th. The Plains;
7th. The Rocky Mountain region; 8th. Arizona, New Mexico and the Great Basin;
9th. The Pacific region ; and 10th. Alaska.
Only native species are considered in the following discussion of the kinds of wood.
So much confusion exists in the popular and commercial names of many of our trees that
the botanical name is given where necessary for precision. One example is sufficient to
illustrate this confusion of names. The most widely spread and valuable of western timber
trees, Abies D ouglasii, which grows from British Columbia to New Mexico, is known in
its different localities under the various names of Douglas Fir, Red Fir, Black Fir, Douglas
Spruce, Red Spruce, Black Spruce, Hemlock, Oregon Pine, Western Pitch, Bear River
Pine, Swamp Pine, and perhaps others; moreover, nearly all of these names are also applied
to other species. Similar confusion exists in the popular names of not a few species.
New England was originally entirely wooded, and has about eighty or eighty-five
species of trees of which about sixty may reach fifty feet in height Maine is a great
source of pine and spruce lumber, but, as a whole, hard wood species predominate, particu
larly south of the 44th parallel. Many of these hard woods are noted for their durability
and texture, and form the raw material for a great variety of manufactures, particularly of
carriages and various tools and implements where tough wood is an essential part. The
extent and variety of manufactures in wood is relatively greater in this region than else
2
T H E W O O D L A N D S A N D T H E FOREST SYSTEM S OF T H E U N IT E D STATES.
where, and ship-building is an important industry. The large timber used in house and
ship building is unquestionably rapidly diminishing, but the area of woodlands is not
decreasing in the same ratio. In many places the large trees suitable for sawing are cut,
without clearing the land of the smaller growth, leaving it still woodland; and as such it is
shown on the map. A s a whole, the area of woodlands in this region is but slowly, if
indeed at all, diminishing, and in large districts it increases from year to year. This is
particularly the case in portions of the western part, where hilly regions, formerly largely
in tillage and pasturage, are now growing up with trees, mostly of hard-wood kinds. Some
of the timber thus grown is considered peculiarly valuable in manufactures, where strength
and durability are needed. This extension of woodland-areas is by natural process. Few
if any forests have been planted, except on the sandy regions along the southern part and
on the islands, where pines have been planted to some extent The extensive planting of
trees for shade and ornament, however, increases largely the actual amount of wood in this
region. To appreciate how much, it is only necessary to see many of the New England
villages and cities from some height in summer, where the abundance of trees gives the
appearance of a forest to the scene. Some of the cities have more actual wood growing in
their streets and parks than is sufficient to be termed a heavy “ forest” or “ timber” in the
sparsely wooded regions of the west In New England the elm and perhaps the sugar
maple attain their finest development and greatest abundance.
The middle States have about ioo to 105 species of trees, 65 to 67 of which
sometimes reach 50 feet in height. The region was originally entirely wooded. Over
much of it the forests were very heavy, and there are still immense quantities of timber
available. The forests of this region are usually made up of quite a number of species,
in some places the broad-leaved species predominating, in others the Coniferez ; but
both kinds commonly grow together, the coniferae usually less abundant in the south
ern and western portions. The deciduous oaks, chestnut, beech, two species of ash, and
perhaps the white pine, attain in this district their greatest size. The original and some of
the remaining forests are noted for their grandeur. On the ridges of the Appalachians
which cross Pennsylvania and New York, while the hard woods may not attain their
greatest size, some of them, particularly white oak, white ash, and some of the hickories, are
believed to attain their greatest perfection as regards strength and durability, or, at least,
they are only equaled by the timber of the same species extended on the line of these
ridges beyond this district in both directions. This is a matter of great importance in ship
and boat building, and in the manufacture of railroad cars and of agricultural implements,
all of which industries are here prominent. In portions of New York and Pennsylvania
there are still large forests of excellent timber almost untouched by the axe ; but as a whole
the woodlands and forests are rapidly diminishing, both in area and in aggregate value, and
there is as yet no corresponding compensation. Probably the price of timber must advance
considerably before adequate means will be taken to produce a future supply by growth.
How much this may be aided by wise legislation is still a problem.
The southeastern region, extending from Virginia to Florida, is the richest in species,
is of peculiar interest to the botanist, and of first-class importance in commerce. (W e can
not say that any one wooded region is more important than others, inasmuch as wood is a
prime necessity in any civilized community.) This region, originally entirely wooded, has
upwards of 130 species of trees (a much larger number, indeed, if we include the larger
shrubs and the tropical species of extreme southern Florida), seventy-five of which attain
a height of fifty or more feet, and perhaps a dozen species attain a height of 100 feet. A
belt of pine timber extends nearly the whole length of this district, of varying width,
occupying a part of the region between the mountains and the sea. This is the great
source of hard pine timber (known in commerce as hard pine, yellow pine, heavy pine,
pitch pine, southern pine, and Georgia pine). State statistics show that the annual export
from Georgia alone now amounts from 200 to 300 millions of feet per annum. The trade is
yearly growing, and the adjacent States are contributing largely to the supply. But this
is not the only commercial lumber of this district. The live oak of Florida has a reputa
tion throughout the world as ship timber. The hard woods of the mountain ridges have
been less utilized than the growth of the regions already spoken o f ; but this is not owing
to any inferiority of the wood itself. It is believed that the white oak attains its greatest
development of strength in certain parts of Virginia and West Virginia, hardly equaling
in size, however, its greatest development in the States immediately north. While pine is
abundant along the belt mentioned and is at present of greater commercial importance; the
broad-leaved species are the most abundant element in the forests. Here we find the mag
nolias and many flowering trees and shrubs in their greatest development and beauty.
The area of woodlands as a whole has not probably much diminished of late years; but
the trees suitable for hewing and sawing are decreasing under the heavy drafts made by
commerce. In very many cases the land is -despoiled of only its best timber-trees; the
others are left so that it is yet a “ woodland,” and in due time a new crop of timber will
result The data for the preparation of the map of this region are more imperfect than for
either of the regions before enumerated.
The northwestern region extends from Ohio to Iowa and Minnesota inclusive.
In its original state, it had every variety of forest feature represented, from the heavy
forests of broad-leaved species of the Ohio bottoms, and the dense conifene forests
of Michigan through every gradation of lighter forests, “ openings” and “ belts” along
the streams, to the grassy prairie and the treeless plains which everywhere terminate this
district on the. west It is represented by about 105 to 110 species, about 68 or
70 of which may reach a height of 50 feet In southern Ohio and Indiana, the
forests are of broad-leaved species ; oaks and various hard woods grow to magnificent size
and of good texture, while black walnut, basswood, white wood (or tulip tree) attain here
their greatest development The pine region may be said to begin in northwestern Ohio
and extend across Michigan and Wisconsin to northern Minnesota. The northern parts of
the three States last-mentioned now furnish a larger quantity of sawed lumber than any
other part of the country. The census of 1870 gave the total production of sawed lumber
in the United States as i2 f millions M. feet and of this Michigan furnished over 2\ millions
and Wisconsin over one million, the two States producing upwards of one-fourth of the
whole yield of the country. The Chicago Lumberman’s Exchange gives as the receipts of
“ lumber” at that city over a million M. feet for each of the three years since that census
This is sawed lumber, exclusive of laths, shingles, and all forms of hewed timber. A
prominent journal devoted to the lumber trade gives the production of logs for a single
river during the last winter (1873-4) as 433 million feet and deplores the dull trade as
shown by such a short crop. To illustrate the capacity for sawing lumber, it may be stated
that a single mill in Michigan, recently (on June 3d, 1874), as a test of capacity, sawed
179,718 feet of lumber in three working hours, the actual running time being two hours
and forty minutes. (This is given on the authority of a local journal.) Many mills boast
a capacity of 50,000 to 150,000 feet per day. But these examples of production tell a
story of destruction also ; and great as is the supply of pine in this region, it is so rapidly
diminishing under the demands of the growing cities of the west, that serious apprehensions
are awakened of a scarcity within a comparatively few years.
The data for northeastern Minnesota are very meagre, and that portion of the map
has been prepared according to such scanty information as could be collected. For
southern Minnesota I am indebted to the State surveyor-general for a detailed map of the
areas of woodland and prairie.
Between the pine forests and the treeless plains, the prevailing trees are of broad
leaved species, sometimes forming forests of considerable density and size. Sometimes
the limits of prairie and woodlands are well-defined; at others there is a regular gradation
through “ glades” and “ openings” from the actual forest to the prairie. It must be remem
bered that the uncolored portions of the map are by no means always treeless. A region
with less than forty acres woodland per square mile, if sparsely settled, may have sufficient
timber and wood for the ordinary wants of such a population. Again, there are other
regions without actual trees but with low shrubs sufficient for fuel and many other uses.
The prairies of this region are the typical prairies of the country. Respecting their origin
and the conditions which have rendered them treeless, there have been many theories,
which it is not necessary here to discuss. Periods of excessive drouth, fires, the physical
texture of the soil, are the leading theories, some advocating one, and some another.
Where the prairies are uncultivated, or have at most but a sparse population, the patches of
wood (where they occur) are doubtless diminishing in number and area through man’s
agency. Where, however, a prairie region is largely occupied by settlers and a considerable
part is under cultivation, the amount of wood is doubtless rapidly increasing. This is
brought about in part by checking the fires which would otherwise kill the trees while
young, in part by fostering in various ways any spontaneous growth of wood that may
occur, and in part by actual planting. In some places the aspect of the country has been
entirely changed in this character by the settlement of the country; and in the more fertila
regions, there seems no good reason why a future supply of wood and timber may not be
produced on lands originally treeless, whenever the price is sufficiently enhanced to make a
successful growth profitable.
The southwestern region extends from Kentucky and Missouri to Alabama and the
western edge of the timber in Texas. Originally the eastern and southeastern portions
were heavily wooded ; prairies, however, occurring far eastward in the district, increasing in
number and area westward, until the dry and treeless plains are reached which skirt the
whole western border. It has about 112 to 118 species, 60 to 65 of which attain a height
of 50 feet. The belt of pine of the southeastern States extends into this region near the
Gulf in Alabama, thence running west and leaving the coast, extending into Indian Terri
tory and Texas. This belt is not continuous, however, west of Mobile bay, and there are
other detached areas of considerable extent with valuable “ pine lands.” In this district
are swamps having an immense growth of cypress. Although so much of Coniferce may
be found, broad-leaved species constitute by far the most abundant element of the forests
embracing both hard and soft woods, and some species, which are shrubs or small trees
elsewhere, attain in this district large dimensions. Sassafras, which is but an insignificant
tree in New England, in Missouri becomes a tree sometimes three or more feet in diameter,
equaling camphor-wood for the manufacture of chests for household use. Black walnut
also is abundant in places and grows to a great size, and various species of timber trees are
abundant over large parts of this district This region has not furnished so much wood or
timber to commerce as either of the districts before considered. This is not due to any
deficiency in quantity or quality of its woods, but entirely to other causes. In this district
as in the northwestern, the woods diminish westward, and finally fade out in the “ oak
openings” and “ cross-timbers” of Texas and the fringes of wood that follow the streams far
beyond the other trees into the plains west
Over most of this district, particularly the better wooded portions, the area of wood
lands is not seriously diminishing, but, as elsewhere, in places most available for commerce
the better timber trees are disappearing. In the western borders, where the supply is at
best sparse, it grows yearly less by the destruction or use of the scanty supply, and no
efforts are made to replace it
THE W OODLANDS AN D TH E
FOREST SYSTEM S OF T H E
West of the districts described, the treeless belt already spoken of, separates entirely
the wooded portions of the two sides of the continent, a belt extending from Mexico to
the Arctic Ocean. It is fully 350 miles wide in its narrowest part, between Lat. 36° and
370 widening to our northern boundary where it is 800 miles wide, or wider if we include
,
a few outlying patches of timber on some of the northern ridges and mountains. Different
parts of this belt, “ The Plains ” in common language, vary greatly in their aspect.
Sometimes they are absolutely treeless as far as the vision extends; in others, a fringe
of timber from a few rods to several miles wide skirts the streams, while the spaces
between are treeless; and again in others, particularly northward, some of the intervening
hills are dotted with scattered cedars, usually shrubby and crabbed, but in places attaining
che size and dignity of trees. The Black Hills have heavy forests of pine and spruce, and
appear like a forest-island 300 miles long rising out of this sea of plain, far from the forests
of either side. A few other similar, though smaller, detached forests occur in this treeless
waste. The causes which have left this great area so bare are without doubt mostly cli
matic. Although in places the character of the soil is unfavorable, the great cause is
doubtless the scanty or capricious rainfall of the region. What can be done towards
clothing this with trees by artificial means, is an entirely unsolved problem.
The Rocky Mountain region lies near the chain so called and north of Lat. 36°.
From the Columbia River northward to Alaska, forests clothe the whole mountain belt,
except where too high, or on limited parks and prairies. On our northern boundary, the
treeless plains suddenly cease at the eastern base of the chain (about Lon. 113040' W.),
and heavy forests are almost continuous thence westward to the Pacific. South of the
Columbia River (about Lat. 38’ N.) the forests of this chain are everywhere separated from
those near the Pacific by dry and treeless plains and valleys of greater or less width. The
forests of the northern part of the chain are continuous from Alaska southward to about
Lat. 42040' N., where a nearly treeless belt about a hundred miles wide cuts entirely
through them from the bare plains east to the more barren basin in the interior.
South of this belt, forests begin again and extend southward from southern Wyoming across
Colorado and into northern New Mexico, more than 400 miles, with a width of 200 to
250 miles. This forest is of varying degrees of density and interspersed in it are many
treeless, or nearly treeless valleys called Parks. This forest is surrounded on every side
by treeless areas, the limits usually sharply defined except along the southern and south
western edge, where they shade off more gradually in density. The northwestern part of
this forest is continuous with the forests of the north slope of the Uintahs, and these again
with the forests of the Wasatch of Utah. Southwesterly in New Mexico and Arizona,
are detached forests of similar character, clothing in each case mountain chains. These
forests are everywhere of Coniferce. The whole tree-vegetation consists of twenty-eight or
thirty species, about one-third of which are broad-leaved kinds and two-thirds conifers, the
latter constituting the forests. O f the former, box-elder (.Negundo aceroidcs) occurs most
abundantly along the eastern base of the mountains; two kinds of cottonwood, along the
streams and mostly out on the plains or in the parks; alders along the streams but higher
in the mountains; the aspen as a small tree (locally known as A sp), in the mountains and
on the margins of the parks. N o oaks occur as trees, but a scrubby form ( Qucrcus alba,
var. Gunnisonii), rarely more than ten to twenty feet high, sometimes occurs on the foot
hills in the south. These and a few other species known to the botanist but not abundant
as wood, and usually here as stragglers from some other region, make up the ten or eleven
broad-leaved species. The great Colorado forest spoken of consists essentially of five
species of Conifers, viz., Pinus pondcrosa (called here yellow pine), P. contorta (called
tamarac, and red pine), Abies Engclm anni (really a spruce, but called “ white pine,” as
it has a soft, white wood), A . M enziesii (called here balsam), and A . D ouglasii (called
by a variety of names). These five species are by far the most abundant, large areas often
being covered almost exclusively by but one or two of them. Other species not here
named, are frequently met with, “ not rare,” as the botanist would say, but of vastly less
economic interest than the species enumerated. On the outlying spurs and ridges which
extend into the woodless region on every side, scrubby cedars are found, and in the drier
valleys the nut pine or pinon (P. cdulis) is abundant, particularly southward,— a low,
scrubby tree usually less than twenty and rarely more than thirty-five feet high. These,
with a few others, make up the eighteen or twenty species of Coniferee. The data for this
part of the map are quite full and believed to be reasonably accurate. The timber of this
region is diminishing vastly faster than a legitimate use demands. Where one tree is cut
for use, ten perhaps are killed by fires which destroy great forests nearly every year,
kindled by the carelessness of the whites, or perhaps as often by the Indians, who sometimes
fire the forests to drive out game, sometimes to annoy an enemy, and sometimes, no one
knows why. Whatever may be the cause, blackened trunks disfigure many hundreds of
square miles.
For that portion of the Rocky Mountain region lying between the 43d and 49th par
allels, the data for the maps are, as a whole, rather meagre. For Idaho and the Yellowstone
region, they are more complete and reliable, but for the region north and east of the Wind
River Mountains, they are scant and unsatisfactory. The map is colored according to the
best information available I have reason to suspect that the average of timber indicated is
too high. The species of the northern Rocky Mountain region are perhaps the same as
those south, but varying in relative abundance. The two magnificent firs, Abies grandis
(called “ white spruce,” but in Oregon “ yellow fir”) and A . amabalis, become more
abundant In the northern part, particularly in the Kooskooskie region, heavy “ pine
forests ” are reported.
U N IT E D STATES.
3
West of the Rocky Mountains is another treeless or sparsely wooded region which
extends from the Columbia River to Mexico. Its northern portion narrows northward,
but forms an important part of the valley of the Columbia and its tributaries; it embraces
the whole of the great basin except insignificant edges of the rim ; it throws out an eastern
branch entirely through the Rocky Mountains, and southward it is continuous with the
treeless or sparsely wooded region which extends across the continent along our southern
frontier. In this area occur the driest and the most inhospitable deserts of our country".
It is of too varied character to admit here of details. Some portions are grassy prairies,
some are plains of lava, others are deserts of drifting sand, others are half-naked rock cut
by canons, others are “ alkali plains ” and “ salt valley's,” others are great areas covered with
“ sage brush ” and “ grease wood,” others pass into chapparal— in fact, there is every- gradation
from naked barrenness to great forests. Some of the mountain chains found in this
area are as bare of trees as are the valleys themselves, others have large shrubs of scrubby
pines or cedars, while others are clothed with forests. The extreme northern part consists
largely of lava-plains. South of this, the Blue Mountains of eastern Oregon have heavy
forests of pine, fir and spruce of the same species found in the northern Rocky Mountains.
Still south of this are the “ sage plains” and “ deserts.” In Nevada the valleys are treeless
(with very rare exceptions); the ridges sometimes bare, sometimes dotted with shrubs
and scrubby pines, the actual amount of wood being small, yet of inestimable value to a
country so rich in minerals, and so poor in wood. Over parts, there is crabbed, shrubby
growth, becoming in places chapparal, but oftener of scattered shrubs attaining in favorable
places the size of small trees. One of these, called “ mountain mahogany” (Cercocarpus
ledifolius), is often over thirty feet high with a base two feet in diameter, the wood very
hard, close-grained, dark-colored, and taking a beautiful finish when wrought. The shrubby
vegetation of the region, including as it does the “ sage ” bushes, “ grease woods,” “ creasote
bush,” etc., is of great interest to the botanist, but can hardly claim further notice
here.
South of Latitude 350 are a few species of small trees of much greater value. O f
these, first in importance is the mesquit (Prosopis glandulosis), which thrives in hot dry
places in the valleys and on the mesas, but is rare on the steeper slopes. The tree has a
spreading habit, rarely more than thirty feet high and twelve inches in diameter. The
very hard and durable wood is used for a great variety of purposes. Posts in use for
fifty years are still sound, and its value for railroad ties must ultimately be great. The
fruit, consisting of eight to twelve “ beans” in a long, sweet, pulpy pod, like that of the
Carol) (or St. John’s Bread) of the Old World, is a valuable food for animals and even for
man; while in western Texas a considerable trade has sprung up in Mesquit Gum, which
is similar to Gum Arabic. This species extends from California to Texas, and in the future
will doubtless be extensively planted and cultivated. The tornillo or screw-pod mesquit
(Prosopis pubcsccns) is smaller and of more restricted range, but of similar use. Another
small tree, called arbol de hierro or iron-wood ( Olneya tesota), is of much local value and
may become a commercial wood. Other broad-leaved trees occur, cottonwoods and syca
mores are common along the streams. In parts of this region are several Cacti and one
Yucca attaining a tree size, more picturesque in the landscape than useful to man.
The higher mountains of Arizona are well timbered with Conifers. The prevailing
species are red spruce (Abies Douglasii) and yellow pine (P. brachyptcra) The most
notable of these forests (the limits of which have lately been demonstrated by the explora
tions of Lieut. Wheeler), extends nearly 400 miles. Other isolated forests, occupying
mountains, are indicated on the map. On many of the lower ridges, the pinon (Pinus
cdulis) abounds, furnishing food to the Indians and fuel to the whites. It is a crabbed
shrub rather than a tree, usually less than twenty or twenty-five feet high. Other trees
occur of more limited range or abundance, the actual number known to botanists in the
whole of this vast region amounting to about thirty-five species.
The Sierra Nevada and Cascade Mountains lie nearly parallel with the coast of the Pacific,
with their eastern base 100 to 200 miles distant from it. This chain is nearly continuous
from the northern frontier southward to Lat. 350 a distance of about 1000 miles, everywhere
,
a broad and high chain, its summits far above the line of tree-vegetation, often in the per
petual snow, culminating in the loftiest peaks in the United States. Its broad western
slope is everywhere heavily timbered. Along the coast for the same distance are the
“ Coast Ranges,” a system of mountain chains, more or less connnected together but broken
by gaps and separated by valleys and usually rather steep on the ocean side. They form a
belt twenty-five to fifty miles wide and are mostly between 2000 and 4000 feet high, but
with numerous points rising to twice that height. The Coast Ranges are generally wooded.
Between these two mountain systems a series of valleys extend their whole length from
Puget Sound to southern California, cut across by a few ridges, so that it is not a single
continuous depression, but rather a row of valleys.
North of the Columbia, this valley is heavily wooded; the forests are open, but the
trees are large, and little prairies are interspersed. Passing southward, the valley of the
Willamette is largely prairie, but there is an abundance of wood for all uses. Between the
upper Willamette and the upper Sacramento, several ridges cross from the Coast Ranges to
the Cascades, and forests and prairies alternate. The former are heavily timbered. The
great central valley of California is by far the largest of this series and is treeless, or but
sparsely wooded, for an area 420 miles long by thirty to sixty miles wide. The northern
half of this has more wood than the southern, where large areas are absolutely treeless,
except a very narrow fringe along the few streams.
This region of mountain and valley, as a whole and in all its relations, economic, scenic.
4
T H E W O O D L A N D S A N D T H E FOREST SYSTEM S OF T H E U N IT E D STATES.
and botanic, has perhaps the most interesting tree-vegetation known. The whole number
of species known to botanists amounts to eighty-eight or ninety, but a vastly smaller number
are found in any one botanical or commercial district. Many of the more noted species
are very restricted in their range, and not more than three or four important timber trees
extend the whole length of the region. It is therefore necessary to treat its parts more in
detail than in the case of the other districts. In this district are perhaps the grandest
forests on the globe. In Washington Territory they are made up of but few species, of
which Abies D ouglasii (called here Red Fir) is the most important Commonly 150 or
more feet high and four or more feet in diameter, but sometimes fifteen feet (in extreme
cases even over twenty feet) in diameter and over 300 feet high, straight growth, the wood
firm, elastic, holding spikes with great tenacity, it produces the most noted timber of the
territorv. Oregon cedar ( Thuja gigantea), yellow or “ Punkin” pine (P. ponderosa),
Yellow Fir (Abies grandis), Black Spruce (A . M enziesii), are the next most abundant
species, all attaining a great size. The popular names are much confused, the generic
terms of cedar, pine, spruce and fir are all very loosely and capriciously applied. The
finest of the forests are about Puget Sound and on the western flanks of the Cascades.
On the Coast Ranges the forests are denser and with tangled undergrowth ; but the trees
not of such large average size. Regarding the wonderful quantity of wood produced, one
authority (for many years surveyor-general of the territory) states that the whole region
west of the summit of the Cascades to the Pacific and north of the Columbia, will yield “ an
average of 32,000 feet per acre of merchantable lumber.” He states that about one thirtysecond part of this area is prairie. The following extracts from the Annual Reports of the
Commissioner of the General Land Office of the United States relate to this territory,—
“ the land will produce from 25,000 to 300,000 feet per acre,” and “ there are vast tracts that
would cover the entire surface with cord-wood ten feet in height; there are localities that
would afford double that quantity.” Again the reports speak of the forests of pine, fir and
cedar “ which grows thickly,” “ from one to fifteen feet in diameter and 200 to 300 feet
high,” and again of the forests of “ red and yellow pine of gigantic growth, often attaining a
height of 300 feet and from nine to twelve feet in diameter.” Similar testimony could be
greatly extended. In the extreme northeastern part and east of the Cascades, are forests of
pine; these forests are in character more like those of the Rocky Mountains with which
they are continuous.
Passing south of the Columbia River the same species occur; but the forests are not so
heavy, although individual trees may be as large. Prairies become more numerous and
larger, and oaks and other broad-leaved trees become more common in the valleys. In
places, Larch (.L arix occidentalism is abundant, and the Yew ( Taxus brevi/olia) attains in
Oregon and northern California a height of fifty or seventy-five feet, a greater size than is
attained by any Yew elsewhere in America. As a whole, Oregon is very heavily timbered.
Passing southward to California the tree-vegetation changes still more, and becomes the
richest in species of any region west of the great plains, embracing a total of over eighty
species. Some fifty species of Coniferae have been enumerated by botanists, embracing
several species and even genera not found elsewhere. A ll the Conifers of Washington and
Oregon are found here, but not in the same relative abundance or size. The yellow pine
(P. ponderosa) attains its greatest development and is often over 200 or 250 feet in height
and four to eight (sometimes twelve) feet in diameter. The Sugar Pine ( P Lambcrtiand)
is perhaps the most valuable pine of the State; is abundant, of excellent quality and greatsize. There are four firs (Abies of the section Picca), three large spruces; and about
twelve species of pine are more or less abundant (more than twice that number of sup
posed species have been described by botanists). The “ Big-Trees ” (Sequoia gigantea) occur
on the western slope of the Sierra Nevada, and are too well known to need notice here beyond
the remark that the ease with which they are propagated and their valuable timber and
rapid growth will doubtless give them great value for cultivation in the future. O f more
present value is the Redwood (Sequoia sempervirens), which only grows very near the sea
between Lat. 36 and 43 degrees, and on portions of this coast forms forests rivalling, if
indeed not exceeding, any found elsewhere on the earth. The trees are often ten and
sometimes more than twenty feet in diameter, very straight, 200 to 300 feet high, and the
wood, which is light, is straight-grained, very durable, and adapted to many uses. It is
extensively cut and the lumber shipped to South America, the Pacific Islands, China, and
even to New Zealand. It is rapidly diminishing in quantity, and the only slight compensa
tion is that when cut a new growth sprouts from the stump, which is not true of any other
timber-tree belonging to the Conifcrce. California Cedar (Libroccdrus dccurrens) occurs
in the mountains of large size. Several species of Cypress ( Cuprcssus), the California
Nutmeg (Torrcya), and cedars of smaller size abound. Among the broad-leaved trees
there are many of great beauty, but there is a great lack of hard woods. The Laurel
( Tctranthcra c a lif or nica) has been sparingly used in ship-building; an ash, one maple
(neither abundant), and some of the oaks do sendee where smaller hard woods are needed,
but the supply is deficient. But among these trees are some of marvellous beauty, particu
larly among the oaks. Two cottonwoods, two sycamores, the Madrona {Arbutus Afea
siest i}, and other trees are not rare.
The data for Alaska are insufficient to construct a map of distribution and density
of timber with reasonable accuracy; so the attempt is not made. Some portions of that
extensive territory are heavily wooded, other portions are treeless and there is every
gradation, but the relative areas of each, and their boundaries are unknown. Official reports
speak of the forests as “ being really magnificent, covering the lower hills and uplands
with dense masses of pine, spruce, fir, hemlock, cedar and other valuable timber, principally
evergreens.” Again : that “ the forests extend almost to the water’s edge along the southern
shores, but north and east of the Alaskan Peninsula they exist only in the interior except at
the heads of bays and sounds,” while “ the inland forests are abundant, extending to within
a short distance of the Arctic Ocean.” In establishing the United States military post of
Fort Tongas, “ in clearing the timber for this post a magnificent growth of yellow cedar
trees, eight feet in diameter and 150 feet in height” was found. “ Nearly the whole of the
Yukon district is well supplied with tim b e r a n d much more appears to the same effect
O f the species on the Yukon Mr. Dali states that the white spruce (Abies alba} is the
“ largest and most valuable tree ” found in the Yukon district The next in importance is
the Birch (Belula glandulosa). Various other species are mentioned.
Many questions suggest themselves in connection with the matters already discussed.
That the original distribution of wood in the country was mostly determined by climate,
there is no question. In all that part East, which was originally forest-clad, there is an
abundant rainfall, and the rains (or snows) are so distributed throughout the year that rarely a
month passes without any. Again, in all that treeless region west of the 97th meridian,
the rainfall is much less, and long drouths prevail. While a certain amount of annual rain
is a necessity, a glance at the rain chart will show that the density of the forests do not
depend upon the amount of rain. It appears, however, that the treeless regions, even to
the fertile prairies, are usually in regions more subject to drouths than the Atlantic slope.
But the limited parks enclosed in forests in the Rocky Mountains, the abrupt line of
division between the timber and the plain region at or near the base of many mountain
chains, the isolated patches of timber in the western prairies, or isolated prairies within the
woods, all show that other conditions conspire to produce the result seen. The character
of the winds, the variations and range of temperature and moisture of the air, the physical
texture of the soil, its chemical composition, the geological character of the rocks beneath,
may each be demonstrated to influence or even control the distribution of the tree-vegeta
tion in some particular place. Doubtless other and less obvious causes conspire to pro
duce the varied results seen. O f late much has been said and written about the influence
of woodlands or‘ rainfall and climate. Within our country accurate observations and data
arc too meagre for any conclusions of value. It has not yet been demonstrated that the
destruction of woodlands in the East, or the planting of trees on the prairies of the West
have materially changed the rainfall. Limited observations in the eastern States seem to
indicate that of two places near each other, the one well wooded and the other not, that
which has the most trees will receive a little more rain, the excess being entirely made up
in the light showers of the summer.
Regarding the economic value of our wood interests in the industries and productions
of the country, no estimate of values can be made which truly covers the case. The census
of 1870 gave to lumber the second place in our manufacturing industries, iron manufacture
standing the first. The statistics of “ sawed lumber” were 1,295 millions laths, 3,265 mil
lions shingles, 12,756 millions feet of lumber, $143^ millions of capital was invested, 150,000
persons employed, and the lumber produced was valued at $210 millions. Then of the
secondary manufactures, in which lumber is the raw material, we have 22,000 persons
employed as cabinet-makers, whose products are valued at S17J millions, 15,000 carpenters
and builders producing Styf millions, sawing and planing establishments employing over
52,000 persons, and producing $58^ millions, and so on through coopers, tanners, carriagemakers, ship-builders, &c., &c., all using products of the forests as their raw material. Yet
all this gives but an imperfect idea of the part that wood and timber plays in the wants
and industries of a people. The great majority of all the buildings of the country are made
of it, and it is an essential ingredient of nearly all those which are nominally of brick or
stone. It, too, is the principal ingredient in the vast majority of ships, boats, cars, carriages,
etc., for transportation, so too of our furniture, and of most of the tools and implements in
use. It is the sole household fuel of at least two-thirds the inhabitants of the country, and
the partial fuel of perhaps nine-tenths of the remaining third. For making steam, reducing
metals and the various processes in the arts, it is used in immense quantities. Entering
as it thus does into the multiform uses of civilization, and every period of life from the
cradle to the coffin a constituent of so many of our manufactures and nearly all our
structures, from a match or tooth-pick to the railroad and steamship, it forms an element in
our needs and our industries which cannot be reached by statistics nor expressed by
figures.
In our exports, it is an important feature. “ Furs, sassafras, and cedar” we are told,
formed the cargoes of ships from our coast even before the first settlement at Jamestown,
Manhattan or Plymouth; and a continuous stream of lumber from our shores still pours
across the Atlantic on one side and the Pacific on the other.
That our larger timber, suitable for sawing, is diminishing, there is no question, nor is
there any question that this will go on until the price so much rises that new timber will
be planted as the old is cut. That a part of this diminution is due to prodigal use and
needless waste there is also no question. Legal efforts have been put forth to prevent this
waste (with varying success) from time to time since early colonial days. W e find, for
instance, that “ A tt a meeting held this 29th day off Aprill 1699, in Breucklvn (Brooklyn)
Benjamin Vande Water, Joris Haussen, Jan Gerritse Dorlant were chosen officers to
consider the “ greate inconvenience and lose ” that the inhabitants of the town suffered
because that unauthorized tradesmen “ doe flail and cutt the best trees and sully the best
woods,” &c. Steps were then taken to stop the needless waste, and penalties affixed for
illegally cutting or wasting the timber on the public lands. And similar laws have been
enacted from time to time ever since, by local governments first, and the General Govern-
TH E W OODLANDS AN D
THE
FOREST SYSTEM S OF T H E
ment later; but the waste has not ceased, nor have any adequate means been devised to
stop it A t present, the most serious waste is caused by forest fires.
The question of future supply suggests itself in any discussion of our woodlands and
forests. Intimately bearing on this, is the experience of other countries, now civilized, once
forest clad, and the relations of our tree flora with theirs. W e have already stated that our
flora was rich in native species of trees. How much richer than central and western
Europe a few figures will show. W e have already roughly stated the number of our native
trees as above 300 species. Gray’s “ Manual of the Botany of the Northern United
States” (east of the Mississippi and north of the Carolinas) enumerates 132 indigenous
trees. Torrey’s “ Flora of the State of New Y o rk ” gives 80 species of trees for that
State alone. Cooper in his “ Catalogue of the Native Trees of the United States gives for
the eastern forest regions (of North America north of Mexico) 234 species; for the western,
including the Mexican boundary, 138 species. In this discussion we have considered only the
more abundant kinds, and the three authorities are merely cited to illustrate by their figures
this single point, the wealth of our flora in tree species. In comparison with this, Germany,
embracing the whole of central Europe from the frontiers of France to those of Russia and
from the Adriatic to the Baltic sea, has but about sixty native species. In France the
number is given by some authors as thirty, by others as thirty-four species. In Great
Britain, there are twenty-nine species above thirty feet high, and the local botanists describe
but fifteen of these as “ large ” or “ moderately large ” trees. But in all of these countries,
tree culture began early, and the resources in wood and timber have been enormously
increased by the introduction of foreign species, sometimes by private enterprise, some
times with government aid. Lindley gives in detail the history of the introduction of
foreign trees and shrubs into Great Britain. He states that in the 16th century 89
new species were brought in, in the 17th 131 species, in the 18th 445, in the 19th,
up to 1830, 699 species; “ the total number of foreign trees and shrubs introduced up to
the year 1830 appears to be about 1,300,” but “ among them are not more than 300 trees
U N IT E D
STATES.
5
which attain a timber-like size.” The most valuable one of tnese he considers the Larch,
but many other valuable timber trees have been planted; and he adds “ our principal fruit trees
are from Asia, but by far the finest ornamental trees and shrubs are from N orth America”
In France a similar process has been going on. Professor Thouin stated in the Memoires
d’Agriculture for 1786 that “ France then possessed about eighty-four different species of
trees, of which twenty-four were of first rank in point of size or exceeding 100 feet” And
the work has gone on since. A similar process has been going on in most countries of
Europe, and the production of wood and timber has thus been increased. If these countries,
having naturally a tree flora so much poorer than ours, have been so successful in the cul
tivation of woods and forests, may we not infer that we may be equally or more so, in a
country where the natural conditions seem more favorable, as indicated by the number of
our species and the luxuriance of the native growth ?
But what species are to be most advantageously used for cultivation here cannot be pre
dicted by any scientific observations yet made. Prolonged and extensive experiment only
can tell which will be the most successful kinds. The success attending the introduction of
foreign fruit trees is significant; so also that of a few forest trees introduced for ornament—
some in the eastern States being already over a century old. The luxuriance of the
European Elm, the Lombardy Poplar, various willows, the Ailanthus and other species
in limited cultivation in the older States, and of the Eucalyptus west, indicates that ulti
mate success is certain. The last-mentioned tree has perhaps been the most extensively
planted of late of any one foreign species, one or two millions having been planted within
the last ten years. One tree recently cut (1874) in Sonoma, Cal., of nine years growth, we
are told by a local authority had attained a height of ninety-six feet, and a diameter of
eighteen inches at four feet from the ground. The fact that so many ornamental species
flourish in cultivation,also points to ultimate success in the cultivation of the useful ones;
yet, our hopes of future supply must be mainly from native kinds, either the spontaneous
growth of nature or as a product of cultivation.
GEOLOGICAL MAP OF THE UNITED STA TES AND TERRITORIES.
B Y C H A S . H. H IT C H C O C K A N D W M . P. B L A K E .
G E O L O G I C A L Map giving a broad general view of the extent of the various
geological formations of the country has long been an acknowledged desidera
tum. The materials have been accumulating from year to year, one government
expedition after another has returned bringing new facts, and State after State has
instituted geological surveys. But all these results have been published independently,
and at different times, without concert or system. The attempts to combine and generalize
these disconnected data have been few, and, in general, unsatisfactory, though, no doubt,
each effort has been of great service to the science, and economically.
The preparation of such a map is one of the most difficult and thankless labors a
geologist can undertake. It is not a work of mere compilation. To a general knowledge
of the whole region must be added critical skill and discrimination, for the data are so
disconnected, diverse, and often conflicting that they must be compared, harmonized,
and resolved into a common expression. There are also blanks, for which the facts are
scanty or wanting, and these must be filled in order to complete the general picture.
Under such adverse conditions, with diverse, and in some regions, only partial mate
rials, notably in the great and but partly explored areas of the West, the result must
necessarily be imperfect. It will fail to satisfy many who have made special studies of
limited areas in detail, and will afford an inviting field for critics.
Y et such maps, confessedly imperfect, serve a most excellent purpose— they give
broader and more comprehensive views of the geological structure of the country, of the
relative position and extent of the mineral and agricultural regions and of the bases of
indigenous industries. They are important in all discussions of the distribution of plants
and animals and even of population. Further, as regards the progress of geology, they
stimulate investigation and publication, they provoke criticism and corrections and thus
advance knowledge.
It is hardly necessary, however, to explain the reasons for the publication of a general
geological map. Such a map has long been an acknowledged need. A t the meeting of
the American Association for the Advancement of Science, in 1872,8 Committee was
appointed to memorialize Congress upon the preparation and publication of a geological
map of the United States, and it is hoped that suitable provision will ere long be made
for one on a scale commensurate with the importance of the subject to the country.
O f the map now presented two editions have already been issued, one for the volume
on “ Industry and W ealth” at the Ninth Census, the other for the Report of the U. S.
Commissioner of Mining Statistics. The third edition now presented contains many
additions and corrections, but it is still claimed to be only approximately correct and to a
great extent hypothetical, particularly west of the Mississippi River, as all maps of the
kind must necessarily be, until accurate measured surveys of the surface and of the out
crops of the formations have been made.
The topographical or geographical basis of the map is the well-known Engineer’s
map, which has been carefully prepared in the office of the Chief of Engineers at Wash
ington from the results of official explorations, having been added to from time to time, as
the accumulation of data justified it. The scale of the map is about one hundred miles to
the inch. Upon the parallel of 370 an inch extends over two degrees of longitude. An
area of 25 square miles may be covered by the head of a pin. On such a scale detail must,
of course, be sacrificed, and give place to general representation. The same is true of the
topography. And the topographical features, essential guides in plotting the geology, are,
over a great part of the country, and particularly on the western half of the map, very
defective, and in some extended districts are entirely wanting. Y et for many of these
districts a general knowledge of the geology permits them to be colored with tolerable
accuracy. But the difficulty of successfully representing the geology in the absence of the
usual topographical guides will be readily appreciated. It may be stated, as a general rule,
that in regions where the topography is not known, the representation of the geology is
to be considered as typical, or hypothetical and suggestive, rather than accurate.
For convenience of representation and of printing in colors, the formations are de
lineated in nine groups. The arrangement is not in every respect the most natural, but
it best accords with the materials in existence, It is as follows:
\
EOZOIC.
-j Eozoic and M etam o rph ic .
i C am brian and S il u r ia n .
PALEOZOIC... - D evo n ian .
f C arbo n ifero u s .
MESOZOIC.. . .
CENOZOIC.. . .
\ T riassic and J urassic .
(C
retaceous .
I T e r t ia r y .
A llu v iu m .
I V olcanic .
W e have traced out and separately indicated each of these divisions as far as possible
in the existing state of our knowledge, but no attempt has been made to trace the dividing
lines of the Paleozoic over the western area, as will be presently explained.
The first group, the Eozoic and Metamorphic, includes the Laurentian, Atlantic,
Labradorian, and Huronian, together with the granites and metamorphic rocks. The few
metamorphic rocks of later age, whether Paleozoic or Mesozoic, in the Appalachian and
Rocky Mountain regions, have been separated from the Eozoic as far as possible.
G E N E R A L O B S E R V A T IO N S
TH E GEO LOG Y OF TH E
STATES.
UPON T H E
R E P R E S E N T A T IO N
OF
E A S T E R N P O R T IO N O F T H E U N IT E D
B y C. H. H itchcock .
T he rocks of the first group form a continuous belt from the northeastern boundary
southwesterly to Alabama. From their broadest expansion at the north, they gradually
narrow southward through New England to New York and then expand southward
through the Southern States. They form the mountain region of the Eastern States, and,
together with the broad development of the same formations in Canada, skirting the Great
Lake region and considerable areas about Lake Superior, form the margin or rim of the
great interior region of comparatively horizontal Paleozoic formations, holding the vast
coal areas of the continent. The natural geological and geographical outlets of this
interior basin, with its stores of wealth in coal, iron, and fertile lands, are on the southwest,
through the open valley of the Mississippi to the Gulf, and on the east, across the nar
rowest portion of the Eozoic at New York.
These Eozoic and Metamorphic rocks constitute what is generally known as the
granitic region. It is the nucleus of the later rocks, of the Paleozoic on the west, and
the Mesozoic and Cenozoic on the east O f the principal divisions, the Laurentian is
developed along the valley of the St. Lawrence, the Huronian in the west, and the Atlantic
in the White Mountains of New Hampshire.
The Atlantic system is first carefully distinguished from the others in the first volume
of the geological report of New Hampshire (1874). It is the same as the so-called White
Mountain series, and has a large development along the Atlantic border. A considerable
portion of the New England metamorphic rocks, particularly in Maine, is now referred
to the Huronian system.
The Silurian and Cambrian systems are made to extend from the Paradoxides beds to
the Lower Helderberg inclusive; in accordance with the general usage of American geol
ogists. The Calciferous mica schists of Vermont, the Coos group and certain mica schists
of New Hampshire, are provisionally included in this division. Certain schists in North
and South Carolina, largely those called Taconic by Professor Emmons, are excluded, and
referred to the Huronian upon the authority of Professor Kerr. A large area of quartzites
in Minnesota and Dakota, consisting chiefly of the Plateau du Coteau dcs Prairies, are
now for the first time ranked with this division. Heretofore opinion has been divided in
respect to them, whether they should be called Huronian or Cretaceous.
The Devonian system is now separated from the Lower Carboniferous, and is chiefly
developed over the interior of the continent.
The Coal measures are not separated from the Carboniferous, because a map repre
senting them and other subdivisions is included in this publication. The representation of
the entire Carboniferous system by itself enables one much better to understand the
geological structure of the country. The Permo-Carboniferous strata are not separated
from this division.
The Triassic and Jurassic formations are represented together. They constitute long
lines of sandstone in the east, and Gypsiferous beds west of the Mississippi.
The Cretaceous formation may be traced almost continuously from the northeast end
of Long Island through the Carolinas to Alabama; thence northerly along the Mississippi
valley to the mouth of the Ohio River; thence southwesterly into Mexico, and northerly
to the British Possessions, covering immense areas in the Territories and in the States of
the Pacific coast The formation is perhaps the most extensive of any in the country.
With the approval of Prof. Kerr we have represented a continuous area of Cretaceous,
nearly 200 miles long, from the Neuse River in North Carolina to the farther side of the
Great Pedee basin in South Carolina This area is usually covered by Tertiary or Allu
vium, but displays Cretaceous sections along all the great transverse river valleys. Large
Cretaceous areas in Minnesota cover Eozoic and Silurian deposits, and are therefore only
partially represented on the map.
The Tertiary rocks lie outside of the Cretaceous along the whole Atlantic coast
south of Cape C o d ; and are immensely developed over the western portion of the country.
The Alluvium lies outside of the Tertiary along the coast, composing the peninsula
of Florida and the Mississippi delta.
No volcanic rocks, properly so called, occur east of 103" west longitude Greenwich
This edition of the map differs in some portions from the first issue for the following
reasons:
A small area of Cambrian has recently been described by the writer as occupying a
part of the Saco River valley in Maine. The granite in northeastern Vermont, and neai
Montpelier, may be partly of Devonian age. Three small outliers of the Catskill forma
tion are represented in New York upon the authority of Logan’s map. This formation is
everywhere included with the Carboniferous upon the authority of Chancellor YY inchell
The Long Island rocks are still considered as Cretaceous. The ragged edges of thf
Carboniferous rocks in northeastern Pennsylvania are not preserved. In North Carolina
the Eozoic system is expanded to include several isolated patches of gneiss in the low
country. This expansion causes the eastern boundary of this system to harmonize with
that in Y’ irginia, as delineated by Prof. YY’. B. Rogers.
The geology of Georgia is very little known; the Cretaceous outliers are given upon
the authority of Sir Chas. Lyell. The Silurian areas of Ohio and northern Illinois are
G E O L O G IC A L
M AP
OF T H E
U N IT E D
probably connected together across Indiana; the boundaries between the Silurian and
Devonian, as given, being based upon Sir William Logan’s map. The northwest part of
Iowa, here colored as Cretaceous, is said by Pro£ White in his Iowa report to be so deeply
covered bv drift that no rocks appear in situ. The Devonian along the Red River, in
Minnesota, is given upon the authority of Dr. Winchell’s Map. In Texas a few changes
are made upon the authority of a manuscript map furnished by A B. Roessler. The coal
area of Northern Texas is separated from that of the Indian Territory by the overlying
Cretaceous along the valley of Red River. The Tertiary area of the Cross Timbers region
is retained in accordance with the results of this summer’s explorations (1874), specially
communicated by Prof. S. B. Buckley. Improvements will doubtless be made hereafter in
the representation of the copper rocks about Lake Superior. W e have not altered their
delineation from that of the first edition.
A few general statements are suggested by even a casual inspection of the map.
First, there is a wide contrast in color between the east and the w est; indicating that the
former, with its enormous supplies of coal and iron, is adapted by nature to be the manu
facturing region, while the latter, with its immense plains and its veins of the precious
metals, is more properly an agricultural and mining country. Second, the gradual thinning
out of the Tertiary rocks on the Atlantic, suggests the probability of a considerable
submergence off the coast of New England and the British Provinces in very recent
times, so that the later rocks are entirely concealed. Third, the arrangement of the for
mations along the lower Mississippi valley indicates a submergence commencing at the close
of the Paleozoic and continuing down to the present era— the sinking of large tracts of
land in southeastern Missouri in conjunction with the earthquake of 1812, shows that
the line is still weak. The successive development of the several divisions of the Creta
ceous and Tertiary below the mouth of the Ohio, proves that the valley has been gradually
reclaimed from the Gulf of Mexico. Quite recently, also, the western water-shed followed
the Cretaceous outliers from southeastern Arkansas to the “ Five Islands” near the mouth of
Bayou Teche. Fourth, the overflows of lava are confined to the Rocky Mountain region
and westward. There are no evidences of igneous overflows in the east later than the
Jurassic. Fifth, the great plains west of the Mississippi,occupying more than a fourth part
of the country, belong to nearly horizontal deposits of the Cretaceous and Tertiary. Sixth,
the central portion of the main Rocky Mountain range seems to belong to the Eozoic
system; but not to have been elevated extensively so early as the same formation along the
Atlantic border. The principal epoch of Rocky Mountain elevation seems to have been
in the later Tertiary.
G E N E R A L V IE W
OF TH E G EO LO G Y OF TH E W ESTERN
O F T H E U N IT E D S T A T E S .
By W
illia m
P O R T IO N
P. B l a k e .
T he following brief notices of the salient geological features of that portion of the
United States west of the 100th meridian are designed to supplement and explain the
Map and to assist in giving a general idea of the geographical range of the principal
formations and their relation to each other. Some of the difficulties of the task of
delineating the geology over such an extended region, as yet but imperfectly known, are
stated in the foregoing joint article by Prof. Hitchcock and the writer, to which reference
is made.
Eozoic
and
P aleo zo ic
Paleozoic formations have been traced to the shores of the Pacific, and their represen
tation forms a conspicuous feature of the Map from the Rocky Mountains westward
throughout the whole area, and especially in the great interior basin-region where there
are numerous parallel mountain ranges trending from north to south. Over this western
portion of the Map the divisions of the Paleozoic are not indicated by different colors as
they are on the eastern portion. The single blue color represents the whole or any single
member of the Paleozoic, either the Silurian, the Devonian, or the Carboniferous, or all
of them. The divisions have not yet been traced out except in a few limited areas.
The best known member of the system is the Carboniferous limestone, believed in
general to be the Sub-carboniferous, which has a wide extension, having been identified as
far west as the seaward slopes of the Sierra Nevada, in the Humboldt Mountains, the
Wahsatch, and in the Rocky Mountain system of elevation from Mexico to the northern
boundary. It forms the summits of ranges about the Great Salt Lake, and is the prominent
rock of many parallel ranges extending northward into Montana and beyond into
British America. It is believed to constitute an important feature of the Salmon River
ranges of mountains, comparatively unexplored, and of the Blue Mountains in southeastern
Oregon. The formation is, in general, much uplifted, and forms the crest or highest
portions of many mountain ranges up to an elevation of 13,000 feet or more. But in the
broad region drained by the Colorado and its tributaries, the Carboniferous, together with
older divisions of the Paleozoic, and the later formations of Mesozoic time, are compara
tively undisturbed, and form a broad plateau region of nearly horizontal strata through
which the streams have cut their way and expose unbroken sections of the whole series
of rocks from the early Silurian, resting upon the Eozoic, to the Tertiary surmounted by
volcanic outflows. The Mogollon Mountains of Arizona mark the southern limits of the
plateau region, beyond which the formations are uplifted and extend in parallel ranges
southeastward into Mexico. Thus a deep Carboniferous sea appears to have extended
over the greater portion of the United States. A period of elevation succeeded with
the deposition at the west as well as in the eastern portion of the country of sandy and
clayey deposits, the foundation for the growth of plants and the formation of coal-beds.
Coal measures and thin seams of coal are found in the Rocky Mountains at Santa Fd,
and recently they have been shown to exist as far west as the Pancake range of moun
tains in Nevada (Lon. 1150 with workable beds of coal. So far as yet observed, coal)
seams do not exist in the Carboniferous in the northwest
STATES A N D
TE R R ITO R IE S.
7
Devonian beds have been recognized in the White Pine Mining District in Nevada
and probably occur far to the north and south of that point in the same and other parallel
ranges. They have also been identified in the Wahsatch, southeast of Salt Lake City, and
no doubt have a very considerable geographical extension in connection with the Subcarboniferous limestone. Devonian sandstones are reported in the Calitro Mountains,
Arizona; but in a section near El Paso, from the Potsdam upwards, there is a notable
absence of Devonian beds. This section is believed by Mr. Tenney to exhibit the equiv
alents of the Potsdam sandstone, the Trenton limestone and the Oneida conglomerates
with the Carboniferous resting unconformably upon them. An absence of Upper Silurian
and Devonian beds has also been noted by Hayden in sections about the Black Hills and
the Laramie range. But according to Comstock, the whole Paleozoic series, from the
Lower Silurian to the Carboniferous, inclusive, is found upon the eastern slope of the
Wind River Mountains dipping away from the metamorphic rocks.
Limestones of the Quebec group have been identified by Bradley, near Malade City,
Idaho. The equivalent of the Potsdam sandstone is described by Hayden and others as
existing in the Black Hills and northern ranges of the Rocky Mountains, especially in
the Big Horn Mountains at the head of Powder River and in the range known as the
Tetons. A quartzite underlying the limestones of the Wahsatch and resting unconforma
bly upon the upturned edges of Eozoic rocks, is referred by the writer to the Lower
Silurian. The Primordial has also been observed by Clayton in southern Nevada (Lon.
116°), and on Schell Creek, seventy-five miles northeast of White Pine.
It may be said, in general, that the prevailing formations in the silver-mining districts
throughout Nevada are made up of limestones and sandstones of Paleozoic age, either
Carboniferous, Devonian, or older, in connection with Eozoic, granitic, syenitic, porphyritic, trachytic, and volcanic rocks. Dikes of porphyry and dioritic rocks are numerous,
but, in general, are too narrow and limited in their breadth to be satisfactorily delineated
on the Map.
The phenomena of uplift and plication of the strata are exhibited on a broad scale
in the Rocky Mountains and westward in all the mountain systems, though, in general,
the folding is not abrupt and steep, and monoclinal ridges are most common. The
principal area of folding lies to the westward of the Wahsatch range in the Great Basin,
where the parallel mountain ranges are numerous and inclose long and narrow valleys
partially filled by the debris and wash from the adjoining ridges, so that the rocks are
covered from view. The region of the greatest lateral compression is the Sierra Nevada,
where most of the strata stand on edge. The Cretaceous and Tertiary formations of the
Coast Mountains are also plicated.
The rifts and fissures of the rocks giving rise to veins and mineral deposits follow, in
general, the lines of easiest fracture presented by the upraised strata, parallel to the general
axes of uplift. A general longitudinal arrangement results, and determines to a great
extent the distribution of population, lines of communication, settlement, and occupation
of the country.
There are evidences in several places of considerable dislocations and breaks in the
strata for great distances; as, for example, along the eastern base of the Sierra Nevada, and
in the Colorado plateau, where Powell has observed a succession of vertical displacements
extending in a northwesterly and southeasterly direction, one of these lines of break being
nearly under the extinct volcano of San Francisco Mountain and coincident with the edge
of the mesa terminating the plateau on the south.
The wide extension of the Eozoic rocks as the foundation of the western part of the
Continent is well established. They underlie the Paleozoic unconformably, and are in
general crystalline and uplifted at high angles. In the Rocky Mountain system, particu
larly near Santa F£ in New Mexico, in Colorado, and in Wyoming, gneissic strata are
traversed by veins and dykes of flesh-red granite. Farther west this granite disappears
and gray granite prevails, especially in the Wahsatch, the Humboldt, and the Sierra
Nevada. In the Wahsatch the Paleozoic series rests upon the upturned edges of older
formations now in the condition of compact granite but retaining distinct traces of the
original layers of deposition. This granite is flanked by gneissic beds, and it closely
resembles the granite of the Humboldt range, and of the Sierra Nevada, which two great
ranges may also be regarded as prominent lines of exposure of the most ancient rocks.
The Eozoic is also exposed at many points in the ridges of the Great Basin, at the bottom
of the canon of the Colorado, and southward through Arizona into Mexico. In Montana
Territory the rocks are gneissic, and are traversed by gold-bearing quartz veins.
M ESOZOIC.
The most widely distributed and recognized member of the Mesozoic series is the
Cretaceous, which underlies the Great Plains westward from the Missouri, forms the table
lands of Texas known as the Llano Estacado, and appears all along the eastern base of
the Rocky Mountains. Beyond this chain it is spread over the great plateau region of
the Colorado River, finding its principal limit on the north and west in the Wind River,
the Uintah, and the Wahsatch Mountains. Farther west it reappears east of the Cascades
in Oregon, is heavily developed about Puget’s Sound and Vancouver’s Island, and, together
with uplifted Tertiary beds, forms the bulk of the ranges of the Coast Mountains in
California.
In southwestern Texas the lower members of the formation consist of thick beds of
compact limestone, forming cliffs hundreds of feet in height along Devil’s River and the
Rio Grande, while the higher members forming the Llano become more clayey and sandy.
Coarser materials also prevail in the formation upon the western coast, where sandstones
and shales prevail and pass upwards conformably into the Eocene and Miocene Tertiary.
East of the Rocky Mountains the Cretaceous is underlaid by Jurassic and Triassic
strata, the latter being largely developed and exposed at the surface in northern Texas, the
Indian Territory and Kansas. This member of the Mesozoic consists chiefly of red shales,
marls and sandstones, with an abundance of gypsum. The Triassic beds are also found
throughout the Colorado Basin and extend west of the Virgen. They have been identified
in several of the uplifts of the Great Basin area, particularly in the Virginia and Pine Nut
ranges near the eastern base of the Sierra Nevada, associated with syenitic and other
G E O L O G IC A L
8
MAP
OF T H E
U N IT E D
plutonic rocks, and also in the west ranges of the Humboldt Mountains, notably at Star
Mountain, rising to a height of 9000 feet and largely made up of Triassic strata.
Jurassic, and probably Triassic beds, highly folded, form a part of the western slope
of the Sierra Nevada of California, and are the chief repositories of the gold-bearing veins
and of the copper ores. With these beds the Cretaceous formations are not conformable.
Thus the great uplift of the Sierra Nevada, and of many parallel ranges in the Great
Basin, appear to have taken place at the close of the Jurassic period, introducing a great
change in the topographical and physical conditions of the Continent
The relations of the Mesozoic, in the Sierra Nevada, to the Paleozoic, have not been
satisfactorily shown. The Carboniferous has been identified near Fort Reading by Trask,
and in the Map the limestones of the range to the southward have been considered as
belonging to that system. But of whatever age, they as well as other and apparently
older strata, in a metamorphosed condition, are all conformable with the Mesozoic.
C enozoic .
Tertiary deposits over the western part of the Continent are found, in general, nearly
coincident in geographical distribution with the Cretaceous, there being no break in the
continuity of the deposits from below upwards. Along the Pacific border, the Eocene,
Miocene, and Pliocene divisions have been recognized and are all of marine origin and
attain a great thickness. They partake, in the Coast Mountains, of the plications of the
Cretaceous, but are, in general, nearly horizontal along the base of the Sierra Nevada.
Between the Rocky Mountains and the Missouri River, on the Great Plains, extensive
areas are covered with Tertiary beds through which the rivers have cut their way to the
underlying Cretaceous. So also in the Green River basin, north of the Colorado plateau
in Wyoming, there is a wide area covered with horizontal Tertiary deposits eroded by
streams to a great depth. These are not only of marine origin but are mingled with
brackish and fresh-water deposits which, as well as extended basins in the Tertiary of the
Upper Missouri region, were deposited in shallow lakes partially or wholly shut off from
the sea These deposits in Wyoming overlie unconformably an earlier series of Eocene
beds, characterized at the base by the general presence of workable seams of lignitic
coal, found not only along the Rocky Mountains and in the Green River basin but in
California and Oregon; thus showing that at the close of the Cretaceous epoch the greater
part of this western area had emerged from the sea and was covered with a wide-spread
luxuriant vegetation.
In coloring the Map no effort has been made to discriminate between these Tertiary
formations of different periods. The yellow coloring is comprehensive, including all the
sedimentary formations later than the Cretaceous, excepting, only, certain areas of alluvium
and modem lacustrine deposits. It is to be particularly noted that in the region of the
Great Basin, and in a portion of Montana, Idaho, and Oregon, this color represents not
only the Tertiary but the most recent deposits washed down by rains and streams from the
adjoining mountains, and spread out in gentle slopes.
The modem lacustrine deposits, to which reference has been made, constitute one of
the most interesting records presented to us in the whole series of formations. They show
the former extent of immense fresh-water lakes, now either wholly or partially dried up,
leaving behind them floor-like beds of fine clay and well-marked terraces and water-lines.
The largest of these ancient lakes may be designated as the Humboldt, the Timpanogos
(of which the present Great Salt Lake is the remnant), the Tulare, and the Coahuilla, the
last having occupied the long valley at the head of the Gulf of California now a desert.
V
olcan ic .
Lofty extinct volcanoes with enormous outpourings of lava form a striking feature of
the geology of the western portion of the United States. The extent of the igneous
outbursts is shown approximately by the vermilion coloring. The broadest area covered
by lava is in the valley of the Columbia River, and of the Snake River in Oregon. The
principal field extends in a nearly unbroken plain over five degrees of longitude and three
of latitude. There is a continuous line of extinct cones and lava outflows along the Sierra
Nevada of California, and the Cascade Range of Oregon, from latitude 36° to the northern
boundary. A large part of the Cascade Range is made up of the outpourings of volcanoes,
and at the gorge of the Columbia the superimposed lava beds attain a thickness of
between 3000 and 4000 feet, resting upon horizontal Miocene or Pliocene deposits.
The interior region east of the Sierra Nevada is studded at intervals with extinct
cones and lava streams, many of them looking as fresh as if they were now cooling. Some
of the more important of the extinct volcanoes of the interior have poured floods of lava
out over the Cretaceous and more recent formations of the Colorado plateau. Lava plains
of great length and breadth are found along the Gila River and in New Mexico. Another
great center of igneous action exists upon the head-waters of the Yellowstone and the
Snake River, from which lava appears to have flowed throughout the whole length of the
Snake River valley, joining the lava fields of the Columbia. The great geysers of the
Yellowstone region show that thermal action has not yet wholly ceased, and similar
evidences of volcanic heat are exhibited at intervals along the eastern base of the Sierra
Nevada, and in the Coast Mountains of California.
G laciers
an d
E rosion .
There is no extensive drift formation corresponding to the great northern drift of the
Eastern States, nor has there been such a wide-spread and deep erosion of the whole surface
as that which scooped out the valleys of the great lakes and swept away a large portion of
the Paleozoic strata from Maine to Alabama. The erosion of the western area has been
comparatively local, being confined chiefly to river valleys, but is exhibited on a stupendous
scale in all the mountain ranges, especially on the western slope of the Sierra Nevada,
where transverse valleys have been cut out of the rocks to a depth of 3000 feet or more.
Farther in the interior the Great Canon of the Colorado is the grandest example known
of river erosion, this stream having cut out a channel a mile or more in depth through the
horizontal strata of all ages.
Enormous accumulations of bowlders and gravel deposited bv streams are found upon
the flanks of the Sierra Nevada, and are the chief repositories of the placer gold. The
STATES A N D
T E R R IT O R IE S.
deposits appear to be in part the result of ancient systems of drainage, and in part to
be due to glacial action. The Sierra Nevada, the Cascades, and the high ranges of
the Rocky Mountains have all been the theatre of enormous glaciation by local and
wide-spread glaciers. These glaciers have left lateral and terminal moraines of great
extent, particularly in the region above the Yosemite Valley, California, where the ice-sheet
must have been of unusual thickness, and at the head-waters of Kern River about Mount
Williamson. The effects of glaciers have been traced as far south as latitude 350 and
,
remnants of glaciers are still to be found in the deep and protected valleys of the higher
mountains in California and Oregon, increasing in magnitude to the northward until, in
Alaska, they are of magnificent proportions, filling broad valleys and descending to the
sea-leveL
The geology on the whole is much more intricate and complicated than at the east
The transitions from one formation to another are rapid and sudden. It is a region of
great disturbance, of broken, irregular topography, of high mountains, deep valleys, and
of great variety in climate, soil, and productions. The coast is precipitous and the good
harbors are few. The chief geographical outlets from the interior are the Columbia River
in the northwest, the Golden Gate at San Francisco, and the Colorado Valley on the
south, leading to the Gulf of California; but this drains a comparatively inaccessible and
barren region. Practically the outlet of the interior basin is by railway to San Francisco,
all the longitudinal valleys north and south being tributary to one great east and west
line. For the Rocky Mountain region, the Rio Grande and the valleys tributary to the
Mississippi excavated in the later and yielding formations of the Secondary and Tertiary
period, give the most direct and advantageous means of communication.
G eological M aps
an d
P u blication s .
The sources of information from which we have drawn in the preparation of the Map
are very various. The numerous reports of State Geological surveys have been freely
used. Space does not permit a presentation of the full list of geological reports and
other publications upon the geology of the Eastern States. A s might be expected, the
materials accessible have been found to be of very unequal value. In some of the States
very satisfactory work has been done, and this has been properly recorded without difficulty ;
but the adjoining territory perhaps has not been examined, and it has been very difficult to
continue the representations into the unknown region. Different authorities have not
used the same classification, and it has been necessary to make divisions where the author
has given a single color.
In the extreme west it has repeatedly been found impossible to locate recorded
observations, from the fact that rivers or natural boundaries mentioned are not to be found
on the maps. Again, the extent of formations is seldom so described as to permit of
accuracy in plotting except at a single point. It would be well if our explorers should
keep constantly in view the importance of so tracing out the boundaries of formations,
and recording them on maps or sketches on a large scale, that they can be used in the
preparation of reduced maps. Some of the exploring parties of late have been more
interested in the science of palaeontology than in structural geology, and while collecting
fossils have failed to obtain information of the extent and distribution of formations.
The great work of geological exploration of the west (west of the 100th meridian),
may be said to have fairly commenced in 1853, when geologists were appointed to accom
pany each of the Pacific Railroad explorations and the survey of the Mexican boundary.
The results thus obtained form the basis of that portion of the map.
For the Upper Missouri and the Rocky Mountain region we are chiefly indebted to
the labors of Prof. Hayden; for the northwestern boundary region, to the map of Prof.
Bell; for the White Pine region in Nevada, to the Survey of the 40th parallel; for the
Cafion of the Colorado, to Prof. Newberry and to J. W. Powell; and for the Uintah
Mountains, to Prof. Marsh of the Yale Exploring Expeditions. These more recent con
tributions to our knowledge of the geology of the West have been supplemented by
personal explorations.
The earliest publication of a general Geological Map of the United States was by
Maclure in 1809, in a Memoir before the American Philosophical Society. It was
separately published in a small volume in Philadelphia in 1817. The coloring does not
extend westward beyond the mouth of the Kansas in the Missouri. He adopted the
Wernerian classification— the Primitive, Transition, Secondary, and Alluvial.
Featherstonhaugh, in 1835, gave a colored geological section extending from the
Atlantic Ocean across New Jersey, Delaware, Maryland and Virginia, through the Western
States to Missouri, and thence southwestward to Texas.
Sir Charles Lyell, in 1845, published a Geological Map of the United States and
Canada, compiled chiefly from the results of the State surveys. The coloring did not
extend much beyond the meridian of 950
.
In 1853, Prof Jules Marcou published a Geological Map of the United States and
British Provinces of North America, with an explanatory text, geological sections, etc.,
and in October of the same year Prof. Edward Hitchcock published a Geological Map of
the United States and Canada accompanying an “ Outline of the Geology of the Globe
and of the United States in particular.”
Another map by Prof Marcou appeared in Peterman’s Journal in July 1855. It was
presented at the May meeting of the Geological Society of France and was published in
March 1856, and again in the Geology of North America in 1858.
Prof W. B. Rogers, in 1855, compiled a map for A. Keith Johnston’s Physical Atlas,
published in 1856.
After the return of the Pacific Railway exploring expeditions in 1854-55 a map of
the region west of the 100th meridian was prepared by one of the writers. It was com
piled in the Engineer’s office, W ar Department, from the results of various surveys, and it
was exhibited with explanations at the Albany meeting of the American Association in
1856, but it was never published. Shortly after, the map illustrating the General Geological
Features of the country west of the Mississippi River, compiled from the surveys of
W. H. Emory and from the Pacific Railroad Surveys and other sources, by Prof. James
Hall assisted by J. P. Lesley, Esq., was published in the Report of the United States and
Mexican Boundary" Survey, 1857.
G E O L O G IC A L
M AP
OF
T H E U N IT E D
1806.— Abstracts of Public Documents relative to the late discoveries in exploring the
Missouri, Red, and Washita Rivers. 8vo. Washington.
1809.— L e w is and C l a r k e .— The Travels of Capts. Lewis and Clarke; performed in
1804, 1805, and 1806. 2 vols, 8vo. Philadelphia.
1811.— P ik e , Z ebulon M ontgom ery .— Exploratory Travels through the Western Terri
tories of North America, in the years 1805, 1806, and 1807. 4to. London.
1823.— J am es , E dw in .— Account of an Expedition from Pittsburgh to the Rocky Moun
tains, in the years 1819 and 1820, under the command of Major Stephen H.
Long. 2 vols., 8vo. Philadelphia
1843. — N icollet, J. N.— Report intended to illustrate a map of the hydrographical basin
of the Upper Mississippi River. 8vo. Washington.
W ie d , N e u w ie d , M a x im il ia n de.— Voyage dans l’lnterior de l’Am<?rique du Nord
(1832, 1833, and 1834). 3 vols, 8vo, with a folio Atlas of Plates. Paris.
1844. — G regg , J osiah .— Commerce of the Prairies. 2 vols., 8vo. Philadelphia
1845. — F rem ont , Brevet Captain J. C.— Report of the Exploring Expedition to the
Rocky Mountains in the year 1842, and to Oregon and North California in the
years 1843-44. Appendix A, Geological Formations; B, Organic Remains. By
James Hall. 8vo. Washington. With Plates and a Map.
W islize n u s , A — Memoir of a Tour to Northern Mexico connected with C o l
Doniphan’s Expedition, in i846-’47.
A bert , Lieut. J. W.— Reports of his Examination of New Mexico in the years
i 846-’47.
Notes by Prof Bailey on the minerals and fossils. 8vo. Washington.
1848.— F rem ont , J ohn C harles .— Geographical Memoir upon Upper California in illus
tration of his map of Oregon and California. 8vo. 1848. pp. 67.
E m ory , W. H. (Brevet Major).— Notes of a Military Reconnoissance from Fort
Leavenworth in Missouri to San Diego in California, including parts of the
Arkansas, Del Norte, and Gila Rivers. 8vo. Washington, 1848.
185a— M il it a r y R econnoissances in Texas, New Mexico, and the Navajo Country.
Routes from San Antonio to El Paso. By Lieut. Col. J. E. Johnston, Lieut. W.
F. Smith. Lieut. F. T. Bryan, Lieut. N. H. Michler, and Capt. S. G. French.
Fort Smith to Santa F6, by Capt. R. B. Marcy. Navajo Country, Lieut. J. W.
Simpson. Western Frontier of Texas, Lieut. W. H. C. Whiting. 8vo. Wash
ington, 1850.
D a n a , J am es D.— Geology of the United States Exploring Expedition, 1838-42.
Chap, x v ii , Oregon and Northern California. Washington. 4to and Atlas. 1850.
T yson , P h il ip T.— Geology and Industrial Resources of California (with maps and
sections). 8vo, pp. 74 and xxxiv. Baltimore, 1851. Also in Senate Ex. Doc.
No. 47, 1st Session 31st Congress. Washington, D. C.
W illiam so n , Lieut. R obert S.— Upper Sacramento and Pitt Rivers, and Analysis
of Limestone of Mt. Diablo. Senate Ex. Doc. 47, 1st Session 31st Congress.
F razer , J ohn F.— Analysis of Celeetz (Salitz) coal, and limestone of Mt. Diablo.
Senate Ex. Doc. 47, 1st Session 31st Congress. Washington, 1851.
T alb o t , Lieut T heodore .— In a Report to Gen. P. F. Smith. Senate Ex. Doc.
No. 47, 1st Session 31st Congress.
S impson , J. H.— Report and Map of the route from Fort Smith, Arkansas, to
Santa F<5 New Mexico. 8vo. Washington.
,
M a r c y , R. B.— Exploration of the Red River of Louisiana in the year 1852.
Geology by Edward Hitchcock and George G. Shumard. Paleontology by B. F.
Shumard. 8vo. Washington.
1852.— S t a n s b u r y , H ow ard , Capt. Topographical Engineers.— Exploration and Survey
of the Valley of the Great Salt Lake of Utah, including a Reconnoissance of a
new route through the Rocky Mountains. Appendix E, Geology and Paleon
tology, by Prof. James Hall. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1852.
T r a sk , J ohn B.— Geology of the Sierra Nevada or California Range. State As
sembly Document, Session of 1853. 8vo, pp. 31 (First Report).
T r a sk , J ohn B.— Report on the Geology of the Coast Mountains and part of the
Sierra Nevada. Assembly Document No. 9, Session of 1854. 8vo, pp. 95.
T r a sk , J ohn B.— Report on the Geology of the Coast Mountains. 8vo, pp. 95.
Assembly Document No. 14. 1855.
P a tt o n , W il l ia m .— Geology of a Portion of Calaveras County, December, 1854.
In a Report to the Surv eyor General of California. Doc. No. 5, Assembly Session
of 1855. Sacramento.
1854.— S itg r eav e s , Capt. L.— Report of an Expedition down the Zuni and Colorado
Rivers. 8vo. Washington.
B a r t l e t t , J ohn R ussell .— Personal Narrative of Explorations and Incidents in
Texas, New Mexico, California, Sonora, and Chihuahua. 2 vols., 8vo. New York.
M arcou , J ules .— Sur la Geologie des Montagnes Rocheuses entre le Fort Smith
(Arkansas) et Albuquerque (Nouveau Mexique). Extract from Bulletin de la
Soc. Geol. de France, (2* serie, Vol. XI.) 8vo. Paris.
M arcou , J ules .— Resume! dune section geologique des Montagnes R)cheuses;\
San Pedro, sur la cote de l’Ocean Pacifique. (Extract from Bulletin de la Soc.
Geol. de France, 2e serie, Vol. XI.) 8vo. Paris.
E x plo r atio n s and S u r v e y s to determine a Practicable Railroad Route from the
Mississippi River to the Pacific Ocean, in the years 1853 and 1854. 12 vols.,
4to. Washington, 1855.
L f C o n te , Dr. J.— Colorado Desert, etc. Am. Jour. Sci., Vol. xix [2], No. 55,
.
January, 1855.
S c h ie l , J am es , M. D.— Geological Report of the Country explored under the 38th
and 41st parallels of north latitude in 1853-54. Pacific Railroad Surveys.
Vol. II. pp. 96.
B l a k e , W m. P.— Report of a Geological Reconnoissance in California, made in
connection with the expedition to survey routes in California, to connect with the
surveys of routes for a railroad from the Mississippi River to the Pacific Ocean,
under the command of Lieut. R. S. Williamson, Corps Top. Eng’rs in 1853.
4to. New York, 1858, pp. 370— xvi and xm, with maps and sections; and in
Vol. V of Pacific Railroad Reports.
B l a k e , W. P.— Geological Map of the Route explored by Lieut. A . W. Whipple,
near the parallel of 350 N. latitude from the Mississippi River to the Pacific
Ocean. U. S. Pac. R. R. Explorations and Surveys, Vol. III.
B l a k e , W. P.— Report on the Geology o f the Route near the thirty-second parallel.
With Map and Section. Washington, 1856. 4to. Also in Vol. II of U. S.
Pacific R. R. Explorations and Surveys.
B lake , W. P.— Observ ations on the Physical Geography and Geology of the Coast
of California from Bodega Bay to San Diego. 4to, pp. 23, with four Maps. Coast
Survey Report for 1855. Prepared for Prof. A. D. Bache, Superintendent of the
United Coast Survey, 1855.
1856.— A n t is e l l , T homas , M. D.— Geological Report— Route near the 32d parallel
between the Rio Grande and the Pimas villages, also in the Coast Ranges of
California, 1854 and 1855. Pacific R. R. Reports. 4to, VoL V II. Washington,
1856.
STATES
AND
T E R R ITO R IE S.
9
W arren, Lieut G. K.— Explorations in the Dacota Country in the year 1853.
34th Cong. Sen. Ex. Doc. 76. 8vo, with maps, pp. 79.
1856. — W arren, G. K.— Explorations in the Dacota Country' in the year 1855. Appendix
E, Geological Note on section in ravine of l’Eau qui Court River,Jbv W . P. Blake;
Geological Notes, eta, on Nebraska, by F. V. Hayden. 8vo. Washington.
M arcy, Capt R. B.— Exploration of the Big Wichita and Headwaters of the
Brazos Rivers, 1856. 34th Cong. Sen. Ex. Doc. No. 60.
M arcou, Prof. J ules — Geology of North America, with three geological maps
and seven plates of fossils. 4to. Zurich, 1858. This publication contains a
very complete list of works on American Geology up to i 856-’57.
H ayden , F. V., M. D.— Notes explanatory of a Map and Section illustrating the
geological structure of the country bordering on the Missouri River, from the
mouth of the Platte River to Fort Benton. By F. V. Hayden, M. D. 8vo.
Philadelphia, 1857. With Map and Section.
P arry, C. C., M. D.— Reconnoissance to the mouth of the Gila River, from San
Diego, California. U. S. and Mex. Boundary Survey, VoL I, p. 125. 1857.
Also, same volume, General Geological Features of the Country.
1857. — S chott, A rthur.— Geology of the Lower Rio Bravo del Norte. U. S. and Mex.
Boundary Survey, Vol. I. 4to. Washington, 1857.
M arcou, J ules.— Geology of North America, with three geological maps and
seven plates of fossils. 4to. Zurich, 1858. pp. 144.
B lake , W . P.— Notes of a Geological Reconnoissance in Texas, New Mexico,
and Kansas, in 1857. (Inedited.)
1858-59.— E n g e l m a n n , H.— Preliminary' Report on the Geology'of the Country' between
Fort Bridger and Camp Floyd, Utah Territory, and southwest of the latter place
along Capt. J. H. Simpson’s routes, 1858; by H. Engelmann, Geologist of the
party. December, 1858. In Wagon Routes in Utah Territory. 35th Congress,
2d Session. Sen. Ex. Doc. No. 40. pp. 45.
H all , Dr. J ames.— Geology and Paleontology'of the U. S. and Mexican Boundary.
U. S. and Mex. Boundary Survey Report, Vol. I.
N e w be r r y , J. S., M. D.— Report upon the Geology of the Route explored in Cali
fornia and Oregon in 1855. pR- Surveys, Vol. V I.
N ewberry, J. S., M. D.— Geological Report of the Colorado Exploring Expedi
tion, 1857-58. 4to. Washington, 1861. (In the Report of J. C. Ives.)
F orbes, C harles, Esq., M. D., R. N. — Vancouver’s Island, its Resources and
Capabilities as a Colony. A Prize Essay. Published by the Colonial Govern
ment, 1862. 8vo Pamphlet, pp. 63 | 19].
G ibbs, Dr. G eorge.— Cretaceous Fossils of the Coal Formation, Vancouver’s Island.
R ichthofen, Baron F erdinand.— The Comstock Lode, etc. 8vo pamphlet. San
Francisco, November, 1865.
L e C onte , J oseph.— Geological Notes on the Survey' for the extension of the
Union Pacific R. R., Eastern Division, from Fort Wallace to the Rio Grande.
Philadelphia, March, 1868.
L yon, S idney S.— Carboniferous Formations at Pah-rock and Vicinity. Letter to
Authors. December, 1868.
H ayden , F. V., M. I).— Geological Report of the Exploration of the Yellowstone
and Missouri Rivers, i 859~’6o. Washington, 1869. 8vo, pp. 174, with Map.
M eek and H ayden.— Various Memoirs and Reports upon the Geology of the
Upper Missouri Region.
K imball, J. P.— Cretaceous Limestone and the “ Cantcra ’” at Santa Eulalia, Mex.
Am. Jour. Sci., 1870, No. 146. (The same formation is noted at a point 70 miles
west.)
U. S. Geological Survey of the Territories, F. V. Hayden, U. S. Geologist in charge.
Profiles, Sections, and other Illustrations, by II. W. Elliot. 4to. Julius Bien, 1872.
B arlow, Capt. J. W. and Capt. D. P. Heap, Corps of Engineers. Report of a
Reconnoissance of the Basin of the Upper Yellowstone in 1871. Washington,
Government Printing Office, 1872. 8vo, pp. 43, with Map.
C ondon, Rev. T hos.— Geology of Oregon. Overland Monthly and in Prof. Ray
mond’s Report for 1870, p. 205.
S ei.wyn , A lfred R. C.— Geological Survey of Canada. Report of Progress for
1871-72 (Vancouver's Island Coals, etc., by James Richardson). 8vo.
H ilgard, E ugene W., Ph. D.— On the Geology of Lower Louisiana, and the Salt
Deposit on Petite Anse Island.
4to, pp. 34. June, 1872.
Smithsonian
Contributions.
1872. — H ayden , F. V.— Geological Survey of Wyoming. Washington, 1872.
H ayden , F. V.— Preliminary Report of the United States Geological Survey of
Montana and Portions of Adjacent Territories, being a Fifth Annual Report of
Progress. 8vo. Washington, 1872. pp. 538.
B radley , F. H.— Quebec Group, Idaho. Amcr. Jour. Sci., IV , p. 133 and p. 230.
B radley , F rank M.— Notice of the Geological Explorations of the Snake River
Division, U. S. Geological Survey of the Territories in 1872. Am. Jour. Sci.,
V I, p. 194. 1873.
1873. — P owell.— Geological Structure of a District of Country lying to the north of the
Grand Canon of the Colorado. Amer. J our. Sci., V. 456.
C omstock, T heo. B.— Northwestern Wyoming. Am. Jour. Sci., V I, December
1873. 426.
G ardner, J. T.— Survey of the Territories, eta Amer. Jour. Sci., O ct, 1883, VI.
297.
C omstock, T heodore B.— Northwestern Wyoming. Amer. Jour. Sci., VI., Dec.,
1873. 426.
W hitehill , H. R.— Biennial Report of the State Mineralogist of the State of
Nevada, for the years 1871 and 1872. 8vo. Carson City, 1873.
J enney , W alter P.— Notes on the Geology of Western Texas near the thirtysecond parallel. Amer. Jour. Sci., V II, January, 1874.
1874. — L esquereux, L.— Lignitic Beds of the Rocky Mountain Region (South Platte to
Cheyenne, 100 miles) Amer. Jour. Sci., V II , January, 1874, p. 29.
N ewberry, J. S.— On the Lignites and Plant-Beds of Western America Amer.
Jour. Sci., V II, April, 1874.
B rown, A. J.— Carboniferous Coal, Nevada, Pancake Mt. Engineer’s and Miner’s
Journal, July 4, 1874.
M arvine , A rchibald R.— Geology of the Gold Hill Mining Region, Colorado.
Amer. Jour. Sci., V III, 29.
R aymond, R. W.— Reports of the U. S. Commissioner of Mining Statistics.
H ayden , F. V. and G ardner, J. T.— Bulletin U. S. Geological and Geographical
Survey of the Territories. Department of the Interior, Washington.
G ilbert.— Geologist Explorations and Surveys west of 100th meridian, Corps of
Engineers, U. S. Army.
W heeler, G eo. M., Lieut. U. S. Engineers.— Explorations and Surveys west of
the 100th meridian, Corps of Engineers, U. S. Army, Brig. Gen’l A. A. Hum
phreys, Chief of Engineers
T H E GOLD AND S I L V E R MI NE S OL THE WE S T .
BY
PR O F. R O S S IT E R W . R A Y M O N D , U. S. C O M M IS S IO N E R O F M IN IN G S T A T IS T IC S .
H E most important event in the history of mining in the United States was the
discover)7 of gold in California, which led to the rapid development, not only of a
new industry, but of a new empire. The settlement of the Pacific slope was
making but slow progress under the inducements of a scanty commerce in furs and hides.
The liberal grants offered by the Government to agricultural pioneers in Oregon, had
attracted to the Willamette Valley and other favored points in that Territory a limited
population; but the government of the Mexicans in California was positively unfavorable
to enterprise. It is true that gold was known to exist in the country. Rumors of it were
current among the trappers, and placers had actually been worked in what is now Los
Angeles county; but the padres of the neighboring mission of San Fernando had dis
couraged the business as demoralizing to their flocks; and the existence of the precious
metal was not widely known. Still less was its distribution northward suspected. The
discovery of gold, January 19, 1848, at Sutter’s sawmill, on the south fork of the Amer
ican River, afterward famous as Coloma, in Eldorado county, was the beginning of the
new epoch. This discovery was made by James Wilson Marshall, a partner in the mill,
who observed in the debris, washed down by the tail-race, a glittering fragment of a
mineral unknown to him. Suspecting it to be gold, he sought for further specimens, and
obtained, in the course of a few days, several ounces of it. Tests subsequently made estab
lished its character; and the news spread with great rapidity, arousing an excitement
throughout this country, and even in European countries, which has never been paralleled.
March 15, 1848, a San Francisco newspaper contained a paragraph giving the tidings. In
May, the same paper announced the suspension of publication; and the editors and work
men, imitating their fellow-citizens of every class, went off to the diggings. Two years
later, the population of California had risen from 15,000 to 100,000, and the gold-bearing
zone extending along the west flank of the Sierra to Oregon, had been put under active
exploitation. The placers of the southern Counties of Oregon were opened in 1852;
those of the John Day and Powder rivers in i860. Gold was discovered in Idaho,on the
banks of the Pen D’Oreille River, in 1852; hut the active development of the Territory
dates from the discovery of the Oro I'ino mines in i860, and the opening, two or three
years later, of the rich Boise Basin. Montana was found to be auriferous in 1858 (possibly
earlier), and in i860 placer-mining was inaugurated. In 1862, a considerable immigration
from Pike’s Peak (then the general name for Colorado) set in. The gulches of Colorado
began to be worked in 1859; and that Territory was rapidly settled, chiefly by immigrants
from the blast— in contrast to Nevada, Idaho, Oregon,and Arizona, the pioneer population
of which was largely an overflow of the restless enterprise of California. In Arizona, gold
is said to have been discovered in 1858 on the Gila River. In Nevada and Utah, no gold
placers of importance have been found, though the metal is not entirely absent from the
mountain ravines, and in some instances, particularly at the Comstock lode, in Nevada,
it constitutes a considerable portion of the value of argentiferous ores.
The first form of gold-mining in these States and 1 erritories was that of diggings.
The miner loosened the auriferous soil with a pick, and shoveled it into a pan, from which,
by skillful manipulation in water, the clay, sand and pebbles were removed, and the heavier
particles of gold-dust left behind. The first improvement on the pan was the rocker;
afterward the “ tom ” was introduced, from Georgia, and with it the sluice. In 1850 and
1851 the two latter devices began to be generally employed, in consequence of the
greater convenience of water-supply afforded by the mining ditches. The first ditch of
importance was made in 1850; and its success so stimulated imitation that, in the course
of eight years, six thousand miles of mining canals had been constructed, at a cost of more
than $15,000,000, in California alone.
The development of the gold-mining industry was attended with much excitement,
and many fluctuations. A phenomenon more frequent in early days than at present was
that of the “ stampedes” or sudden migrations of whole communities, on receipt of
tidings of rich discoveries in new localities.
Perhaps the most remarkable of these was the so-called Fraser fever in 1858, when,
in the course of four months, i8;ooo men, nearly one-sixth of all the voters in California,
went to Fraser River in British Columbia, expecting to find another virgin gold-field and
to restore the “ flush times” of 1849. The excitement reached its climax before any gold
had been received from the new diggings in San Francisco, and was founded wholly upon
rumors and reports of rich deposits on a bar of Fraser River, and upon the presumption
that large and valuable placers would be found in the upper basin of that stream. The
first discoveries were made in the spring; and the fever died out as suddenly as it had
arisen, five-sixths of the adventurers returning before the end of the year.
A t the present time the resources of the Pacific States and Territories are sufficiently
well known to prevent these miscellaneous and excited migrations of population. It is
not likely that new deposits will be discovered, offering large returns to individual labor
without capital or machinery. The present chief sources of the gold product of the West
are three: first, old and well-known placer-mining regions, where the ground continues to
be worked with sluices and to pay a reasonable profit to miners, who usually operate in
partnerships and companies (as do the Chinese); secondly, deep placers and cement de
posits, which are worked by drifting and blasting, and by the hydraulic process, usually
in the hands of powerful and wealthy joint-stock companies; and thirdly, quartz mines,
operated bv individuals or companies.
The following table, offered as an approximate estimate of the gold product of the
United States since 1847, is the result of careful study of numerous treatises and partial
statistics, in the light of much personal observation of the principal producing districts.
Down to 1862 it follows the table compiled by J. Arthur Phillips, and published in his
T
“ Gold and Silver.” From 1862 to 1866 the production of California is calculated by
deducting from the Express receipts of uncoined treasure at San Francisco from “ the
northern and southern mines,” the receipts from Nevada, and adding 10 per cent to the
remainder, to cover amounts shipped in private hands. From 1866 to 1873 inclusive the
reports of the United States Mining Commissioner have been followed as a general
authority; but as these do not separate the product of gold from that of silver, the division
has been made by estimate, based on the known conditions and relations of the industry
of different localities. Under the head of “ Other States and Territories’ is included the
product of gold from Oregon, Washington, Idaho, Montana, Colorado, etc, and one-third
the product of the Comstock lode in Nevada, that being the average proportion of
gold by value in the Comstock bullion. The values are given in United States gold
coin.
E stim a te
Years.
California.
1848 $10,000,000
1849 40,000,000
1850 50,000,000
1851 5 J,OOO,OOO
1852 60,000,000
1853 65,000,000
1854 60,000,000
>855 55,000,000
1856 55,000,000
'857 55,000,000
1858 50,000,000
>859 50,000,000
1860 45,000,000
1861 40,000,000
of
G old P roduct
since
1847.
Total.
Years.
California.
Other States and
Territories.
$10,000,000
40,000,000
50,000,000
55,000,000
60,000,000
65,000,000
60,000,000
55,000,000
55.000,000
55,000,000
50,000,000
50,000,000
46,000,000
43,000,000
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
$34,700,000
30,000,000
26,600,000
28,500,000
25,500,000
25,000,000
22,000,000
22,500,000
25,000,000
20,000,000
19,000,000
18,000,000
$ 4,500.000
10,000,000
19,500,000
24,725,000
28,000,000
26,725,000
26,000,000
27,000,000
25,000,000
23,500,000
17,000,000
17,000,000
$39,200,000
40,000,000
46,100,000
53,225,000
53.500,000
51,725,000
48,000,000
49,500,000
50,000,000
43,500,000
36,000,000
36,000,000
Total $986,800,000
$252,950,000
$!,239.75°.000
Oiher Stales and
Territories.
$1,000,000
3,000,000
U n ite d S tate s
of th e
Total.
Silver-mining in the West, apart from the early operations of the Spaniards in New
Mexico and perhaps in Arizona, may be said to date from the discovery of the Comstock
vein in 1859. This vein is in Nevada, on the east flank of the Sierra. According to some
accounts, it was discovered as early as 1857, and the placer-diggings in the canon below
its outcrop were found as early as 1849 and worked by a small population from 1852.
The gold contained a large proportion of silver, in some claims nearly one-half the value
of it— a circumstance which was considered a misfortune by the miners, since it reduced
the value per ounce of the gold-dust as currency from $1 7 or $18 to $10 or $12. In the
vein itself the proportion of gold has usually been about one-third of the total value of
the bullion. The revelation that the gray sulphuret of silver from the vein was a rich ore
worth thousands of dollars per ton gave rise to perhaps the most intense excitement
that has ever swept through the West, since the first discovery of gold. A s usual in such
cases, many older districts were suddenly depopulated and the mining industry was sadly
demoralized. The State of Nevada was rapidly overrun by pioneers, and the silver dis
tricts of Esmeralda, Lander, and H umboldt counties, were explored and developed with
an energy which proved in many cases premature. The Washoe excitement maintained
for three years its predominance; but all the silver-mining enterprises of the State shared
in the encouragement afforded by the first success of the mines of Virginia City. In 1863
the panic swept away some thousands of wild-cat speculations, and the Comstock mines
themselves fell greatly in nominal value. A ruinous litigation, involving millions of
dollars of expenditure, assisted this reaction. The discovery within the last three years of
immense bodies of ore at the depth of more than 1500 feet below the surface in the
Comstock lode, has brought the product of that vein to a figure not inferior to those of
its best days. The silver-mining districts of Owyhee in Idaho, Unionville, Reese River,
Belmont, Pioche, White Pine, and Eureka in Nevada, continue to be productive. The
latter district and the silver districts of Utah and some of Montana and New Mexico, as
well as that of Cerro Gordo in California, produce argentiferous galena and carbonate of
lead, which are reduced by smelting in shaft furnaces. The Washoe ores and those of
Pioche are treated by the so-called Washoe process, consisting of crushing in stamp-mills
and subsequent amalgamation in pans. The ores of Reese River, Belmont, and Union
ville in Nevada, and of Georgetown, Colorado, are treated by preliminary roasting with
salt, and subsequent amalgamation. From Colorado and Utah considerable quantities of
rich ore are shipped to American and foreign smelting works.
T he T o ta l P roduct
of
S il v e r
From 1848 to 1858 inclusive,
$50,000 per annum
1859
i860
1861
•
•
1862
.
1863
1864 •
•
•
1865
U n ite d S t a t e s
follow s :
in th e
$550,000
100,000
150,000
2,000,000
4,500,000
8,500,000
11,000,000
11,250,000
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
since
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
T otal
1848 is E stim a ted
,
.
. $10,000,000
. 13,500,000
. 12,000,000
. 13,000,000
. 16,000,000
. 22,000,000
. 25,750,000
. 36,500,000
$ 186,800,000
as
THE
G O LD
AND
S IL V E R
The mining districts of the Pacific Slope are generally ranged in parallel zones
following the prevailing direction of mountain ranges. This generalization, first pointed
out by Prof Blake, has been more fully illustrated and connected with the geological
history of the country by Mr. Clarence King, who says:
“ The Pacific coast ranges upon the west cam- quicksilver, tin, and chromic iron.
The next belt is that of the Sierra Nevada and Oregon Cascades, which, upon their west
slope, bear two zones, a foot-hill chain of copper mines, and a middle line of gold deposits.
These gold veins and the resultant placer mines extend far into Alaska, characterized by
the occurrence of gold in quartz, by a small amount of that metal which is entangled in
iron sulphurets, and by occupying splits iri the upturned metamorphic strata of the J urassic
age. Lying to the east of this zone, along the east base of the Sierras, and stretching
southward into Mexico, is a chain of silver mines, containing comparatively little base
metal, and frequently included in volcanic rocks. Through Middle Mexico, Arizona,
Middle Nevada, and Central Idaho is another line of silver mines, mineralized with com
plicated association of the base metals, and more often occurring in older rocks. Through
New Mexico, Utah, and Western Montana lies another zone of argentiferous galena lodes.
To the east, again, the New Mexico, Colorado, Wyoming, and Montana gold belt is an
extremely well-defined and continuous chain of deposits.”
In my report as United States commissioner of mining statistics, rendered March,
1871, I remarked upon this subject as follows:
“ These seven longitudinal zones or chains of mineral deposits must not, in my
opinion, be held to constitute a complete classification. The belts of the Coast Range
and the west slope of the Sierra are well-defined, both geologically and topographically;
but it is not so easy to separate into distinct groups the occurrences of gold and silver
east of the Sierra. For instance, the gold of Eastern Oregon, Idaho, and Western Mon
tana, together with such occurrences in Nevada as those of the Silver Peak and New Pass
districts, and numerous instances of sporadic occurrence of particular ores of silver or
argentiferous base metals, cannot be brought within the classification above givea Either
more zones must be recognized, or a greater mineralogical variety must be acknowledged
in those already laid down. The latter alternative is, I think, the more reasonable. A c
cording to the principles set forth in a discussion of mineral deposits in my last report, it
appears evident that the agencies which affect the general constitution of geological for
mations are far wider in their operation than those which cause the formation of fissures;
and that the causes influencing the filling of fissures are still more local in their peculiar
ities than those which form the fissures themselves. Thus, of the area covered by rocks
of a given epoch, more or less uniform in lithological character, only a small portion may
have been exposed to conditions allowing deposits of useful minerals, even when such
deposits are contemporaneous, as in the case of coal. Still more limited is the field for the
formation of fissures; but it must be freely confessed that in the case before us, the corru
gation of half the Continent into parallel mountain ranges offers good grounds for the
expectation of vast longitudinal systems of fissures. When we come to consider the
filling of these fissures, however, it is evident that the mineralogical character of the veinmaterial must vary, to some extent, as to the gangue, but to a still greater extent as to the
nature of the ores. Even single mines, in the course of extensive exploitation, have
produced ores differing as widely as do those of the different zones enumerated by Mr.
King. I am, in fact, strongly inclined to consider freedom from base metals, for instance,
a peculiarity due in many cases to secondary processes, and not to be relied upon as
characteristic for single veins even, to say nothing of whole groups, districts, and Conti
nental zones.
“ Nevertheless, the generalizations of Prof. Blake and Mr. King on this subject are
highly interesting and valuable. The criticism here made is not in opposition to their
views so much as in qualification of a possible rash application on the part of the general
public. The zonal parallelism does exist, though in a somewhat irregular w ay; and it is
clearly referable, as these writers have shown, to the structural features of the country, the
leading feature of which is the longitudinal trend of the mountain ranges.
“ Subordinate to this trend (or, more strictly, resulting from the same causes as pro
duced it) appear the predominant longitudinal strike of the great outcrops of sedimentary
rocks, the longitudinal axes of granite outbursts, and, finally, the longitudinal vents of
lava overflows and the arrangement of volcanoes in similar lines. It is evident that in
crossing the country from east to west we traverse a series of different formations, while,
by following routes parallel with the main mountain ranges, we travel upon the contin
uous outcrops of the same general age.
“ The distribution of mineral deposits east of the Rocky Mountains follows somewhat
different laws. Here we have but one longitudinal range— that of the Alleghanies, which
is accompanied by a gold-bearing zone of irregular extent and value. In the Southern
States the strata flanking this range present a remarkable variety of mineral deposits. On
the eastern slope of the Rocky Mountains, again, occurs what may perhaps be denominated
a zone or longitudinal series of coal-fields. But between these mountain boundaries the
geological formations of the country cluster, as it were, around centers or basins. W e
have such a group in Michigan, another in the Middle States, and a third in the Southwest.
“ The deposits of the different metals, ores, and useful minerals, in the country east of
the Rocky Mountains, vary widely in age. The ores of gold, copper, and iron, in the preSilurian schists of the South; the galena and cobalt ores of the Southwest, and the copper
M IN E S
OF
T H E WEST.
ores of Lake Superior, in the lower Silurian rocks; the argillaceous iron ores of New
York, and other States west of New York, in the Upper Silurian, and the salines of the
same group; the bitumen, salt, coal and iron ores of the Sub-carboniferous; the coal and
iron of the Carboniferous; the coal, copper, and barytes of the Triassic; the lignites of
the Cretaceous, and the fossil phosphates of the Tertiary period, are instances which may
serve to show how great is this variety. It is not within the province of this report to dis
cuss the mineral deposits of the Mississippi Basin, the Appalachian Chain, or the Atlantic
Coast I shall content myself with brief mention of two points. The first is the greater
relative age of the metalliferous deposits as compared with those of the inland basin and
the Pacific slope. On this side the period of greatest activity in such formations was over
before it began in the W est The great gold and silver deposits beyond the Rocky
Mountains appear to be post-Devonian, post-Jurassic, and even Tertiary in their origin.
The vast volcanic activity which affected so wide an area in California, Oregon, Washington,
Idaho, and Nevada, is not represented in the East
“ The other point is the peculiar relative position of our coal and iron deposits. This
was eloquently described by Mr. Abram Hewitt, United States Commissioner to the Paris
Exposition, in his admirable review of the iron and steel industry of the world. I cannot
do better than quote his forcible words:
“ ‘ The position of the Coal Measures of the United States suggests the idea of a
gigantic bowl filled with treasure, the outer rim of which skirts along the Atlantic to the
Gulf of Mexico, and thence, returning by the plains which lie at the eastern base of the
Rocky Mountains, passes by the great lakes to the place of beginning, on the borders of
Pennsylvania and New York. The rim of the basin is filled with exhaustless stores of
iron ore of every variety, and of the best quality. In seeking the natural channels of
water communication, whether on the north, east, south, or west, the coal must cut this
metalliferous rim ; and in its turn, the iron ore may be carried back to the coal, to be
used in conjunction with the carboniferous ores, which are quite as abundant in the
United States as they are in England, but hitherto have been left unwrought, in conse
quence of the cheaper rate of procuring the richer ores from the rim of the basin. Along
the Atlantic slope, in the highland range, from the borders of the Hudson River to the
State of Georgia, a distance of one thousand miles, is found the great magnetic range,
traversing seven entire States in its length and course. Parallel with this, in the great
limestone valley which lies along the margin of the coal-field, are the brown hematites, in
such quantities at some points, especially in Virginia, Tennessee, and Alabama, as to
fairly stagger the imagination. And finally, in the coal basin is a stratum of red fossiliferous ore, beginning in a comparatively thin seam in the State of New York, and termina
ting in the State of Alabama in a bed fifteen feet in thickness, over which the horseman
may ride for more than one hundred miles. Beneath this bed, but still above water level,
are to be found the coal-seams, exposed upon mountain sides, whose flanks are covered
with magnificent timber, available either for mining purposes or the manufacture of charcoal
iron, passing westward, in Arkansas and Missouri, is reached that wonderful range of red
oxide of iron, which, in mountains rising hundreds of feet above the surface, or in beds
beneath the soil, culminates at Lake Superior in deposits of ore which excite the wonder
of all beholders; and returning thence to the Atlantic slope, in the Adirondacks of New
York, is a vast, undeveloped region, watered by rivers whose beds are of iron,and traversed
by mountains whose foundations are laid upon the same material. In and among the
coal-beds themselves are found scattered deposits of hematite and fossiliferous ores, which
by their proximity to the coal, have inaugurated the iron industry of our day. Upon these
vast treasures the world may draw for its supply for centuries to come, and with these the
inquirer may rest contented, without further question— for all the coal of the rest of the
world might be deposited within this iron rim, and its square miles would not occupy onequarter of the coal area of the United States.’
“ This vivid description rests upon a geographical rather than a geological grouping.
But it is none the less intimately connected with the underlying geological facts. Its
strongest application is, however, economical. If any material thing may stand as the
type of force, it is coal, the deposits of which may well be called vast storehouses of power
— the product of solar activity through uncounted years— laid up for the use of m an; and
iron, on the other hand, may symbolize the inert, dead matter, awaiting the touch of
power to wake it into efficient life. These are prime elements in our universe of industry.
Take them away and our present civilization is annihilated. Put them together in the
hand of an intelligent and mighty nation, and that nation could recall the world from the
chaos of barbarism. But they need each other; and it is in the wonderful combination of
both, as well as the exhaustless abundance of each, that America finds sure promise of
enduring power.
“ Thus East and West bear witness of our great inheritance of natural wealth. Every
period of geological change has been laid under contribution to endow with rich legacies
some portion of our land. Our territory epitomizes the processes of all time, and their
useful results to man. Divided, yet in a stronger sense united, by mountain chains and
mighty rivers, our diversified mineral resources may figuratively represent, as I firmly
believe they will literally help to secure and maintain, our characteristic national life— a vast
community of communities, incapable alike of dissolution and of centralization; one, by
mutual needs and affections, as the Continent is one; many, by multiform industries and
forms of life, as the members of the Continent are many.”
T HE COAL M E A S U R E S OF THE U N I T E D S T A T E S
[PLATES X I and X II]
BY
PR O F. C. H. H IT C H C O C K , H A N O V E R , N. H.
''■
y ^ H E observations made by American Geologists establish the fact of a fourfold
division of the Carboniferous series, viz.: i. The lowest, sandstones and conglomAerates known as the Waverly sandstones of Ohio, Marshall, Napoleon, and
Michigan groups of Michigan, Catskill of New York, the Vespertine of Pennsylvania,
the Knobstone of Kentucky, etc 2. Mississippi group, or Carboniferous or Mountain
limestone. This is supposed to be the equivalent of the Umbral red shales of Pennsylvania
and Virginia. 3. Millstone grit, or a series of sandstones and conglomerates, the Serai of
Pennsylvania and Virginia, the Conglomerate of Ohio, etc 4. The Coal Measures. It
is from this upper division that the chief supply of our coal is derived. In some regions
there are said to be good workable beds below the Millstone grit ; and in such cases they
are included in the lower division upon the map.
There is considerable diversity of opinion in respect to the minute subdivision of the
Coal Measures. Hence, the map will show only a division in two parts, the upper and
lower. The line of demarcation in the Appalachian basin is the Pittsburgh bed or its
supposed equivalent. In the Illinois and Missouri basins the dividing line cannot be
synchronized with the same horizon, but the division is a natural one.
A glance at the map shows the coal to be grouped in the following natural basins. It
will be interesting to compare these Coal Measure areas with the limits of the entire
Carboniferous System as given in the General Geological Map of the United States.
he
N
ew
n th r a cite
B asins
of
ppa lac h ian
C o al F ield .
This basin comprises 59,105 sq. m. and is situated in the States of Pennsylvania,
Maryland, Ohio, West Virginia, Virginia, Kentucky, Tennessee, Georgia, and Alabama.
Reckoning by States, the areas are distributed as follows:
Pennsylvania (H. D. Rogers)......................................................................... 12,302
Maryland (P. T. T y s o n ),........................................................................................ 550
Ohio (J. S. N e w b e r r y ) ,................................................................................... 10,000
West Virginia and Virginia (W.B. R o g e r s ) ,...................................................16,000
Kentucky (Joseph Lesley).....................................................................................8,983
Tennessee (James M. Safford),............................................................................ 5.100
Georgia (FI. D. R o g e rs ),........................................................................................ 170
Alabama, rough estimate from map,....................................................................6,000
E n g lan d B asin .
This lies in Massachusetts and Rhode Island and is estimated to cover 750 sq. m.
The coal is a plumbaginous anthracite, used to advantage in some smelting furnaces. Per
haps eleven different beds exist; and as seen at the Aquidneck Mine,
Portsmouth, R. I., their maximum thickness is 23 feet. In a sketch
of the Rhode Island part of the field, printed in the Proceedings of
the American Association for the Advancement of Science for i860,
I estimated the whole thickness of the Coal Measures at 6,500 feet,
and the Coal Measures proper at 2,500 feet. According to Lesquereux the plants from this field correspond with those of the
Salem and Mammoth Anthracite and the lower Freeport Bituminous
beds in Pennsylvania.
T he A
A
Square Miles
New England Basin.
Anthracite Basins o f Pennsylvania.
Appalachian Coal Field.
Michigan Basin.
Illinois Basin.
M issouri Basin.
Texas Coal Field.
T
The obtaining of exact information respecting the amount of coal in any basin is at
present impracticable. If we know the area in square miles and the thickness of the beds
along a given section, the multiplication of the area by the thickness should give the
precise number of cubic feet in the field; but the beds vary so much that all such esti
mates must be regarded only as approximate. The estimates that follow are those based
upon the best attainable informatioa
Prof H. D. Rogers reports that the first Coal Field contains an average thickness of
100 feet of coal, and that the second and third carry about 60 feet; the general average of
all three coming to about 70 feet. Daddow and Bannan enumerate 14 beds at Pottsville,
having the maximum thickness of 205 and the minimum of 60 feet; while the accompany
ing strata vary from 2,175 to 820 feet in thickness. There is no end to the details respecting
the anthracite basins which are contained in the Geology of Pennsylvania, by H. D.
Rogers, 1858; Coal, Wood, and Oil, by S. H. Daddow and Benj. Bannan, 1866; and the
Coal Regions of America, by James Macfarlane, 1873.
P e n n s y l v a n ia .
The statistics prove these to be the most important in the
country, yet they occupy a very insignificant space upon the map.
They are usually divided into three groups,
---2
6
Square Miles.
The first, Southern or Schuylkill Basin and Mine Hill, .
The second, Middle or Shamokin, 50; Mahanoy, 41;
and Lehigh Basins, 3 7 , ............................................
The third, Northern, or Wyoming and Lackawanna Basin,
146
128
198
472
The first and second of these basins are shown upon an enlarged
scale near the bottom of the map. [Plate XII.]
Originally these basins must have formed part of a single coal
field, which by later elevating forces has been extensively folded, the
character of the coal changed from bituminous to anthracite, and the
strata broken into fragments through fractures and erosion. This is
shown by the similarity in number, succession and thickness of the
beds of coal in the several parts; also by the constancy of the
character of the conglomerate forming the floor of the Coal Measures.
Fig. 1 is a section of the coal strata at Pottsville. Pa., made by Daddow and Bannan. We
are under obligations to D. Appleton and Co. of New Y ork, for the privilege of copying it from
their electrotype in James Macfarlane’s treatise upon The Coal Regions of America. A , the
lowest bed. is not worked. B, or the Buck Mountain, is a very important bed, 25 to 30 feet
thick at Plymouth, and in some of the Lehigh basins. The third scam. C , is not usually w ork
able. D, the Skidmore or Wharton, is from 6 to 12 feet thick, and valuable. E is the Mam
moth. the largest and best of all the anthracite coal-beds, from 12 to 70 feet thick ; but its best
size is about 30 feet, as in the Lehigh basins, producing more coal than when at its maximum
size. In parts of the Mahanoy basin it is 70 or 80 feet thick. This bed is said to correspond
with the upper bed of the lower bituminous coal measures F is supposed to be the equivalent
of the small seams in the barren measures, and G, or the Primrose, may represent the Pittsburgh
and Cumberland beds in the Appalachian Field. The upper anthracite beds above H may
correspond to the Redstone, Sewickly, and Waynesburg beds in other Sections.
7 .5
73
125:
1 A ~^ r r 5
v
F . 1.— x h a t Sr ta
m A t a c ix t a
Several peculiarities in the structure of this basin are suggested by an inspection of the map. r. It is much
broader over its northern area, contracts through Tennessee and Northern Alabama, but expands considerably at
its termination in Alabama, though by no means to such an extent as in West Virginia and Ohio. 2. The pecu
liar basin structure is best seen in the northern h a lf; while the upper measures are wholly wanting south of West
Virginia, save a minute portion in Alabama. 3. Considered in connection with its elevation above the sea, nearly
the whole of the Appalachian Coal area is an elevated plateau, 2,000 feet above the sea in Tennessee, the
principal depression lying along the Ohio River below Pittsburgh. 4. The northern and western edges have
suffered greatly from denudation. The smallness of the scale prevents the perfect representation of this outline,
but the numerous isolated patches in Northern Pennsylvania, which were once connected together, indicate
forcibly the immense amount of loss this basin has sustained. The absence of much of this rnggedness along
the eastern border illustrates the fact of the operation of different forces in that region. There have been
extensive upthrows and downthrows along the eastern border, shown on the map in the narrow band of older
rocks in southeastern Kentucky. Perhaps on account of these oscillations of level the coal has disappeared
from immense areas in Virginia, Tennessee, Georgia, and Alabama. The narrow lines of lower Carboniferous
rocks in Virginia, on the General Geological Map [Plate X I], may indicate the former eastern extent of the coal there.
5. The basin is subdivided by minor undulations which are of the greatest consequence in the location of mines.
Much remains to be done in tracing out these fo ld s; but I will mention those that are well known. They are
the most marked in Pennsylvania, where they are eight in number. First is the small Broad Top basin. The
extent of this and the other sub-basins can be best comprehended by referring to the General Geological Map,
where the lower Carboniferous rocks are not separated from the Coal Measures. The second is the Cumberland
basin o f Maryland. Though connected directly with a projection from the great basin to the west, it is not
quite certain that the connection is through the upper division. But there is a distinct anticlinal axis along
the angle of the bend, separating the second from the third basin. The third basin, commonly called the
First in Geological treatises, commences with the small area east of Williamsport, known as Mahoopeny moun
tain passes somewhat south of west toward Snowshoe and then southwesterly into Maryland, being divided again
by the ridge lying parlly in Pennsylvania and partly in Maryland. The fourth basin begins with the Barclay and
McIntyre regions, passes to the small patches in the great bend of the north branch of the Susquehanna and
continues up the west branch. This basin may be traced southwesterly to the east of the long pink ridge called
Laurel H ill, and upon it are situated the figures 244 in Pennsylvania, and 90 in West Virginia. The fifth basin
commences at Blossburgh, may be traced by undulations of the lower strata to connect with a much shorter
spur from the main basin and passes down to the southwest side of the Laurel Hill Range into West Virginia.
The sixth basin cannot be traced by names upon our map, but it commences on the '1 ioga River in New 5 ork,
crosses the P. and E. R R. three miles above Emporium, and terminates at the Kiskiminetas River two and one half
miles from its mouth. The seventh basin commences with the Smethport outlier, passes to Ridgway and crosses
the Alleghany just above the great bend between the large letters E and N on the map, pointing towards
Pittsburgh. The eighth basin is said to occupy the rest of the Coal Measures lying to the west of those
enumerated. These undulations have not yet been identified in West Virginia and Kentucky. Possibly the
anticlinal axis at the Kanawha salines may correspond with the Laurel Hill ridge spoken of above. I heir dis
tinctness in the north may be explained by the seemingly greater exposure there to the plicating forces.
The Ohio River runs through the most depressed portion of the whole basin. It
may be remarked that a very narrow exposure of the lower measures follows the Ohio
both at the northern and southern limits of the upper group. This is occasioned by the
river erosion.
In Tennessee an anticlinal axis divides the area into two basins. Its course is indi
cated by the extension northeasterly from Alabama of the narrow white strip west of the
Tennessee River.
In Alabama there are four basins. First is the Coosa field, the long narrow strip cross
ing the Coosa River, with the small area nearly reaching to the Georgia line. Second, the
Cahawba, a narrow club-shaped area, extending farthest south of any. This is supposed to
be on the same line with the long trough terminating at Chattanooga Third, is the eastern
border of the great expanse to the northwest known as the Black W arrior field, and con
necting with the eastern basin in Tennessee. Fourth, the balance of the coal in Alabama
may be comprised in one basin. The dips are highly inclined to the east in the first
basin, but show less evidences of elevation and disturbance in proceeding northwesterly
These facts are compiled from statements furnished by R. P. Rothwell and J. M. Safford.
THE
COAL
M EASU RES
A few details concerning the character of the Coal Measures in different parts of the
Appalachian Field now to be presented, will illustrate their subdivision minutely, as well
as the amount of coal present
H. D.
R
o g ers’
S
ystem
of
C
M
oal
G
easu res
reene
C
A L L E G H A N Y R IVER.
P
of
e n n s y l v a n ia
fro m
M
ercer
o u n t ie s .
So
48
49
50
51
52
53
I.— Lower C oal Measures.
to
F eet.
S h a le ...............................................................................
Flaggy sandstone..........................................................
S h a le ......................................
Upper Lim estone..........................................................
Sandstone and s h a le ....................................................
Soft s h a le .......................................................................
10
20
IO
8
35
5
■ V.
o
Feet.
1 Conglomerate and Tionesta sandstone.................... 50 to 60
2 Slate and shale ............................................................5 “ 15
3 Coal A , B roo kiille .......................................................... I “ 2
4 Slate and shale...................... .......................... .............
25 54 Gw/ /, lF a yn esk u rg ...............................................
6
5 Coal B , Clarion , Blossburg, etc .............. ....................... 3 “ 4
6 Slate and shale.........
30
.
Total feet, 1,115
242
7 Ferriferous lim esto n e..................................................
15
8 Buhrstone and Iron ore.............. ...........................
p
6
W A SH IN G TO N A N D G R E E N E C O U N T IE S.
9 Shale and sandstone....................................................
30
10 Coal C. K ittan nin g ........................................................ 3 “ 4
IV.— U pper B arren G roup.
11 Slate and shale..............................................................
75
55 Yellow and brown shale..........
10
12 Freeport, Dunbar or Contorted sandstone............ 50 “ 60
13 Coal D , Lower Freeport.................................................
3 56 Gray and brown san d sto n e....
35
7
14 Shale and sandstone...................................................... 30 “ 40 57 Blue friable shale........................
2
15 Lim estone...........................................................
4“58 Coal................................................
7
3
16 Fire-clay and shale........................................................ I “ 10 59 Soft blue shale............................
4
17 Coal E , Upper Freeport................................................... 3 “ 6 60 Lim estone....................................
61 Soft blue shale.......... ..............
4
4
3 2 62 Limestone, three shale................
9 63 Blue and yellow layers........
10
64 Sandstone, in three la y e r s _
_
PIT T SB U R G H REGION.
20
65 Brown and blue sh a le ..............
to
II.— B arren Measures.
66 Coal................................................
1
4
t8 Shale.......... ............... ................ ..................... ..
50 67 Brown and blue shale..............
20
19 Mahoning sandstone....................................................
75 68 Sandstone....................................
I
20 Coal F , E lk L ick ......................................................... 1 to 2 69 Coal.................... ........................
70 Buff shale....................................
20
21 Thick shale....................................................................
71 Limestone ..................................
22 Slaty sandstone.............................................................
30
3i
5
0
23 Red and blue shale, Pittsburgh.................................
20 72 Buff shale....................................
73 Gray micaceous sandstone.. . . .
II to 14
24 Coal G ..............................................................................
1
74 Buff shale....................................
17 “ 20
25 Lim estone.......................................................................
2
>4
26 O live slate and buff shale...........................................
100 75 Gray micaceous sandstone . . . .
76 Yellow micaceous s h a le ..........
1
5
27 Ligonier sandstone................
70
77 Shales and sandstone................
62
28 Red marly shale............................................................
12
78 Flaggy sandstones......................
*3
29 Shale and slaty sandstone...........................................
10
30 Limestone.......................................................................
3 79 Blue and buff shales, thin . . . .
80 Coal ten inches..............................
31 Red and blue shales.....................................................
4
4
2
32 Buff shales..................
18 81 Blue shales and sandstones.. .
3
33 Yellow and purple shale.............................................
10 82 Limestone....................................
83 Thin bedded sandstone............
15 to 25
34 Limestone.................................................
2
84 Shale and limestone..............
10
35 Red and yellow shale....................................................
12
1
36 Limestone ..................................................................... 3 to 5 85 C oal...............................................
18
37 Shale and sandstone....................................................
30 86 Dark gray sh ale........................
2
38 Limestone.......................................................................
25 87 L im estone...................................
88 Shale and laminated sandstone
1
5
3
Total feet, 873
481 89 Limestone....................................
90 Coal ten incises.............................
1
91 Limestone..........
................
l
M O N O N G A H E L A R IV ER .
92 Gray sandstone and shale........
4
2
93 Yellow, blue, and brown shale.
27
III.— U pper C oal Measures.
94 Limestone, thin..........................
39 Coal H , Pittsburgh ....................................................... 5 to 8 95 Green micaceous san dston e...,
44
40 Brown shale...................................................................
30 96 Dark gray sandstone................
18
41 Gray slaty sandstone...................................................
25 97 Blue, buff, and olive shale........
5
6
42 Shales..............................................................................
20 98 Lim estone....................................
5
43 Limestone (the b e st)....................................................
16 99 Dark calcareous slate................
5
44 Black calcareous shale, sometimes 2} feet c o a l.. . .
8 100 Gray and buff sandstone..........
no
45 Slaty sandstone.............................................................
18 101 B lank...........................................
200
46 Black slate..........................
5
47 Lim estone.......................................................................
18
Total feet, 2,089
974
S e c t io n
of
th e
C
oal
M
easu res
I.— Lower C oal Measures.
No.
Feet.
1 W averly.........................................................................
2 Conglomerate...*
..................................................
100
3 S h a le .............................................................................
20
4 Fire-clay .....................................................................
3
5 Coal No. 1 (A), Briar Hill or Block C o a l.................
4
6 S h a le .............................................................................. 5 to 40
7 'San dston e..................................................................... 20 “ 70
8 S h a le ............................................... , . .....................
20
9 Coal N o. 2, generally thin.......................................... I “ 6
10 Shale and sandstone..................................................
75
11 Fire-clay........................................................................... 6
12
12 Coal No. 3 (B)................................................................ 2 “ 4
13 Blue or ferriferous limestone....................................
4
14 Shale and sandstone.................................................. 10 “ 50
15 F ire -clay .......................................................................
3
16 Coal N o. ys, local......................................................... 2 “ 3
17 Shale and sandstone...................................................
20
18 Fire-clay........................................................................
3
19 Coal No. 4 (C, Kittanning)......................................... 2 “ 6
20 Gray limestone............................................................. 3 “ 6
21 Shale and san dstone................................................... 20 “ 60
22 Fire-clay, locally hard clay......................................
4
23 Coal N o. 5 (D, Lower Freeport)................................ 2 “ 4
24 S h a le ...................................................
. ...............
50
25 Limestone ................................................................... o “ 8
26 Fire-clay........................................................................
3
27 Coal N o. 6 (E, Upper Freeport)................................. 4 “ 7
28 Gray shale...................................................................... 5 “ 20
29 Mahoning sandstone............................................... ..3 0 “ 80
Total feet, 685
B arren M easures.
1
2
3
4
Limestone..................................................................... 2 “ 10
Fire-clay........................................................................
3
Coal N o. 7...................................................................... o “ 5
Sandstone and s h a le ..................................................
50
W
No.
est
V
ir g in ia
S e c t io n ,
L ower C oal G roup.
by
2
FeeL
1
to 5 Shales and sandstones.........................
6
Coal A , friable...........................................
7
Sandstone and shale...............................
8
Coal B .......................................................
9 to 13 Sandstones, shale, limestone, iron ore
14
Coal C . .......................................................
15
Shale..........................................................
16
Coal D . friable...........................................
17
Shale..........................................................
18
Coal E , th in ..............................................
19
S h a le .........................................................
20
Mahoning sandstone ............................
.46 to 64
Total feet.......................................
2< 3
>
B arren Measures.
21 to 29 Shale, sandstone, limestone_
_
30
Coal F . p o or...................................
I* " \
30
17
I
“ 67
“ 2
12
3i “ 4
30 “ 40
1
5
“ 6
60 “ 70
in
O
h io , b y
J.
S. N
ew berry.
No.
FeeL
5 Fire-clay.................................
6 Coal No. 70 ( F ) ......................
7 Shale.......................................
8 Shale and sandstone............
9 F ire -cla y ................................
10 Coal N o. 7Z (G)...................... .................................... 1 “
4
n S h a le ......................................
12 Crinoidal lim e sto n e....
.................................. 2 1
1 8
13 S h a le ......................
14 Shale and sandstone............
15 Lim estone.............................
16 Fire-clay..................................
Total feet, 1,044
359
U pper C oal M easures .
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
15
Coal N o. 8 (H, Pittsburgh) ..
Black shale............................
Limestone ...........................
Fire-clay................................
Coal X o. 9 .............................. : : .7 .7 .7 " : : : : : : :
Sandstone ..............................
Fire-clav.................................
Coal N o. 1 0 ............................
Sandstone.....................................................
“
Lim estone.. . .
....
Sandstone and shale............
F ire-clay................................
Coal N o. 1 1 ............................
Sandstone and shale
Coal N o. 12............................
Sandstone and s h a l e ..........
Coal N o. 13.............................
Sandstone...............................
Limestone
......................
Total feet, 1,455
W. B.
R
o g ers.
A
THE
U N IT E D STATES.
C
o m p a r is o n
*3
U
of
O H IO .
pper
C
o als, by
J. J.
S teven so n .
P E N N S Y L V A N IA .
Coal X III.
Coal X II.
Coal XI.
Coal X.
Coal IX.
Coal V I l i e
Coal V U Ib.
Coal V i l l a
Coal V III.
W E S T V IR G IN IA .
Top at Waynesburg.
Middle at Waynesburg.
Waynesburg.
Uniontown. ?
Not present
u
a
en n essee
u
u
“ east side of basin.
Sewickly.
Redstone.
Pittsburgh.
Sewickly.
Redstone.
Pittsburgh.
T
?
?
Waynesburg.
Not present
C
oals.
Through the kindness of Prof. J. M. Safford we are enabled to present further details
of the distribution of the coal-beds in Tennessee in the small map annexed.
A broad line
—
^
*
*
“ upper part of the Lower Coal M
easuret*.
I he outline of the Coal Measures is indicated by a simple line, and it will be found
to correspond essentially with the delineation upon our map. Within this is a dotted line
agreeing with the outcrop of the main Sewanee coal. This is regarded as the equivalent
of Lesley’s bed B in Pennsylvania; and the area between the dotted and outer border
lines is placed under the conglomerate underlying the usual Coal Measures. These lower
beds are not developed so extensively in the States farther north.
T
he
M
ic h ig a n
B
a s in .
The Michigan Basin has an area of 6,700 square miles, with 123 feet of measures, and
eleven feet (maximum) of coal. In the center the coal is thickest, thinning out to nearly
the thickness of paper around the edges. The facts are derived from the reports of Prof.
A. Winchell, and the map from a geological sketch of Michigan in the recently published
Topographical Atlas of that State.
T
he
I l l in o is B
a s in .
The Coal Measures of the Illinois Basin occupy about 47,188 square miles, in the
States of Illinois, Indiana, and Kentucky. Some authors think the beds of coal in this*
basin are the equivalents of corresponding ones in the Appalachian field. It is claimed by
some that the two fields were connected together at the time of their formation, their sul>sequent separation being due to erosion. Our small map shows that the lower part of
the Carboniferous is continuous from one basin into the other, but the delineation of the
Coal Measures themselves indicates a wide gap between the two areas, even where they
approach nearest to each other in Kentucky.
4
ac
411
b r id g e d .
NO.
OF
Dr. J. S. Newberry shows conclusively that the Silurian rocks in Southern Ohio constituted a mountainous
ridge long before the Carboniferous era, and thinks it clear that the coals could never have been united in Ohio.
Mr. Lesquereux endeavors to show by a thorough comparison of plants that several beds can be identified in
both basins by their organic remains. Drs. Newberry and Dawson dissent from his conclusions, on paleontolog
ical grounds.
Mr. Lesquereux made use of the stratigraphical facts collected by Major S. S. Lyon, assistant of Prof. D.
D. Owen, State Geologist of Kentucky, and drew a comparative section of the measures in Pennsylvania, Ohio,
Kentucky, etc., pointing out the beds that seemed to be equivalent in both fields. There were difficulties in the
matching of the paleontological and stratigraphical work which lead to a new investigation, and a fault was
discovered in Major Lyon’s section. It is to the credit o f Lesquereux’s theory that it suggested the existence
of errors which had not been suspected by the field geologists, while the first announcement of the equivalency
was compelled to assume the correctness of the stratigraphical work. Nevertheless, the theory is rather unpop
ular with American Geologists.
In this field the beds o f coal are not so thick as in the Appalachian, though their number is about the same.
The thickness of the measures is also greatly reduced, while the limestones are more abundant, thus giving
evidence o f different conditions of formation. These differences are intensified in the Missouri field, save that
the measures are almost as thick as in the east. The coals themselves are also more apt to be impure, while
there is an abundance o f good workable beds, as shown by the statistics of production.
Feet
31 to 33 Shales and san dstone......................................
34
Coal G, slaty........................................................
35 to 58 Shales.conglomerates.sandstones.limestones
59
Coal g .....................................................
2
40, 41 Limestone and shales......................
i(,
Total feet, 719
53
3
201
to
420
U pper C oal G roup.
42
Coal H (Pittsburgh).......................................... 6 f to 9 i
43, 44 Shale and limestone.........................................
22
45
Coal /, Redstone...................... ....................... 3 “ 4
46 to 52 Shale, limestone, and sandstone....................
3>
53
Coal J , Sewickly................................................
5i
54 to 65 Shales, sandstones, and limestones___ _
_
211
66 Coal K , \\ aynesburg, and two smaller seams.
7i
67, 68 Shales and sandstones......................................
20
Total feet, 1,0:9
310
Indiana.— The measures in this State occupy 6,500 square miles, contain twelve beds
of coal with an aggregate thickness of 40 feet above the millstone grit, according to Prof.
Cox’s Section. The division of lower and upper corresponds to the “ eastern and western
zones ” of the reports. The former occupies about 450 square miles. The coals are non
coking or free-burning, and are generally known as the “ block coal ” because it comes out
in square pieces, the bed being traversed by a multitude of joints or seams. It is found
to be very valuable in the smelting of iron, and is largely used for this purpose.
The western zone is by far the most extensive, and the coals are of good quality and
considerable thickness. The irregular outlines of these divisions were specially furnished
us for our map by Prof. Cox. The following is his Section, taken from the Report for
1870:
4
THE
C o n n ected S ection
of th e
C o al M easures
L ow er P art.
I n d ia n a ,
by
M E A SU R E S OF
E. T. C ox .
THE
U N ITE D
STATES.
The following is a condensed vertical section of the Coal Measures, as drawn up by
the State Geologist, only the numbers of the strata are reversed so as to make this conform
to the list already given for other States.
U pper P a r t .
ft. in.
Shales and thin C o al............................
Measures...............................................
Coal A
............................................
M easures...............................................
Coal B
..........................................
Millstone G rit.....................................
Coal F , third block..............................
M easures..............................................
Coal G, second b lo ck ...........................
M easures...............................................
Coal H ...................................................
Measures................................................
Coal /, main blo ck................................
Measures.......................................
in
COAL
Coal J . ..........................................
Coal K
L o w e r D iv is io n .
N o.
Coal X
1 (32) Coal, clay io inches at base.
2
M easures.............. ..........
3
C oa l........................................
4
M easures.... .........................
5
C oa l.......................................
6
M easures..................
...
7
C o a l.....................................
8
Measures.... ............. , ____
9
C oa l...................................................
10
Measures
..............
11
Coal........................................
12
M easures...............................
13
Coal ....................................
14
Measures...............................
15
Coal ..................................... *
3
8
O miI L . ..
6
Coal M ...........................................
6
.....................................
Th ickness.
6
Coal N
Total feet..............
Illinois.— The measures in this State occupy 36,800 square miles, are 600 feet thick,
and contain ten beds of coal with an aggregate thickness of 38 feet. The workable coals
belong to the lower division. In the section the beds are numbered from below upward.
ft.
13“
i i in.
11 ft.
2
2J-4 ft. 5 in
48 ft
2“
Locality.
Ralls. Audrain, St. Louis, St. Charles and Montgomery, Henry
and Johnson.
Macon. Henry, and Johnson.
Macon.
Randolph, Boone, Callaway, Johnson. Henry, Vernon. Rates.
Adair. Sullivan. Putnam, Audrain, and Macon.
Henry.
4“
8 in.
18 ft.
1 ft. 8 in.
18 ft.
7 in.
52 ft.
i t ft (Warrensburgh.)
Johnson.
Johnson.
Johnson.
Johnson, Henry, Chariton.
M id d l e D iv is io n .
L
ow er
S
Usually a coal basin displays its lowest beds upon all sides, and the lower measures
extend beneath the upper, with greater thickness in the middle. The Illinois basin shows
certain peculiarities in its structure varying from the normal type. It may be seen partly
by reference to the smaller general map. A t the south end the underlying strata are of
Carboniferous age, just older than the Coal Measures to the north in Illinois; these are
outcrops of the Devonian and Silurian, the lower members of the latter system adjoining
the Carboniferous on the north side of the field. The upper Coal Measures rest upon
Silurian rocks in Northern Illinois instead of the lower Coal series. It would appear,
therefore, that there must have been a gradual sinking of the land to the north during the
age of the Coal Measures, and the newer beds have been brought successively into direct
contact with much older formations. Our map exhibits the lower division upon the cast
and west sides of the upper, but not on the north. There is a somewhat similar state of
things in Western Kentucky.
Kentucky— In Western Kentucky this field occupies 3,888 square miles, according to
Major S. S. Lyon’s survey. A revision of the vertical column, by E. T. Cox, makes the
measures 612 feet thick, including the millstone grit. There seem to be nine beds of coal
in this area, having the following thicknesses respectively, commencing with the lowest,
two, four, three, two-and-a-half, five, two-and-a-half, five, two, and three feet; making 29
feet in all. The reports of Kentucky need to be studied with great care, since they were
prepared before the discovery of serious errors in their sections. Several of the beds are
repeated in consequence of the presence of a fault on the Ohio River near Henderson,
and hence the number of beds are given in the reports as twice their proper number. Our
map shows the boundaries of the lower division, as given by S. S. Lyon expressly for us,
while the line of the upper measures has been drawn by a comparison of the statements
in the reports with the facts sent in for Illinois and Indiana. W e shall soon have reliable
maps of this State from the Survey now in progress under the direction of Prof. N. S.
Shaler.
T
he
M issouri B asin .
This is the largest of all the Coal Fields of the country in territorial expanse, amount
ing to 84,343 square miles, though thinner and with fewer beds of coal than the Appalachian.
The lower division occupies all the eastern border, while the higher portions are situated
upon the western side and pass beneath Permo-Carboniferous,and Cretaceous strata. The
territory has been very little studied.
Iowa.— The Coal Measures of Iowa are divided by Prof. C. A. White, State Geologist,
into three parts, each about 200 feet in thickness. The area of the lowest division is 6,100
square miles, of the middle, 3400, and of the upper, 8,500, in all 18,000. The lowest is
the most important for producing coal, and occupies the eastern border of the tract, as
shown upon our map. The middle and lower divisions are grouped together as the lower
member upon our map.
Thickness.
Nos.
ft. in.
Sandstones and shales, two or three workable
beds, about........................................................ 200
L o w e r D iv is io n .
M i d d l e D i v is io n .
1-3
4
5-7
8
9-18
16
Shales, limestones,etc............................................ 43
Coal, Lacona............................................................
20
Sandstones andshales . ......................................... 40
Coal, P a n o ra ........... ............. ............................... 1
Shales, etc............................................................. 26 8
Coal, W heeler...........................................................
15
16
17
18.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26 (7)
e r ie s .
No. 1 ranges from two to three feet in thickness.
No. 2 ranges from two to five.
No. 3 ranges from three to four feet, and is local in its development.
No. 4 has been seen only at Cuba, where it is four and one-half feet thick.
No. 5 is almost universally developed, and is extensively worked.
It varies from three to nine feet in
thickness.
No. 6 is much like 5 in its development and valuable qualities, varying from three to seven feet in thickness.
The five seams o f the upper series range from a few inches to two feet in thickness, and are o f scarcely any
practical value. The limits of the upper part were furnished specially for the map by A. H. Worthen, State
Geologist
Nos.
17-32
33
34-41
42
43, 44
Shales, sandstones, limestones
Coal, Marshall.............................
Shales, etc....................................
Coal, Lyonsdale..........................
Shales...........................................
ft. in.
T2
5
20
55
2
M
U r r e R D iv is io n , W in t e r s e t S e c t i o n .
2-5 Limestone, etc......................................................... 84
6
C o a l ............................................................... ...........
18
7-16 Limestones, clays, carbonaceous shales, e tc __ 94
As the lower divisions extend beneath the higher, it is probable that the whole 18,000
square miles are to be regarded as workable territory.
Missouri.— According to G. C. Brodhead, State Geologist, the Coal Measures cover
an area of about 23,100 square miles in Missouri. He divides the series into three parts,
as in Iowa— the upper, or barren measures, occupying 8406, the middle 2,000, and the lower
12420 square miles. Upon our map the middle and lower divisions of Brodhead are
called the lower member, and upon the map the attempt has been made to make others
correspond in distribution with the corresponding members in Iowa
The aggregate thickness of the upper division is 137 feet, including about four feet
of coal in two seams of one foot each, and a few streaks. The middle division is 324 feet
thick with seven feet of coal, including two workable seams of 21 and 24 inches, a third
of one foot worked under favorable circumstances, besides six seams of extreme thinness.
The lower division is from 250 to 300 feet thick, embracing five workable beds, varying
from one-and-one-half to four-and-one-half feet each in thickness, and thin seams between
six and eleven inches, besides unimportant streaks— in all, 13 ft 6 in. The total thickness
is therefore near 1900 feet of Coal Measures and 24 ft 6 in. of coal.
Measures
Coal..........
Measures
Coal..........
Measures.
Coal..........
Measures.
Coal..........
Measures.
Coal---Measures.
50 to 90 ft.
21 inLafayette, Johnson, Carroll, and Livingston.
14 ft.
7 inLafayette and Ray.
36 ft.
2 ft. (Lexington )
Lafayette, Johnson, and Ray.
70 ft
1 foot.
Cass, Johnson, Lafayette, Livingston, Grundy.
164 ft.
3
in.
Pleasant Hill, Missouri City, and Princeton, Mercer County
379
U p p e r D iv is io n .
27
28
29
30
31
32 (1)
Coal..........
Measures.
C oa l.........
Measures.
Coal..........
M easures.
10 in.
207 ft.
12 in.
392 ft.
12 in.
339 ft-
Platte County.
Andrew, Buchanan, D eKalb, Gentry, Platte.
Holt, W. part of Nodaway and northwardly.
Nebraska.— The area marked Carboniferous in this State, upon Dr. Hayden’s map,
measures about 3,600 square miles. The outcrops belong entirely to the upper of the
three divisions of Iowa and Missouri; all geologists agree that it is not likely to afford any
good workable beds of coal. Beds of the thickness of six, eleven, fifteen, and twenty-two
inches, are reported from different counties. The coal is usually inferior, but may be used
in the neighborhood to some advantage in the absence of all other fuel, but good workable
coals are yet to be discovered in Nebraska They may yet be found at considerable depths.
Kansas.— Prof. Swallow estimates the area occupied by the Coal Measures in Kansas
at 17,000 square miles. 1 he same three divisions occur here as in Iow’a and Missouri, but
we have not the means of separating them upon the map. The rocks dip slightly to the
northeast, and consequently the upper unproductive division is the one most largely
developed.
The elaborate section of the Coal Measures given by Prof. Swallow shows 22 different
seams of coal, varying from a few inches to seven feet in thickness. Ten are over a foot
thick. 1 he measures amount to 2000 feet in thickness, being made up of more than 80
different seams of limestone.
„
No.
S ummary of S wallow’ s Section in A scending O rder.
1 Ijn oer Carboniferous Form ation . . . .
............... .....................................................
2 /.osoer Coal series, contains 24 layers, five beds coal................................................................... .
(1) 6 to 10 inches. (2) 3 feet. (3) 2 to 4 inches. (4) 2 to 6 inches. (5) 5 to 7 feet.
3 Fort Scott M arble series, 7 layers, coal hed 2 ft. 6 i n . . ...............................................................
4 Fort Scott series, 12 layers, two coal seams, 6 in. and 16 in........................................................
5 Pawnee limestone series, 9 layers, 6 inches coal......................................................................
6 M arais de Cygnes coal series, 25 layers, 4 seams coal.............. ...................................................
(1) 2 to 3 feet. (2) 1 foot to 2 ft. 6 in. (3) 1 ft. 8 in. to 2 ft. 9 in. (4) 2 inches!
7 W ell rock series, 11 layers, coal I to 5 inches ...............................................................................
8 Spring rock series, 9 layers, two seams coal, 6 in. to 1 foot, and 4 to 8 inches..........................
9 Cave rock series................................................................................................
10 Stanton limestone scries, 5 layers, coal 12 to 30 inches.................................................................
11 Chocolate limestone series, 10 layers........................................... .....................................................
12 Upper Coal M easures, 56 layers, 3 scams coal, I to 3 and 4 to 10 inches.................................
Thickness.
120 feet.
353 "
O• ••
%
142 “
1 12
“
33 “
0
238 “
88
••
75 “
74 “
79 "
31 •
9 •
Indian Territory.— The Coal Measures are made to cover as much as 13,600 square
miles upon the map. Little is known of the coal outcrops. The officers of the Missouri,
Kansas, and 1 exas R. R. Company find good banks of coal at several places along their
line several feet thick.
Arkansas.— There are twro beds of coal in Arkansas beneath the millstone grit,
according to D. D. Owen and Lesquereux. They are each four or five feet in thickness.
Ow’en estimates the area occupied by the coal-bearing rocks in this State at 12,000 square
miles. Macfarlane states it to be 9,043 square miles.
T exas B asin .
According to A. R. Roessler in the “ Almanac,” the measures occupv 6,000 square
miles in this State. Our map is copied from one furnished by him. B. F. Shumard esti
mates the thickness of the measures at 300 feet. S. B. Buckley says there are from two to
four scams of coal at Fort Belknap, and six miles further north another five feet thick.
This field may be the continuation of the Missouri, as the space between them, along the
valley of Red River, is occupied by newer and overlying formations.
Arizona.— Near Camp Apache, Mr. G. K. Gilbert of the expedition under the direc
tion of Lieut. G. M. \\ heeler, reports a bed of coal belonging to the true Carboniferous
series. Twe other examples are mentioned by Prof. Blake.
T riassic C oal .
The map does not extend far enough w’est to allow7 of the delineation of Rocky
Mountain areas underlaid by beds of lignite. The outcrops of a later coal are shown in
Virginia and North Carolina The best known is the Chesterfield County field near Rich
mond, Y a , estimated at 185 square miles. Coal was mined here before the opening of
7
collieries in any other part of the country. The thickness of the beds vary, the largest
being at the Creek Pit, where 52 feet of clear coal are contained in a thickness of 58 feet
The two other Triassic areas in Virginia are not known to contain beds of coal. The most
southern one in North Carolina is known as the Deep River Basin, containing 5 beds,
having a thickness of three, one, three, two, and four feet respectively. It is known to be
30 miles in length with a width of 12 to 14 miles. The other is the Dan River field,
about 40 miles in length and from four to seven miles wide. The coals are less promising
than in the other field.
There are other Triassic areas in the field of the map, but they are not represented, as
no coal of any consequence is known to occur in them.
*
pi.ii
m
a « ea
POP------ RAINTOBACCO
*
obrat *
l
\lulnrt
A
'V r*
«
on, on
264386
1 /4
64
IS
28
to b a c c o
W
H
' ) |08 « 0
S 'O0
iR ,,1^^000
C.
- 9 2 0 0 0 0 , Jfc,
1938000
JS ^ ,1 3 149 000
5 1. 32 ?0 0
4 0
ry |,334 000
• '■ 6 90 0
7 0
,.'^ " 3 * 0 0 0
/ // >
>/ / /
✓ 'S rB O
g O
^ 2 154000
32 240 0 0 0
18^
74
2 0 0J
b0
7 2 3 .9 9 4
/(i*JHh’n*rfr
H
yt/rm
y*Io n s
o nu
1
.0,111,ft,
m
an
Area . in square m iles.
Haiti Fall, in in ,‘/n s rfit*n the (7rorf n/'.laniuil Hnut /h//
/nihhshe,/ Ay the Sm i/hsnnitw IrishIn turn 18711,
Coni and Wheal. m bushels.
Tobacco and Rice, in p ou n d s.
S u g a r . /// /nsf-v/nm/s
cli are added certain sta tistics com piled Fn>in th
( otlon . /// bn/es
Steam Power and Water Power tn /u a llv cnifr/oi rd rn
R E T T R X S OF POPVLATION AND INDI STKY
at the Ninth C en su s 18*0
M a/m /hc/nrr.\\ in t,hr n n il ol'hornt /n>\eer
fitat'
p i.nr
p i.iv:
^------------- r
(
«
A
sf*
lA
,
Y
T)
\
w
---------
\
\ 1
A - W
— 1
>
^>
Ns
■r ~ ', '£ y /
7
r
yh
y \
** '
“ vvJT
!i/ -:V
^ %
WA|
!i
E
1
&
K
v“
V
W f_
J
i- V s
3# '
ggd/lii
i? \ ‘H.IW ’
&
7"t ,n
yJ / A '
7
^;
'icxU
t
sp
L=
3
UtKM
ftt.-
WffM
-~ a '
•i
ji?
~
—it
5 :“^
d T
v-
\
\
•I'M 'it...
AKKD
ificlU j 5f S
|
W, r
k
'
£ Yr
4(> amr# to the tty.?.hit
C
3 ,/ s S
KST/VCAspo
C/l-l
l'ndrr
I U
S HOWI X G I X F IV ]•: D E G H K E S ()F I) E XS I T Y
THE I) I STRIBUTIOX OF
W O o n I, A N I)
W IT H IX THE T E R R I T O R Y OF THE
U N I T E D STATES,
S60 and at r /
C o m p ile d b y
•i
_
?t\
-.1 \ \ is
_
Lincoln
N-t>ti««V
<r k
T
t I CI
imo i v
A ’ l t /i .v i i '
r-£fT'.wi
' i s Sj, ^ S T t T i
IT
oOV"1
1'
s^
j
T
\
R
\
/:} T » "““'“
i.u 'u
v \
T
(—
\ 28
«A '’v,,v
s
(ia e n
lv ftto
'c
tw rm
ia im
KMX CHART
III1 TMTHl) s t a t u s
!
SIIIAVIN(i Till-: DISTHIIHTION BY
ISOIIYETAI. LINKS OFTlIli MKAN l'KHCHMTATION
IN ItAIN AND MKITKD SNOW
VOW Tin: YKAlt.
CoitsInicUMl under llicdim'lion of
lMtOK.IOSKlMI IIHNRY. SerV. Smithsonian Institution
iYom materials collorhMl and observations made
lor Iho Smilhsoniun Institution
|)v (HAS. A SCHOTT Assl I S Toast Survrv,
with additions to
I
,
1872 .
,
i
i \\ \ \ \\ l
A
k lttffe.
Yf
— -----M i
TUfnumlxrs < blue im tuute the nun h ill i/i hntfhsh inchest
//
the Itrohrn lim y tin ■ inynnnnitiltviiy.
H ir/vnytiltilitvi on theincim /tii/i mm/es wvst 0/ Inuufilitdf /(*!'
tlioiuih <
‘ll<it tvnsit/endtle. islo o im /xr/rti/vknotm to /< dr/inniln/.
>■
//f r/u/nnrt/ tun/ ftri/ilrd /hr t/tf X/tt/ix/ictt/
. Ii/tt.v o f ' r/a Ifni/td fftu/tu. irM prnnt,witni o f
/‘n>/. './oxt/i/i //tn n Sn v. Xm /I/m oh u u i /rt.v/iftuioo
» 4
■ le fc t
a fa
lirtu
m
S u C ty
io x «
Sprintffi®
*
.Sprum
llB"'
:«<W
f \ .
*L n x k
I'mur,
Miii-»l,,,ll!
1
Suvuimm
/
U Uht'Il
i«
(ia citlo
lv il
•U filial
iiy
l.S.SIGNAL SERVICE CHART
Mtu io H y
u n ro ^
Sluiwiug the
rm:(^i k \( v o r storm ( k n t k k s .
Num ol’ Storm C
ber
entres passin ov eachp in
g er
o t
(leclucedfrcnnihe av g of the tw years
era e
o
M
airli l!!7l to FeLnnu-v 1H clu
73in sive
Compiled from datu collcclrd ut (hi*
OITico o f (lie CluiT Signal Officer of H Army.
it*
fro m
1 to .V
fro m
5 to 10
fro m
10 to 15.
fro m
1
15tu 2 0 . |
Note.
////.*• (h u r t xhcmvrthe IrrinitNcy in/Ji which the rrn/rv iVf/m/.v ot'low
banmulcrfaxfumetl tourcruof tit)y milesin i/iiim .fcr/h.nc /*m.vw i’fcniny
./in n tft.s1ru1. h div.t net m./mie
Ii h . i I
Ih/in.lcr or l/.iil 'ionns
l{ ^
IV i
iiiltiik
M rqiuM
u
Gwen
Vnundfc'jK
iKamUll
Sm uz Ci^fj
l«»vrnI ily
----- --
h k
-,
I.IIK llI o
'o
Nrbra.skn I’ll
,
k*nvor
- C 'l
! ^
o a .— *
v
l
>nn :
!
K
Hanmbul
AllllliM I
M
/u h h i i k
A'////
ciscuntAfi
Sprung
f \ incenn*"
C
ity
A
Spriii^*iS»l|
r—-
T«te— !
n **'
iattw
v
(■
S V-
C » (S
h *t*<
S*V«,U ’
lU
k n ftM p
lo U M
(J J v
*
\
tv
IjjM M
Q l;is
1
III..
L y M t
f Chi
\ \ m .A / S r i |Y\
,
\Aa
U /^
v ?:
S'M W
«V j
H o ilsln ll
[yptttoii
(
U\
f
c~
i
TKMIMillATritE ( IIAUr
K V *
.1- im
OF THE UNITED STATES.
SHOWING TIIK DISTRIBUTION
BY ISOTHERMAL LINKS OK TilK MKAN TKMPKRATURK
lie c/n/n tut / a/"/ pri/Utt/ ti>r tin .S utixtira /
'/
FOR THE YEAR
. U/ft.v o f f/n L'tiitrr/ SYf/i/x. m'i// /umiifixio/i o f
Constructed under the direction of
lMtOE JOSEPH UKNltY Se<y. Sm ithsonian Institution
by (’HAS. A.SCIIOTT, Asst.P.S.Coast Survey,
in October, 1J171?.
11
2
IID
17
1
IU
13
1
■fnxr/i/i //< t / r M i r s/iti//i.voniiut /nxtitution
/
III
107
i'mitniLi
cj) b a i« !
> i« iW
ir
/
IrtPlidu City
" a/Vl.
V
ci« «
n **
K m i.vii.i
1 K
A
K
± £-4 .J»
'/.v
r~—
, sN
____ A J
s
1
"Tl F (iiU t
? son
t < P y
>
lireon
S r» li? t
p m l>
W*
\
I
?
Nr, / Q
\
+
iunhviV
W
^
iQ O j
UO
y/t/fr
rv*\!
\# Uh«
i
San AnMu<»
^ yn w
■ u
xinl'IiriHl
r.S.SKINAI. SKKVICI
u iA in
Showing (lit
K
.-vV.V»l
At la:. 1. M.ol'llu! hottest weekol’llii-. in m l uml
’
At Zur.A.M of Qw coldest week nl’IKJ J and
in l>lin
t'»ni|iilnl IVolil iliitu <ollt-t It'd itl llio
Office of tlif Chief Signal Officer of the Arinv
PI. VIII
P1.X.
PI. IX.
)
vx
L\
Vs
1
A-
r<*-
W
.'. J
*
V ’ W i
•t i i V -
v W
t
-i
VJ
i»v
S 5/ Y /
J 'J $ A S
/ /
( \
)-, _y
S
A "
A&k
\!w }
\
V V K A
B tr
A
s ?
/
JPIm-mi
/
r ,
/
Xf J L U
,j
Jtv
) -A l \ f
A x
|
/y^i
Xg
■&£> >
_
______
r„
I. O H A D u
3 ■_'Tj's.
X }i
s r
c
um
sao8€„
invoxt*1
sn«
CHART,
SHOWING
A UAL. MEANS OF BAROMETER
TOTAL MOVKMKNT OF AIR WITH RESULTANTS
tor ntrtixurntnj movement, of air.
Com piled from data, co lle cte d at the office of
C h ie f Signal Officer of the Army.
M*
.)cfltcha »Y,n
*
IVnibinu
s'. J o M V
O
Atchison
Hannibal
c]SCVfSX
Spn
iiff
■1
Spruill»*\
V
b
lltrm t
M
C oii«
\uiU
r//,■
//
N. < a *
S r itIf ill' Ik1rvul mil*
ShviiH 1
I'1'
<//>m
r
IV//f)
*/
(mm *(0)0 to 80000 |
-
80 ) to-(0(00
(0 1
S ' Ma|Vi*#j
lU iiU
W ont*'
00.‘(00
(0 1
,
S'-Antl""
/
)
too to ,l»0CI
ii
San An m
M tt»' 40O f)
tmV o/W
iu
bimrium
i»pM riH
rU (h li
M a lm iio r a N
HYPSOMETRIC SKETCH
OF THE
UNITED STATES
V
.-v'*'-"
ZZa / / curvtaof■ // oat/ /Z /J Zcr/ ///’ H/nv/wn (vruy/ruc/o//o' A /hn/o/
nr
/(>
O
The /nr/runr.r< /Z/WO■ ■ /((((((otol A'OOO/rd»/'lilrnilioii
>'
con.f/ror/n//i C/trts A./u/totLAsstUS (oastSurry
Rrpro<lurt»<l from Ihn 'V iloI SIVl(IS11('S Ninth (CliHus 1 170.
(
Shor«* lino Ironi tho CoiihI Survey. iiuxiiiliiiiiN from
1---------- H ----_____ £
—
■--- ---------
Survey*
_____ j------- ------
l
l
i
pi.xn.
PI. XI.
to
•
TO
\AS^\
n«ur\
wt!st:nsu>
romuilunLt heneoth the ton l Allen mures
Lon-er t o n / .t/eamnirrs
l n p e r liutl.lieturnte.t
Tkassk> rrrr
. in thru a tr
jtavr.Biaxcrrr
ifrrrii''1
"
UiXlSVTO*
H n.nn.s
T
rinssn- (on/
■filll'HO
A JV *-'
.V IU
1
. /I n mill in
OKU1VV
xvinrn.it
iTrAXo°M
itrHts
U I*-” 11" '
II.IM
r 0A
H*
MAP OF THE
COAL FIELDS
Alta,
ofteie
TATTED STATES
C O M P IL E D FROM STATE R E P O R T S
ANI) DATA SP E C IA L LY FURNISHED BY PROF. W B. ROGERS.
E. T. COX. A.H.WOKTHEN. S. S.LYON,RICHARD OMEN. A.R ROESSLER.
R.P ROTHWELL. J.VMAFFARLANE. (iC.SWALLOW ANDWTC.KERR,
H
I
CHARLES H HITCHCOCK.
To which are added Ihe Statistics of Coal ftoduct f o r the ve-ar ending.hine 1 ’
*
compiled from the Statistics of Industry, Ninth Census, 18/ 0
in
F R A N CIS A.W ALKER.
o au
/M ch
^Chunk
Note
M ap o f the F irst a n d Seco n d A n thracite Coal F ields ot
9
fr
97
'
95°
Pennsylvania
n r S p u r s im /josr,/ upon fA r O n / / ir/r/s n prr.rrn/ /Ar /Anusnm /s •* fm .y n /' AA n /
m is t* / d u rin a tAr A rnsus y ea r /m m fA r yrne/nA nrrr/AAorAntff/. .)« nAAm/pA
A ris A rm m nr/r Art Am/A/m tA r pn///As oA nrA/a/A wnrAv/tf/ .
p i .xiit
-A | r Lryt
\
\ 'V y j
•v? s ?
CH .A
i V
e m m / r , »»•*•»*■ •
«Fakkd
E X P L A N A T IO N
OF C O L O R S
cozoic
CAMBRIAN
a id
SILURIAN
DEVONIAN
TRIAS SIC A3 JURASSIC
.D
GEOLOGICAL m a p
CRETACEOUS
OF
TH E
TERTIARY
C O M P IL E D 1IY
ALLUVIUM
W. P. B L A K E
VOLCANIC
from sources mentioned in the text
Sotr There may he seme Metamorphw Paleozenc formaturns included in the A tlantic
1824-
portion o f the Konunc. In the western p a n ion the Metamorphic Mesozoic formaticns
art a sh partially separated from it. T h e Paleozoic Sy stem a n d th e Cenozenc
System are not subdivided west o f IPO • W
”Lon g Greenw ich except in th e arise
Lith by J Bien N.Y
ofa few Post tertiary lacustrine areas an d d ella s.
/
AREAS AND POLITICAL DIVISIONS OP THE UNITED STA TES .787 0 > 74.
B Y S. W. S T O C K IN G , U N IT E D S T A T E S P A T E N T O F F IC E .
[PLATE XV ]
H E Area Map [Plate X V .] and this explanatory text with tables are an amplifica
tion of the Area Map and “ Historical N otes” in Volume I. of the Ninth Census
of the United States [1870]. The map is intended to display the areal changes
occasioned by successive political boundaries during the era of States. Upon it extensive
tracts of territory including more than an existing State or Territory, and also the present
States or Territories, are designated by name, and minor parcels are distinguished by
letter.
The matter explanatory of the map consists of— rst An alphabetical list (pp. 3 to 6)
of existent and obsolete civil divisions. Under the name of each existing civil division,
is placed a brief description of each parcel of land which contributes to its present area.
Here the parcels are specified by their letters on the map. 2d. A Table (pp. 8 to 9)
showing the original extent and subsequent areal changes of each political division, and the
transfers, among such divisions of each parcel of territory smaller than the political division
of which it is now a part. Here, also, the parcels are designated by the letters which they bear
upon the map. By the combined use of this table and the map any reader can easily recon
stitute the States and Territories as they were at any one of the numerous dates indicated,
and by means of tracing-paper, draw in a few minutes a map of the United States which
shall be true and precise for the date taken. 3d. A Table (p. 7) presenting area and
population, together with average density of settlement at the successive censuses.
The area of the United States in its original extent and its subsequent accessions,
though represented on the map in colored masses, with names and dates, yet requires a
more precise and ample presentation. To this the remainder of the text is devoted.
A map, dated a. ix 1776, covering territory co-extcnsive with the United States a. n.
1874, presents these features : A t the northeast, but south of the River St. Lawrence, Massa
chusetts begins with the former Sagadahoc territory and province of Maine, continues over
its present area to New York, while, westward of Pennsylvania, broadening from the lati
tude of its present southern boundary to that of Lake Winnipiseogee in New Hampshire,
it reaches a western limit on the River Mississippi. New York has its present area, and
north of Massachusetts has a boundary on New Hampshire, which extends between New
York and the northeastern spur of Massachusetts. Rhode Island appears as on the maps of
to-day. Connecticut has its present area, while beyond Pennsylvania it extends to the River
Mississippi. Pennsylvania has no corner, as now, between New York and Lake Erie. New
Jersey, Delaware, and Maryland present forms familiar to modem maps. Virginia reaches
over to the Mississippi river and northward to the western territory of Connecticut. North
Carolina and Georgia, in full width, and South Carolina, in a narrow belt, enfold the land
to the common western river. On the south of Georgia, peninsular East Florida trends
westward to the River Appalachicola, and West Florida asserts a disputed northern limit
at the parallel of the mouth of the Yazoo river in the westland of Georgia. Quebec,
reaching southward over the southern trapping grounds of the Hudson’s Bay Company
and over the western lands of Massachusetts, Connecticut, and Virginia, claims to cover
the whole territory between the Ohio and Mississippi rivers and the great lakes. Between
the Mississippi riv^r and the Stony Mountains, lies Louisiana, a Spanish dependency.
Beyond to the Pacific stretches the vast expanse of the older Spanish America. And at
the extreme northwest, there points towards the opposing continent a peninsula whose for
bidding coast has been hitherto but a few times visited by European navigators.
The British dependencies which thus occupied the land east of the Mississippi— the
Floridas and Quebec excepted— by the acts of their delegates in Congress (1776) became
the original Thirteen States. In the next year (November 15, 1777) their Congress, as a
basis of a general government, adopted Articles of Confederation. The first of these Arti
cles reads, “ The style of this Confederacy shall be the United States of America” The
Articles were referred to the several Stales for their approval. The different views respect
ing the unsettled lands at the west were the chief hindrance to the ratification of the
Articles and the completion of the Confederacy. Each State carefully claimed the largest
extent of soil and jurisdiction which its most favorable charter or the most liberal con
struction of acts of discovery and exploration could be made to comprehend. The doc
trine was maintained that each State succeeded to royal rights and domain within its
limits; and that right of soil and jurisdiction so vested in the State could not, against
its will, be deported to any Confederacy. Hence the seven States having extensive
claims to western lands tenaciously resisted any attempt to restrict their boundaries in
behalf of the Confederacy, while the six States whose areas had precise limitation and
small extent from the eastern sea-coast, as earnestly insisted that, as the unoccupied west
must be conquered or defended from inroad by the joint efforts and at the common
expense of all, so it should be possessed by the general government for the common welfare.
The immediate result of the controversy appears in two provisions of the Articles of Confed
eration. One asserts that “ each State retains its sovereignty, freedom and independence,
and evety power, jurisdiction, and right” not expressly delegated to the United States;
and another, after prescribing a court and procedure for the settlement of areal and other
disputes between States,concludes with," Provided, also, that no State shall be deprived of
territory for the benefit of the United States.” These provisions were unsatisfactory to
T
the States having small areas, and their approvals to the Articles were given singly and with
reluctance. Maryland, sturdily asserting her right in common with all other States to a
share in the western lands, at last stood alone in dissent. Then Congress, by Resolutions
(September 6 and October 10, 1780), urged upon the States the policy of surrendering to
the United States a portion of their unoccupied western territory, and asserted the condi
tions which should bind the Confederacy on the acceptance of such cessions. These, briefly
stated, were guarantees that the ceded lands should be used for the common benefit, and
when peopled should be divided into republican States to be admitted into the Confederacy
on an equality with its original States. Thereupon New York, Connecticut, and Virginia
offered to cede their western lands, and upon this evidence that there would be a western
public domain, Maryland authorized its delegates in Congress to sign the Articles of Con
federation, which they did on the day of the first (New York) cession, and by their signa
tures completed the Confederacy.
[The States ratified the Articles of Confederation by the signatures of their delegates in Congress, in the fol
lowing order : In 1778; July 9, Massachusetts Bay, Rhode Island and Providence Plantations, Connecticut,
New \ ork, Virginia, and South Carolina; July 21, North Carolina; July 22, Pennsylvania; July 24, Georgia;
August 8, New Hampshire; November 26, New Jersey. In 1779; February 12, and May 5, Delaware; and
finally m 1781, March 1, Maryland.]
A s these authorized cessions were not then made, other States held warily to their
unsettled wilds. Again and again Congress, first by an address to the States (April 18,
1783). afterward by a Resolution (April 29, 1784), urged territorial concessions as a source of
common revenue, a removal of jurisdictional and other disputes, and a means for promo
ting and perpetuating the harmony and unity of the States. One after another the States
made their cessions until Georgia (1802) made the final response to the appeal.
[The prominent details of these cessions may be presented chronologically as follows :
N av York authorized a cession in February 1780, and executed it March 1, 1781. It was renewed by deed
April 19, 1785. The claims ceded were titles acquired by treaties with the Six Nations o f Indians and covered
the whole territory from the lower of the Great Lakes southward across the valley o f the River Ohio as far as the
Cumberland Mountains. October 29, 1782, the cession was accepted by the United States.
Virginia offered to cede, by Act of Januaiy 2, 1781. Congress, by Act of September 13, 1783, agreed to
accept the cession as offered. Thereupon Virginia, by Act of October 20, 1783, authorized its delegates in Con
gress to complete the transfer, which was done by deed, March 1, 1784. The deed conveyed all the title and
claims of the State o f Virginia to territory northwest o f the River Ohio. Virginia, by virtue of conquests of her
militia, asserted title as far north as Lakes Erie and Michigan, but due recognition of the ancient charter boun
dary of the colony o f Connecticut, places the northern limit o f the cession on the forty-first parallel o f north lati
tude and permits it to comprise only those parts of the States of Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois, situated south of
that parallel. In this cession there was reserved to the State of Virginia, as military bounty lands for her soldiery,
both in the militia and in the Continental line, the entire territory (6,570 square miles) in the present State of
Ohio, and between the Scioto and Little Miami rivers from their sources to the River Ohio.
Massachusetts, November 13, 1784, authorized a cession by her delegates in Congress. April 18, 1875,
Congress agreed to accept the cession, and April 19, 1785, it was executed. It included all title of the State of
Massachusetts to territory west of the present western boundary o f the State of New York, and covered the land
from the State of Pennsylvania to the Mississippi river, and giving the full extent of the first charter o f the
colony, between the latitude o f the southern boundary of the western extremity o f the present State of Massa
chusetts and the latitude of a league north o f the inflow o f Lake Winnipiseogee in the State o f New Hampshire.
Connecticut, October 10, 1780, having offered to cede with restrictions which were unsatisfactory to the United
States, on the second I hursday o f May, 1786, again authorized a cession. May 26, 1786, Congress expressed
readiness to accept the cession as proposed; and September 14, 1786, the cession was accomplished by the exe
cution of a deed and its acceptance by Congress. This cession embraced the soil and jurisdiction of the terri
tory east o f the River Mississippi between the latitudinal parallels o f 41° and 42°2', and west of a meridian one
hundred and twenty miles west of the present western limit of the State of Pennsylvania. Connecticut, by Act
of October, 1797, authorized the release to the United States of jurisdiction over the land between the eastern
boundary of her former cession and the present western boundary of the State of Pennsylvania. This transfer
was consummated May 30, 1800. The State retained the right of soil in the same territory, which, lying in the
present State of Ohio between 4 1n and 42°2', and reaching from the western bounc(ary of the State o f Pennsyl
vania westward one hundred and twenty miles, has ever since been known as “ The Western Reserve o f Con
necticut.” In 1792 the State conveyed five hundred thousand acres in the western part o f this reserve to certain
of its citizens as compensation for their property destroyed by fire and pillage during the Revolution. September
9 < * 7 9 5 ’ ^ e State alienated the remainder of this Reserve for one million and two hundred thousand dollars.
This sum was appropriated as a fund whose annual interest is pledged to the support o f schools.
South Carolitia, August 19, 1787, by her delegates in Congress, authorized by a previous act o f the State
Legislature, executed a deed o f cession, and April 2, 1790, Congress accepted the deed. It conveyed an oblong
parcel o f land from twelve to fourteen miles in width and now forming the northernmost portions o f the States of
Georgia, Alabama, and Mississippi.
North Carolina, December 22, 1789, by Act, authorized a cession. Pursuant to that Act, the Senators of
the State in Congress executed a deed of cession, which the United States accepted by Act o f April 2, 1790.
The deed conveyed the area o f the present State o f Tennessee.
Georgia, February 5, 1788, by Act, authorized its delegates in Congress to cede to the United States sub
stantially that territory o f the former British Province of West Florida which projects north o f the 31st parallel
of north latitude. Congress, by Resolution of July 15, 1788, rejected this proposed cession. April 7,1798, Con
gress, by Act, authorized a Commission to meet a like Commission from the State o f Georgia empowered to treat
concerning the conflicting territorial claims of the Confederacy and the State. By A ct of May 10, 1800, Congress
authorized the Commissioners on the part of the United States to finally settle the controversy and pass cessions.
April 2 }, 1802, by Articles o f agreement and cession entered into by these commissioners, Georgia ceded to the
United States her claims to the whole territory between her present western boundary, shortened at its northern
end by twelve to fourteen miles (the western limit o f T on the map), and the River Mississippi ; while the United
States ceded to Georgia that part o f the cession by South Carolina to the United States which lies east o f the
present western boundary of Georgia ( T ). These Articles were ratified by the State o f Georgia, June 16, 1802.
This agreement included, among others, provisions for— 1st, payment, out o f proceeds from the sale of land
in the cession, of $1,250,000 to the State of Georgia as a reimbursement o f its expenses in relation to the terri
tory ceded ; 2d, the appropriation o f 500,000 acres, or the proceeds of at most that quantity of land, to satisfythe claims against the land o f the cession; and 3d, extinguishment o f the Indian title to specified parts of the
cession. It resulted that the United States, in addition to the cession to Georgia, paid not far from $3,000,000 for
this cession from Georgia.]
The O riginal Public Land o f the United States.— The Confederacy asserted jurisdiction
over all of that portion of the present territory of the United States east of the Mississippi
river from the present British possessions on the north to Florida on the south. The con
2
AREAS AN D
P O L IT IC A L D IV IS IO N S OF T H E U N ITE D STATES, 1776— 1874.
cessions from the States to the Confederacy, which have been described, divided this region
into two distinctive portions: one along the coast, whose soil was vested in the thirteen
States in severalty; another, inland, whose soil and exclusive jurisdiction were possessed by
the Confederacy. These State and Federal domains were separated by an irregular line
along the present western boundaries of the States of New York, Pennsylvania, West V ir
ginia, North Carolina and Georgia. Westward of this line, and separated into two parcels
by the territory of the present State of Kentucky, lay the original public domain of the
young Confederacy, comprising 406,952 square miles, while the aggregate area of the
thirteen States was but 420,892 square miles.
The O riginal Territorial Government.— Plans for the erection of governments on
this domain, early engaged the attention of the Congress of the Confederacy. Coincident
with the cession by Virginia, Jefferson, its delegate in Congress, anticipating prompt ces
sions from the remaining States, reported from a committee a plan of government for the
whole public territory. This plan required seventeen new States, each covering about
two degrees of latitude, arranged in two tiers separated by meridians, each tier containing
eight States, the seventeenth State to be east of the eastern tier and between the Ohio
River and the western boundary of Pennsylvania. The report included the famous proviso
that “ after the year 1800, there shall be neither slavery nor involuntary servitude in any of
the said States other than in the punishment of crimes, whereof the party shall have been
duly convicted.” When the proviso was put to vote three States were unrepresented.
Three, Maryland, Virginia and South Carolina, voted nay— North Carolina was divided.
The four New England States, with New York and Pennsylvania, voted aye. Failing
to receive the additional vote necessaiy to complete a majority, the proviso was stricken
out of the report, which was thereupon adopted. This ordinance was in no instance
applied in erection of a government.
Again (July 13, 1787), soon after the region northwest of the River Ohio had been
transferred to the Confederacy by the cessions of New York, Virginia, Massachusetts and
Connecticut, another ordinance was enacted, erecting “ The territory northwest of the
River Ohio.” To this ordinance were appended six articles, the last of which provided for
the future formation, on the land within the Territory, of not less than three nor more than
five States, as follows: the western State, between the Mississippi, Ohio, and Wabash Rivers
and a north line from Port Vincent on the latter river to British territory; the middle
State, between the last recited line, the Ohio River and a north line from the mouth of the
Great Miami to the border line; the eastern State, between the last described line, the Ohio
River, the State of Pennsylvania and the national boundary. Authority was reserved to
create two States in that part of the territory north of the latitudinal parallel of the southern
extremity of Lake Michigan. It will be noticed that the meridional boundaries between
those projected States which were plotted on the River Ohio now separate the States of
Illinois, Indiana and Ohio, while the northern part of the original Territory has included the
entire States of Michigan and Wisconsin, and furnished a part of the territory of the State
of Minnesota.
Article V I. of the Ordinance of 1787 was as follows: “ There shall be neither slavery
nor involuntary servitude in the said territory, otherwise than in punishment of crimes,
whereof the party shall have been duly convicted : Provided always that any person escap
ing into the same, from whom labor or service is lawfully claimed, in any one of the original
States, such fugitive may be lawfully reclaimed and conveyed to the person claiming his
or her labor or service as aforesaid” This inhibition of slavery, save that it was imme
diate, is in the very terms of the defeated proviso in the first or Jeffersonian project. A t
the submission of this ordinance to vote, eight States were represented in Congress and
all voted for the measure. The passage of the Article was possibly secured by the appension of the proviso respecting the return of fugitives from slavery and by the tacit
understanding that slavery would be permitted in the public domain south of the Ohio
River.
O riginal Area o f the United States.— Meanwhile, and prior to the last two of the
cessions by the States, the independence of the States forming the Confederacy had been
recognized by Great Britain in the Provisional Treaty of Peace signed at Paris, November
30,1782, and in the definitive Treaty of Peace between Great Britain and the United States
concluded at Paris, September 3, 1783. By the second Article of the Treaty, the bounda
ries of the territory of the United States were declared.
[In substance they ran from the mouth of the St. Croix River to its head and thence “ due north from fhe
source of the St. Croix River to the Highlands ; along the said Highlands which divide those rivers that empty
themselves into the River St. Lawrence from those which fall into the Atlantic Ocean, to the northwesternmost
head of the Connecticut River,” and down that river to and westward along the forty-fifth parallel, to and along
the middle of the Ontario, Erie, Huron, Superior, and Long Lakes and their water connections “ to the most
northwestern point of the Lake of the Woods, and thence on a due west course to the River Mississippi,” thence
down the middle of that river to and along the thirty-first parallel, to and along the middle of the River Appalachicola to its junction with the Flint River, and thence straight to the head of and down the River St. Mary’s
to the Atlantic Ocean, and included all islands within twenty leagues of the Atlantic coast.]
The western and southern boundaries of this original area of the United States were
confirmed by treaty with Spain, the contiguous owner, October 27, 1795. The northern
line was the subject of protracted and difficult negotiations with Great Britain. The
Treaty of London, November 19, 1794, included provisions for determining the River S t
Croix and its source, and the source of the Mississippi River. By Treaty of Ghent,
December 24, 1814, three Commissions were authorized: one to settle title to islands off
the coast of Maine ; another, to determine the boundary from the source of the River St.
Croix to the River S t Lawrence; and a third, to lay the line from the River St. Lawrence
to the western point of Lake Huron, and also, as a separate duty, thence to the most north
western water of the Lake of the Woods. The first Commission, November 24, 1807,
awarded Moore, Dudley and Frederick islands to the United States and all other islands
in Passamaquoddy Bay, and also the Isle of Grand Menan to Great Britain. The third
Commission defined their portion of the boundary line in their decision dated at Utica,
New York, June 18, 1822. The second Commission failed to agree, and after repeated
attempts, all disputes affecting this boundary of the Treaty of 1783 were adjusted by the
Webster-Ashburton Treaty of Washington, August 9,1842, where may be found the present
line from the Atlantic Ocean to the S t Lawrence River, and from the western terminus of
the work of the Utica Commission, to the westernmost water of the Lake of the Woods, and
thence— confirming the Treaty of October 20, 1818— due south to the forty-ninth parallel.
It will be seen that the United States commenced its career as an acknowledged
government with the landed area which it now possesses east of the River Mississippi and
north of the State of Florida, and, westward of that State, north of the thirty-first parallel,
being an extent of 827,844 square miles.
The Union o f the United States o f America.— The States having found their Con
federacy too feeble for the exigencies of a protracted war for independence, provided “ a
more perfect union ” by adopting (September 17, 1787), in the Congress of the Confed
eracy, the Constitution of the United States, with provisions for its submission to the
several States for ratification by conventions to be called by the Legislatures and chosen
by the people in each State. The last ratification was secured within three years of the
adoption of the Constitution by Congress, when the Union consisted of the Thirteen
States and the one Territory of the Confederacy.
[The States ratified the Constitution of the Union by signatures o f their Delegates in succession as follows :
Delaware, December 7, 1787; Pennsylvania, December 12, 1787; New Jersey, December 18, 1787; Georgia.
January 2, 1788; Connecticut, January 9, 1788; Massachusetts, February 6, 1788; Maryland, April 28, 1788;
South Carolina, May 23, 1788 : New Hampshire, June 21, 1788; Virginia, June 26, 1788 ; New York, July 26,
1788; North Carolina, November 21, 1789; Rhode Island, May 29, 1790.
The ratification o f nine States was sufficient to establish this union between the ratifying States. Accord
ingly the ratification o f New Hampshire established, and that of Rhode Island completed, the Union. ]
C
e s s io n s
by
F
o r e ig n
P ow ers
to
th e
U
n it e d
S tates.
The French Cession.— Spain having held during thirty-seven years the Province of
Louisiana which she had received (1763) from France, receded it October 1, 1800, to
France, and France, April 30, 1803, ceded it to the United States. After this accession
negotiations with Great Britain were begun, to determine its northern boundary. In 1807
an agreement was reached, but not formally perfected, and, the war of 1812 intervening,
the settlement of the boundary was deferred to October 20, 1818, when, by Convention, it
was extended from the most northwestern point of the Lake of the Woods to and along
the 49th parallel to the Stony [Rocky] Mountains. The line was extended no further
westward, among other reasons, in order that no offence might be given to Spain, which
asserted title by discovery to the whole Pacific slope of the continent. Y et it was agreed,
to prevent collisions, and without prejudice to the claims of the parties or of outside
powers, that any country claimed by either party to the convention should be free to both
parties during ten years. The part of the eastern boundary of this cession, on the Missis
sippi River as far south as the 31st parallel, and its southeastern boundary on the Gulf of
Mexico, were undisputed. But the remainder of the eastern and the whole of the western
boundary was in controversy between the United States and Spain. The western limit at
the north, as asserted by France and maintained by the United States, was the Pacific Ocean.
Spain, however, claimed title— by prior discovery on the northwestern coast— as far east
ward as the Rocky Mountains; and held that— as against such discovery— the title of
France, rested solely on discovery and exploration of the River Mississippi, covered no
more than the basin drained by that river and its tributaries, and consequently ended
westwardlyat the Rocky Mountains. A t the southwest, the United States maintained an
extent of the French cession, including the country east of the Rio Grande. But Spain
having long kept a line of garrisons in that region, held the French territory to have been
bounded by the Sabine River. These conflicting demands were satisfied by Treaty at
Washington, February 22, 1819. By this authority, the border line between Spanish
possessions in the southwest and the territory of the United States ran from the Gulf ol
Mexico up the western bank of the Sabine River to the 31 st parallel of north latitude,
thence north to and along the Red River, to and along the 23d meridian (100th Green
wich), to and along the southern bank of the Arkansas River to its source, and thence due
north to and along the 42d degree of north latitude to the Pacific Ocean. This line, in
this discussion, will be regarded as having been the southwestern boundary of the Province
of Louisiana. On the east the Treaty of 1763 had confined the French cession to the
Mississippi River as far south as the 31st parallel, whence eastward various boundaries have
been asserted.
[The United States construed the cession o f France (1803) to include all o f the region between the 31st
parallel and the Gulf of Mexico, and between the Mississippi River and the Perdido River, now the western
boundary of the State of Florida. The ground of this construction seems to have been that the original Province
of Louisiana extended eastward to the Perdido, and that, if France, at its cession to Spain, had not actual posses
sion, it yet had a possessory right reaching to the Perdido, which it ceded to Spain (1763)1 w’bich Spain receded
to France (1800), and which France (1803) ceded to the United States.
On the contrary, Spain asserted that the Province of Louisiana had its boundary at the southeast as expressed
in the Treaty o f 1763 between Great Britain ar.d France, namely, “ The River Iberville and Fakes Maurepas and
Pontchartrain,” the waters skirting the so-called “ Island of New Orleans,” westerly and southerly from the River
Mississippi to the G ulf o f Mexico, and that the successive transfers had carried that province with that eastern
boundary' into the possession of the United States. Under this construction o f the cession of 1803, it embraced,
east of the Mississippi, only the small “ Island of New Orleans.” ]
Under the construction of the cession adopted by the United States, the Province of
Louisiana is now covered by those portions of the States of Alabama and Mississippi
which lie south of the 31st parallel, by the entire States of Louisiana, Arkansas, Missouri,
Iowa, Nebraska, and Oregon, and by that part of the State of Minnesota west of the Mis
sissippi River and all that part of the State of Kansas on the North of the Arkansas
River and east of the 23d meridian (100th Greenwich); by the entire Territories of
Dakota, Washington, Idaho, and Montana, the part of the Territory of Colorado east of the
Rocky Mountains and north of the Arkansas River, by that entire part of the Territory of
Wyoming north of the 42d parallel and east of the meridian of the source of the River
Arkansas and by what is known as the Indian Country. This accession of area for which
the United States paid, in principal and in interest, more than $23,500,000, added (adopting
the United States view of the cession), 1,171,93 t square miles to the public domain, ex
tended the United States from ocean to ocean, and completed its possession of the central
river and basin of the Continent
The Spanish Cession— The next addition to the area of the United States was con
tributed by Spain. A t the time of the conclusion of the Definitive Treaty of Peace
between the United States and Great Britain (September 3, 1783), Great Britain ceded to
Spain the Provinces of East and West Florida without definition of their boundaries.
Hence arose two opponent constructions of the Treaty, affecting theproiince of \\ est
Florida. Great Britain held the northern boundary of the province which she ceded to
be the 31st parallel from the Appalachicola to the Mississippi River, and b\ a simultane-
AREA
AND
P O L IT IC A L
D IV IS IO N S
ous treaty acknowledged the territory north of that parallel to belong to the United States,
which government also adhered to a boundary on the 31st parallel. In opposition, Spain
claimed that, by the Treaty, the province of West Florida was ceded, and that, on the day
of the Treaty the province remained as extended May 15, 1767, by Great Britain, including
the country between the same rivers as bounded the original province and northward from
the 31st parallel to that of the mouth of the Yazoo River. This country Spain took into
possession and held until, by authority of Joint Resolution of Congress, January 15, 1811,
and Acts of the same date and of March 3 ,1811, passed in secret session, and first published
in 1818, the United States took it into possession. On February 22, 1819, the controversy
was ended by the Treaty of Washington, whereby Spain ceded to the United States its
Provinces of East and West Florida In accordance with the construction maintained by
the United States respecting the southeastern limit of the French cession and the northern
limit of the Spanish cession, the latter added the territory of the present State of Florida,
59,268 square miles, to the area of the United States at a cost of nearly six and one-half
millions of dollars.
By the same Treaty, Spain agreed to that line between her western American posses
sions and the United States which has herein been adopted as the southwestern boundary
of the French cession, and ceded to the United States all her claims to any territory east
or north of that line.
After this cession by Spain, Great Britain and the United States had only their own
rights to consider in the settlement of the northwestern boundary. Hitherto the line had
rested on the forty-ninth parallel of north latitude at the Rocky Mountains. By Article I.
of the Treaty of 1846, it was stipulated that the boundary should be extended from the
Rocky Mountains westward along the same (49th) parallel “ to the middle of the channel
which separates the continent from Vancouver’s Island, and thence southerly through the
middle of the said channel and of Fuca’s Straits to the Pacific Ocean.” The British
government claimed that the “ channel” of this Article of the Treaty is the so-called Straits
of Rosario. The United States maintained it to be the Canal de Haro. The question
was submitted to the arbitrament of William I. Emperor of Germany, who gave decision
October 21, 1872, in favor of the Canal de Haro. So it has required nearly ninety years
for the national boundary at the north to traverse the continent.
The Texan Annexation.— The next expansion of the limits of the United States
was southwestward. The United Mexican States having achieved their independence of
Spain, under the Treaty at Cordova February 24, 1821, by Treaty of Mexico, January 12,
1828, ratified that boundary with the United States of America which had been acknowl
edged (1819) by Spain, when possessed of their territory. Subsequently the people of
“ Texas and Coahuila,” one of the United States of Mexico, revolted from the authority of
that Republic, and in convention March 2, 1836, declared the Independent Republic of
Texas. By an act of the legislature of that republic passed December 19, 1836, its boun
daries were declared to be on the north and east the old line settled (1819) by the United
States and Spain, and on the south and west from the mouth of the River Sabine and three
leagues from the coast to the mouth of and up the Rio Grande to its source and thence
due north to the 42d parallel of north latitude. By Joint Resolution of March 3, 1837,
the United States of America acknowledged the independence of the Republic of Texas;
by Joint Resolution of March 1, 1845, gave assent to the admission of Texas as a State
into the Union ; and by Joint Resolution of December 29, 1845, the Republic, with the
limits just now recited, was declared to be one of the United States of America. This
was an annexation of 376,163 square miles of territory making the total area of the
United States 2,435,176 square miles.
The Mexican Cessions.— The old Spanish provinces of Texas and of Coahuila, were
separated by the River Nueces. A t the institution of the Mexican Republic these provinces
were united as the State of “ Texas and Coahuila.” The River Nueces was, however, still
regarded as the future boundary between the probable separate States of Texas and of
Coahuila as contemplated by the Constitution of the United Mexican States. On the
annexation of the Republic of Texas to the United States of America, Mexico insisted
that Texas only— and not Coahuila— had revolted, and consequently that its proper western
boundary lay on the River Nueces. On the contrary, the Texan Republic had asserted a
wider revolt and a western boundary on the Rio Grande. The United States annexed
Texas as bounded on the west by the Rio Grande and maintained that boundary. The
ensuing war was concluded by a Treaty ( February 2, 1848), wherein the United States of
Mexico ceded to the United States of America all claims to the area asserted by the former
Republic of Texas, and to the vast tract of land west of the Rio Grande and of a meridian
from its source to the 42d parallel of north latitude, south of that parallel, east of the Pacific
Ocean and north of the present boundary of the United States, excepting the Mesilla
valley south of the River Gila.
The latter territory, known as the Gadsden Purchase, was ceded by Mexico, December
30th, 1853.
The money consideration passing from the United States for the first Mexican cession
was Si 5,000,000, and for the second cession $10,000,00a The first cession (exclusive of the
“ Texan annexation”) added 545,783 square miles, and the second cession 45,535 square
miles to the area of the United States, and increased it to an aggregate of 3.026494 square
miles.
Russian Cession.— There remains to be noticed but one further increment to the area
of the United States. Russia, by Treaty of March 30, 1867, ratified June 20, 1867, for con
sideration of $7,200,000, ceded her territory in America, which has been named Alaska
[On the east this cession has limit on the line which, by Treaty between Great Britain and Russia (1825)
separated their territory. It begins at the southernmost point of Prince of Wales Island, which is on the parallel
of 54’ 40, runs northward along Portland Channel to the junction o f the fifty-sixth parallel o f north latitude
with the Continent, and thence along the summits o f the mountains parallel to the coast to and along the one
hundred and forty-first meridian to the Arctic Ocean. But where the crest o f the mountains skirting the coast
from the specified parallel to the meridian is more than ten marine leagues from the ocean, there the boundary
is a line not more than ten marine leagues from the coast and parallel to its windings. The remainder of the
boundary of this Russian cession originated in the Treaty by which the cession was nade. It commences in
the Arctic Ocean on the 64th meridian of West Longitude (141st Greenwich) descends Behring Straits midwav
between the islands o f Krusenstem and Radmanov to 65° 30' (142 30’ Greenwich; just south o f the nearest
points o f Asia and America, continues between the island o f S t Lawrence and Cape Chonkotski to the 95th
meridian (i72d Greenwich), thence midway between Alton and Copper Islands to 1160 (167 East Longitude
from Greenwich), and thence coastwise to include the Aleutian Isles.]
Alaska is separated from the main territory of the United States by that western part
OF
THE
U N IT E D
STATES,
1776— 1874.
of the British Possessions which iies between the paiahels of 54" 40 and 49° north latitude,
its southernmost point being nearly four hundred miles distant from the northern boundary
of the Territory of Washington. Its area is estimated at 577,390 square miles.
Summary o f the Area o f the United States.— The Russian cession completed the
present area of the United States. Originally, as limited by Treaty with Great Britain
(1 783), this area— expressed in square miles— was (after the cessions of States to the United
States), in the States, 420,892; out of the States, 406.952,— in all, 827,844. The additions
are (1803), from France, the province of Louisiana, 1,171,931 ; (1819) from Spain, Florida,
59,268; (1845) the Texan annexation, 376,133; (1848) the first Mexican cession, 545,783;
(1853) the second Mexican cession, 45,535 ; and finally (1867) the Russian cession Alaska,
577> °>— making the total area of the United States 3,603,884 square miles.
39
D escription
of the
P arcels of T erritory C omposing each E xisting
P olitical D ivision of the U nited S tates.
or
O bsolete
[The italic letters refer to the Area Map, Tlate X K ]
A labama, the State of: area, 50,722 sq. m.; is composed of A , B, C, and D, ceded by
the States of Georgia and South Carolina, and by France.
A . Alabama, now in the State o f : estimated area, 1,700 sq.m. Isa strip of land twelve
to fourteen miles wide across the northern part of the State and adjoining the southern boun
dary of the State of Tennessee. Ceded by the State of South Carolina. Transfers : from the
Territory south of the River Ohio to the Mississippi Territory and to the State of Alabama.
B. Alabama, now in the State of: estimated area, 27,722 sq.m. Lies between the
States of Georgia and Mississippi and between A and a line drawn due east from the
mouth of the Yazoo River to the Chattahoochee River. Ceded by the State of Georgia.
Transfers: from the Mississippi Territory to the State of Alabama
C. Alabama, now in the State of: estimated area, 19,000 sq. m. Between the States
of Georgia and Mississippi and the southern boundary of B and the 31st parallel. Ceded
by the State of Georgia Transfers: from the Mississippi Territory to the State of
Alabama
D. Alabama, now in the State of: estimated area, 2,300 sq. m. Between the Perdido
River and the State of Mississippi and between the 31st parallel and the Gulf of Mexico
Ceded by France. Transfers: from the Mississippi Territory to the State of Alabama
A laska, (the unorganized territory of:) area, 577,390 sq. m. Ceded by Russia.
[See Russian Cession, ante.]
A rizona, the Territory of: area, originally, 126,141 sq.m. Consisted of E and B i ;
Ck was added from Mexico and B i was transferred to the State of Nevada; now consists
of E and Ck ; area, 113,916 sq.m. Ceded by Mexico. Transfers : from the Territory of
New Mexico to the Territory of Arizona.
E . Arizona, now in the Territory of: estimated area, 82,381 sq. m. All of the terri
tory north of the River Gila. Ceded by Mexico in 1848. Transfers: from the Territory
of New Mexico to the Territory of Arizona.
Ck. Arizona, now in the Territory of: estimated area, 31,535 sq.m. The part of the
territory south of the River Gila. Ceded by Mexico in 1853. Transfers : from the Terri
tory of New Mexico to the Territory of Arizona.
A rkansaw T erritory (obsolete) was F\ 52,198 sq. m. Ceded by France. Trans
fers : from the Province of Louisiana, to the District of Louisiana, to the Territory of Lou
isiana, to Arkansaw Territory*
A rkansas, the State of: identical in extent with Arkansaw Territory.
C alifornia , the State of: area, 188,981 sq. m. Ceded by Mexico.
C olorado, the Territory of: area, 104,500 sq. m. Composed of H, /, J, I<, and L
Ceded by France and Mexico.
//. Colorado, now in the Territory of: area, 4,000 sq. m. Bounded on the north by
the Arkansas River, east by the 25th meridian, south by the 37th parallel, and west by the
26th meridian. Ceded by the State of Texas. Transfers: from the Territory of Kansas
to the Territory of Colorado.
/. Colorado, now in the Territory of: area, 14,000 sq. m. Bounded on the north and
south by the 38th and 37th parallels, east by the 26th meridian, and west by the Rocky
Mountains. Ceded, the part north of the Arkansas River (if any), by France; south of
the river, by the State of Texas. Transfers: from the Territory of New Mexico to the
Territory of Colorado.
J. Colorado, now in the Territory o f : area, 40,965 sq. m. Bounded north by the 40th
parallel, east by the 25th meridian, south by the Arkansas River westward to the 26th
meridian and by the 38th parallel, and on the west by the Rocky Mountains. Ceded by
France. Transfers: from the Territory of Kansas (being, with //, the portion of the
Territory of Kansas which was not included in the State of Kansas) to the Territory of
Colorado.
K . Colorado, now in the Territory of: area, 16,035 S(l- m- Bounded north and south
by the 41st and 40th parallels, cast by the 25th meridian, and west by the Rocky Moun
tains. Ceded by France. Transfers: from the original Territory of Nebraska to the Terri
tory of Colorado.
L. Colorado, now in the Territory o f : area, 29,500 sq. m. Bounded north and south
by the 41st and 37th parallels,east by the Rocky Mountains, and west by the 32d meridian.
Ceded by Mexico. Transfers: from the Territory of Utah to the Territory of Colorado.
C onnecticut, the State o f : area, 4,750 sq. m. One of the original thirteen States. A t
first extended westward to the Mississippi By two cessions [see Cessions by States,ante]
Connecticut ceded to the United States all claims to territory west of the State of Penn
sylvania, excepting a reservation in the State of Ohio. There remained a claim to the
northern part of the State of Pennsylvania. By virtue of it, Connecticut granted lands in
the valley of Wyoming, on which the grantees, emigrants from Connecticut, settled, and
erected civil governments in conflict with those of the State of Pennsylvania. During the
existence of the Confederacy, the conflicting claims of these States were submitted to a
* A s all o f the parcels of territory west of the Mississippi River which were ceded by France (save that part o f the State
of Louisiana lying west of the River Mississippi) were successively in the Province, the District, and the Territory of Louisi
ana, mention of these transfers will be omitted in subsequent descriptions of parcels.
4
AREAS
AND
P O L IT IC A L
D IV IS IO N S
federal court organized under a provision of one of the Articles of Confederation, and
judgment was rendered (1782) giving title of the lands in question to Pennsylvania.
D akota , the Territory o f : area, 150,932 sq. m. A t first it consisted of N , O, P, Bd,
and A y ; area, 310,867 sq. m.: then Bd, P, and A y were set off to the Territory of Idaho;
area then, 148,932 sq. m .: next, Bd, P, Be, B f, and Be were received from the Territory of
Idaho ; area then, 240,597 sq. m.: next were transferred to the Territory of Wyoming all of
the parcels last above mentioned, excepting P, which has since been taken into the Terri
tory of Montana. The Territory of Dakota now consists of N and O.
N . Dakota, now in the Territory' of: area, 81,960 sq. m. Bounded north by the 49th
parallel, east by the western boundary of the States of Minnesota and Iowa, south by the
Missouri River, and west by the Missouri and White Earth Rivers. Ceded by France.
Transfers : from the Territory of Missouri to the Territories of Michigan, Wisconsin, Iowa,
Minnesota, and Dakota.
O. Dakota, now in the Territory o f : area, 66,972 sq. m. Bounded north by the 49th
parallel, east by the White Earth and Missouri Rivers, south by the present northern
boundary of the State of Nebraska west of the mouth of Niobrara River, and west by the
27th meridian. Ceded by France. Transfers : from the original Territory of Nebraska to
the Territory of Dakota
D elaware, the State o f: area 2,120 sq. m. One of the original thirteen States.
D istrict of C olumbia , T h e : area, 64 sq.m. Consisted of Co and Cn, 100 sq. m.
Ceded by the States of Mary land and Virginia Cn, 36 sq. m. was afterwards receded to
the State of Virginia
Prior to the Union, the Federal Governments were peripatetic* By Article I, Sec
tion 8 and Clause 16 of the Constitution of the Union, Congress was empowered “ to exer
cise exclusive legislation in all cases whatsoever over such district (not exceeding ten miles
square) as may by cession of particular States and the acceptance of Congress become the
seat of government of the United States.”
The State of Maryland, by A ct of December 23,1788, ceded to Congress territory ten
miles square, for the seat of government of the United States. The State of Virginia, by
Act of December 3,1789, ceded territory ten miles square, or a less quantity, to the United
States in Congress assembled for the same purpose. By A ct of July 16, 1790, (amended
March 3, 1791) a “ district” of territory not exceeding ten miles square on the River
Potomac, near the Eastern Branch, was accepted for the permanent seat of the Federal
Government. Provisions were included in the Act, for surveying and bounding the District,
and Philadelphia was made the seat of government during ten years, and on and forever
after the first Monday of December 1800, the District was made the seat of the Federal
Government. By Proclamation of the President, March 30,1791, a district ten miles square,
located and bounded as therein defined, was declared to be the Federal District. By A ct of
February 27, 1801, Congress assumed exclusive jurisdiction. By A ct of July 9, 1846, the
cession of Virginia was retroceded.
F lorida, the State of, (the Territory obsolete:) area, 59,268 sq. m. Ceded by Spain.
6' was Spanish “ East Florida
D i, part of “ West Florida”
G eorgia, the State of: area, 58,000 sq. m. O neof the original thirteen States. Was
composed of U, B, C, A s, and A t ; now composed of T and (J.
T. Georgia, now in the State of: estimated area, 1,500 sq. m. Is a strip of land
twelve to fourteen miles wide across the northern end of the State of Georgia, adjoining
the States of North Carolina and Tennessee. Ceded by the State of South Carolina to
the United States and by the United States to the State of Georgia when the latter State
made its cession to the United States. Transfers: from the Territory South of the River
Ohio to the State of Georgia.
U. Georgia, now in the State o f: estimated area, 56,500 sq. m. Is the State except T,
being the part of the original State of Georgia which remained after the cession by the
State of Georgia to the United States.
I daho, the Territory o f: area, 86,294 sq. m. A t first it consisted of V, Be, Bj, A x , Ay,
P, Bd, Be, and B f ; area, 326,373 sq. m .: next, A y and A x were taken from it to form the
Territory of Montana, and Bd, P, Be, B f, and Be were set off to the Territory of Dakota;
area of the Territory then, 90,932 sq.m.: and, lastly, Bjxv as transferred to the Territory of
Wyoming. The Territory now consists of V, ceded by France. Transfers: from the Terri
tory of Oregon to the Territory of Washington, to the Territory of Idaho.
I llinois, the Territory of, (obsolete:) estimated area, 144,662 sq. m. Was composed
of IV, X, Y, and Z.\ Transfers: from the Territory Northwest of the River Ohio to the
Territory of Indiana, to the Territory of Illinois. Absorbed by the States of Illinois and
Wisconsin, the part of the State of Minnesota east of the Mississippi River, and that
portion of the State of Michigan west of the eastern boundary of the Territory.
I llinois, the State o f : area, 55410 sq. m. Transfers : from the Territory of Illinois.
I ndiana , the Territory of, (obsolete:) original estimated area, 205,151 sq. m. Com
prised IV,X, Y, Z, Ab, Ac, Ad, Ac, and Cg. Afterward Bs and A r were added ; estimated
area then, 226,194 sq. m. Ceded as was the Territory of Illinois. Transfers: from the
Territory northwest of the River Ohio to the Territory of Indiana. Absorbed by the States
of Indiana, Michigan, Illinois, Wisconsin, and that portion of Minnesota east of the Missis
sippi River, except the parcel Bs, now in the State of Ohio.
I ndiana , the State o f : area, 33,809 sq. m. Composed of A b and Ac. Ceded as was
the Territory of Illinois.
Ab. Indiana, now in the State o f: estimated area, 1,200 sq.m. Bounded on the south
by a line drawn east from the southern extremity of Lake Michigan to the present eastern
boundary of the State; on the east by the present eastern boundary of the State; on
the north by a line drawn due east and west ten miles north of the southern boundary of
this parcel; on the west by a line from the southern point of Lake Michigan northward to
* ” The American Association " and “ The United Colonies " convened at Philadelphia (1774-6); “ The Thirteen United Colo
n ies" at Philadelphia (1776). where they became “ The United States,” whose Congress met at Baltimore (i776),at Philadel
phia (1777), at Lancaster and also at Y ork in the State of Pennsylvania (1777), and again at Philadelphia (1778-83). There the
••Thirteen United States" was succeeded by “ The Confederacy,” whose Congress convened at Philadelphia (1776), at Prince
ton in New Jersey, 1783, at Trenton in New Jersey (1784), and finally at the city of New Y ork (1785-89). There (April 30,1789)
the first President of the Union was inaugurated and the government of The United States in the Union was instituted.
t It will I* understood without further mention, that those States. Territories, or parcels, formed out of The Territory North
west of the River Ohio, were, at the south of the 41st parallel, upon the cession from the State of Virginia ; thence northward to
42" 2', upon the cession o f Connecticut; thence northward to 43' 43' 12'', upon the cession of Massachusetts ; and north
thereof, upon the original public domain of the United States as defined by Treaty *1803) with Great Britain.
OF
THE
U N IT E D
STATES, 1776— 1874.
its intersection with the northern boundary line of this parcel. Transfers: from the Terri
tory northwest of the River Ohio successively to the Territories of Indiana and Michigan
and to the State of Indiana.
Ac. Indiana, now in the State of: estimated area, 32,609 sq. m. Being the State of
Indiana, less Ab, with the same transfers as Ab, except that it was never in the Territory
of Michigan.
I ndian C ountry, T he (unorganized :) area, 68,891 sq. m. This is a geographical, but
not an organized political division of the United States. By Act of June 30, 1834, regu
lating trade and intercourse with Indians, this Country was declared to be “ all that part of
the United States west of the Mississippi [River] and not within the States of Missouri
and Louisiana and the Territory of Arkansas.” This was the extent of the remainder of
the area of the Territory of Missouri after the State of Missouri had been taken from it
(1,010,305 sq. m.). By the statute above mentioned this country was separated into
two portions. The northern was for the purposes of the Act annexed to the United States
Judicial District in the State of Missouri, and the southern (substantially the present Indian
country), for the same judicial purposes, to the Territory of Arkansas.
The Indian Country has since been reduced successively, by the Territory of Iowa ; by
A w added to the State of Missouri; by the Territory of Oregon ; by the original Territory of
Nebraska, which comprised the country between the Rocky Mountains on the west and
the River Missouri on the east, and extended southward to the parallel of the present
southern boundary of the State of Nebraska; and by the Territory of Kansas. The remain
der constitutes the present area of the Indian Country, sometimes styled the Indian Terri
tory, which for judicial purposes is attached to the western Judicial District in the State of
Arkansas.
I ow a , the Territory of, (obsolete :) estimated area, 194,536 sq. m. Consisted of A f,
A g , A h, A i, and N. Absorbed by the State of Iowa, by that part of the State of Minne
sota lying west of the River Mississippi, and by the portion of the Territory of Dakota
lying east of the River Missouri.
I ow a , the State o f: area, 55,045 sq. m. As first admitted consisted of A f and A h ;
now consists of A f and A g . Ceded by France.
A f. Iowa, now in the State o f : estimated area, 36,720 sq. m. Bounded north, east,
and south by the present boundaries of the State, and on the west by the meridian of 1 f 30'.
Ceded by France. Transfers: from the Territory of Missouri successively to the Terri
tories of Michigan, Wisconsin, Iowa, and to the State of Iowa.
A g . Iowa, now in the State of: estimated area, 18,325 sq.m. Bounded on the north
and south by the present like boundaries of the State of Iowa, on the east by the meridian
of 17030', and on the west by the Big Sioux and Missouri Rivers. Ceded by France
Transfers: the same as A f.
K ansas, the Territory of, (obsolete:) area, 126,283 SF m- It consisted of //, J, A j,
<
and A k. Ceded by France, except // and A h and the part of J south of the Arkansas
River, which was ceded by the State of Texas. The portion ceded by France was orig
inally in the “ Province of Louisiana;” the portion ceded by Texas first appears in
this Territory. Absorbed by the State of Kansas and a portion of the Territory of
Colorado.
K ansas, the State of: area, 81,318 sq. m. Consists of A j and A h. Ceded, the part
cast of the 23d meridian and north of the Arkansas River, by France; the remainder by
the State of Texas.
A j. Kansas, now in the State of: estimated area, 73,542 sq. m. Bounded north and
east by the present boundary of the State of Kansas, on the south by the present boundary
of the State of Kansas westward to the 23d meridian, then northward on that meridian to
and along the Arkansas River, westward to the 25th meridian, which bounds this parcel on
the west. Ceded by France. Transfers: from the Territory of Missouri successively to
the Territory of Kansas and to the State of Kansas.
A k. Kansas, now in the State of: estimated area, 7.776 sq. m. Bounded on the north
by the Arkansas River, east by the 23d meridian, south by the 37th parallel, and west by
the 25th meridian. Ceded bv the State of Texas. Transfers: from the Territory of
Kansas to the State of Kansas.
K entucky , the State o f : area, 37,680 sq. m. Formed from the State of Virginia.
L ouisiana, the Province of, (obsolete :) estimated area, 1,171,931 sq. m. ( See French
Cession, ante.)
L ouisiana , the District of, (obsolete:) estimated area, 1,134,329 sq. m. Consisted of
the then Territory of the United States west of the Mississippi River not included in the
State of Louisiana. (See Indiana, ante.)
L ouisiana, the Territory of, (obsolete.) Same area as the District of Louisiana ;
became the Territory of Missouri.
L ouisiana, the State o f : area, 41,346 sq.m. Originally consisted of A m ; afterward
A ji was added. Ceded by France.
Am. Louisiana, now in the State of: estimated area, 37,602 sq. m. Comprehends all
of the State of Louisiana except the portion east of the Mississippi River and north of the
“ Rivers Iberville and Amite and Lakes Maurepas and Pontchartrain. Ceded by France.
Transfers: from the Province of Louisiana to the Territory of Orleans, to the State of
Louisiana
A n. Louisiana, now in the State of: estimated area, 3,744 sq. m. Being the part of
the present State of Louisiana not included in Atn. Ceded by France. Transfers: from
the Province of Louisiana to the Territory of Orleans, to the State of Louisiana
M aine , the State of: area, 35,000 sq. m. Formed chiefly from the State of Massa
chusetts. Consists of A o and Cq, parts of the original State of Massachusetts, and of Cr,
that portion west of the River Kennebec and north of a right line connecting the conflu
ence of the Kennebec and Dead Rivers with Lake Umbagog. The last parcel would
appear never to have been in the Provinces of Main or Massachusetts Bay, or in the
State of Massachusetts If this view be correct, then this tract (C r) was a parcel of tin
original public land of the United States, as defined by Treaty (1803) with Great Britain.
M aryland , the State of: area, 11,124 sq. m. One of the original thirteen States
Originally, was A p and Co. The District of Columbia (Co), 64 sq. m., was ceded b\ the
State of Maryland to the United States
M assachusetts, the State of: area, 7,800 sq. m. One of the original thirteen States
AREA
AND
P O L IT IC A L
D IV IS IO N S
and consisted of Cq, Ao, and A q (see Maine), and extended westward to the Mississippi
River. Ceded to the United States its claims to territory west of the western boundary
of the State of New York. [See Cessions by States, ante.] Massachusetts still asserted her
right to territory within the State of New York and west of the Delaware River. This
claim was founded on the inclusion of that territory’, in the charter limits of the province
of Massachusetts Bay, and on its allegation that the grant of New Netherland to the Duke
of York conveyed no land farther west than the Delaware River. New York claimed this
country under the grant to the Duke of York, and under rights of soil and sovereignty
acquired by treaties with the Six Nations of Indians. The matter was put in suit before a
federal court organized under one of the Articles of Confederation. But the contesting
States appointed Commissioners who met at Hartford, Connecticut, December 16, 1786,
and decided the issue by an agreement New York received jurisdiction over the whole
territory in dispute, and to Massachusetts was accorded right of soil and of pre-emption
(from the Indians) to the territory from the meridian of the 82d milestone of the northern
line of the State of Pennsylvania so far west as one mile east of the River Niagara, and also
obtained confirmation of the title to “ The Boston Ten Towns” which were east of that
meridian. So Massachusetts secured no less than 5,230,000 acres or 8,172 square miles
of the best arable land in the State of New Y o r k ; an area greater and more evenly fertile
than her present territory. After legislation granting and receiving sovereignty and juris
diction by the States concerned, and after consent to the cession by Congress, the south
western extremity of the State of Massachusetts known as the District of Boston Comer
was, by the Proclamation of the Governor of the State of Massachusetts, dated January 11,
1855, declared ceded to the State of New York. Pursuant to an A ct of the Legislature of
Massachusetts, passed April 10, 1861, and to a Decree of the Supreme Court of the United
States in the December term of 1861, the boundary between the States of Massachusetts
and Rhode Island was so adjusted that these States interchanged parcels of territory.
These two transactions transferred areas too small for further description, or for insertion
in the succeeding table of parcels, or for delineation on the map of parcels.
M ichigan, the Territory of, (obsolete:) at first consisted of Ab, Ad, A r, and R s;
estimated area, 41,243 sq. m.: next Ae, Cg, X, Y, and Z were added, and A b was subtracted ;
estimated area then. 136,975 sq. m.: afterward A f, A g , A h, A t, and N were added, in
creasing the area to 331,511 sq. m. The Territory is now covered by the States of Michigan,
Wisconsin, Iowa, Minnesota, by parts of the States of Ohio and Indiana ( Rs and Ab), and
by the part of the Territory of Dakota which lies east of the Missouri and White Earth
Rivers.
M ichigan, the State o f : area, 56,451 sq. m. Consists of A d, Ae, A r , and Y
Ad. Michigan, now in the State of: estimated area, 19,000 sq. m. Bounded on the
south by a line drawn due east through a point ten miles north of the southern extremity
of Lake Michigan to the eastern boundary of the State of Indiana, on the east by said
boundary of Indiana extended northward until it intersects the western boundary of this
piece of territory, which begins on the southern boundary of this parcel and runs north
wardly through the middle of that lake to the point of intersection with its eastern boun
dary. Transfers: from the Territory Northwest of the River Ohio successively to the
Territories of Indiana and Michigan and to the State of Michigan.
A r . Michigan, now in the State of: estimated area, 20,443 ST m- Being all of the
State of Michigan east of the eastern boundary of the State of Indiana extended northward
to the international boundary line. Same transfers as Ad.
Ae. Michigan, now in the State o f : estimated area, 7,180 sq. m. Consists of all the
territory (except Cg) bounded on the east by the western boundary of A r, on the north
by the international boundary line, on the west by the meridian of the eastern boundary
of Illinois,* on the south by the northern boundary of Ab. Same transfers as Ad.
V. Michigan, now in the State o f : estimated area, 9,828 sq. m. Bounded on the east
by the western boundary of Ae, on the north and northwest by the international boundary
line, on the south and southwest by the State of Wisconsin. Transfers: from the Terri
tory Northwest of the River Ohio successively to the Territories of Indiana, Illinois, and
Michigan, and to the State of Michigan.
M innesota, the Territory of, (obsolete:) area, 165491 sq.m.
Consisted of N, Z,
A i, and A h. Absorbed by the State of Minnesota and that portion of the Territory
of Dakota lying east of the Missouri river.
M innesota, the State of: area, 83,531 sq. m. It consists of Z , A h , and A t. Ceded,
west of the Mississippi River, by France.
Z. Minnesota, now in the State of: estimated area, 26,000 sq. m. Bounded on
the north by the international boundary line, on the east by the boundaries of the State,
on the west by the Mississippi River and a line drawn due north from its source to the
international boundary line. Transfers: from the Territory Northwest of the River Ohio
successively to the Territories of Indiana, Illinois, Michigan, Wisconsin, and Minnesota,
and to the State of Minnesota.
A i. Minnesota, now in the State o f : estimated area, 50475 sq. m. Bounded on
the north by the international boundary line, on the east by a line drawn from the
international boundary line due south to the source of the Mississippi River, and by the
Mississippi River, southward to and along the Northern boundarv of A h, to and south
ward along the meridian of 170 30', to and westward along the parallel of 430 30' to the
western boundary of the State of Minnesota Ceded by France. Transfers: from the
Territory of Missouri successively to the Territories of Michigan, Wisconsin, Iowa, and
Minnesota, and to the State of Minnesota
A h. Minnesota, now in the State o f : estimated area, 7,056 sq. m. Bounded on the
north by the parallel passing through the confluence of the Blue Earth or Mankato and
the Minnesota Rivers, on the east by the Mississippi River, on the south by the parallel
of 430 30', and on the west by the meridian of 170 30'. Ceded by France. Transfers:
from the Territory of Missouri to the Territories of Michigan, Wisconsin, and Iowa, to
the State of Iowa, again to the Territory of Iowa, to the Territory of Minnesota, and to
the State of Minnesota.
M ississippi T erritory, (obsolete:) at first consisted of C and A t\ estimated area,
33,956 sq. m.: afterward A , R, A s, and Cm were added; estimated area, 91, 978 sq. m.:
afterward, D and A u were added ; area, 97,878 sq. m. The eastern part became the State
of Alabama and the western the State of Mississippi.
OF TH E
U N ITE D
STATES,
1776— 1874.
5
the State of: area, 47,156 sq. m. Consists of A s, A t, A u , and Cm.
Ceded by the States of South Carolina and Georgia, and by France.
Cm. Mississippi, now in the State of: estimated area, 1,700 sq. m. A strip of land
twelve to fourteen miles wide across the northern part of the State next the State of
Tennessee. Ceded by the State of South Carolina. Transfers: from the Territory
South of the River Ohio to Mississippi Territory and the State of Mississippi.
A s. Mississippi, now in the State o f : estimated area, 26,900 sq. m. Lies south of
Cm and north of A t. Ceded by the State of Georgia. Transfers: from Mississippi Ter
ritory to the State of Mississippi
A t. Mississippi, now in the State o f : estimated area, 14,956 sq. m. South of yf.r,and
bounded on the north by a line drawn due east through the mouth of the Yazoo River
and on the south by the 31st parallel. Ceded by the State of Georgia. Transfers: from
Mississippi Territory to the State of Mississippi.
A u . Mississippi, now in the State o f : estimated area, 3,600 sq. m. All of the State
of Mississippi south of the 31st parallel Ceded by France. Transfers: from Mississippi
Territory to the State of Mississippi
M issouri. Territory of, (obsolete:) estimated area, 1,134,329 sq.m. Was a reor
ganization of the Territory of Louisiana with the same boundaries. Consisted of all of
the “ Province of Louisiana” except A m , A n , A u and D. Its area was first diminished
by that of the State of Arkansas and next by that of the State of Missouri. A t the last
reduction, the Territory seems to have lost both government and name. Its remaining
area having been included in the Indian Country, was divided and attached for judicial
purposes to the Territory of Arkansas and to the Judicial District in the State of Mis
souri For the subsequent disposition of this area, see I ndian C ountry , ante.
M issouri , the State o f : area, 65,350 sq. m. Consisted first of Av, afterward A w was
added.
A v. Missouri, now in the State of: estimated area, 62,182 sq.m. Ceded by France.
Is the State of Missouri east of the meridian passing through the confluence of the
Kansas and Missouri Rivers. Transfers: from the Province to the District and Territory
of Louisiana, and to the Territory and State of Missouri. Was the original State of
Missouri.
Aw. Missouri, now in the State of: estimated area, 3,168 sq. m. Ceded by France.
Consists of all the State west of Av. Transfers: same as A v, except that it was not in
the original State of Missouri.
M ontana , the Territory of: area, 143,776 sq.m. Consists of A x and Ay. Ceded
by France.
A x . Montana, now in the Territory of: area, 27,507 sq. m. Bounded north by the
49th parallel, east by the Rocky Mountains to their junction with the Bitter Root Moun
tains, west by the Bitter Root Mountains to the 39th meridian, and on that meridian
northward to the 49th parallel. Ceded by France. Transfers: from the Territory of
Oregon to the original Territory of Washington, to the Territory of Idaho, to the Terri
tory of Montana.
Ay. Montana, now in the Territory of: area, 116,269 sq. m. Bounded north by the
49th parallel, east by the 27th meridian, south by the 45th parallel to the 34th meridian,
southward on that meridian to the parallel of 440 30', westward on that parallel to the
Rocky Mountains, and on the west by the Rocky Mountains. Ceded by France. Trans
fers: from the original Territory of Nebraska to the Territories of Dakota, Idaho, and
Montana.
P.
Montana, now in the Territory of: area, 2,000 sq. m. Bounded north by the
parallel of 440 30', east by the 34th meridian, and south and west by the Rocky Moun
tains. Ceded by France. Transfers: from the original Territory of Nebraska to the
Territory of Dakota, to the Territory of Idaho, to the Territory of Dakota, to the
Territory of Montana.
N ebraska, the Territory of, (obsolete.) Ceded by France. At first consisted of
A z, K , O, Rc, Rd, P, and A y ; area, 351,558 sq. m .: then K was set off to the Territory
of Colorado; area then, 335,523 sq. m.: next, O, P, Ay, and R d were set off to the Terri
tory of Dakota, and at the same time Re was added from the Territory of Washington, and
R f from the Territory of Utah; area then, 121,994 sq. m.: next, Rc, Re, and R f were set
off to the Territory of Idaho. The remainder of the Territory, area 75,995 sq. m., became
the State of Nebraska
N ebraska , the State o f : area, 75,995 sq. m. Ceded by France.
N evada , the Territory of, (obsolete:) area, 73,574 sq. m. Consisted of Rg. Ceded
by Mexico. Transfers: from the Territory of Utah to the Territory of Nevada
N evada , the State o f : area, 104,125 sq. m. Consists of Rg, Rh, and Bi.
Rg. Nevada, now in the State o f : area, 73,574 sq. m. Bounded north and south by
42d and 37th parallels, east by the 38th meridian, and west by a part of the eastern boun
dary of the State of California Ceded by Mexico. Transfers: from the Territory of
Utah to the Territory of Nevada, to the State of Nevada
Rh. Nevada, now in the State o f : area, 18,326 sq. m. Bounded north and south by
the 42d and 37th parallels respectively, east and west by the 37th and 38th meridians
respectively. Ceded by Mexico. Transfers: from the Territory of Utah to the State of
Nevada
B i. Nevada, now in the State o f : area, 12,225 sq. m. Bounded north by the 37th
parallel, east by the 37th meridian, southeast bv the Colorado River, and west by the
boundary line of the State of California Ceded by Mexico. Transfers: from the
Territory of Arizona to the State of Nevada
N ew H ampshire, the State of: area, 9,280 sq.m. One of the original thirteen
States.
N ew J ersey , the State o f : area, 8,320 sq. m. One of the original thirteen States.
N ew M exico, the Territory of: area, 121,201 sq.m. A t first consisted of Rm, De,
Ri, E , and /,- area, 215,807 sq. m .: afterward were added Ck and Cl, being the second
cession from M exico; area then, 261,342 sq. m .: first, / was set off to the Territory of
Colorado; area then, 247,342 sq. m.: next, E , Ri, and Ck were cut off to form the Terri
tory of Arizona. Ceded by Mexico and by the State of Texas.
Bm. New Mexico, now in the Territory of: estimated area, 42,000 sq. m. The Ter
ritory north of the Gila River and west of the Rio Grande. Ceded by Mexico in 1848.
M
is s is s ip p i,
6
AREAS
AND
P O L IT IC A L
D IV IS IO N S
De. New Mexico, now in the Territory o f : estimated area, 65,201 sq. m. Bounded
south and east by the 32d parallel and the 26th meridian, north by the parallel of 370 and
,
west by the Rio Grande. Ceded by the State of Texas (1850).
Cl. New Mexico, now in the Territory of: area, 14,000 sq.m. West of the Rio
Grande and south of the Gila. Ceded by Mexico in 1853.
N ew Y ork, the State o f : area, 47,000 sq. m. One of the original thirteen States.
Originally consisted of Bn and Bo. (See Massachusetts, the State of)
N orth C arolina, the State o f : area, 50,704 sq. m. One of the original thirteen
States. A t first consisted of Bp and Bq. Ceded Bq to the United States.
O hio, the Territory Northwest of the River (obsolete:) estimated area, 265,558 sq. m.
This was the first of the Territories. It comprised all the parcels west of the western
boundary of the State of Pennsylvania, and between the Ohio and Mississippi Rivers,
now covered by the States of Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Michigan and Wisconsin, and that
part of Minnesota east of the Mississippi River, and of a line drawn northward from the
source of the Mississippi River to the international boundary' line. [See the foot-note at the
Territory of Illinois and the text of “ The Original Territory',” ante.]
O hio, the Territory South of the River (obsolete:) estimated area, 50,500 sq. m.
Consisted of the Territory now covered by the State of Tennessee, and of Cm, A and T,
now in the States of Mississippi, Alabama and Georgia.
A t the establishment of the Union of the United States, its public land, it would
appear, consisted of the original Territory' Northwest of the River Ohio, and of three other
parcels, C r now in the State of Maine, Cp now in the State of Pennsylvania, and thirdly,
the cession of South Carolina. The three parcels not civilly organized were isolated from
each other and from the solitary Territory, and were otherwise then unfit for political
organization. The cession of North Carolina added a region— the area of the present
State of Tennessee— contiguous to the South Carolina cession, and by Act of May 26, 1790,
the combined cessions of the States of South and North Carolina were declared to be
“ one district” for a government like that of the Territory Northwest of the River Ohio,
except as otherwise provided in the conditions of the Act of April 2, 1790, by which the
North Carolina cession was accepted. The new Territory {Bq, Cm, A , and T — 50,500
sq.m.) lay, as the States then were, east of the River Mississippi, west of the Carolinas, south
of Virginia, and north of Georgia. The conditions of the Act accepting the North Carolina
cession were ten in number, the eighth of which required that the laws of North Carolina
should remain in force until changed by the Legislature of the new Territory. There
was appended to the fourth condition “ Provided always that no regulations made or to
be made by Congress shall tend to emancipate slaves.” So the first Free Territory was
balanced by the first Slave Territory. After the erection of the State of Tennessee, the
remainder ol this Territory ( T,Cm and A ) was styled in legislation “ The Territory of the
United States south of the State of Tennessee ” until the cession of T to Georgia, and
the inclusion of Cm and A in Mississippi Territory.
O h i o , the State of: area, 39,964 sq. m. Formed as a State from the Territory
Northwest of the River Ohio. Consisted of B r. Afterward Bs was added.
Br. Ohio, now in the State o f: estimated area, 39,364 sq. m. The portion of the
State south of a line drawn due east through the southernmost extremity of Lake Michi
gan. Transfers: from the Territory Northwest of the River Ohio to the State of Ohio.
Bs. Ohio, now in the State o f : estimated area, 600 sq. m. Bounded south by Br,
and on the north by a line from the southernmost point of Lake Michigan to the northern
most point of Miami Bay. Transfers: from the Territory Northwest of the River Ohio
to the Territory of Michigan, to the State of Ohio.
O regon, the Territory of, (obsolete :) area, 288,345 sq. m. Originally composed of
Bt, Bu, V, Bj, Be, and A x , being all of the then Territory of the United States north of
the 42d parallel and west of the Rocky Mountains; next, Bu, V, A x , Bj, and Be were
cut off to form the original Territory of Washington. The remainder of the Territory
became the State of Oregon. Ceded by France. Transfers: from the Territory of
Oregon to the State of Oregon.
O regon, the State of: area, 95,274 sq. m. Ceded by France. From the Territory of
Oregon to the State of Oregon.
O rleans, the Territory of, (obsolete:) consisted of Am, A n, Ait, and D, estimated
area, 47,246 sq.m. Ceded by France. Transfers: from the “ Province of Louisiana.”
Now constitutes the whole of the State of Louisiana and those parts of the States of Mis
sissippi and Alabama which are south of the 31st parallel.
P ennsylvania , the State o f : area, 46,000 sq. m. One of the original thirteen States.
Was B v ; afterward Cp was added.
Bv. Pennsylvania, now in the State o f : area, 45,684 sq. m. All of the State south
of the 42d parallel. Is the original State of Pennsylvania.
Cp. Pennsylvania, now in the State of. All north of the 42d parallel and west of
the State of New Y o r k : area, 316 sq. m. By the cession of the State of New York in
1781, and of the State of Massachusetts in 1785, the United States acquired title to this
parcel of territory. By Resolution of Congress, passed June 6, 1788, the right of soil was
conditionally sold to the State of Pennsylvania, and a survey of the parcel was ordered.
By Resolution of September 4, 1788, the right of government and jurisdiction was relin
quished to the State of Pennsylvania By Treaty, concluded January 9, 1789, with the
Indian tribes known as the Six Nations, the Indian title to this parcel was vested in the
State of Pennsylvania By Act of Congress passed January 3, 1792, the President was
authorized to issue letters patent granting this parcel to the State of Pennsylvania Such
letters patent were issued March 3, 1792.
R hode I sland, the State o f : area, 1306 sq. m. One of the original thirteen States.
[See Massachusetts, ante.]
South C arolina, the State o f : area, 34,000 sq. m. One of the original thirteen
States. A t first included B x, Cm, A and T. Cm, A and T, were ceded to the United
States.
T ennessee, the State o f : area, 45,600 sq. m. Formed from Territory' ceded by the
State of North Carolina
T exas, the State of: area, 274,356 sq. m.
By Joint Resolution of Dec. 29, 1845,
admitted as a State, comprising then, The Texan Annexation, shown on the map,
and described, ante. By Act of Sept 9, 1850, Congress proposed that the State of
OF T H E
U N IT E D
STATES, 1776— 1874.
Texas cede to the United States the territory shown upon the map as the Texas Cession,
and relinquish all claims against the United States for liability of the debts of Texas and
on account of the property' of Texas which accrued to the United States at annexation;
and that the United States, in consideration of such acts, pay to the State of Texas, ten
millions of dollars in five per cent stock redeemable in fourteen years. By A ct of the
Legislature, Nov. 25, 1850, these propositions were accepted by the State of Texas, and
by the President’s Proclamation, Dec. 13, 1850, the A ct of Sept 9, 1850 was declared
to be in full force.
U norganized T erritory W est of the I ndian C ountry : estimated area, 10,800
sq.m. Bounded by 36° 30' and 370 of latitude and by the 23d and 26th meridians. Ceded
by the State of Texas Originally' was the remainder of the Texas Cession after the for
mation of the Territory' of New Mexico. It then consisted of Cj, H, and A k , area
22,576 sq. m. H and A k have been included in the Territory of Kansas On some
maps the parcel { Cj ] which remained, is included in the Indian Country. This is incorrect,
for the Indian Country was defined in the year 1834, when the western boundary of the
United States at this latitude was the 100th meridian (Greenwich), and when consequently
this parcel did not belong to the United States, but to Mexico. No subsequent legislation
has placed this parcel in the Indian Country or in any State or Territory.
U tah , the Territory o f : area, 84476 sq. m. Ceded by Mexico, 1848. Originally in
cluded Bz, Bg, B/i, Cd, B f, and L ; area, 220,196 sq. m. First, L was set off to the
Territory of Colorado; area, then, 190,696 sq. m. Next, B f was set off to the Territory
of Nebraska, and B g to the Territory of N evada; area, then, 106,382 sq. m. Next, B h
was set off to the State of Nevada; area, then, 88,056 sq. m. Next, Cd was set off to the
Territory of Wyoming.
V ermont, the State of: area, 10,212 sq. m. From the State of New York.
V irginia, the State of: area, 38,348 sq. m. One of the original thirteen States.
Originally included Ce, Cf, Ctt, and A l, and the portions of the States of Ohio, Indiana,
and Illinois, which lie south of the 41st parallel. First, ceded these last-named portions
of existing States to the United States; next, the State of Kentucky was formed from its
westernmost territory; next, ceded 36 sq.m., C m , to become a part of the District of
Columbia. Cn was subsequently retroceded. Finally, the State of West Virginia was
erected from the territory of Virginia.
Ce. Virginia, now in the State of: area, 38,312 sq. m. Being the present State of
Virginia, less Ctt. No transfers.
Cn. Virginia, now in the State of: area, 36 sq. m. That portion of the State of
Virginia which was formerly a part of the District of Columbia. Transfers: from the
State of Virginia to the District of Columbia, and again to the State of Virginia.
W ashington, the Territory of: area, 69,994 sq. m. Originally included Bu, V, A x ,
Bj, and B e; area, 193,071 sq. m. All parcels but B u were taken into the Territory of
Idaho. Ceded by France. Transfers: from the Territory of Missouri, to the Territory
of Oregon, to the Territory of Washington.
W est V irginia, the State of: area, 23,000 sq. m.
Formed from the State of
Virginia.
W isconsin, the Territory of, (obsolete:) area, 274,460 sq. m. Originally included X,
Cg, A f, A g , A h , A i, Z, and N. All of it west of the Mississippi River was afterward
included in the Territory of Iowa. The part east of the Mississippi River not included
in the State of Wisconsin was afterward included in the Territory of Minnesota.
W isconsin, the State of: area, 53,924 sq. m. Consists of X and Cg. Ceded as was
the Territory of Illinois.
X. Wisconsin, now in the State o f: estimated area, 53,424 sq. m. All of the State,
except that part on the east of the projected eastern boundary of the State of Illinois.
Transfers: from the Territory Northwest of the River Ohio successively to the Territories
of Indiana, Illinois, Michigan, and Wisconsin, and to the State of Wisconsin.
Cg. Wisconsin, now in the State o f : estimated area, 500 sq. m. Being that point of
land between Green Bay and Lake Michigan which lies east of the eastern boundary of
the State of Illinois extended northward. Transfers: from the Territory Northwest of
the River Ohio successively to the Territories of Indiana, Michigan, and Wisconsin, and
to the State of Wisconsin. Unlike the rest of the State of Wisconsin, this parcel was
never included in the Territory of Illinois.
W yoming, the Territory of: area, 97,883 sq. m. Consists of Be, Bd, Be, B f, Bj,
and Cd.
Be. Wyoming, now in the Territory of: area, 30,621 sq.m. Bounded north and
south by the 43d and 41st parallels respectively, east by the 27th meridian, west by the
Rocky Mountains. Ceded by France. Transfers: from the original Territory of Nebraska
successively to the Territories of Idaho, Dakota, and Wyoming.
Bd. Wyoming, now in the Territory o f : area, 43,666 sq. m. Bounded north by
the 45th parallel, east by the 27th meridian, south by the 43d parallel, and west by the
Rocky Mountains and 34th meridian. Ceded by France. Transfers: from the Territory
of Nebraska successively to the Territories of Dakota, Idaho, Dakota again, and
Wyoming.
Be. Wyoming, now in the Territory o f : area, 4,638 sq. m. Bounded on the northeast
by the Rocky Mountains, south by the 42d parallel, and west by the 33d meridian. Ceded
by France. Transfers: from the original Territory of Oregon successively to the Territories
of Washington, Nebraska, Idaho, Dakota, and Wyoming.
B f. Wyoming, now in the Territory of: area, 10,740 sq.m. Bounded north and
south by the 42d and 41st parallels respectively, east by the Rocky Mountains and west
by the 33d meridian. Ceded by Mexico (1848). Transfers: from the Territory of L tah
successively to the Territories of Nebraska, Idaho, Dakota, and Wyoming.
Bj. Wyoming, now in the Territory of: area, 4,638 sq.m. Bounded northeast by
the Rocky Mountains, south by the 42d parallel, east and west by the 33d and 34th meri
dians respectively. Ceded bv France. Transfers: from the original Territory of Oregon
to the Territories of Washington, Idaho, and Wyoming.
Cd. Wyoming, now in the Territory o f : area, 3,580 sq. m. Bounded north and south
by the42d and 41st parallels respectively, and east and west by the 33d and 34th meridians
respectively. Ceded bv Mexico (1848). Transfers: from the Territory of Utah to the
Territory of Wyoming.
AREA, POPULATION, AND AVERAGE DENSITY OF SETTLEMENT OF EACH STATE OR TERRITORY AT EACH CENSUS.
i) )
1 8 7 0 . (< (A
States
and
T erritories.
Square
M
iles.
Persons.
Persons
to a
Square
M
ile.
10.70
19.21
19.66
9-3°
2.29
H3'5
)
1 8 5 0 . (A
i 8 6 0 . (A M
)
Square
M
iles.
Persons.
Persons
to a
Square
Mile.
60 )hio, North of the River.........
61 Ohio, South of the River.........
62 Oregon....................................
63 Orleans....................................
64 Utah........................................
65 Washington.............................
66 Wisconsin................................
67 Wyoming ...............................
68 On pub. ships in serv. of the U.S.
577.390
113,916
....
104,500
w 150,93 *
64
....
86,294
....
58,191
10,800
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
2) 143,776
....
121,201
(*
>
(*)
O.08
9,658
....
....
39,864
O.38
14,181
OQ
.O
131,700 2057.81
....
....
14,999
O.17
....
....
(A
)
(A
)
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
20,595
91,874
«...
....
....
84,476
69,994
....
....
•• ••
....
86,786
97.883
9,Il8
....
23,955
—
(A
)
(A
)
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
0.14
•• ••
O.76
• • ••
....
I.03
0-34
....
0.09
—
....
....
....
....
....
64
....
....
....
58,191
10,800
....
....
126,283
....
....
81,960
....
....
....
351,558
261,342
....
....
....
220,196
193,071
•• ••
••••
_
—
(a) The land-surface of the United States, 3,603,884 square miles, when increased
by the water surface of the great lakes and rivers, gives a total area to the United
States of about 4,000,000 square miles,
(A) The excess of the total area of the United States at 1870 over the total area
at 1860 represents The Russian Cession, or Alaska ; the excess at 1860 over 1850,
The Second Mexican Cession, or "Gadsden Purchase"; of I860 over 1840, The
Texan Annexation and First Mexican Cession ; of 1810 over 1800, The French
Cession, or “ Province of Louisiana,”
(r) In the first quarter of the year 1861, the State of Kansas and the Territories
of Colorado, Dakota, and Nevada were formed. The Census of i860 recognized
these new organizations. The areas at the year 1861 wrought with the population
returned at 1860 aflord better comparison with the areas and population at 1870
than do the above columns at 1860. Columns for the year 1861 are made by the
following changes In the columns .It I860. Place Kansas among the States— thus
•• • •
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
75.08° 1,17313
....
....
....
....
....
....
(A
)
(A
)
....
....
141,483
....
....
4,837
....
....
....
28,841
93,516
....
....
....
47,'30
” ,594
....
—
(A
)
(A
)
....
....
0.90 |
.... |
O.06
.... |
.... |
.... !
0.08
0.36
•• ••
....
••••
....
0.21
0.06
....
••••
—
J
1830.
Persons
Persons
Square Persons.
to a
Square Persons.
to a
Square
Miles.
Square Miles.
Square Miles.
Mile.
Mile.
23,191,876 7.78 2,059,043 17,069,453 8.29 2,059,043
2,980,95s
1,544,221 23,047,891 14.99 912,614 16,891,107 18.50 800,197
50-772 77',623 15.21
50,772 590.756 11.66
50,722
209,897 4.02
52,19b
97-574 1.87 • • • •
52,198
188,981
....
....
92,597 0.49 • • • •
4,750 309,978 65.26
4,750 370,792 78 06
4,750
2,120
2,120
78,085 3683
91,532 4318
2,120
59,268
....
....
87,445 1.48 • • •.
58,000 906,185 15.62
58,000 691,392 ” •95
58,000
55,410 851,470 15-37 55,410 476,183 8-59 55,410
33,809 988,416 29.24 33,809 685,866 20.29 33,809
•• • •
....
55,045 192,214 3-49 . . . .
....
....
....
••••
••••
....
37,680 982,405 26.07
37,680 779,828 20.70
37,680
41,346 5 ' 7,762 12.52 41,346 352,4 ” 8.52 41,349
35,o°o 583,169 16.66 35,000 501,793 14-34 35.000
11,124 583,034 52 41
11,124
11,124 470,019 42.25
7,800 994.5'4 127.50
7,800 737,699 9458
7,800
56,45i 397,654 7.04 56,451 212,267 3-76 . . . .
....
....
....
....
. •••
....
47D56 606,526 12.86 47,156 375,65! 7-99 47,156
65-350 682,044 10.44 65,350 383,702 5.87 62,182
....
....
....
....
. • ••
...
....
....
....
•• • •
••••
....
....
9,280 317,976 34-26
9,280 284,574 30-67
9,280
8,320 489,555 58.84
8,320 373,306 44.87
8,320
47,000 3,097,394 65.90
47,000 2,428,921 . 51.68
47,000
50,704 869,039 17.14
50,704 753,419 14.86
50.704
39,964 1,980,329 49-55
39,964 1,519.467 3827
39.364
....
....
....
....
....
....
••••
46,000 2,311,786 50.26
46,000 1,724.033 3748
46,000
1,306 108,830 83-33
1,306 147,545 11297
1,306
34,000 668,507 19.66
34,000 594,398 17.48
34,000
45,600 1,002,717 21.99
45,600 829,210 18.18
45.600
....
....
.... 1 ....
274,356 212,592 0.77
10,212 314,120 30.76
10,21 2 291,948 28.59
10,212
61,348 1,421,661 *3-17
61,312 1,239,797 20.22
61,312
....
....
....
...•
....
....
....
—
—
—
....
53,924 305-391 5.66
T he United States.............. 3,603,884138,558,37'
3,026,494 31,443.321 ■ 0-39
T he States............................ 1,984,46; 38,115,641
1.723,029 31,040,84c 18.OI
Alabama..................................
50,772 964,201 19.01
50.772 996,992
484,471
Arkansas................................
52.19*
52,19b 435-45C 8-34
188,981
188,981 379-994
California................................
560,24;
2.01
4,750 460,147 96.87
J, Connecticut.............................
4,I 2c 537.454
>
75C
2
'25,015 58-97
2,1 20 112,216 52.93
Delaware................................
59,268 140,424
2.65
f Florida....................................
59.268
187,74*
3*7
58,00c 1,184,109 20.42
58,000 1,057,286 I8.23
; Georgia...................................
j Illinois....................................
55.41c 2,539.891 45-84
55,410 i ,7 ” ,95‘ 30.90
33.809 1,680,637 49.71
33,809 1,350,428 39-94
s Indiana..................................
rc Iowa.......................................
55.045 1,194,020 21.69
55,045 674,9'3 12.96
4.48
11 Kansas...................................
....
....
....
81,31b 3®,39!
1
37,680 1,321,011 35-33
37,680 1,155,684 30-94
ta Kentucky................................
41,346 708,002 17.12
41.346 726,915 17.58
13 Louisiana................................
14 Maine.....................................
35.00° 626,915 17.91
35,000 628,279 17-95
11,124
780,894 70.20
11,12) 687,049 61.76
>5 Maryland................................
16 Massachusetts.........................
7,800 «,457.35' 186.84
7,800 1,231,066 157-83*
17 Michigan................................
56,45' 1,184,059 20.97
56,451
749,H 3 13-37
2.10
18 Minnesota...............................
172,023
83.53' 439,706 5.26
83.531
47,156 791-305 16.78
*9 Mississippi............................. 47056 827,922 17-56
JO Missouri..................................
65.350 1,721,295 26.34
65,350 1,182,012 18.09
21 Nebraska................................
....
....
....
75.995 122,993 1.62
22 Nevada....................................
104,125
42,491
0.41
....
....
....
9,280 318,300 34-30
9,280 326,073 3514
23 New Hampshire......................
8,320 906,096 108.91
8,320 672,035 80.77
*4 New Jersey.............................
47,000 4,382,759 93-25
47,000 3,880,735 82.57
25 New York..............................
26 North Carolina.......................
50,704 992,622 19.58
50,704 1,071,361 21.13
27 <>hio....................................... 39,964 2,665,260 66.69
39,964 2,339,5 ” 58-54
28 (iregon...................................
9S.*74 90,923 0.95
95>274 52,465 °-55
46,000 2,906,215 63.18
29 Pennsylvania........................... 46,000 3.52i,95i 76.56
1,306 174,620 I33.7I
1,306 217,353 166.43
3° Rhode Island...........................
34,000 703,708 20.70
31 South Carolina......................... 34,000 705,606 20.75
45,600 1,109,801 24-34
32 I ennessee.............................. 45,600 1,258,520 27.60
274.356 818,579 2.98 274,356 604,215 2.20
33
10,212 3 15,098 30.86
34 Vermont.................................. 10,2 I2 33°-55' 32-37
35 Virginia.................................. 38,348 1,225,163 3'-95 (D 61,348 I,596,3 i 8 26.02
.... ;
....
36 West Virginia........................... 23,000 442,014 19.22 (0__
37 Wisconsin................................j 53.924 1,054,670 I9-56
53.924 775,881 1439
T he T erritories................... 1,619,417 442,730
0.27 wi,303,465 W 402,481 «0.30 1,436,735
38 Alaska (unorganized territory)..
39 Arizona...................................
40 Arkansas................................
4i Colorado................................
42
43 District of Columbia................
44 1lorida....................................
45
46 Ilinois....................................
47 Indian Country (unorg. territory)
48 Ind.Coun., U ri. t e r . w eo t
iio
l
s
49 Indiana....................................
50 own.......................................
51
52 Louisiana................................
53 Michigan.................................
54 Minnesota .............................
55 Mississippi.............................
56 Missouri.. .............................
57 Montana..................................
58 Nebraska.................................
59 Mew Mexico............................
I84O.
....
....
....
....
....
64
....
....
....
524,256
22,576
....
....
....
....
....
165,491
....
....
....
....
215,807
....
....
288,345
....
220,196
....
....
—
—
143,985
O 9 1,146,429
.O
. ••
•• ••
....
....
....
51,687
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
IO
O
59,268
....
....
812,601
....
....
194,536
....
....
....
. . ••
....
....
....
....
••••
(A
)
(A
)
....
....
....
....
....
•. •
••••
• • ••
....
807.61
....
....
....
(A
)
(A
)
....
....
....
•• • •
....
6,077 0.04
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
...
61,547 0.29
....
....
•• ••
....
13,294 O.05
....
....
11,380 O
.05
....
....
....
....
—
—
—
172,246
0.15 1,258,846
__
__
....
....
....
....
•• • •
....
52.198
....
....
....
....
....
....
43,712 43712
100
54,477 O.92 59.268
....
....
....
....
....
....
(A
)
(A
)
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
43,” 2 0.22 • • • •
....
—
•• . •
....
....
....
136,975
....
....
....
. . . . 1,010,305
•• ••
••••
....
....
•• ••
....
....
....
••••
....
....
•• ••
....
•• ••
. ..
79,924
30.945
—
—
6,100
81,318; 107,206; 1.30. The totals of the States become 1,804,347; 31,148,046;
17.21. Place Colorado. Dakota, and Nevada among the Territories named, and
strike out the numbers for the Territories of Kansas and Minnesota. The Territo
rial columns for 1861 become : The Territories, 1,222,147 ; 295.275 ; o 24 : Colo
rado, 104,500; 34,277; 0.33 : Dakota, 310.867 ; 4,837; 0.01 : District of Columbia,
64; 75,080; 1,173.13: Indian Country, 58,191 ; (No census): Unorganized terri
tory, 10,800; (No census): Nebraska, 121,994; 28,841 ; 0.24 : Nevada, 73,574;
6,857; 0.09: New Mexico, 247,342; 93,516 ; 0.38 : Utah, 106,382; 40,273; 0.38;
Washington, 188,433; n ,5 9 4 ; 0.06.
(< At 1790, the Western Reserve was a part of Connecticut. Connecticut had
/)
made a legislative proposition for its cession to the United States, and the latter
government had included it in The Territory North of the River Ohio, where it is,
in this Table. The population returned at 1790 for Connecticut was wholly on
the present area of the State.
....
....
....
....
....
0.39
—
....
•• ••
•. ••
•• • •
....
—
—
Persons
to a
Sauare
Persons.
Square Miles. Persons.
M
ile.
12.866,020 6.25 2,059,043 9,638.453
12,724,111 15.91
738,015 9,5 ' 5-659
309-527 . 6.10 50,722 127,901
...
....
....
297.675 62.67
4,750 275,248
2,120 72,749
76,748 36,20
....
....
•• ••
516,823 8.91
58,000 340,989
157,445 3.02 55,410 55,211
343,031 IO. I I 33,809 147,178
....
....
....
....
687,917 18.26 37,680 564,317
215,739 5-22 4 L346 153,407
399,455 II .41 35,ooo 298,335
447,040 40.I9
11,124 407,350
610,408 78.26
7,800 523,287
....
....
....
....
136,621 2.9O
47,156 75,44s
140,455 2.26
....
269,328 29.02
320,823 38.56
1.918,608 40.82
737,987 >4-55
937,9<>3 23-83
....
*«- * 1
i ,348,233 29.31
97,199 74.42
581,185 I7.O9
681,904 14-95
....
....
280,612 27.48
1,211,405 19.76
•• ••
•• • •
....
....
136,591
(A
)
....
....
. . .*
.
....
•• ••
••••
•• ••
•• ••
5,318
(A
)
....
....
....
....
••••
....
....
....
—
------- !
l8 00.
57-74
34 31
4.75°
1 7 9 0 .
X
Square
Miles.
Persons.
to a
Square
Miles.
Persons.
Mile.
827.8445,308,483
6.41
Persons
to a
Square
Mile.
827,844 3.929,2 14
4-75
511,68 6 3,893,523
7.61
W 4-75°
>
2,120
2.37.946
59,096
50.09
27.88
5*3.330 5> 34.534 10.00
*
55•' 5
34.28
4-35
(/)! 11,122
162,686
1.46
(/) 145,078
82,548
•57
37,680 406,51 I 10.79
37,680
220,955
5.86
(/) 37,680
73,677
r.96
8.52 t/) 35,000 228,705 6-53 (y) 35,000 > i.7i 9 4-34
5
36.62
11,124 341.54® 30.70
11,124 380,546 34.2 1
/)
67.09 < 17,800 472,040 60,52 (/) 7,800 422,485 54-11
</> 35,000
I '.1 2 4
(/) 7,800
96,540
319,728
5-88
1.00
261,942
72,674
2,120
58,000 252-433
4. 75°
2,120
251.002 52.84
64,273
4-35
14.98
3-73
378,7«7
2.76
*«-75
48.56
....
1.60
—
0.09
9,280 214,460
8,320 245,562
47,000 959,049
50,704 555,5°°
39-364 230,760
23.11
29-51
20.41
I0.06
9,280
8,320
47,000
46,000 810,091 17.61
1,306 76,93' 58.90
34,000 415,115 12.21
45,600 261,727 5-74
10,212
61,312
183,85s
211,149
5S9,° 5 >
19.81
25-38
12.53
....
9,280
8,320
(/) 47,000
'8 4 ,13 9
340,120
943
50>704
393.7 5 '
46.000
1,306
34.000
45,600
602,365 13.09
69,122 5292
(A) 46,000
1,306
34,000
434,373
68,825
217,895 21.33 | 10,212
974,600 ' 5.90
61,312
154.465 15'3
880,200 '436
(/) 10,212
(/) 6 1,3 12
85,425
747,610
....
1,490,203
....
203,340
5.87
50.704 478,103
345,591
105,602
10.16
2.32
....
0.14
73,949
0.24
249,073
....
..
304.5'4
141,885
3 ' 6, I 58
35,6 9 '
....
....
....
...
15.29
22.13
7.24
7*77
....
....
9.44
52-70
7-33
....
•. ■
8-37
12 .19
....
....
52,198
....
14,273
33.039 330.39
....
24,023 240.23
...
....
144,662
12,282
•• ••
....
40,289
....
24,520
....
0.51
....
• • • • 1,124,685
8,896 0.06
41,243
20,845
4,762
.... 0
40,352
100
0.08
••••
....
....
....
136-975
....
....
(A
)
....
••••
66,586 0.06
91,978
....
....
—
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0.44
...
....
*05,151
33.956
5,641
8,850
0.03
J
....
....
....
....
. . .
....
....
....
....
14,093 140.93
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
....
....
....
....
....
0.03
....
....
....
....
2
::::
0.02
0.01
(A
)
....
2
2
::::!}
IO
O
....
....
....
....
1,072,487
0.27
1
a
0.01
....
loo
39,834 398-34 '
34,730 o-59 (D 59,268
,...
....
....
....
....
....
....
0.23
....
....
122,794
)
1 8 1 0 . (A
Persons
Persons
to a
Square Persons
to a
Square Miles.
Square
Mile.
Mile.
4.68 1,999.775 7,239,881 3.62
12.89 509-572 7,036,541 13.81
2.52
9,280 244,161 26.31
8,320 277,575 33-36
47,000 1,372,812 29.21
50,704 638,829 12.60
39,364 581,434 14.80
....
....
....
46,000 1,049,458 22.81
1,306 83-059 63.60
34,000 502, 74' ' 4-79
45,600 422,823 9.27
.,.,
__
10,21 2 235.98 ' 22.13
61,312 1,065,366 17-38
....
...
....
....
....
O II 1.321,028
....
....
30,388 0.58
...,
•• ••
....
•• ••
....
....
....
....
....
•• • .
....
....
31,639
....
....
1
1820.
....
....
**• «
•• • •
. • ••
....
—
....
....
—
47.246
...
76,556
....
—
...
«...
....
....
(r) At 1800 and 1790 Georgia had not ceded her western lands to the United
States. The tabulated areas include those lands. The population at these cen
suses was wholly on the present area of the State. For comparison, the following
numbers may be taken for Georgia : 1800, 58,000; 162,686; 2.80 1790, 58,000;
82,548; 1.42.
( / ) A t 1810, 1800, and 1790, Maine (disregarding a small northwestern
parcej) was a part of Massachusetts, and at 1790 Vermont a part of New York,
and Kentucky a part of Virginia. These parts of States are here tabulated sepa
rately for comparison with themselves as States, at later censuses.
(g) Since 1870 2000 square miles (P on Area Map) have been transferred from
Dakota to Montana.
60,407
4.900
1.62
45,365
<>
*
o .75
265.558
(A
)
j (w)45,600
) (m 4,900
)
....
35,6 9 '
(A
)
.!.
i
0.08 j (
(A) ( (
___
(
___
f
....
....
....
....
::::
....
....
....
c
(«) Withdrawing from Virginia the area now in West Virginia and the popula
tion on that area at each census, there results : V irg in ia ; 1860, 38,348 ; 1,219,630 •
31.80: 1850, 38,348; 1,119,348; 29.11: 1840, 38,312; 1,015,260; 26.50: 1030,'
38,312; 1,034,481; 27.00 : 1820, 38,312; 928.558; 24.24: 1810, 38,312; 869,13122.69: 1800, 38,312; 801,608; 20.92: 1790, 38,312; 691,737; 18,05.
West
Virginia: 1860, 23,000:376,688; 16.38: 1850, 23.000; 302,313; 13.14: 1040,
23,000; 224,537; 9.76: 1830, 23,000; 176,924; 7.69: 1820, 23,000; 136,808;
5.95: 1810, 23,000; 105,469; 4.59: 1800, 23,000; 7»,5'12; 3.42: 1790, 23,000;
55.873; 2-43.
(4) No Census taken,
(/) The Spanish Cession, not yet organized as a Territory.
(4)
Disregarding the parcel Cp (see Area Map), which became a part of the (" i ) The upper line, in the next year (1791), became the State of Tennessee
State in 1792.
The lower line is the remainder of this Territory south of the Ohio.
TABLE SHOWING THE PARCELS OF TERRITORY COMPOSING EACH POLITICAL DIVISION AT ANY YEAR FROM 1776 TO 1874.
N ot ® In any year not heading a column of this Table or not mentioned in a foot-note, no areal changes occurred.
.—
In the Year columns of this Table, the Roman letters refer to the parcels of territory on the Area map (Plate X V.), and thefigures in parenthesis
refer to the notes under this Table.
Treaties of the United States with foreign powers and the Statutes of the United States for the specified years, constitute the main authorities for thefacts presented in this Table.
These authorities are mainly cited on pp. 574-580 of Vol. I, of the Ninth Census (1870).
In that volume are an analogous map and
table.
That table takes up each tract of territory at the year when it became a part of the area of the United States.
Hence, maps traced from that map in accord with that table will present the territory of the United States only, at the selected date.
On the contrary, this table takes up In its first Year column
everypiece of territory which then (1776) was, or which afterwards became a part of the area of the United States; and any map traced from the area map of this Atlas, pursuant to any column of this table, will show the territory of the United States at the date selected, and will present also, with their names, (he
political divisions then without, but at later dates within the present limits of the United States.
1776
17 8 1
17 8 4
I 78S
17 8 6
178 7
1790
1791
1792
179 6
17 9 8
1800
18 02
Ch (16)......................
Idem . . . .
I d ....................
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ....................
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ........................
i d ................
I d ............................
M (1)..........................
I d ............
Id ....................
I d ............
M (3 . . . .
)
I d ............
I d ........ ...........
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ......................
M ................
Q ................................
I d ..........
I d ....................
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
i d ....................
Cn, Co.
I d ....................
I d ..........
I d ...
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ......................
I d ........................
I d ........................
I d ............
I d ............
U, B, A s ............
P o lit ic a l D iv is io n s .
I
a
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
to
it
1
3
«3
«4
1
5
16
*7
18
*9
30
31
33
33
24
25
a6
27
38
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5°
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
63
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
7
6
1804
18 05
i d . ..
i d ............
i d ........................
i d ........
Id.
Id
id
I d ............................
i d ..........
i d ............
u ........................
Id . ..
Id
Id
Id
I d ................
I d ................
I d ................
I d ............................
I d ....................
I d ............................
i d . ..
i d . ..
i d . ..
I d ...
I d . ..
Id . . .
u ........................
i d ........................
i d ........................
Id . .
Id .
Id . .
Id
id
I d ............
Id
Id
Id
id
i d ................
T, U .....................
i d ............
u ............
i d : .. ..............
id .. .
Id .
id
Id
W ,X , Y , Z . . .
Id
i d ................
Td
Ac, A c, C g .. . id
A c, C g ........
Ab, A c . . . .
Id
18 03
18 0 9
18 12
18 16
Alabama, the Territory o f ...........................
Alaska, the unorganized territory o f.. . . .
Arizona, the Territory o f.............................
A rkansas T erritory.....................................
Arkansas, the State o f .................................
California, the State of.................................
Colorado, the Territory o f...........................
( 'onnccticut, the State of..............................
Dakota, the Territory o f..............................
a
Fast Florida, the Province of..................... S (3)........................... I d ............ I d (3).............. I d ............ I d ............ I d ............
Florida, the Territory of.......................... .
Florida, the Stale o f .....................................
Georgia, the State o f..................................... U, B, C, A s, At (3).. I d ............ Id (3).............. I d ............ Id ............ I d ............ I d .................... I d ............
Idaho, the Territory of.................................
Illinois, the Territory of..............................
Illinois, the Slate of.......................................
Indiana, the Territory of ...........................
Indiana, the State o f ......................... ...........
Indian Country, Thu .................................
Iowa, the Territory of...................................
Iowa, the State o l...........................................
Kansas, the Territory of...............................
Kansas, the State o f...................................... ..................................... .................. .......................... .................. .................. .................. .......................... ..................
(1 )
7
Louisiana, the Province o f....................... ..
Louisiana, the District of............................
Louisiana, the Territory of...........................
Maine, the State o f.......... .............................
Maryland, the State o f .................................
Massachusetts, the State o f........................
Michigan, the Territory of...........................
Michigan, the State o f..................................
Minnesota, the Territory of.........................
Minnesota, the State o f................................
18 17
I d ............
I d ....................
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ....................
I d ............
(4)
Id .,
Ar, B s ...
id . .
u
(5 )....
Ac, Ae, Y, Z (6).
u r n
Id
A/
.
"a l ’ ! ! ! ! !
i d ............
id .......
I d ............
id . . . . . . . . . . . . . ’ I d . . . . . . . . .
i d ........................ Id (17)........
id . . . i i . i i , .
Id . i i . . . . . . . . . . . i i .
i d . ..
i d ..........................
Id (17).. .
Id . .
id
I d ............
I d (9 - . ..
)
Id . . .
I d ........................
I d ........................
Ad, Ab, Ar, Bs.
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
A p ...................
I d . ..................
I d ............
I d ............
i d ............
i d ............
I d ............
I d ............
i d ........................
i d ........................
Id . ............
I d ................
I d ................
i d ............................
I d ............................
I d ............
I d ............
I d ...
I d ...
I d ............
Id . . .
Id _
_
Id .
Id . . .
Id _
_
Id.
id . . .
id- ,
Id
id
I d ..
id
i d ................
Id
Id
Ad, Ar, B s .
DO
(7
)
Id
A/
Id
(8)
*
Mississippi, the State o f..............................
Missouri, the Territory o f ...........................
Missouri, the State of....................................
■4
»5
16
«7
18
*9
30
31
33
33
24
25
27
Am, An,.
I d ....................
I d ....................
1
3
38
(8)
I d ............
I d ............
1
1
13
36
Id
(8)
Ap, C o ......................
Aq, Cr, Ao, Cq (1)..
I
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Id
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
3«
39
40
11
42
Nebraska, the Territory o f...........................
Nebraska, the State o f..................................
Nevada, the Territory o l .............................
Nevada, the State o f.....................................
New Hampshire, the State o f...................... Bk
New Jersey, the State o f.............................. B l...............................
New Mexico, the Territory o f.....................
New Spain, part o f.. . . . .............................
(1 )
3
New York, the State o f............................... Bn, Bo (13)...............
North Carolina, the State o f........................ Bp, B q .. ‘ .................
Ohio, (lie Territory N. W. of the R iv e r...
Ohio, the Territory South of the River . . .
Ohio, the State o f..........................................
Oregon, the lerritory of.............................. ......................................
Oregon, the State o f . . ..............................
Orleans, the Territory of..............................
Pennsylvania, the State o f.......................... B v ..............................
(1 )
5
Rhode Island, the State of........................... B w ..............................
South Carolina, the State of......................... Bx, T , A , C m ...........
43
44
45
•
I"
id . .. ; . . ’ . I d .. . . . . . . . . .
’
I d ............ I d ....................
I d '. '. '. . . . .
I d ............
id .......
i d ............
I d i......
I d ............
id .. . . . . . . . . .
i d ....................
I d i......
I d ............
I d .......
I d ............
I d i......
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ..........
I d ............
i d ............
i d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
i d ....................
i d ....................
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
Bn, B o ...
I d ............
I d ..................
I d ....................
I d ....................
(7
)
i d ....................
Bq, T , A , Cm .
Bn...........
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
id . . . . . . . . . ...
i d ........................
Id . . . . . . . .
I d ............
Id . . . . . . . . . . . . i i .
I d ............................
id ...
i d . ..
ii. i i
i d ........
Id . [ [
I d ......................
Id
Id . . .
id
id
Id
Id
Id
Id
i d ........................
i d ........................
i d ........................
A / .- . v . ..
I d ........................
I d ............ T.A.Cmris) I d ........................
I d ................
I d ................
I d ................
i d ............................
i d ............................
I d ............................
i d ..........
i d ............
Id . .
i d ............
i d ............
i d ........
I d ..............
I d ........................
I d ..............
Id . . .
I d ............
Id . . .
id
fd ...
id t
id
id
id
Id
Id
Id
I d ................
A s, A, Cm, B (14).
Br............................
I d ........
i d . ..........
i d ............
I d ........................
i d ....................
i d ............
I d ................
Id . . .
id ...
I d ................
I d ..........
id
Id
Id
a . an.
i d ..........
I d .. .
Id
fd
Id
~Td
Id
Id
Id
Id
.
.................. .......................... .................. .................. .................. .......................... .................. .................. .................. .............................. ......................
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ....................
I d ....................
I d ....................
I d ....................
I d . ..........
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ....................
I d ............
Bv, C p ... I d ............
I d ........................
I d ............
I d ................
I d ............
I d ............
I d ....................
I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ..........
i d ....................!.
i d ........................
I d ........................
I d ................
I d ................
I d ................
i d ........
! id .......
i d ............................ i d ............
i d ...... .............
I d .. .
B x ..................
Id . . . • • • •
I d ............
B q ..........
Texas, the Republic o f ...............................
Texas, the State of........................................
Unorganized ter. VV. of Indian C ountry..
Utah, the Territory o f...................................
Vermont, the State of...................................
Virginia, the State o f..................................... C e .C n , Cf, A 1( i ) . . . I d ............
Washington, the Territory o f .....................
West Fiorlda, the Province o f .................... An, Au, Di, D (3). . I d ............
West Virginia, the State o f..........................
Wisconsin, the Territory o f ........................
Wisconsin, the State o f.................................
/
Wyoming, the Territory o f...........................
Am.An,Au,I) I d ........................
I d ............ I d ........................
id ._ '
_
i d ........
i d . ..
i i . ..............' 1!!
i d ........................
i d ..................
47
48
49
50
5*
5*
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
63
63
(>4
65
66
(>7
Ce, Cn, Cf, A l. I d ............
I d ............
I d ............
Ce, Cf, A l . . . .
Bo"..........
I d ............
I d (3)..............
I d ............
I d ............
I d ....................
I d ............
I d ............
Ce, C f....
I d ............
I d ............
i d ........................
i d ........................
I d ................
I d ................
i d ..........
i d ............................
i d ............
i d ............
i d ............
i d ............
i d ........................
i d ........................
I d ............
I d ............
i d ........................
I d ................
i d ............................
i d ............
i d ............
u
I d ............
........................
I d ...
I d ....................
Id
Id
Id
Id-
Id
Id
I d ................
j)i
Id
Id
68
<9
>
70
7*
72
73
74
75
76
•
(1) And its western cession shown on the map.
( 3) And its western reserve described in Cessions by States.
(3) Originally the British Provinces of East and West Florida were entirely South of the 31st parallel of North latitude and were separated by the
River Appalachicola.
In 1767, by an Order In Council, A t and C were added to West Florida.
In 1783, [the reference figure for this date is placed above
in the column for 1784, for economy of space,] all of East Florida, and the part of West Florida South of the 31st parallel was ceded by Great Britain to
Spain, while the rest of West Florida (A t and C) was ceded to the United States.
Notwithstanding the Order in Council, Georgia claimed these parcels,
and they are herein accorded to that State. D i should be on the map, to mark all of the present State of Florida west of the Appalachicola.
(4) The part of The Territory Northwest of the River Ohio lying west of the meridian of the present eastern boundary of the State of Indiana (Ab, Ac,
A d, A e, Cg, W, X , Y, Z).
(5) A lso the District of Louisiana— being all of The French Cession (see map), except the Territory of Orleans— was committed to the government
of the officers of this Territory.
(6) And the present States of Illinois and Wisconsin.
(7) Shown on the map.
(8) Same extent as The Province o f Louisiana (see map) less the Territory of Orleans.
(See column for 1804, supra.)
(9) Less its western Cession shown on the map.
(10) Formed subject to the claims of the State of Georgia to the territory.
(11) Comprised the Georgia Cession as shown on the map, and Cm and A of the South Carolina Cession.
(is) Comprised the First and Second Mexican Cessions and the Texan Annexation, as shown on the map.
(13) And its western cession described in Cessions by States.
(14) After the admission of the State of Tennessee to the Union these parcels were styled in legislation “ The territory of the United Stales south
of the State of Tennessee," until T was ceded to Georgia, and A and Cm, with A s and H received from Georgia, were placed in Mississippi Territory.
(15) That part of the area afterwards included in “ The Territory Northwest of the River Ohio,” which lies North of the "M assachusetts Cession."
The British Province of Quebec was established (1763) by Royal Proclamation
By A ct of Parliament (1764) the whole area styled on the map "T h e T er
ritory Northwest of the River O h io ” was added to the Province.
The older provinces, however, despite the Act, maintained their charter areas across the
southern part of this addition to Quebec, as represented on the map by their western cessions.
(16) Russian America.
(17) Shown on the m ap; originally a French province; ceded to Spain in 1763; retroceded to France in 1800; ceded to the United States in 180"
TABLE SHOWING THE PARCELS OF TERRITORY COMPOSING EACH POLITICAL DIVISION AT ANY YEAR FROM 1776 TO 1874 -C oncluded.
N ote ._In any year not heading a column of this Table or not mentioned
Treaties of the United States with foreign powers and the Statutes of the United
table.
That table takes up each tract of territory at the year when it became a
every piece of territory which then (1776) was, or which afterwards became a part
political divisions then without, but at later dates within the present limits of the
in a foot-note, no areal changes occurred.
In the Year columns of this Table, the Roman letters refer to the parcels of territory on the Area map (Plate X V.), and the figures in parenthesis refer to the notes under this Table
States for the specified years, constitute the main authorities for thefacts presented in this Table.These authorities are mainly
cited on pp. 574-580 of Vol. I, of the Ninth Census (1870).
In that volume are an analogous map unb
part of the area of the United States.
Hence, maps traced from that map in accord with that table will present the territory of the United States only, at the selected date.
On the contrary, this table takes up In its first Year column
of the area of theUnited States; and any map traced from the area map of this Atlas, pursuant to any column of this table, will show the territory of the United States at the date selected, and will present also, with their names the
United States.
I
P o l i t i c a l D i v i s io n s .
18 18
18 19
18 20
18 2 1
18 2 2
1834
I8 3 6
18 3 7
18 3 8
18 4 5
I8 4 6
18 4 8
18 4 9
18 5 0
1853
1854
18 5 8
i d ......................
i d ......................
i d ..................
i d ..................
i d ......................
i d ......................
i d ..........
i d ..........
i d ..........
I d ..........
I d ...
I d ...
I d ..............
I d ..............
I d ..............
I d ..............
I d ......................
I d ......................
I d ................................
I d ................
..........
i d ..........
i d ..........
id ...
I d ....
id ....
Id . . . .
id ...
Id.
(14)
id ...
id ...
F ...........
I d ....
Id . . .
id ...
Id . . . /,/..................
i d . .. I d ......................
id ...
_
A .B.C.D I d _
I d ...
9
11
i d ......................
i d ..........
I d ..........
I d ...
I d ..............
I d ................................
I d ................................
i d ..........
i d ..........
Id. . .
Id. . .
I d .. .
Id
18 6 6
id .
id .
Id
id . .
I d ....
I d ...
I d ......................
i d ..................
i d ......................
i d ..........
I d ..........
I d . . . I d ..............
I d ..............
I d ..................
I d ................................
i d ..........
I d .. . i
I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
A t ..........
Id ..........
I d ..........
id ....
id _
_
id _
_
Id. . . . Id . . . i d . ..
I d .... id ... id ...
Id _
_
S,Di.<3) i d . . .
I d ......................
i d ....................
i d ..................
i d ..................
i d ......................
I d ....................
i d ..........
i d ..........
i d ..........
I d . ..
I d ...
i d ..............
I d ..............
i d ......................
i d ......................
I d ................................
I d ................................
i d ..........
i d ..........
i d . ..
I d . ..
Id . . .
..............
i d ..................
i d ..................
I d ......................
Id
Id
I d ...
I d ..........
id. . . . I d . . . .
id ...
I d ...
id ...
id ...
i d ....................
C o.........
i d ..............
i d ..............
H. I, J, K L ..
d
. _
_
N, O, P, Ay, Bd O, N .. ..
I d ...................... Jd ..........
Id . .
18 6 7
1868
1873
1
lei
3
3
E ,C k ..!
Id
Id
Id
td
N ,(),P (4). I d ..........
Id
Id . .
Id
Id .
I d ......................
I
6
5
let
td
7
td
td
Li. . . N, O, P . . .
Id
I d . . . I d ..............
8
N, ( ) ....
.......... .................... ................
S. Di (3). I d ..........
I d . . . . . I d ..........
7
I d ...
I d ...
i d ..............
i d ..............
I d .......... ...
I d ..............
i d ......................
i d ......................
I d ..........................
I d ................................
I d .. . . . .
Id _
_
Id . ..
I d . ..
id .....
i d ......................
Id . '.
I d ...
(5)
id
i d . ..
V Hi.
Id
Id
Id
Id
Id
id ...
vr
I d ..........
id ....
Id _
_
I d ...
I d . ..
i d ......................
i d ..................
I d ....................
I d ..........
I d ..........
I d ...
i d ..............
I d ..............
i d ......................
I d ...............................
I d ..
I d . ..
i d ......................
Id. ..
Id
Id
i d . ..
I d ...
i d ..........
id _
_
id ....
i d . ..
id ...
i d ......................
i d ......................
i d ..................
I d (17)..........
i d ......................
i d ..........
i d ..........
i d ..........
I d . ........
id ...
i d ..............
i d ..............
i d ..............
i d ..............
i d ....................
i d ......................
Id ................................
id _
_
id _
_
id . . i d ....................
I d . .. i d ......................
Id. .
Id . ..
Id
Id . .
Id
td
Id
i d . ..
i d ..............
i d .............. . . . .
I d .. . . . . . . .
Id . .
Id . '.
Id
A t. . .
i i ....................
Id . . . .
I d ...
Id . .
Id . . .
Id
Id
Indiana, the Territory of ...........................
(16)
(18)
A i,A f,Ah,A g,N
(19)
A g,A i,N Ah,Ai,N I d '...
A?j A h .. Af, A g .. I d . . . i d ..............
C i ...............................
Id . . . . . . . . . . .
H, J, A k, A j.............
I d ..........
id .. . I d ....
I d ...
3
1
3
3
I d ...
I d ..........
I d ....
I d ...
Id . ..
I d ..........
I d ..........
I d ..........
Id *
I d ...
id ...
I a ......................
I d ..................
I d ......................
I d ..........
I d ..........
I d ...
i d ..............
i d ..............
i d ......................
I d ................................
i d . ...
I d . ..
i d __
i d . ..
i d . ..
i d . ..
9
to
1
1
13
'3
'4
'5
16
'7
18
\\ .. .
3
7
3
8
3
9
id
i d . !!
i')
id
Id ..
..
" id .: : ."
id
30
31
33
»3
34
*5
36
37
38
39
............ ............
30
Michigan, the Territory of...........................
(6)
I d . .. I d ..........
I d . . . I d (I)...
I d ....
Id _
_
I d ....
I d ....
Id _
_
I d ....
Id _
_
I d ....
I d ...
I d . ..
I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
(7
)
I d ....................
I d ......................
I d ......................
I d ......................
I d ..................
I d ..................
I d ..................
I d ..................
I d .............. ...
I d ......................
I d . ....................
I d ......................
i d .. ..
i d ..........
i d ..........
i d ..........
I d ..........
I d ..........
I d ..........
I d ..........
I d . ..
I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
i d ..............
i d ..............
i d ..............
I d ..............
i d ..............
i d ..............
i d ..............
i d ..............
i d ......................
i d ......................
i d ......................
i d ......................
I d ................................
I d ............................. .
I d ...............................
I d ..
i d . ..
id _
_
i d ..
i d ...
i d . ..
i d . ..
u ...
i d ..................
i d ..................
i d ............
i d ............
Id . ..
I d ..........
I d ..........
i d . ..
Id .
Id . .
I d .. .
I d ...
id
Id
Id
Id
Id
Id
Id
id .: .
A d,A e,A r,Y .
i d ......................
i d ..........
i d ..........
i d . ..
I d ..............
i t ..............
i d ..............
id
................
i d . ....................
Id . . .
I d ................................
id
id
i d __
id ..
id
Id
id ...
i d ...
Jd ..........
id
Id
id ...
I d . . . . I d . .. Id . . . I d ......................
I d (2) . I d . . . (l6)
A v . . . I d . . . I d . . . I d ......................
id ...
i d . ..
id
id ...
id
id . \ .
id
Id
Id
Id
td
td ...
id
td
N .......... i d . . .
Z,Ai,Ah. I d . . .
I d ....................
A v, A w . ..
i d ..........
i d ........
I d ...
I d ..............
i d ..............
i d ......................
I d ................................
Id . . .
I d ......................
i d . ........
i d ........ ;
I d ..
I d ..............
i d ..............
i d ......................
I d ................................
id ..
A z, K ,0 , Be, Bd, P, Ay. i d ..........
Id . . . id . . .
" id .:
i d . ..
Nevada, the Territory o f .............................
id .
id !_ !
_
Ax, Be, Be, Bf..
B g ....................
I d ..........
I d ..........
I d ....
Id _
_
I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
I d ......................
I d ......................
I d ..................
I d ..................
I d ......................
I d ......................
i d ..........
i d ..........
I d . ..
I d ...
I d ...
I d ..........
I d ..........
I d ..........
I d . . . . Id (21) I d . ..
I d . . . I d .'..'. i d . . .
Id _
_ I d . . . I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
I d (22)..............
i d . . . ' . ..............
i d ......................
I d ..................
I d ................
I d ..................
I d ......................
I d ......................
I d ......................
I d ..........
i d ..........
I d ..........
, ............ ........ .. , • •••••• .......... .......... ............................
Id _
_ Id _
_ I d . . . Id . ■ . Br, Bs ..............
I d ..................
Ohio, the Territory N. W. of the R iv e r...
Ohio, the Territory South of the River . , . , , , , , ,
I d . ..
Oregon, the Territory of..............................
I d ..........
........................
.......... ..
I d ...................... I d ..........
i d ..........
i d ..........
i d ..............
i d ..............
i d ....................
i d ......................
D> M M K I i d ......................
< m i
I d (2'll I d ........
I d ........‘. . ,
(23)
I d ..........
u .......... I d . . . I d . ............ i d .............. i d ......................
i d .......... I d . . . I d .............. i d .............. i d ......................
..............
i d ..........
I d ...
I d ...
......
I d ..............
I d ..............
.......
Id . . I d ............
I d ..............
(8)
I d ................................
I d ................................
i d ........
i d ..........
De, Bm, Bi, E, I, (20) i d ..........
td
i d .......... id . .
i d . . . Id ..................
id
I d . .. I d ...................... id .
i d . .. Dc,Bm,Bi,E (20) I)e Bm.CI i d . . .
)d
fd
Id
Id .
id
Id
Id
id ...
n ____
i d ..........
i d . \. i d . . . ........ '.'.'..
Id . . I d ......................
id ....
i d ..........
id
i d . ..
Id
Id . .
Id
I d ...
H
43
A x ,A y ,P 43
44
45
I"
i d . ..
Id. . .
i d . ..
i d . ..
Id
I d ...
td
I d ..................
i d . ..
id
Id
19
5
0
5
1
Id
Id
i d . ..
i d ..........
47
48
I d ...
53
53
54
55
5b
57
58
59
60
....
I d ................................
i d ................................
I d ..........
Id _
_
Id _
_
I d . ..
I d ...
I d ......................
I d ................
I d ......................
i d ..........
i d ..........
I d ...
I d ..............
i d ..............
I d ......................
i d ....................
i d ..........
Id. . I d ................
i d . ..
id .
Id
Id .
td
I d . . . I d ..........
I d . . . I d ..........
I d . . . I d ..........
id _
_
id ....
I d ....
it_
_
id ....
id _
_
i d . ..
I d ...
I d ...
i d . ..
I d ...
I d ...
i d ......................
i d ......................
i d ......................
i d ..................
i d ..................
i d ..................
i d ..................
i d ......................
i d ......................
i d ......................
i d ......................
i d ..........
i d ..........
i d . ........
i d ..........
i d ..........
i d ..........
id ...
I d ...
I d ...
I d ..............
I d ..............
I d ..............
i t ..............
i d ..............
i d . ............
Id . . . ..............
I d ......................
I d ......................
i d ................................
i d ................................
i d ................................
i d ..........
i d ..........
I d ...
Id . . . Id ......................
Id . . . i d ......................
Id . . . I d ......................
Id. ..
i d ........
i d ...
id .
i d . ..
id
Id
Id
Id
id
Id
I d ...
td
Id
id
(9)
id ......
I d ...
I d ........
B v ............
(IO)
(II)
I d ..............
I d ..............
i d . . ..............
i d ......................
i d . . . ..........
i d ......................
Id ......................
id . . . . . . . .
id . .
i d . ..
I d . ..
Id _
_
Id ..........
Id
i d . ..
i d . ..
id.
id ..
i d . ..
i d ...
i d ..
i d . ..
id ..
id
id
Id
Id
Id
1.
id
id
td
id ..
id ...
id
Id '
Id
Id
Id
Id
id ...
Id
id
C f ..........
i d ...
Id
i d ...
Id
Id
I d .. .
Id . . .
id
id ...
id
Id
Id
I d ...
Quebec, part of the Province of................
(9)
66
67
68
Virginia, the State o f............... .....................
I d ...
I d . ..
I d ..........
I d ..........
Id _
_
I d ....
id _
_
I d ....
I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
I d ...
i d ......................
i d ......................
i d ..................
i d ..................
i d ......................
i d . ....................
I d ........
i d ..........
I d .......... Ce,Cf,Cn
I d ...
I d . ..
I d ..............
Id ..............
B u,Bj,Be,A x,V
West Florida, the Province o f ....................
I d ...
Id ..........
I d ....
Wisconsin, the Territory o f .........................
id . : : :
I d ................................
i d ...............................
I d .. .
id . . . w
Id ......................
Bz, Bh, C d. .
I d . . . ................
/,/......................
Bu, V, Bj, A x..
I d ....
(13)
id ..................
X, Z, C g .........
I d ........
I d ..........
Wyoming, the Territory of..........................
(I)
(3)
(3)
(4)
Less F.
Less Av.
The letters D i should appear on the map to designate all of the present State of Florida west of the River Appalachicola.
And F t, ltd, F t, and F f In the present Territory of Wyoming.
(5) The present Territories of Idaho and Montana and of Wyoming, excepting Cd ( V, A x , A y, P , B e, Bd, B t, B f, B j).
(6) The present States of Michigan and Wisconsin, B t in Ohio and Z in Minnesota (A d, A t, A r, Y , X , Cg, Z, Bs).
(7) The present States of Michigan, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, F t in Ohio, and N in the Territory of Dakota (A d , A r , B s, A t , A f , Ag, A h , A i,
Cg, X , Y, Z, N ).
(8) The Territory north of the 43d parallel of latitude and west
(9) The Texan etnnexation shown on the map.
(10) Ceded by the State of Texas and not then included in any
(II) From the Rocky Mountains to the State of California with
(13) See text at M a s s a c h u s e t t s .
This transfer of a .d . 1855 is
C i................................
of the Rocky Mountains (V , B t, B u , B j, B e, A x).
State or Territory (C j, H , and A i).
its present latitude (L , B f, B s, Cd, B h, Bg).
placed in the ( 1 8 5 1 ) column to save tabular sp a ce.
Z. . . .
X .C g Id ..............
Id ..............
Id ......................
i d ................................
I d ..........
I d . ..
I d ...
B/ Cd
...
33
34
35
3f>
37
38
39
40
td
Id
td
td
B t ...
.................... ........................ ..
i d .............. i d ....................
i d .............. Bt......................
i d (12).
..............
I d . . ............................
33
id
A z . .. Id
i d ..........
Mir Bit Bi
I d ...
Id .
id ....
id ....
30
31
td
A d, Ar, A e, Y.
Nebraska, the Territory of...........................
60
69
70
71
73
73
74
75
76
I d ......................
I d ......................
I d ..............
Id . . . .
33
»3
*4
J5
36
61
62
63
64
65
i d ..................
I d ..........
M
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
F .......................
Id
Id ..
I d ..
I d ........
Dakota, the Territory o f...............................
»5
16
*7
18
18 6 4
id
i d ..
u ..............
Id
/d . .
I d ...
13
*3
1
9
30
3
1
18 6 3
E,Bi,Ck.
G ..............
10
18 6 1
18 5 9
<
1
1
63
63
f>
4
f>
5
66
<7
>
68
B<' Bd Bn
Bf.Bj.Cd
f>
9
70
71
73
73
74
75
76
(13) The present States of Wisconsin, Iowa, and Minnesota, and N in the present Territory of Dakota.
(14) The present eastern limit determined a .d . 1825.
Annotated from the iM tltl column, to save lateral space In the tablo.
(15) Ceded to the United States, and named Alaska.
(16) The Indian Country absorbed the then Territory of Missouri.
It also included the parcels A f, A g, A h , A i, and N , which, two days before the
limits of the Indian Country were established, were taken from the Territory of Missouri and added to the Territory of Michigan.
(17) Less A ui.
(18) Less the original (1838) Territory of Iowa.
(19) Less the original (1848) Territory of Oregon.
The Indian Country then comprised that part of The French Cession cast of the Rocky Moun
tains and west of the River Missouri and of the present States of Missouri and Arkansas.
(20) A lso The Gadsden Purchase, shown on the map.
(21) Became a part of The Republic of the United Mexican States, or of Mexico.
(22) Less the Republic of Texas, shown on the map as The Texan Annexation.
(23) Less The F irst M exican Cession.
Then was exactly The Gadsden Purchase.
Ceded A.D. 1853 to the United Slates
THE MINOR POLITICAL DIVISIONS OP THE UNITED STATES.
BY
S. A
G A L P I N , LL.B „ H A R T F O R D , C O N N .
H E universal application within the United States of the principle of local selfgovernment, has given to the several States— exhibiting, as they do, wide diversity
of settlement, of interests and of traditions— codes of local law, differing in greater
or less degree from each other. To indicate in detail all the peculiarities of these varying
codes would be a work far too large for the present limits. They may, however, be
roughly classed, according to the more or less minute subdivision of the States for local
purposes, under three general types or systems, which will be known throughout this dis
cussion as the “ T o w n ” system, the “ C ounty” system, and the “ Compromise” system.
It is the purpose of this paper to indicate briefly the general characteristics of these types,
and to present some statistics of the minor political divisions of the country gathered from
the Returns of the Ninth Census. No attempt will be made to discuss the subject philo
sophically, or even historically, or to speculate upon the advantages or disadvantages which
attend the adoption of one or the other of the systems named.
In further limitation of this enquiry, it should be understood that it will not be
extended to the Territories of the United States. They will be excluded, not on account
of the scantiness of their population, or the crudeness of their political organization, but
because both their present boundaries and their existing governments are provisional only.
They are wholly under the control of the Federal Government, their principal executive
officers being appointed by the President, the Acts of their Territorial Legislatures being
subject to revision by Congress, and their single delegate having, indeed, a seat in the
House of Representatives and the right to participate in its deliberations, but no vote.
When, however, these Territories are once admitted as States, they attain equal rank and
authority with the original members of the Union, and have the same exclusive control
over their territory and interior organization. Such action of the law-making power, once
had under the Constitution, becomes irrevocable.
In discussing, moreover, the peculiarities of local government in the several States
of the Union, a foreign reader may need to be reminded that, however much the States
may differ among themselves in size or in interior political organization, their relations to
the Federal Government are absolutely the same.
O f the three systems before mentioned, the two which differ most widely from each
other, not only in their general characteristics, but also in their location throughout the
country, are the “ Town ” system of New England and the “ County ” system of the South.
Both of these were firmly rooted in their respective sections before the Declaration of
Independence, and passed through the successive transfers of sovereignty growing out of
the War of the Revolution, without any material change.
It must not be understood from this classification that the County does not exist in
the “ Tow n” States, their title being simply the result of the prominence given to the
“ town " in their interior political organization. Indeed,so strong has been the impress of
English tradition throughout the United States that, with one exception only, the political
division next below the State is known as the County; and this is true, not only of the
original thirteen States, but also of those erected later on territory acquired by treaty or
purchase, whether from England, France, or Spain. The sole exception to the rule laid
down is found in Louisiana, which, under the influence of the civil law, is divided into
“ Parishes.” As these “ Parishes,” however, possess powers and general characteristics sub
stantially the same as do the Counties of other States, the difference is considered to be
one of name only and will not be further observed in the progress of this inquiry.
Attention is here invited to the statistics of Counties in the United States, as set
forth in the following table, compiled from the published reports of the Ninth Census:
TABLE
T
able
s h o w in g
A S H A V IN G
th e
num ber
of
P O P U L A T IO N , A T
Sta tes .
o r g a n iz e d
EACH
I.
C
o u n t ie s
D E C E N N IA L
w it h in
each
C E N S U S OF TH E
1870
i860
1850
1840
1830
1820
Alabam a................
A rk a n sa s..............
California..............
Connecticut..........
D elaw are..............
F lo rid a ..................
G e o r g ia ................
Illin o is ..................
Indiana..................
I o w a ......................
K a n s a s ..................
K en tu ck y..............
L o u isia n a .............
M ain e....................
M arylan d..............
M assachusetts.. . .
M ich ig an ..............
M in nesota............
M ississip p i..........
Missouri ............
N eb rask a..............
Nevada..................
New H am pshire..
New Jersey . . . .
New \ o r k ............
North C a ro lin a ...
O h io .......................
O rego n ..................
Pennsylvania . . . .
Rhode Is la n d _
_
South Carolina . . .
T en n essee............
T e x a s ....................
Verm ont................
V ir g in ia ................
Vi est V irg in ia .. . .
W isco n sin ........ ..
65
6l
50
8
3
39
132
102
92
98
64
»5
53
l6
22
14
71
71
65
114
52
14
IO
21
60
9°
88
22
66
5
31
85
141
14
99
53
58
52
55
44
8
3
37
132
102
92
97
52
5i
27
8
3
28
95
99
9i
49
49
39
36
8
3
93
87
87
109
48
16
21
14
62
64
60
113
IOO
47
*3
20
14
43
IO
21
60
86
88
19
65
5
30
84
«33
>4
148
58
2164
1950
1590
U N IT E D
,
returned
STATES.
31
T otal..........
ta te
24
8
3
S
1810
1800
1790
8
3
8
3
8
3
8
3
76
51
63
47
19
35
38
24
11
9°
38
13
20
14
32
83
31
IO
19
14
67
25
9
19
14
54
42
>9
20
19
18
19
16
59
IOO
56
62
26
32
17
IO
20
59
79
87
8
18
53
68
79
8
14
56
64
73
6
13
50
62
59
6
13
43
62
36
5
13
30
60
5
*3
15
54
63
5
29
79
73
14
137
54
5
29
72
51
5
29
62
51
5
28
48
42
5
28
38
35
22
25
is
13
106
13
103
12
97
11
92
80
1216
933
725
524
408
271
TABLE
T
able
N
s h o w in g
in t h
C
th e
num ber
e n su s, c o n t a in e d
C
of
one
-h
II.
o u n t ie s
alf
and
of
S
each
th ree
-fo u
tate
rth s,
w h ic h
,
at
r e s p e c t iv e l y
,
of
th e
it s
P O P U L A T IO N .
N umber
of
w h ich
S tates .
Alabam a.............
A rk a n sa s...........
C alifornia...........
Connecticut . . . .
D ela w a re...........
F lo rid a .............
G eorgia...............
Illin o is ...............
Indiana...............
I o w a ...................
K a n sa s...............
Kentucky . . . .
L ouisian a...........
M a in e .................
M arylan d ...........
Massachusetts .
M ich ig a n ...........
Minnesota . . . .
M ississippi........
C ou n ties
con tain
One-half o f the Three-fourths of
aggregate pop the aggregate
ulation of the
population of
State.
the State.
St a t e s .
24.
6
IQ
7
3
1
8
38
2C
32
24
12
32
11
c
3
3
*4
II
*9
N um ber 01r C o u n ties
WHICH CONTAIN
One-half of the Three-fourths of
aggregate pop the aggregate
ulation of the
population of
State.
the State.
c6
7
20
5
2
Nevada ...............
New Hampshire.
New Jersey . . . .
3
4
6
6
12
81
North C arolin a..
29
53
11
I
IO
28
2
>9
28
6
55
42
24
64
27
O r e g o n ...............
Pennsylvania . ..
Rhode Island. . .
South C arolin a..
IO
V erm on t.............
V irg in ia .............
West V irgin ia.. .
W isconsin...........
5
26
15
•3
3/
9
53
28
25
Total . . .
535
1068
8
25
21
35
I.— T h e
T own
11
S ystem .
The “ T ow n ” system, pure and simple, prevails only in the six New England States.
-Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Rhode Island, and Vermont. The
area of these States is 68,348 sq. m., their population 3,487,924. They thus contain about
one-thirtieth of the area and one-eleventh of the population of the States of the Union.
Under this system, the “ town,” which in its area and general characteristics conforms
closely to the “ township" of the W est.f is the important political division of the State.
It is a body corporate and politic, deriving its charter from the Legislature of the State
and generally entitled to an independent representation in the lower branch of that Legis
lature.:}: It has power to elect its own officers, to manage in its own way its own roads,
schools, local police and other domestic concerns, and collects through its own officers, not
only its self-imposed taxes for local purposes, but also those levied by the Legislature for
the support of the State, or by the County officers for the limited objects of their expen
diture. Reference to the table following shows that the average area of the New England
“ town”— deduction having been made for the estimated unsettled area of Maine— is 34
sq. m., the number of its inhabitants averaging at the same time 2,450, or about 72 to the
sq. m. Deducting the population of cities and towns having over 10,000 inhabitants, the
average population of the town is 1700— or 50 to the sq. m. In a community of such
area and numbers, meetings of the legal voters to examine the accounts and official con
duct of the town officers and to consider subjects of common interest are possible; and
the increased strength of public sentiment serves no less than this direct supervision to
induce a proper execution of public trust.
Where so much political power is vested in the town, any larger subdivision of the
State must necessarily have but a limited function. The County thus becomes in New
England mainly a judicial, not a political, subdivision of the State. The jurisdiction of
the executive officers of the County over the towns within it extends to the laying out of
new highways and is then in the nature of an appellate one only, while such duties of
those officers as relate exclusively to County affairs are confined to the care and control
of the County buildings.
In further illustration of the “ Tow n” system, thus rudely sketched, it has been
thought best to detail at somewhat greater length its workings as set forth in the statutes
of one of the States which has adopted it, some of the particulars in which the organiza
tion of the other “ Town ” States differs from that thus detailed, being at the same time
indicated in foot-notes. The State chosen for this purpose is M a s s a c h u s e t t s .
20
14
120
In connection with the statistics of Counties thus presented, the following table is
believed to be of interest. A s will be seen by its title, it gives the number of Counties of
each State which, in 1870, contained one-half and three-fourths, respectively, of its popula
tion. The most casual examination of this table discloses the fact that the inequalities
which mark the distribution of the population among the several States of the Union*
exist also as between the several Counties of each State. Though it was not practicable
to extend the computation to every Census, yet the writer has reason to believe, from
some scattering tests, that such inequalities have always existed, and in substantially the
same measure for each State at each Census, as at 187a
* A t 1870, one-half of the population of the thirty-seven States of the Union was found within eight States, three-fourths
within seventeen States.
f The “ town " of New England or New York must not be confounded by a Western or Southern reader with the aggre
gation of houses to which in those sections the name is generally applied. The whole area of the States named, exception
being made of the unorganized portions o f Maine, New Hampshire and Vermont, is covered by the “ towns, within whose
limits may be one, two, three, or even more villages.
X The system of “ town ” representation was changed in Massachusetts in 1857 for that by Representative districts.
THE
M IN O R
P O L IT IC A L
D IV IS IO N S
M assachusetts .
The County.— The officers, other than judicial,* o f a County o f Massachusetts, are three County Commis
sioners and a County Treasurer, all of whom are elected from the body o f the County for three years— one
Commissioner being chosen annually. A full attendance at the meetings o f the Board is required for the
transaction o f business, vacancies arising from the absence or disqualification by reason of interest of any
member, being supplied by two Special Commissioners who are elected also for three years.
The Board has power to manage the Count)- buildings (Court House, Jail, House o f Correction, Fire Proof
Offices, &c.), to hear on appeal complaints o f the assessment o f damages for property taken for any railroad or
other corporation, or o f the decision o f the Town Assessors in undue assessments, to lay out new highways
from town to town, to license inn-holders and common victuallers, and, in regard to finances, to examine the
accounts o f the County Treasurer, to make annually an estimate o f the amount o f taxes necessary to meet the
County charges, and to send a copy of this estimate to the Secretary of the Commonwealth to be laid before the
Legislature for examination and allowance, to apportion the County taxes among the several cities and towns,
certifying the same to the several Town Assessors, and to negotiate temporary loans and contract new debts not
to exceed in any one year or for any one object $30.00 for each 1000 inhabitants.
The accounts o f the Board of County Commissioners are audited by a Board o f Examiners composed of
the Judge o f Probate, the Register of Probate, and the Clerk o f the Courts for the County. The Board o f
Examiners also canvass the returns of an election for County Commissioners.
The Town.— The town is, however, in New England the political unit. It is a municipal corporation with
full corporate rights and powers, and responsible solely to the Legislature, from which it derives its life.
The voters of the town have power in “ town-meetings ” to appropriate moneys for the support o f public
schools, and for conveying pupils to school, for the support and employment of the poor, for laying out and
repairing highways, and for all other necessary town charges.
They have power also to make by-laws in regard to their prudential affairs and for maintaining the public
peace— such by-laws, when approved by the Superior Court,being binding on all persons coming within the town
limits, and being enforced by penalties not exceeding $20.00 for one offence.
The more important o f the town officers, all of whom are elected annually, are, a town clerk, three, five,
seven or nine selectmen,! three or more assessors, and, if deemed expedient, three or more assistant assessors,
three or more overseers of the poor, treasurer, one or more surveyors of highways, three or more members of
school committee, and constables, who shall collect taxes unless collectors are chosen.
The powers and duties of most of the officers above named are so clearly indicated by their official titles,
that it is deemed sufficient for the purposes of this paper to speak further o f the selectmen only. These are
required to register the voters and provide means for elections, to establish fire departments, lay out highways,
determine damages sustained by repairing the same, order a watch, grant all licenses, except to inn-holders and
common victuallers, and, in general, to manage all town affairs. They, as well as the other important town
officers, are required to make in town-meeting full reports of their official action.
Municipal Corporations.— So much for towns. No provision is made in this State for the incorporation by
general law- of villages or other municipal corporations within the limits o f towns. Cities are, however, as
matter of fact, towns incorporated, where, by special charter, the management of municipal affairs is transferred
from the town-meeting and selectmen to the Mayor and Council.t
T o indicate more clearly the method in which the local government is administered under the town system,
some of the more important of its departments are outlined below.
Schools.— Every town is obliged by law to maintain for “ at least six months in the year, a sufficient number
o f schools for the instruction of all the children who may legally attend public school therein, in orthography,
reading, writing, English grammar, geography, arithmetic, history of the United States, and good behavior.”
The general supervision of the public schools is entrusted to a school committee o f three members, or of
any number a multiple o f three, who are elected for three years— one-third going out annually. This committee
has power to select and contract with the teachers, to determine the text-books and arrange for furnishing them
to the scholars at cost, and in general to supervise the working of the school system, making an annual report to
the State Board of Education. Assistance from the educational fund of the State is granted to the town in pro
portion to the number of its children between five and fifteen years of age. This number is obtained annually
by the assessors and reported by the school committee to the State Board of Education.
Prior to 1869, the school law of Massachusetts provided for the districting of the town for school purposes.
These districts were formed by the inhabitants of the town in town-meeting, such reference being had to the
convenience of the pupils that a part o f one town might be included for school purposes in the same school
district with an adjoining part of another town.
In that year, the district system was abolished by general law, the property and powers of the districts
reverting to the several towns of which they were parts. This act was, however, so far modified in 1870 as to
allow the towns by a two-thirds vote to re-establish the school districts, and about one-eighth of the towns of the
State (generally the smaller ones) have availed themselves o f the permission thus given. As the school-district
still exists in most of the New England States, it is deemed advisable to sketch briefly its place and function in
the educational system of Massachusetts.
The School District is a body corporate for school purposes only. Its legal voters determine in district
meeting where the school-house shall stand, and have power to raise money for erecting and repairing it, for
purchasing or hiring buildings or land for school purposes, and for purchasing libraries and school apparatus,
fuel, furniture, and other necessaries.
Every town, divided into districts, chooses at its annual town-meeting, or authorizes the districts to choose,
each for itself, a prudential committee o f one from each district, whose duty it is to keep the school-house of
that district in order, to provide fuel and other necessaries for its schools, and to aid the school committee of
the town in the discharge of their duties; and, if so authorized by the town, select and contract with the
teachers— the committee being enlarged in the latter case to three members.
The only other officer of the district is a clerk who is required to certify to the town assessor all votes of
the district for raising money, &c. The assessor, treasurer, and collector of town taxes, act in respect to school
taxes.
Elections and Town-Meetings.— Every town is a voting district, unless subdivided by the Legislature for
election purposes. The registration of voters is made by the selectmen. The annual town-meeting, when town
officers are chosen, is held in February, March, or April. This and all other town-meetings, are held in pursuance
of a warrant under the hands of the selectmen, which warrant must express the time and place of meeting and
the subjects to be acted on, the selectmen being required to include in it all subjects for which ten or more legal
voters may make request
At town-meetings for the election of National, State, or County officers, the selectmen preside and canvass
the votes. The result is recorded by the town-clerk and copies of the record are sent, in the case of County
officers to the Board of County Examiners, and of all other but town officers to the Secretary o f State.
At all other town-meetings, a moderator chosen by the meeting presides ; he announces the result of an
election for town officers, and administers the oath of office to such of the persons elected as may be present
— the absentees being duly notified o f their election.
Revenue.— State taxes are levied by the assessors of the several towns upon a warrant o f the State
Treasurer.
County taxes are certified to the town assessors by the County Commissioners, their estimate o f the amount
required to meet the County charges having been first allowed by the Legislature.
The town assessors are required further to levy all town and school-district taxes duly certified to them,
one-sixth of the sum raised— not, however, exceeding $1.50 per capita— being assessed upon the polls.
The inhabitants o f the town are required to bring in annually to its assessors, sworn lists of all their polls
and taxable property, from which lists a fair cash valuation of all the real and personal property o f the town is
obtained.
Licenses to inn-holders and common victuallers are granted by the Board of County Commissioners; all
other licenses by the selectmen.
Highways.— Highways from town to town are laid out by the Board of County Commissioners after notice
to the selectmen o f the towns interested. Town ways and private ways are laid out by the selectmen of the
several towns. Appeals in the matter of damages arising from their action, or from their refusal to lay out
OF
THE
U N IT E D
STATES.
ii
roads, are entertained by the Board o f County Commissioners. Appropriations for laving out and repairing
highways are made by the towns in town-meeting and expended under direction of the surveyor o f highways.
The town may be divided into highway districts, for each of which district a surveyor o f highways is elected
annually, who may be empowered to collect the highway taxes o f his district.
Poor Support.— Poor support is furnished by the selectmen o f the several towns to all needy persons having
a “ residence ” within their limits, while paupers having no such u residence ” in any town are cared for at one
of the State Alms-Houses.*
Records.— Records of births, marriages, and deaths are kept by the town-clerks— certified copies of the
same being furnished to the Secretary o f State.
Real Estate Records are kept by a Register o f Deeds, who is elected for three years in each registration
district— each County forming one or more registration districts.!
II.— T he C o u n ty S yste m .
The “ County” system, which is so markedly in contrast with that just noticed, is now
found in seventeen States, viz.: Alabama, Arkansas, California, Delaware, Florida, Georgia,
Kentucky, Louisiana, Maryland, Mississippi, Missouri, Nebraska, Nevada, Oregon, South
Carolina, Tennessee,and Texas. These “ County” States have an area of 1,243,295 sq. m.,
with a population of 11,955,731,— about two-thirds of the area and more than one-third
of the population of all the States.
Until a recent date, the County system prevailed in every State south of Pennsylvania
and the Ohio River. Within the last decade, however, North Carolina, South Carolina,
and Virginia have taken measures for dividing their Counties into townships and for
clothing those townships with more or less of political power; although South Carolina
subsequently retraced its steps and abolished the townships thus erected. In view of this
recent action of Virginia, the opinions of her great statesman, Mr. Jefferson, upon the
merits of the “ township” system may be not irrelevant. Extracts from three of his
letters are, therefore, inserted, the order of their dates being, for convenience of citation,
reversed:
“ Among other improvements, I hope they (a proposed constitutional convention) will adopt the subdivision
of our Counties into wards. The former may be estimated at an average o f twenty-four miles square; the
latter should be about six miles square each, and would answer to the hundreds o f your Saxon Alfred. In each
of these might be, 1st, An elementary school; 2d, A company o f militia, with its officers; 3d, A justice of the
peace and constable; 4th, Each ward should take care of their own poor; 5th, Their own roads; 6th, Their
own police; 7th, Elect within themselves one or more jurors to attend the courts of justice; and 8th, Give in at
their Folk House, their votes for all functionaries reserved to their election.” (Letter of June 5, 1824, to Major
John Cartwright, Opera, vol. vii, p. 357.)
In a letter to Samuel Kercheval, July 12, 1816, (Opera, vol. vii, p. 13,) Mr. Jefferson,
after describing at greater length such a division of the County, adds:
“ These wards, called townships in New England, are the vital principle of their governments and have
proved themselves the wisest invention ever devised by the wit of man for the perfect exercise of self-government
and for its preservation. We should thus marshal our government into, 1, the general federal republic, for all
concerns foreign and federal; 2, that of the State, for what relates to our own citizens exclusively ; 3, the
County republics, for the duties and concerns of the County; and 4, the ward republics, for the small and yet
numerous and interesting concerns o f the neighborhood ; and in government, as well as in every other business
of life, it is by division and subdivision of duties alone, that all matters, great and small, can be managed to
perfection. And the whole is cemented by giving to every citizen, personally, a part in the administration of the
public affairs.”
And again, May 26, 1810, writing to Governor Tyler, Mr. Jefferson says (Opera,
voL v, p. 525):
“ ’rhese little republics would be the main strength of the great one. We owe to them the vigor given to
our Revolution! in its commencement in the Eastern States, and by them the Eastern States were enabled to
repeal the embargo in opposition to the Middle, Southern and Western States, and their large and lubberly
division into Counties which can never be assembled. General orders are given out from a centre to the
foreman of every hundred, as to the sergeants o f an army, and the whole nation is thrown into energetic action
in the same direction in one instant, and as one man, and becomes absolutely irresistible.”
Resuming the consideration of the County system it is to be noted that under it all
the conditions of the “ town ” system are reversed. The names of the greater and lesser
subdivisions of the State may remain unchanged, but the powers and position of these
subdivisions are in no case or degree the same. The town or township is but the skeleton
of the New England town, while the County is clothed with all the political power. It
derives its charter from the Legislature, and is responsible to the State authorities for its
share of the State taxation. Its subordinate divisions, formed— Delaware and Maryland
being exceptions— by its own officers, have no political power whatever, and exist only for
convenience at the general elections, or to mark the district of a justice of the peace and
a constable.§ The average area of the County in the States adopting this system is 1040
sq. m., its population 11,236, the unorganized portions of these States being excluded in
the computation; or, excluding also the partially organized and settled States of the
Pacific slope, its area averages 734 sq. m., its population 11,515, or about 15 inhabitants to
the square mile.
The radical differences between these two types may, perhaps, be emphasized by com
paring the States of Rhode Island and South Carolina in respect to their interior organ
ization. The area of Rhode Island, as given by the General Land Office, is 1306 sq. m.,
* In N ew Hampshire, paupers having no “ residence ” in any town, are cared for at the expense of the County.
t In Vermont, Rhode Island, and Connecticut, real estate records are kept by the town-clerks of the several towns.
* In Rhode Island there are no County officers other than judicial.
In N ew Ham pshire and Connecticut, County taxes are laid by the County Convention, which is called by the County
Commissioners and is composed of the persons elected to represent the several towns of the County in the Legislature.
In Vermont, most of the duties of the County Commissioners are performed by the Judges of the County Court.
f In Rhode Island, the duties of the selectmen are performed by the “ town council,” which consists of not less than three
nor more than seven electors.
$ In Vermont, villages containing more than thirty houses may be incorporated by the selectmen of the town, with muni
cipal powers over sidewalks, nuisances, watch, estrays, & c. The officers of such villages, elected annually, are a clerk, five
trustees, collector, and treasurer. Fire districts, containing not more than two square miles, may be established by the
selectmen, whose officers are a clerk, prudential committee of three, collector, and treasurer.
In Connecticut, boroughs and cities are incorporated by special charter, the whole area o f the town not being generally
included within the municipal limits.
“ Gores," in Vermont, are unorganized districts in which State taxes are assessed and collected by officers appointed by the
Governor, highways are under direction of the County Court, and school districts are laid off by the selectmen of adjoining
towns.
“ Grants " and “ Locations ” in H em Hampshire, are unincorporated districts, which, when called on for public taxes, are
vested with all the powers o f towns relating to the assessment and collection of such taxes, to choice of officers and to
high wavs.
“ Plantations ” in M aine, are not clothed with the full corporate powers of towns, but may elect certain officers and raise
monev for schools, poor-support and legal plantation expenses. (In the early colonial history of New England, this term was
applied alike to an isolated settlement, to a town, whether organized or not. and, indeed, to the colony itself— of which latter
use there is still a tradition in the official title “ State of Rhode Island and Providence Plantations.” )
“ Townships" in M aine have no corporate powers, but State and County taxes on the lands lying within them are
collected by the State Treasurer.
! A s illustrating the views of Mr. Jefferson, a glim pse of the workings of the town system during the War o f the Revo
lution is given in the following extracts taken from the official records of a precinct o f one of the towns o f Massachusetts.
“ A t a legal meeting held June — , 1778, Voted, to choose a committee of seven to estimate the charges of the war since
the seventh part o f the male inhabitants from 16 years old and upwards were raised as Continental soldiers.
July 20, 1778, “ Voted, that each company within the precinct shall pay their own soldiers, and that the money granted at
the last meeting shall be assessed accordingly.” (The precinct contained two militia companies and here seems to have been
practicallv subdivided for the purpose of intensifying still further its public sentiment.)
“ Ju ly 17, 1780, “ Voted, to authorize the precinct treasurer to give security in behalf of the precinct, to the soldiers that
were last raised, for the sum contracted for, as an encouragement to their engagement in the service.
And in order to
strengthen still further this security for the payment o f the sums named, we find under date o f January 17. 1781, the following:
“ Voted, that the soldiers who may engage in the three years service shall have liberty to take their security of individuals
whom they shall choose, and that the precinct will indemnify such persons in giving them securities in behalf of the precinct.
| In Alabama. Florida. K entucky. Nebraska, Oregon and Texas, these divisions are known as “ precincts” ; in Arkansas.
C alifornia, M issouri and Nevada, as “ townships ” ; in Delaware, as “ hundreds” ; in Georgia, as “ militia districts” ; in Louis
iana, as “ wards ” ; in M aryland, as “ election districts ” ; in M ississippi, as “ supervisor s districts ; and in Tennessee, as civil
districts." For each of the civil divisions thus named, one or more justices of the peace and constables are elected or
appointed, with terms varying from 2 to 4 years.
In regard to Georgia alone does a modification o f the statement in the text seem to be required, the primary object of its
division into militia districts being (as their name implies) to provide for the organization within the County of its companies
c f militia— one in each district.
12
THE
M IN O R
P O L IT IC A L
D IV IS IO N S
less than double the average area of the political unit under the County system, yet it has
within its limits 36 towns and cities, each being an independent political organization,
while South Carolina with an area of 34,000 sq. m. has only 31 organized Counties, which
are in no respect the superiors of the Rhode Island towns in political power. On the
other hand, the population of the Rhode Island town averages 6038, or, excluding cities,
4000 inhabitants, the area being about 36 sq. m.; that of the South Carolina County,
22,731, distributed over an average area of nearly 1100 sq. m.
Under these conditions of settlement and organization, differing widely as they do
from those of New England, the methods of administration must also differ. The area of
the County forbids any general gathering of its inhabitants vested with the legislative and
executive functions of the “ town-meeting,” as well as any intimate mutual acquaintance
between the inhabitants of its different sections. O f necessity, therefore, the administra
tion of all local affairs is entrusted wholly to the County officers, and the political duty
and privilege of the citizen begins and ends on election day.
The duly authorized officers of the County are thus charged with the care and control
of theCounty property, the levy and collection of all State and County taxes, the division
of the County into election districts, the laying out and repairing of roads and bridges,
the care of the poor, the police of the County, and, in general, all County and local
affairs.
Following the plan already adopted, further explanation of the County system is
sought to be furnished by a sketch, accompanied by notes referring to other States and
acknowledged to be incomplete, of the political code of
A labam a.
The County.— The officers o f a County of Alabama who are charged with a share o f the political adminis
tration are the Court of County Commissioners, assessor, treasurer, collector, superintendent o f education,
apportioners o f roads, and overseer of roads.
The Court o f County Commissioners is composed of four commissioners elected for three years from the
County at large, with the Judge of Probate, elected for six years, as principal judge. This Court possesses
original jurisdiction over matters pertaining to roads and bridges, and has authority to divide the County into
election precincts and road districts, to direct and control the County property, to appoint certain County officers,
as specified below, to correct the assessments, to levy general and special taxes, to examine, settle and allow
all accounts and claims against the County, to examine the accounts of all County officers, to regulate poor
support, to establish hospitals, and, in general, to transact all the business of the County.**
§
The assessor,f collector, and superintendent o f education,} are elected from the body of the County, and
perform the duties usually devolving upon such officers.
The treasurer,§ three apportioners of roads for each election precinct, and an overseer of roads for each
road district, are appointed by the Court of County Commissioners, the former officer for three years, the latter
for two only.
M unicipal Corporations.— Under general law, towns containing not less than 100 nor more than 3000 inhab
itants may be incorporated by the Judge of Probate, thus obtaining the powers and rights usually granted to
such municipalities. Their affairs are managed by an Intendant and five councillors elected annually, the
number of councillors being, in some cases, increased to nine. Taxation for municipal purposes is limited to
one per-centum on the assessed valuation and a poll-tax o f two dollars per capita. Road and patrol duty is not
required of the inhabitants outside of the corporation limits. It may be added, however, that most rf the towns
of Alabama, following the custom in regard to cities, are incorporated under special charters from the Legisla
ture, though such charters differ but little in scope and detail from that outlined in the general law.
Schools.— The school system o f Alabama is conducted somewhat as follows:
The superintendent of education for the County has general supervision overall its public schools,examines
the teachers and grants certificates to them, and distributes to the trustees of each school district the district’s
proportion of the State and County funds for school purposes.
The County school-tax is limited by general law to 10 cents on each $100 of valuation, and is assessed
and collected as are other taxes, though a higher rate may be authorized in any County by special legislation.
No additional taxes are imposed by the school districts.
Congress granted the sixteenth section of every surveyed township for school purposes. Every “ Congres
sional township ” is, therefore, incorporated as a school district for the use and management of the funds arising
from this grant and for other school purposes. The affairs of these school districts are managed by three
trustees, elected annually, who have full power to establish schools, employ teachers, eta, etc. The trustees
are required to report annually to the County superintendent of education the number o f children of school age
within the district— the school fund of the State and County being distributed upon the basis thus ascertained.
Elections.— The Court of County Commissioners has power to establish and change election precincts, for
each one o f which three inspectors of election are appointed by the Judge of Probate. The inspectors deter
mine the qualifications of each elector as he presents his ballot, no registration o f voters prior to the day of
election being made. Upon the acceptance of his ballot, his name is entered on the “ poll-books ’ ’ by the clerks
o f election and a number corresponding to that there given him is marked upon the back of his ballot.|
Returns of the election are made by the inspectors to the Court of County Commissioners and canvassed by
them.11
Revenue.— All taxes, State and County, are levied by the Court of County Commissioners, the County tax
not being permitted to exceed fifty per centum of the State tax. An annual assessment o f the property of
* The official titles and methods of choosing the officers who, in the Counties of other States, correspond with the Court
o f County Commissioners of Alabama, differ widely.
In Florida. M aryland, Nebraska, Nevada, and South Carolina, they are known as the “ Board of County Commissioners."
In Florida these Commissioners are five in number, appointed by the Governor, as are a ll other prin cipal officers o f the County, for
two y e a rs; in Maryland the number is determined by special legislation for each County, one-half being elected biennially
for four years ; in Nebraska the Board consists of three members, one being chosen annually for three y ea rs; in South Caro
lina. of three, elected biennially; in Nevada, also of three, this number being increased to five in those Counties which have
4000 voters or over.
In Arkansas, Kentucky, Oregon, Tennessee, and Texas, the powers of the County are exercised by the County Court, the
members of which, when not otherwise indicated, are elected biennially from the body of the County. This County Court is
composed, in Arkansas, of a Presiding Judge elected by the County, and two Justices of the Peace elected by the justices of
the Peace of the County— the latter being in turn appointed by the County C o u r t; in Kentucky, of a Presiding and two
Associate Judges; in Missouri, of three Judges; in Oregon, of the County ju d g e, with or without two Commissioners ; in
Tennessee, of the Justices of the Peace, elected for six years by the several Civil Districts of the County ; in Texas, of a
Chief Justice and four Commissioners, elected, one from each of the five precincts into which the County is divided.
In Georgia, County affairs are entrusted to the Ordinary, elected for four years, who possesses also, as do the County Courts
of the States just named, powers exclusively judicial.
In Delaware, the powers of the County are exercised by the Levy Court, which is composed o f one or more Commis
sioners elected for four years from each hundred of the County.
In California and M ississippi these officers are styled Supervisors, the Board in the latter State consisting of five members,
in the former of three, five or seven, as the County has less than 8/000 inhabitants, between 8.000 and 20/000, or over 20.000. In
both States, the members must be residents of tfie districts which they represent, while in Mississippi only are they elected by
their respective districts. Their term of office is, in California, three years ; in Mississippi, two.
In Louisiana, the Board is styled the Police Jury, and is composed of members elected from the various wards of the
Parish.
f I note that the duties of assessor are performed in Arkansas by the Sheriff; in Delaware, Nebraska and Tennessee, by an
assessor for each hundred, precinct, or civil district; in Georgia, by a tax receiver ; and in M aryland, by the collector.
Taxes are collected in Arkansas, M issouri (if there is no collector), Oregon and Texas, by the Sheriff; in Nebraska, Nevada
and South Carolina, by the treasurer.
J In Georgia, a County Board of Education consisting of five members is elected by the Grand Jury, the secretary of this
Board chosen from its members being ex-officio Superintendent of Education.
§ The treasurer is appointed in Delaware by the L evy C o u rt; in Florida and South Carolina by the G overnor; and in
M aryland, generally by the Board of County Commissioners
In most of the other States he is elected by the people.
This system o f conducting elections obtains in Georgia and, unless recently changed, in Arkansas and Florida also,
n K entucky, Maryland, Nebraska (except in cities having over 15,000 inhabitants), Oregon, South Carolina, Tennessee, and
probably Texas, the ballots are not numbered, but in other respects the system does not differ materially from that of
Alabama.
In Delaware. Louisiana, M issouri and Nevada, the voters are registered prior to an election, by officers appointed as
follow s: In Delaware, by the Clerk of the Peace for the County ; in Louisiana, by three Commissioners of Election for each
ward of the Parish, who. as also the State Registrar, are appointed by the G overnor; in M ississippi, by a Board of Registration
(three members) for each County, who are appointed by the Sheriff, the Chancery Clerk, and the President of the Board of
Supervisors; in M issouri, by an “ officer of registration” in each election district, who is appointed by the Superintendent of
Registration for the County, the latter officer receiving his appointment from the G overnor; and in Nevada by the Justices of
the Peace in each township.
T I note that in Delaware, the Inspectors o f election for each hundred, and in M aryland, the Judges of Election for each
election district, form a Board o f Canvassers for the County. In South Carolina, the Governor appoints three Commissioners
of Election for each County, who form the County Board of Canvassers, and appoint three Managers of Election for each
precinct.
In Nebraska, three J udges and two Clerks o f Election are elected for each precinct.
OF
THE
U N ITE D
STATES.
the County is made by the Count}' assessor, and corrected by him under the direction o f the County Con.
missioners.
Licenses are granted by the J udge o f Probata
There is no restriction in the Revised Laws of the State upon the power o f the Counties to borrow monev
or loan their credit to corporations.
Highways.— New roads are established by the Court o f County Commissioners. On receipt o f an applica
tion for the laying out o f a new road, the Court appoints seven disinterested persons to examine and mark
out the road, and assess damages, and takes action upon their report Election precincts, for each of which
the Court appoints three apportioners o f roads, and road districts, an overseer o f roads being appointed for
each,* are laid out and altered by the County Commissioners.
The apportioners o f roads detail to each overseer o f roads the persons and hands liable to road duty in his
district and inspect the roads of their election precinct, reporting to the Court o f County Commissioners on their
condition. The overseer o f roads superintends the actual working o f the roads o f his district.
Poor Support.— Poor support is furnished at the expense o f the County by the Court of County Commis
sioners, who have power to provide poor-houses and hospitals.}
R eal Estate Records are kept in the office o f the Judge o f Probata}
I I I .— T
he
C
o m p r o m is e
S ystem .
There yet remains to be noted, however, what I have ventured to call the “ Compro-'
mise ” system, which, having its home in States lying between those already named, is itself
the result of a fusion of the systems which prevail on either side of it This third
general type has been adopted in the organization of the States of the Northwest, and
now prevails in Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Michigan, Minnesota, New Jersey, New
York, North Carolina, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Virginia, West Virginia, and Wisconsin,
These fourteen States contain 672,824 sq. m., and 22,671,986 inhabitants, their area being
about one-third of that of the States of the Union, their population nearly two-thirds.
The average number of inhabitants to the square mile is nearly 34.
The States above named may be again subdivided with reference to the manner of
electing their County officers into the “ New Y o rk ” system and the “ Pennsylvania”
system, the former prevailing in Illinois,§ Michigan, New Jersey, New York, Virginia,
West Virginia, and Wisconsin ; the latter in the other States of this group. The difference
between these two systems is one of form and name rather than of substance. In New
York, the powers of the County are exercised by a Board of Supervisors, in which Board
the towns of the County are represented as equal political communities. In Pennsyl
vania, on the other hand, the affairs of the County are managed by a Board of three Com
missioners elected from the body of the County. In New York, also, the Supervisor who
represents the town in the County Board has other town duties and is thus an officer both
of the town and the County, while the County Commissioner in Pennsylvania has no
township duties whatever.
In the “ Compromise” system, as seen in the largest and most important. States of
the Union, the political power, which in New England is lodged with the town and at the
South with the County, is divided between the two organizations. The County is the
creation of the State Legislature and the political unit. It is, however, subdivided into
towns, or townships, which possess considerable political rights, and thus becomes a minia
ture of a State as subdivided for local purposes into its Counties. The townships are laid
out by the County officers— in New Jersey only, by the Legislature of the State— and
have power to elect their own officers, to lay out and repair their highways, to determine
in township-meeting the amount of taxes to be raised for school and other local purposes
and submit an estimate of the same to the County authorities for approval, and, in general,
to act upon all local matters in much the same way as the New England town, subject,
however, to the supervisory control of the County.
The County thus becomes a more important factor in the administration of local
affairs than in New England. Its executive officers are required to discharge all duties
properly connected with the County administration, and, in addition, to audit the accounts
of township officers and accounts and claims against the township and direct the raising
of funds for their payment, to approve of votes of the township for borrowing money or
incurring any extraordinary expenditure, and to levy on the property of the township
such taxes for township purposes as may be duly certified to them by the township
officers.
So nearly do the two subdivisions of the “ Compromise” system, which have been
previously noticed, resemble each other in the distribution of power between the County
and its constituent parts, that it is believed that the workings of the system will be suffi ciently indicated by reference to the code of one State only— that of
N ew
Y ork.
The County.— The County is in New York, as elsewhere, a body politic with the usual corporate powers,
which can be exercised by the Board of Supervisors ] only, or in pursuance of a resolution adopted by them.
Its officers, in addition to the Board of Supervisors, are a Treasurer, a Clerk, and a School Commissioner,— the
two former being chosen for two years, the last for three years.IT
The duties o f the Board of Supervisors in regard to town affairs will be indicated hereafter. In County
matters they have power to locate, erect and care for the County buildings (court-house, jail, and clerk’s office),
to borrow money for building purposes for a term not exceeding ten years, and to lay a tax not exceeding
$5,000 in any one year, to appoint special commissioners to lay out highways which they deem important, in
cases where the town commissioners o f highways refuse to act, to lay and apportion among the several towns
taxes for building and repairing bridges and highways where in their judgment the whole or part o f such taxes
should not be borne by the town in which the highway or bridge lies, to examine and allow accounts against the
Count}-** and lay taxes for their payment.
The duties o f the other political officers o f the County can be inferred from their official titles.
* In M aryland, a Supervisor of Roads is elected biennially, in each election district; in Nebraska he is elected annually in
each road district; but, in general, the subordinate road officers are appointed in the manner indicated in the text.
J In Delaware, the Levy Court appoints three Trustees of the Poor for each hundred ; in M aryland the County Court
appoints Trustees of the Poor for the C o u n ty; and in Tennessee the same authority appoints three Poor House Commissioners.
J In C alifornia, M issouri and Nevada, transfers of real estate are recorded by a Recorder of D e ed s; in Tennessee, by a
Register ; but in most of the “ C oun ty" States, by the County Clerk.
§ Twenty-six Counties of Illinois, with an average area and population but little more than half those of other Counties of
the State, and lying in its southern part, still retain the County system, and are not, therefore, divided into townships.
| In N ew Jersey, the Board corresponding to this is known as the “ Board of Chosen Freeholders," each township
electing annually two members.
In Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, M innesota, Ohio and Pennsylvania, the duties of the Board of Supervisors are entrusted to three
“ Countv Commissioners,” one of whom is, in most of the States named, elected annually for three years, the term of office
being limited in Kansas only to one year. In M innesota, Counties having over 800 voters, elect five Commissioners ; in
Iowa, where the “ Pennsylvania" system has been recently substituted for that of New ) ork, the number of Commissioners
may be increased to five or seven— the largest number being that generally adopted ; while in Kansas, Counties having over
30,000 inhabitants (one in number at 1870) elect biennially a Commissioner from each representative district.
In N orth Carolina, the Board consists o f five Commissioners elected for two years.
1 The County in Indiana. Iowa, M innesota and Ohio, elects an auditor for two years.
** In Pennsylvania, a Board o f three County Auditors is charged with the examination of the accounts o f all County
officers.
D IV IS IO N S
The Town.— The town has power to lay out roads within its own limits,* to determine the amount o f taxes
to be levied for town purposes, to manage its own schools, and, in general, to conduct all town aifairs with much
the same freedom as the town o f New England- Its action is, however, subject to revision by the Board o f
Supervisors for the County in several important particulars. Thus the Board o f Supervisors must approve o f
all votes o f the town for borrowing money, and has authority to audit the accounts o f town officers, and accounts
and claims against the town, and to direct the raising o f money for their payment, to equalize the assessments
o f the several towns in the County, to levy all taxes— State, County, and town— properly certified to them, and to
issue their warrant to the town collector for the collection and distribution o f the same among the several funds
for which thev were raised. Indeed, as has already been indicated, the Board o f Supervisors has power, by a
two-thirds vote, to erect a new town, or alter the bounds o f a town already existing— a power which with the
“ town " system is vested in the Legislature.!
T he "principal officers o f the town, elected annually, are a supervisor,! town-clerk, assessor, collector, and
commissioner o f highways. The number o f assessors is three, their term o f office being three years. I f the
town so decides, they may elect three commissioners o f highways, whose term is, in such case also, three years.
M unicipal Corporations.— Provision is made by general law for the incorporation as a village on application
to the Court o f General Sessions o f any town containing not less than four hundred inhabitants and three hun
dred inhabitants to each square mile, or o f any part o f a town or towns not within the limits o f an incorporated
city or village, containing not less three hundred inhabitants to each square mile o f territory.
T he village officers are a president, three trustees, three assessors, collector, treasurer, clerk, and not more
than five fire-wardens. T he trustees are ex officio commissioners o f highways, though without jurisdiction over
the establishment, alteration or discontinuance o f roads, and have power also to care for the village property, to
audit accounts and claims against the village, to grant licenses, to make all necessary by-laws, etc., etc.
The village thus incorporated may make all necessary municipal regulations for the public peace and health,
and is a separate highway and fire-district. It does not, however, have any separate representation in the Board
o f Supervisors, nor is it independent o f its town for purposes o f elections or taxation.
Cities are incorporated by special legislative enactments, and are entitled to such representation in the
Board as is granted by their charters. They are independent o f the townships in which they are located.§
This sketch o f the “ compromise system ” will be closed with a brief resume o f the method o f administra
tion in those departments only in which the powers o f the New England town are divided between the town and
the County, those powers having been detailed somewhat at length when speaking o f the “ town ” system.
In New York, elections are supervised and highways are established, repaired and discontinued by town
officers and under substantially the same regulations as in Massachusetts.
Schools.— The schools in the various towns o f the County are under the superintendence o f a School Com
missioner, who is elected triennially in ever}- County which constitutes an assembly district. H e has the power,
vested in the school committee o f the New England town, to enquire into the management o f the schools o f his
County and the methods o f instruction, to examine teachers and grant certificates to them, to advise and counsel
with the officers o f the several districts, and acting alone or jointly with the Supervisor or Town Clerk to divide
the towns into school districts, whose officers chosen annually are a clerk, one or three trustees, a collector and
librarian, and whose powers correspond closely in all respects with those o f school districts in New England.
Revenue.— All taxes, except those laid by school districts for school purposes, are levied by the Board o f
Supervisors for the County— State taxes upon warrant o f the proper State official, County taxes not exceeding
$5,000 per annum, as they themselves may determine, and town taxes as certified by the supervisor o f the
town.
The assessment o f property is made in each town and ward o f a city by its assessors, who may, if they see
fit, divide the town into districts, and who meet as a Board o f Equalization after they have completed their
assessments. The assessment roll thus revised is transmitted to the Board o f Supervisors, who equalize the
assessed valuation between the several towns and cities o f the County— the aggregate assessed valuation o f the
County as returned by the assessors being, however, not reduced— and levy on each piece o f property the taxes
as just indicated.) A copy o f the list thus completed is forwarded to the Comptroller o f the State, and to the
supervisor and collector o f the town, together with a warrant directing the latter officer to collect the sums
named and pay over to the proper town officer the amounts collected for schools, for highways, for poor support,
and for town expenses, the balance being paid to the County Treasurer.
Poor Support.— Paupers having a residence in any town are supported by i t ; other paupers by the County.
It is, however, within the power o f the Board o f Supervisors o f any County to abolish the distinction between
“ town ” and “ County ” poor, thus making all paupers a charge on the County.lf
R eal Estate Records.— These are kept by the County Clerk.**
In concluding this sketch of the minor political divisions of the United States, which
is put forward as a contribution, merely, to a subject rarely discussed, the writer ventures
to present in the following Tables, numbered III and IV , some statistics in regard to such
divisions existing at 1870. Table III is devoted to the Counties of the several States;
Table IV , to the minor divisions of those Counties, however characterized. In the compu
tation of the average area of the County, as shown in Table III, care has been taken to
exclude such portions of any State as, from sparseness of settlement or other cause, were
outside of the limits of organized Counties. In the similar computations for Table IV , it
was found that the returns of minor political divisions were in some States so imperfect
as to require estimates for one or more Counties, and in others, notably of the County
system, so irregular as to defy estimate and calculation alike. These latter States— Ala
bama, California, Florida, Nebraska, Nevada, and Oregon— are, therefore, omitted from
the table. The figures given for Mississippi and Texas were not obtained, as were the
others, from the Census returns, but by a calculation based on the law of those States,
which requires each County to be divided into five districts or “ beats” for the election of
members of the County boards of administration. By reason of the exclusions thus
rendered necessary, Table IV accounts for but 36,114,247 inhabitants of the 38,115,641
living in the States of the Union at 1870.
It should be added further, that in determining the number of political divisions,
incorporated cities have been included only when they were returned as independent,
territorially, of the townships or other divisions of the Counties in which they are
situated.
* In A 'em Jersey new roads are laid out under the supervision of the Court of Common Pleas ; in Pennsylvania, by a
similar court which, when engaged upon County business, is known as the “ Court of Quarter Sessions.”
I This power is, in Pennsylvania, entrusted to the “ Court of Quarter Sessions ” ; in V irg in ia , to the “ County Court ” ;
in .V n e Jersey, to the Legislature of the State. It can be exercised by the Board of Supervisors in W est V irginia, only with
the consent of the people interested.
! In W isconsin, a Board of three Supervisors is elected, the chairman of which represents the township in the County
Board. In N ew Jersey, two Chosen Freeholders are elected by each town to represent it in the County Board of that name.
In Illin ois, towns having more than eight hundred voters elect, in addition to the supervisor, an assistant supervisor, who, also,
is entitled to a seat in the County Board.
In Ohio, and most of the States adopting the Pennsylvania system, three trustees are annually chosen to manage the
affairs of the town, this number being in Kansas reduced to one, and the official title being changed in M innesota and Pennsyl
vania to Supervisors. The township in M innesota elects three supervisors ; in Pennsylvania, one or two. In North Carolina,
the township clerk and two justices of the peace, elected biennially, are ex officio trustees of the township.
§ In Pennsr/vania, boroughs having over three hundred inhabitants may be incorporated by the Court of Quarter Sessions
with the concurrence of the Grand Jury. When thus incorporated, they are independent of the township in the assessment of
County rates and levies. The borough officers are, a burgess, town council of six members, two overseers, town constable,
one judge and two inspectors of election, one assessor and two assistant assessors, borough auditor and six school directors.
In Ohio, the Municipal A ct of 1869 provides for the uniform incorporation under its provisions of municipalities, as
follow s: of incorporated villages for special purposes, of incorporated villages, of cities of the second class, and of cities of
the 6rst class. Cities of the first class must contain 20,000 inhabitants or over, those of the second class, between 5,000 and
30.000, incorporated villages, between 500 and 5,000, and incorporated villages for special purposes, not less than 50 legal
voters. In cities and incorporated villages, municipal authority is vested in a Mayor and Council elected for two years, the
Council to consist of two members for each ward or at least for six members for the municipalitv— one-half being chosen
annually. In incorporated villages for special purposes, the municipal affairs are managed by three trustees, one being
chosen annually for three years Provision is also made for the advancement, on petition to the County Commissioners, of
these corporations in gTade as they reach the limits fixed ; as also for the discontinuance of the organization of any township
whose territory is fully covered by an incorporated village or city.
| I note that the levy of taxes is made in Ohio and several other States by the Countv Auditor ; in N ew Jersey, by the town
assessor In Pennsylvania and Virginia, County taxes are levied and collected by the County officers, and township taxes by
the township officers.
Speaking broadly, it may be said further, that in the States adopting the Pennsylvania system, all taxes— State. County
and township— or all except township taxes, are collected by County officers.
« I noie that in Indiana. Kansas, North Carolina. V irginia, and W est V irgin ia, all paupers are relieved at the expense of
the Countv. In Pennsylvania, poor support is under the charge of the County Director of the P o o r; in V irginia, of a Super
intendent of the Poor.
•* I„ Indiana and Ohio, papers relating to real estate are recorded by a “ R ecorder" ; in Kansas, M ichigan, M innesota,
N orth C an tina, and W isconsin, by a Register of Deeds.
OF
THE
U N ITE D
STATES.
13
TABLE
T
able
O
s h o w in g
at
N
th e
N
th e
C
r g a n iz e d
C
in t h
of
U
Average Average
population.
area.
594
2,062
557
928
261
7*9
67
1,020
T
67,182
3 9 . 182
104,096
32.830
4 3 .4 7 '
23,611
52,060
8
5
A
and
,
P
verage
returned
as
o p u l a t io n
h a v in g
780
856
3.780
707
i.5 * 9
439
328
780
506
725
65
61
5°
3
39
•3 2
S3
22
65
114
52
of
th e
p o p u l a t io n
3 5 .4 9 5
• 2 ,7 3 7
• 5 ,'o o
2,365
4 .3 3 1
22,761
14,806
1,040
11,236
5.805
5*5
734
* *,
543
102
92
98
64
7'
7'
21
60
90
88
66
24,969
18,268
12,184
4 , '3 3
367
562
739
73'
960
396
783
The System .............
5,694
16,677
6,'93
43,'47
73.046
563
454
I 1,901
30,287
53,363
•2,375
8,340
697
387
99
53
58
'.033
3 .0 3 5
22
1,097
536
1,128
85
141
Illinois.......................
In d ian a...................
Iowa.........................
K ansas.......................
M ich igan ..................
Minnesota
........
New J ersey.............
New York ( 1 ) ........
North Carolina.........
O hio............................
Pennsylvania (2) ..
Virginia . . . . . . . . . .
West V irg in ia ...........
Wisconsin..................
1 3 ,7 1 5
7 .4 3 7
A verag e
p o p u la t io n .
THE “ COMPROMISE”
SYSTEM.
7 ,9 4 2
•4
3'
978
11,205
41,672
4,814
8,971
11,487
573
A verag e
a rea.
The System............... 1,064
The System, excluding Pacific S ta te s..
1 5 ,3 3 8
1,040
T o ta l
S yst e m , num ber
“ County”
he
South C aro lin a.---Tennessee................
T e x a s .........................
“ CO U N TY ”
SYSTEM
Alabama. .....................
Arkansas
...................
California.......................
D elaw are.....................
Florida............................
Georgia............................
K entucky.......................
L o u isia n a .....................
M aryland.......................
Mississippi.....................
Missouri.........................
Nebraska. ......................
N evada..........................
Oregon............................
,
tates
[Area in square miles.\
l6
U
IO
The System ...................
rea
S
n it e d
14
Connecticut...............
M aine.............................
Massachusetts...............
New Hampshire. . . .
Rhode Island.................
Vermont.........................
A
verage
th e
en su s.
Total
THE “ TOW N” SYSTEM. number.
THE
, A
um ber
o u n t ie s
III.
434
930
18,184
600
21,948
R E C A P IT U L A T IO N .
*
Total Average Average
num
ber.
area
population.
T he “ T o w n ” S ystem . . ....................................................
T hf. “ C o u n t y ” S y s t e m .........................................................
T he “ C omp r o mi s e ” S y s t e m ....................................................
67
1,064
1.033
1,020
1,040
600
52,060
11,236
21,948
T he U n ite d S t a t e s ....................................................................
T he U n ite d S t a t e s , e x clu d in g t h e P a c ific S tate s .
2,164
2,078
829
6 77
17,613
18,009
(1) Excluding the City and County of New York, the average population is 58,313.
of Philadelphia, the average population is 43,812.
TABLE
T
able
s h o w in g
P
oth er
th e
after
can
W IT H
C
D
o l it ic a l
same
geth er
N
th e
T
and
iv is io n s o f
AVERAGE
ow ns
th e
n
*8.
3.277
1,522
4,318
1.378
6,038
1,360
2,377
1.356
2,348
1.193
3.015
1,301
The System............... 1424
34
2450
IJOO
659
31
12
,1 2
845
444
193
325
940
415
75
3
79
6 4
8 .033
5 15
2 .0 5
4 1.563
5
9 1,637
3
5 4,046
2
,5 7
'45 2 4
7 1,831
°
82
717
3.139
996
1.370
1.248
2,675
2,509
1436
1,582
1,700
rea
o u n t ie s
over
Average popu
lation, excluding
cities and towns
having over 10 0
,0 0
inhabitants.
29
36
23
39
36
42
THE “ C O U N T Y ”
SYSTEM.
Arkansas...................
Delaware...................
Georgia (3)................
Kentucky...................
Louisiana (4).............
Maryland...................
Mississippi...............
Missouri ( 5 ) .............
South Carolina (6 ...
)
C
A
th e
of
of
1 0 ,0 0 0
T
th e
th e
returns
P O P U L A T IO N , A N D
164
412
338
231
36
243
Connecticut...............
Maine (1) (2).............
Massachusetts..........
New Hampshire (2). .
Rhode Island...........
Vermont (2)...............
IV.
verage
from
having
H
«g
A
and
a s c e r t a in e d
T H E IR
it ie s
THE “ TO W N "
SYSTEM.
be
umber
(2) Excluding the City and County
U
o w n s,
S
n it e d
of
N
th e
A L SO T H E IR
in h a b it a n t s
T
o w n s h ip s ,
h ave
,
tates
C
inth
AVERAGE
so
far
en su s,
or
as
to
P O P U L A T IO N
been
exclu d ed
.
< !
Average popu
lation, excluding
cities and towns
having over io,ooo
inhabitants.
T en n essee..................
T e x a s ..........................
1,282 3
6
705 226
982
1,161
931
1,124
The System................
6,961
7
9
1,301
1.255
6
1.545 3
4
993 3
1,187 4
5
353 104
859 60
662 7
9
228 3
7
1.644
1.693
1,006
1,032
1.387
1.548
932
982
1,233
616
2,663
2 642
1,308
1,620
1.727
2,586
THE “ CO U N TY ”
SYSTEM .
T H E " C O M P R O M IS E ”
SYSTE M .
Illinois (7)..................
Indiana........................
Iowa ( 8 ) ......................
Kansas (9)..................
Michigan (8)...............
Minnesota (10)...........
New Jersey
........
New Y o r k ..................
North Carolina..........
Ohio.............................
P en n sylvan ia............
Virginia (8 )................
West Virginia............
W isco n sin ..................
The System................
O
28
S3
Total
number.
P O L IT IC A L
Average
area.
M IN O R
Total
number.
THE
<
5
0
r!
17
.3 9
664
3.97
4
+653
1.324
1,964
2426
2,817
1412
IS
63
29
780
69
15
.3 2
1 .9 5 5
11 9
1.923
15
,3 7
15 3
.4 2 2
45 8
3 8
33 7
1 3
15
.3 5
1,228
1,504
R E C A P IT U L A T IO N .
]
Total
number.
he
“ T
o w n
T
he
“ C
o u n t y
”
S
T
he
“ C
om prom ise
y s t e m
” S
.................................................
y s t e m
”
S
..........................................
y st e m
..................................
Average
population.
M 24
6,961
11.915
34
79
59
2450
1,301
1.923
1,700
1.255
1.504
20,300
T
Average
area.
Average popula
tion excluding
cities and towns
haring over
10,000 in
habitants.
69
1.695
1433
1
(1) The average area is estimated.
(2) Only organised towns included in computations.
0 ) Militia Districts of twenty
Counties estimated.
(4) Wards of four parishes estimated
(5) Townships of one County estimated.
(6) Townships of
three Counties estimated. Since 1870, all townships in this State have been abolished.
(7) Townships of the twenty-six un
organized Counties estimated from the returns of precincts or land survey townships of those Counties.
(8) Townships of
two Counties estimated.
(9) Townships of twelve Counties estimated.
(10) Townships of nineteen Counties estimated
THE PROGRESS OF THE NATI0N-'79<>-'87°-
\
[P L A T E S X V -X I X .]
B Y T H E C O M P IL E R O F T H E A T L A S .
H E series of maps numbered 15 to 19 inclusive, is intended to exhibit the growth
of the United States in population, from the date of the first census, 1790, through
eight decades, to 1870. The method pursued in the compilation of these maps is in
general that which has been adopted in the preparation of the geographical illustrations of
the statistics of the ninth census. The county has ordinarily been taken as the unit of
treatment. Its population at the period to which the individual map has reference, having
been ascertained, and deduction having been made of the population of any city of 8,000
inhabitants or more found within it, in order that the population of such city might be
represented separately from the other population of the county, the number of inhabitants was
divided by the number of square miles in the county, the quotient representing the average
density of settlement. Where, however, any county was of unusual extent, or there was
reason known to the compiler for suspecting that various portions of it might be found in
very different stages of settlement, the county was no longer taken entire, but the investi
gation was carried down to sections of the county and even to its several townships.
The number of counties thus broken up for the purposes of this compilation, would
naturally vary much. A t some censuses, they would amount to several hundreds ; at others,
to scarcely as many score. The average density of each county or part of a county, by
turns, having been thus ascertained, all were grouped according to five degrees of density,
as exhibited in the scales accompanying the maps. The plan of grouping has been to
make as large groups as could be done without merging any appreciable proportion of
counties in groups of a markedly different grade. Thus, if a single county of small extent
belonging to Group III. should appear surrounded by numerous counties of Group IV. or
of Group 11., it would not be preserved distinct, but would take the shading of its general
section. If, however, a county of Group IV. or V. should appear among counties of
Group I. or II. the distinction would be regarded as of sufficient importance to be main
tained. Again, a county whose average brought it within Group IV. might come between
III.’s and V.’s, appearing thus to belong to a group distinct from both. Yet the resolution
of the county into its constituent townships might develop the fact that those parts of the
county which bordered on the III.’s were themselves of that grade, while the parts border
ing on the V.’s were of that degree of density. In such a case, the division of the county
by a centra^ line, and the throwing of the parts, on the one side and on the other, into the
adjacent groups, would not only dispense with the necessity of preserving a troublesomely
small group upon the map, but would even better represent the facts of the case. Again,
a tier of counties along a river might yield a quotient showing an average population of
but thirty to the square mile, and thus in Group III. while examination of the townships
would show that for a few miles from the river the population was not less than one
hundred to the square mile, and thus in Group V. while the portions of the county away
from the river would sink back into Group II. or I.
The above illustrations will perhaps sufficiently convey the idea which has governed
in the grouping of the smaller territorial divisions, for the purposes of these maps. The
compiler has gone as low down as the county, or even as the township, not with a view to
separately representing each such individual subdivision, but for the sake of more exactly
determining the true line of demarcation between considerable groups, and of resolving
such false appearances as those indicated in the latter two illustrations given above.
The difficulties experienced in earn ing out this plan arose, first, from the failure of the
publications of the earlier censuses, in no small proportion of cases, to give the facts of popu
lation for any smaller divisions than the county ; and secondly, from the absence of good
maps, representing the States in sufficient detail, at several of the periods taken for this
treatment. I will not weary the reader with a description of the various means to which
recourse was had in the course of this compilation, to obviate these difficulties; suffice it to
say that in the main, the difficulties were overcome to an extent which allowed the delinea
tion of groups of population to be as minute as the scale of the maps would admit Had
the maps been taken all of the same size, the increasing weight of these difficulties, as we
go back in our national history, would have made the earlier ones less and less precise in
their determinations of population. But as the scale of the maps for 1840 and 1830 is
smaller than for 1870-50, and that for 1820-1790 much smaller still, most, if not all, the
errors of delineation, slight even on the scale used for 1870-50, practically disappear.
Such being the system and scope of the illustrations under consideration, I propose to
discuss the statistics of population, from 1790 to 1870, geographically and by methods
somewhat noveL The discussion will have constant reference to the maps bearing plate
T
Nos. X V -X IX . A s these maps do not profess to exhibit settlements which do not reach
an average of two inhabitants to the square mile, for a tract large enough to be shown to
the eye on the scale used in the smallest— those for 1790-1820, it follows that the outside
lines of color indicate the limits of a population of two or more to the square mile. The
petty population that lies beyond is made up of the solitary ranchman, the trapper and the
fisherman, the small mining party, and the lumbering camp at the sources of streams that
find their later way into more populous regions.
Let us consider the results of some measurements and computations as to the extent
of these outside lines of color, and of the spaces which they enclose.
Measuring upon the larger map (scale 1 : 4000.000) from which the engraved maps
have been reduced, I find the length of the unbroken line which starts on Passamaquoddy
Bay in Maine, upon the map of 1790, and runs around the continuously populated region,
in and out as the facts of settlement require, until it issues on the Atlantic just above the
Morida boundary, to be 3,200 miles. In this measurement, no account is made of slight
tremulous irregularities, as, for example, those which are due to the ordinary meanderings
of a river forming the boundary of a group of population ; but I have carefully traced all
the ins and outs of this “ line of population” which seem to indicate a distinct change of
direction in the settlement of the country, for any cause, whether in progression or in
retrogression.
What, now, is the area embraced between the coast and the line thus described ?
%
This, again, it has been sought to determine as closely as it could be done on a map of the
scale used in the compilation, and also as the nature of the subject would allow. Such a
determination must of necessity be merely approximate, inasmuch as the statements of the
General Land Office, our highest official authority on this subject, in regard to the areas of
the several States and Territories, are seldom the result of completed surveys. I have, more
over, taken these areas generally somewhat below the Land Office figures, in allowance for
considerable bodies of water found within the limits of the States. No attempt has been
made to deal with this matter with mathematical nicety. Errors to the extent of one or
two per cent, in the case of any State, have been seen to be unavoidable in the nature of
the subject, though it is not doubted that such errors will to a considerable extent neutral
ize each other, in the result for the whole United States. A t the same time, while making
no claims to minute accuracy, I shall preserve the results just as I reach them in my com
putations, giving the square miles down to hundreds, tens, and even units, not that it is to
be supposed that the results are exact to anything like that degree, but at once for the
greater convenience of discussion, and to allow each of my readers to make his own allow
ances for probable error.
The settled area of 1790, then, as indicated by the line traced, I find to be 226,085
square miles. The entire body of continuously settled territory, thus composed, lies
between 310 and 450 N. Lat. and between 67° and 83° W. Long.
Outside, however, of this body of continuous settlement, there were, at 1790, in addi
tion to a score of small and remote posts and settlements, such as Detroit, Vincennes,
Kaskaskia, Prairie du Chien, Mackinac, Green Bay, Sault St. Marie, etc., and in addition to
the humble beginnings of Elmira and Binghamton in New York, which then lay outside
the line traced on the map, three considerable masses of population, one in Western Vir
ginia, one in Kentucky, and the third in Tennessee, which require to be taken into account
in computing the settled area. That in Western Virginia lay upon the Ohio and Kanawha
rivers, and comprised about 750 square miles. That in Kentucky lay across the Licking,
Kentucky, Salt and Green rivers, and comprised about 10,900 square miles. That in
Tennessee lay along the Cumberland river, and embraced about 1,200 square miles. If
we add 1,000 square miles for all the other patches of settlement outside the “ line of popula
tion,” we shall have the settled area of 1790, 239,935 square miles, the aggregate population
being 3,929,214, and the average density of settlement 164 inhabitants to the square mile.
A t the second census, 1800, the “ line of population” had been rectified so that,
though it embraced 282,208 square miles, it described a course, when measured as was
that of 1790, of but 2,800 linear miles The advance of the frontier line in every direction,
at this census, is too plainly shown upon the map to require to be pointed out in detail
From the region thus defined, however, there must be deducted an unsettled tract in New
York State containing not less than 10,300 square miles, embracing the counties of Hamil
ton, Essex and Warren, and large portions of Fulton, Herkimer, Lewis, S t Lawrence,
Franklin and Clinton, being the general region of the Adirondack Mountains So that
2
THE
PROGRESS
OF T H E
the actual area of settlement within the line of population is to be taken as 271,908 square
miles. A ll this lay between 30 45' and 45A5' N. L a t and between 67° and 88° W . Long.
Outside this line of continuous settlement, we have the Kentucky and Tennessee
groups, now grown together across the common boundary of those States, and extended
northward to cover the south bank of the Ohio for several hundred miles, and even to
cross the river at numerous points in Indiana and Ohio. The Kanawha settlements have
somewhat extended since 1790; while distinct strips of settlement appear along the Mis
sissippi River, within the present State of that name, also on the same river at and below
St. Louis; on the Mobile River, in the present State of Alabama; and at numerous points
in the northwest The aggregate extent of the Kentucky and Tennessee groups, together
with these isolated settlements, I compute to be 33,800 square miles, making the total area
of settlement at 1800, 305,708 square miles, the aggregate population being 5,308483, and
the average density of settlement, 17.3.
A t 1810, the Kentucky and Tennessee groups of population, with the settlements
upon the river in Ohio and upon the Tennessee River in North Alabama, were all embraced
within the line of continuous settlement: but the Mississippi groups, northwest and south
west, were still separated from the “ continent” of population by broad spaces vacant of
settlement. The frontier line I find to have been then 2,900 miles long, and to have
included between itself and the Atlantic 408,895 square miles of territory. But from this
must be deducted the area of three large tracts, around which, but not over which, popula
tion had flowed, and which were hence included by the frontier, though not settled. These
were the tract about the Adirondack region in New York, now considerably reduced in
dimensions; another in northwest Pennsylvania and southwest New York, mainly within
the former State, and the third in West Virginia extending even a little way into Ken
tucky. These tracts comprised 26,050 square miles, making the actual area of settlement
included within the frontier, 382,845 square miles. All this lay between 290 and 45°i5'
30'
N. Lat. and 67" and 88° 30' W. Long.
Without the frontier thus traced, we have, in addition to a number of outposts and
scattered settlements, four considerable bodies of settlement; one in Michigan reaching
around from the river Raisin to lake St. Clair; one along the Mississippi, extending
from New Madrid to Alton and St. Charles; one on the Mobile, now extending to 320
N. Lat. and reaching over into the present State of Mississippi; and lastly, an exten
sive group along the lower Mississippi and its branches, representing the Jefferson pur
chase, in which the small group which we noticed in 1800, east of the river and north
of the 31st parallel, has been merged. The aggregate extent of these and of the numerous
small patches of population scattered over the west and south, may be taken at 25,100
square miles, making the total area of settlement at 1810, 407,945 square miles, the aggregate
population being 7,239,881, and the average density of settlement, 17.7.
A t 1820, a new and striking feature is introduced into the course of our frontier line,
which was perhaps getting to be rather humdrum in its steady movement northward and
westward. Now we see the Louisiana group of population, not only running far up the
Red and the Washita rivers to the west, but pushing eastward even to the Eastern boundary
of Mississippi, while the great Kentucky and Tennessee group, so long poised above the
35th parallel, now pours a broad though irregular stream of population down across the
whole length of Alabama, and makes connection with the Louisiana group across the
Mobile and Pascagoula rivers, a connection never to be broken.
A s a result, the frontier line now rests, when it has run its course, upon the Gulf of
Mexico, instead of returning to the A tlantic; while this southwest connection has em
braced within the frontier one other great vacant tract, soon, however, to be devoured by
population. This interior unsettled tract I may call the Central Southern, consisting as it
does of the extreme southeast comer of Tennessee, the extreme southwest corner of North
Carolina, the eastern half of Alabama, and the western and southern portions (far more
than the half) of Georgia. Most of this is occupied by Indians, for whose removal nego
tiations are already in progress. Florida, too, is at this date (1820) a blank upon a map
of the population of the United States. The treaty which gives her to us is signed ; but
the delivery has not yet taken place. Turning to the northwest we find the Detroit and
S t Clair settlements now for the first time embraced within the line of continuous settle
ment, while to the west population has pushed out along the Missouri River to the great
salt springs.
Measuring the frontier of 1820, with all its ins and outs, from the St. Croix to the
Gulf, we find our line', though it has no longer to return across the country to the Atlantic,
to have extended to 4,100 miles, embracing an area, after deduction made, not only of the
three interior vacant tracts in New York, Pennsylvania and Virginia previously described
(all of which have been greatly encroached upon by population during the decade), but of
the Central Southern tract just mentioned, of actual settlement, determined as heretofore,
of 504,517 square miles, all lying between 290 30' and 45°3o' N. L a t and between 67° and
93° 45' W - Long.
Outside the “ line of population” we have small bodies of population on the Arkansas,
White and Washita rivers in Arkansas, as well as some patches in the northwest Com
puting these at 4,200 square miles in the aggregate, we have a total settled area of 508,717
square miles at 1820, the aggregate population being 9,633,822, and the average density of
settlement 18.9 to the square mile.
The isolated patches of population at 1820 in Arkansas have at 1830 made connection
with each other and with the Tennessee group, on the northeast, giving birth to a figure of
extraordinary proportions, not unlike a marine monster formerly of fable, but now of
N A T IO N — 1790-187a
science; and as our plan requires us to measure the creature, not only from its head to its
tail, but also according to the showman’s rule, back again on the under side, from its tail
to its head, if indeed such a monster can be said to have either head or tail, we have the
frontier line enormously increased, namely to 5,300 miles Florida now appears for the
first time as contributing to the population of the United States. To the west, population
has thrown itself forward along the Missouri River in a narrow belt of perhaps fortv miles
average width, till it rests on the western boundary of the State of Missouri The
aggregate area embraced between the Ocean (with the Gulf) and the frontier line as described
on the map of 1830, is 725406 square miles O f this, however, not less than 97,389 square
miles are comprised within the several interior vacant tracts (including the unsettled por
tions of Florida), leaving but 628,017 square miles as the settled area within the “ line of
population,” all lying between 290 15' and 46° 15' N. L a t and between 67° and 950 W . Long.
Outside the body of continuous settlement, are found, at 1830, no longer large groups,
like those of Kentucky and Tennessee at 1790 and 1800, of Louisiana at 1810, and of
Arkansas at 1820, but a number of small patches of population in Ohio, Indiana, Illinois,
Michigan and Wisconsin, aggregating perhaps 4,700 square miles, making the total settled
area of 1830,632,717 square miles, the aggregate population being 12,866,020, and the
average density of settlement 20.3 to the square mile.
A t 1840, the frontier line crosses Maine, Michigan and Wisconsin, notably higher up;
takes in the southeast comer of Iowa, and, from the 40th parallel southward to the 31st,
covers substantially the entire western boundary of Missouri, Arkansas, and Louisiana.
The line thus traced is but 3,300 miles long. This astonishing shortening of the “ line of
population” is due to the rectification of the frontier, northwest, west, and southwest. The
area included is 900,658 square miles, all between 290 and 46°
N. Lat. and 67° and
95° 3°' W . Long.; the vacant tracts to be deducted, 95,516, and the settled tracts outside,
2,150; making the entire settled area of 1840, 807,292 square miles, the aggregate popula
tion being 17,069,453, and the average density of settlement 21.1 to the square mile.
A t 1850, the frontier line crosses Michigan and Wisconsin higher up, takes in nearly
all the eastern and southern half of Iowa, and passing down the western boundary of Mis
souri, Arkansas and Louisiana, much as at 1840, though somewhat more closely, it runs
out into the newly acquired territory and newly admitted State on the southwest, Texas,
reaching a point three degrees further west than the extreme frontier on the Missouri, and
issuing finally on the Gulf of Mexico below the River Nueces, having described a course
of 4,500 miles.
The aggregate area included thus is 1,005,213 square miles, from which deduction
has to be made for vacant spaces (only one, that, namely, in the Adirondack region of
New York, remaining out of the three described at 1810,) to the extent of 64,339 square
miles, and to which addition must be made, on account of numerous settled tracts scattered
outside the line of population, east of the 100th meridian, from Pembina to the Rio Grande,
of 4,775 square miles.
But it is no longer by a line drawn around from the St. Croix to the Gulf of Mexico,
that we embrace all the population of the United States, except only a few outlying posts
and small scattered settlements. Already from the Pacific we may run a line around
perhaps 80,000 miners and adventurers, the pioneers of more than one populous State
soon to be formed. I will not interrupt the continuity of this paper by attempting to trace
the course of this line, either at 1850, or at any subsequent census; but will content myself
with indicating the addition to be made, on this account, to the populated area of the
United States. In 1850, the Pacific settlements may, though of necessity very rudely, be
computed at 33,600 square miles, making the total area of settlement at that date 979,249
square miles, the aggregate population 23,191,876, and the average density of settlement
23.7 to the square mile.
A t 1860, the frontier line includes a narrow strip of population along the entire
northern and eastern boundary of Maine; embraces substantially all of Michigan as high as
430 30', and of Wisconsin as high as 440 30'; takes in the southeast quarter of Minnesota,
and only excludes now the extreme northwest comer of Iowa. A t the mouth of the Sioux
River, it takes the first step of its great forward movement towards “ The Plains,” and, cross
ing the Missouri here, it annexes to the body of continuous settlement fully 20,000 square
miles in Nebraska and Kansas. Respecting the faith of the Government pledged to the
Indian tribes, it still confines itself to the western boundary of Arkansas, and then, running
out along the Red River across nearly four degrees of longitude, it stretches with a bold,
free course across the vast plains of Texas, almost touching in its furthermost sweep the
100th meridian. The line thus described measures 5,300 miles, and embraces 1,126,518
square miles, lying between 28° 30' and 47° 30' N. Lat. and between 67° and 99030' W. Long.
From this, deduction is to be made, on account of vacant spaces, of 39,139 square miles.
The outlying settlements east of the 100th meridian, are now more numerous than for many
decades previous, including a strip extending far up the Rio Grande, and embrace 7475
square miles; while the Pacific settlements, now comprising one sovereign State of the
Union, are nearly three times as extensive as at 1850, embracing 99,900 square miles,
making the total area of settlement at i860, 1,194,754 square miles, the aggregate popula
tion being 31443,321, and the average density of settlement 26.5 to the square mile.
A t 1870, we learn the last the census has yet to tell us of the Progress of the Nation.
The imperial sweep of the “ line of population” now embraces 1,178,068 square miles, all
between 270 15' and 470 30' N. L a t and between 67° and 99° 45’ W. Long., from which,
however, deduction has to be made of 37,739 square miles on account of interior spaces
vacant of population. To what remains we must add 11,810 on account of settled tracts
THE
PROGRESS
OF T H E
east of the 100th meridian, and 120,100 on account of the Great Pacific settlements,
making the area settled at 1870, according to the scale taken, viz., two inhabitants or more
to the square mile, not less than 1,272,239 square miles, the aggregate population being
38,558,371, the average density of settlement being 30.2 to the square mile.
Tables I and II present the above recited facts in due order of succession, and in
immediate relation to each other.
TABLE
EXTENT OF
UNEAR
TABLE
EXTENT OF CONTINUOUS SETTLEMENT.
MILES.
Degree of
N. Latitude.
N. Lat.
3200
2800
29OO
4100
5300
3300
4500
5300
5700
67°— 83°
670 88°
—
67°— 88°
67 °— 93 °
67° 95 °
67 °— 95 °
6 7°-9 9 °
6 7°— 9 9 °
67°— 99 °
47
46
45
44
43
30'
45 '
42
30 '
30 '
45 '
No. II.
AREA, IN SQUARE MILES.
SETTLED TRACTS W ITH O UT
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
i860
1870
226,085
282,208
408,895
562,591
725406
900,658
1,005,213
1,126,518
1,178,068
Vacant tracts
within the
frontier.
10,300
26,050
58.074
97.389
95.5*6
64.339
39. *39
37.739
FRONTIER.
East of 100th
Merid.
*3.850
33.800
25,100
4,200
4.700
2450
4.775
7475
I I , 8 lO
West of tooth
Merid.
33.600
99,900
120,100
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
i860
1870
0
0
30
226
339
234
238
358
270
0
0
3*7
252
355
375
396
37 *
456
560
606
533
395
327
192
* *4
0
0
392
279
425
568
47 *
584
0
0
392
279
0
*5
392
299
79
50
437
425
485
0
20
421
308
792
*3 *
*25
521
73*
1001
**43
1277
1220
1168
1141
1018
*057
1030
938
1105
1023
983
785
372
102
209
230
858
777
**37
1248
*325
1252
1224
**93
**34
*057
1030
938
W. Long.
3 i°
— 45 °
30° 4 5 — 45 ° 15'
29° 30'— 45° 15'
29° 30'— 4 5 ° 30 '
29° 15 — 46° 15'
290 — 46° 30'
28° 30'— 46° 30'
28° 3 0 - 4 7 ° 30'
27° 15'— 4 7 ° 30 '
TABLE
Area embraced
within the
frontier.
III.
FRONTIER.
Relum ing to the Resting on the
G ull of Mexico.
Atlantic.
DATE.
3
The result of the application of these rules to our measurements is to give the popu
lated areas along each parallel, either in one continuous body, or in several groups, as
population is broken by foreign territory, by lakes or bays, or by large vacant spaces.
Consolidating all such, however, and reducing all the populated distances on each parallel
to a continuous line, we have the following as the area of settlement along the successive
parallels, at each census from 1790 to 187a
No. I.
DATE.
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
i860
1870
N A T I O N - 1790— 187a
POPULATION.
Total Area of
Settlement.
239.935
305.708
407.945
508,717
632,7*7
807,292
979.249
>.*94.754
1,272,239
3.929.214
5,308,483
7,239,881
9,633,822
12,866,020
*7.069,453
23,191,876
31443.321
38,558,37 *
Average
Density of
Settlement.
Persons to a
sq. mile.
164
*7-3
177
18.9
20-3
21.1
23-7
26.5
30.2
Having thus gone through the successive censuses, tracing the course of the outside
line of population, and estimating the settled area enclosed between this line and the
ocean, let us now go back to 1790, and follow out the movement of population along the
several degrees of latitude, to note the relative rapidity and steadiness of advance within
each belt of territory. Owing to the difficulty of locating with precision the numerous
small patches of population in the Pacific States and Territories, these computations are
restricted to the country east of the 100th meridian.
But before the results of such computations can be satisfactorily stated, an explanation
must be given of the method followed.
First: The successive parallels are taken as the central lines of zones half a degree
wide; and where any parallel passes through vacant spaces, any body of population lying
within a quarter degree, upon either side thereof, is referred thereto, after being reduced to
the width of a half degree in latitude. Where a solid body of population lies close up against
a parallel on one side, however, no reduction is made on account of the absence of popula
tion on the other side. The only important exception to the rule is in the case of the 34th
parallel, where, after crossing the 94th meridian.it runs through the southern portion of the
“ Indian Territory," shortly above the northern line of Texas. A s the absence of popula
tion as known to the census (Indians in tribal relations not being recognized by the census
law) from the line of this parallel, in this part of its course, is the result of express exclu
sion by treaty stipulations, the population just below is not referred to it
Second : The starting point on the coast is taken, not from the extreme end of any
cape or promontory upon which the parallel may chance to emerge from the Atlantic,
but from the average projection of the coast line in the general neighborhood of the par
allel. In the case of Long Island, the eastern half was taken to fill up the western end of
the Sound, and the 41st parallel was assumed for the purposes of these computations to
begin with the 730 W . Long.
Third: The northern lakes and all considerable bays were “jumped,” as also the
British possessions when crossed by the parallels under measurement
Fourth : All spaces vacant of population were skipped, the same rule being adopted for
measuring and referring to parallels, spaces which are not directly upon any parallel, as in
the case of the populated areas lying above or below a parallel when passing through
vacant spaces.
The measurements as to all extensive bodies of continuous settlement have been made
with as much exactness as the scale of the map (1: 4,000,000) would allow. Where,
however, only one or two small parcels of population appear upon any parallel, as on the
31 st for 1790 and 1800, the 28th at 1840, the 27th at i860 and 1870, these have been taken
roundly, without much care, as it is not possible to determine with precision the periphery
of such isolated settlements. The measurements, therefore, have a far higher relative
accuracy for the more central parallels than for those at the extreme north or south.
4*
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
3*
30
29
28
27
26
425
344
462
384
302
*75
30
10
0
0
0
0
0
25
0
0
0
0
0
565
707
706
682
39 *
362
230
227
240
*50
0
0
0
0
58 i
548
6 13
888
83*
746
75*
575
616
328
597
357
180
0
9
0
0
691
663
912
1038
87*
797
878
961
707
554
742
634
323
0
0
0
0
963
1013
**34
*043
1020
902
*034
976
916
8*5
763
678
373
30
20
0
0
404
816
984
1107
1140
1043
1032
1018
1057
1030
938
989
929
860
725
255
80
0
0
25
65
10 5 5
1008
99 *
785
372
140
25
65
It will be noted that in the case of two parallels, the 32d and 33d, population has
fallen off since i860. This occurs in the more sparsely settled regions of Texas, where the
degree of density is the slightest of all shown, and where, consequently, retrogression would
imply the least actual diminution of population. How much of this result is due to the
actual effects of the w ar; how much to changes of populationfollowing the extension of
the railroad system, and how much to a closer definition of the range of population
at
1870, I can not with satisfaction determine.
W e have thus far treated of a population of two or more to the square mile, without
distinction of the higher degrees of settlement. Let us now proceed to discuss the distri
bution of the total area of settlement, at each census, as shown by Table II, according to
the several degrees of density exhibited by the maps.
These degrees are as follows :
I. A population of from 2 to 6 to the square mile.
II. A population of from 6 to 18 to the square mile.
III. A population of from 18 to 45 to the square mile.
IV . A population of from 45 to 90 to the square mile.
V. A population of 90 or more to the square mile.
O f these groups, as I will call them, the first three generally indicate a predominantly
agricultural condition. Speaking broadly, agriculture in the United States is not carried
to such a point as to afford employment and support to a population in excess of 45 to a
square mile; and consequently, the fourth and fifth groups never appear with us,except as
trade and manufactures arise, and the classes rendering personal and professional services
are multiplied. O f the agricultural groups, the first represents a very sparse population
such as in our western country might be sustained by grazing industry, without any culti
vation of the so il; and accordingly we find this group, at the present time, mainly along
the frontier in Iowa, Minnesota, Nebraska, Kansas, Arkansas and Texas. The poorest
tillage regions also sink into this group, and hence we find not inconsiderable portions
of some of the older States in this class. In 1790, however, No. I was the largest single
group in Maine, New York, Pennsylvania, South Carolina and in what is now the State
of West Virginia The second group— 6 to 18 inhabitants to the square mile— indicates
almost universally the existence of defined farms or plantations, and the systematic cultiva
tion of the ground, but this, either in an early stage of settlement or upon more or less
rugged soil. Thus we find this group still large in many of the western and southwestern
States and in the mountainous regions of the Atlantic slope. A t 1790, however, this group
far exceeded in area Nos. I ll, IV,and V combined. The third group— 18 to 45 to the square
mile— almost universally indicates a highly successful agriculture. Here and there the
presence of petty mechanical industries raises a difficult farming or planting region into
this group; but in general, where manufactures exist at all, they induce a population of 45
or more to the square mile. W e should therefore expect to find, as we do find, No. I ll
the predominant group in Alabama, Delaware, Georgia, Illinois, Iowa, Kentucky, Mary
land, Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, North Carolina, South Carolina, Tennessee and Vir
ginia O f the New England States, Maine, New Hampshire and Vermont also have large
tracts in this degree of settlement In 1790, No. I l l was the largest single group in Dela
ware, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, New Jersey and Virginia (exclusive of
West Virginia).
The fourth group almost universally indicates the existence of commercial and manu-
THE
4
PROGRESS
OF T H E
facturing industry and the multiplication of personal and professional sendees. New York,
New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Ohio and Indiana are the States in which this group is found
in excess of any other; in the latter State, however, this excess is but slight O f these
States, in none was this group in excess in 1790. Two of these, Ohio and Indiana, can
scarcely be said to have been settled at all (Marietta, Ohio, having been founded in 1788,
while in Indiana there were but two or three small settlements, the remains of French
occupation). In New York and Pennsylvania, at that date, Group I was predominant
The fifth group represents a very advanced condition of industry'. A t the first census,
only a few counties, and even at the ninth census, less than 20,000 square miles, were found
populated to this extent. In the lower three New England States— Massachusetts, Rhode
Island, and Connecticut— alone, is this found in excess of every other group. In each of
these, it is also in excess of all other groups, though not largely. This degree of settle
ment is only reached where manufacturing and trading villages are numerous. In the
present condition of the United States, however, there appears to be a stronger tendency
for tracts in Group IV to pass into Group V than for tracts in Group III to pass into
Group I V ; and it would not be unreasonable to anticipate that the census of 1880 will
exhibit a larger proportional gain in the group we are now considering, than in any other.
Having thus sought to give a general, though necessarily a somewhat vague, impression
of the significance of these group-numbers in such an analysis of our population, I ask the
attention of my readers to the following table, which exhibits, for each census, the distribu
tion of the total area of settlement among the several classes indicated:
N A T IO N — 1790-1870.
States. None of these began to assume importance in the account of settled area prior to
185a
The following tables— IV , B, C, and D, exhibit the same facts as are given in Table IV
above, but separately for each of the groups of States just enumerated. The petty patches
of population found within the third group prior to 1840, are disregarded.
TABLE
B.—
FIRST
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
i860
1870
Total Area of
Settlement, & c .
224,685
266,208
297,668
3 *2,173
348,902
353>*37
359.692
361,141
358,546
I
SQUARE
72.386
63,260
56,979
48,690
45445
33.340
28,213
20,060
17,000
MILES.
1790
DATE.
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
i860
1870
Total Area of
Settlement: 2 or
more to the square
mile.
■
11
6-18 to the square
mile.
239.935
IV
V
45-90 to the
square mile.
90 and over to
the square mile.
59.282
82,504
108,155
*50,390
186,503
24*.587
338,796
431,601
470,529
83436
3 0 5 .7 0 8
III
18.45 to tl>e square
mile.
83.346
I 23,267
*544*9
*77.153
225,894
291,819
294,698
353-34 *
363475
2-6 to the square
mile.
8l,OIO
407.945
5 0 8 .7 1 7
632.717
807,292
979.249
*.*94.754
1,272,239
16,629
140,827
151,460
183,607
233.697
260,866
245.897
I
13,05 *
*7.734
27499
39,004
65446
8445 *
100,794
*34,722
*74.036
820
1.*93
1.243
*.343
34*4
5,828
1 1,264
14,224
18,302
1806
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
i860
1870
The following table exhibits proportions existing between the several quantities in
Table IV , namely, the increase, per cent, in the total area of settlement, from census to
census, and the number of square miles, in each 1,000 settled at each census, occupied by
a population of each specified degree of density.
TABLE
DATE.
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
i860
1870
Increase, per
cent, in total area
of settlement.
274
334
24.7
244
27.6
2*-3
22.
6,5
IV.— A.
PROPORTION OF EACH GROUP OF POPULATION TO TO TA L
TO TAL
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
I
348
265
286
277
239
228
239
218
*93
SECOND
GROUP
IV
»
348
403
379
348
357
361
301
296
286
AREA OF SETTLEMENT.
247
270
265
296
295
299
346
361
369
V
54
58
3
4
3
3
6
7
11
12
15
67
76
*03
*05
*03
* *3
*37
But we may carry' our analysis down further, with results still more instructive. Those
who have read the description given above of the progress of the “ line of population”
from census to census, will have observed that the States and Territories may naturally be
grouped into three classes, with reference to the order in time of their settlement
The first consists of the original Thirteen States, with those formed from them, viz.,
Vermont, Maine, and West Virginia.
The second consists of Kentucky and Tennessee, on the west, Ohio, Indiana, Illinois
and Michigan on the northwest, Missouri, Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi and Alabama
on the southwest, and Florida on the south. A ll these were largely represented in the
tables showing the area of settlement at 184a The third class consists of Wisconsin, Iowa,
and Minnesota, Nebraska and Kansas, Texas, the present Territories, and the Pacific
15.250
39.500
I 10,277
196444
282,815
438,355
493,757
519.957
52 7,627
I
II
11,050
*7.750
59.650
91,737
105,215
138467
1*4459
62450
48,637
D.—
59.282
79,504
97.385
**5.540
130,642
140,753
164,050
178483
177,723
4,200
18,250
38,957
67,007
110,639
*74,954
184,607
182,689
167,576
TH IR D
OF
IV
1 3 .0 5 1
17.234
26,599
36454
54.346
60,351
66,224
73.982
79.072
V
820
*493
*,243
*.343
34*4
5,828
11,264
14,224
18,302
STATES.
SETTLEMENT, BY CLASSES.
HI
3,000
10,770
34.850
55,86 i
100,834
160,646
220,698
228450
IV
V
500
900
2,550
11,100
24,100
34.045
544 20
82,964
GROUP OF STATES.
DENSITY OK SETTLEMENT, BY CLASSES.
DATE.
It will be noted that notwithstanding the constant passing of the lower groups into
the higher, through the intensification of settlement, the lower groups are still so rapidly
recruited by the annexation of fresh territory, in the westward extension of the frontier
line of population, as not only to maintain, but to increase them from census to census,
without an exception, until at 1870 a slight falling off is disclosed in No. I. It should also
be noted that the increase of No. 11 during the decade previous was comparatively slight
The reader may or may not deem these last results sufficiently significant to intimate a
movement in the same direction during the current ten years.
Total Area of
Settlement, &c.
III
79446
105,017
1*5462
110,146
* 1 5 .2 5 5
112,865
89,941
74.392
66,449
DENSITY OF
DENSITY OF SETTLEMENT, BY CLASSES.
STATES.
II
IV.
DATE.
IN
GROUP OF
DENSITY OF SETTLEMENT, BY CLASSES.
DATE.
C.—
TABLE
IV.
1840
1850
i860
1870
Total Area of
Settlement, &c.
15,800
125,800
3 *3,656
386,066
I
11,800
91,025
* 78,356
180,260
II
4000
20,150
96,260
129450
III
14,100
32420
6 4 ,3 5 6
IV
V
525
6,620
12,000
The most casual examination of these tables will show at once that the relations of the
groups to the several epochs of our national development, have importantly changed from
what appeared in Table IV. In the first group of States, from 179010 1830 inclusive,
the increase in the settled area was marked at every decade. After that, the increase was
down to i860, scarcely more than nominal, the tracts desirable for settlement having.it
may fairly be presumed, substantially all been taken up. But while the increase in the
total area of settlement went on till 1830, Group I never increased at all, the higher groups
not only absorbing all the current growth of settlement but steadily encroaching upon
No. I, which has been reduced from 72,386 in 1790 to 17,000 in 1870, nearly all which
remains being in the mountainous regions of West Virginia and Georgia. The increase
in Group II stopped at 1810, when it reached its maximum at 115462 square miles. It has
since declined to 66,449, more than half this amount being in Georgia and North Carolina.
This group appears, however, in Maine, New Hampshire and Vermont, in Pennsylvania,
Virgirfia and West Virginia
In Group III, the increase went on uninterruptedly until i860. Between i860 and
1870 there was a slight falling off. In Groups IV and V the increase has proceeded
steadily from the first enumeration under the Constitution to the present time, and will
doubtless continue, at the expense of the lower groups.
Attention will naturally be attracted to the falling off in the total area of settlement
between i860 and 1870. This occurred almost entirely in the State of Maine, where a low
birth-rate (see Chart X L , and the figures for Maine on Charts X X V I I I and X X X IX ), the
direct losses of the war, the superior attractions of prairie agriculture to eastern farmers, and
of city life to the youth of the country, together with the prostration of one of the most
important of the industries of the State, ship-building, have combined to reduce the popula
tion, alway's sparse, of extensive tracts along the northern frontier of settlement below
2 to the square mile, and thus to exclude these tracts from our table.
In the second group of States, the total area of settlement has continued to increase
without interruption to the present date; Group I increased till 1840, since which time it
has fallen off from its maximum of 138467 to 48,637 square miles; Group II increased until
1850, since which time it has decreased, though not heavily; Groups III and IV have
increased without interruption since 1790— Group V has never been formed in this body
of States— that is, population has nowhere been found to the degree of ninety and more
THE
PROGRESS
OF T H E
to the square mile, for any tract sufficiently large to be shown to the eye on maps of the
scale used. In the third group of States, the progress has thus far been uninterrupted,
both in the total area of settlement, and in each of the (four) constituent groups of popula
tion, though it will be observed that the increase in Group I between i860 and 1870 was
almost at a minimum. Group V does not appear in this section of our table.
In the foregoing Tables, IV , B, C, D, we have the total settled area of each of three
specified G roups of S t a t e s at each census, 1790 to 1870. The following table presents
the population of each of these groups, at the dates taken, with the average density of
settlement in each (cities here included:)
TABLE
FIRST GROUP.
DATE.
Population.
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
i860
1870
3,819,846
4.922,070
6,161,566
7 4 G 432
9.153403
10,631,904
13,218496
15,818,547
I 7.964.592
17
18.5
20.6
23.8
26.2
30.1
36.7
43.8
50.1
5
I will only add that in a very few cases, the most notable being that of Salem at 1790,
I have included towns which only just failed of reaching the limit of population assigned.
The following table exhibits the number of cities of 8,000 or more inhabitants at each
census of the United States :
TABLE
V.
IV.— E.
SECOND GROUP.
Average density. Persons
to a square mile.
N A T IO N — 1790— 187a
Population.
109,368
386413
1.078,315
2,216,390
3,707,299
6,357,392
9,078,288
12,637,882
15,594,721
TH IR D GROUP.
Average density. Persons
to a square mile.
7.2
9.8
9.8
11-3
i 3-i
14-5
18.4
24-3
29-5
Population.
74.057
895.092
2,986,892
4,999,058
Average density. Persons
to a square mile.
4-7
7-i
9-5
12.9
C IT IE S .
It will be remembered that all cities of 8,000 inhabitants and over were excluded
before determining the population-groups in which the several counties should be placed.
We have, therefore, yet to speak of the urban population of the United States, in progress
from 1790 to 1870.
Several difficulties, not a little annoying, arise during the reduction of these results to
a form for comparison. For instance, what constitutes a city? In some States, the laws
relating to the incorporation of villages and boroughs are so liberal, and the people are so
well disposed towards this form of civil organization, that there is no danger of any con
siderable town failing to be distinguished from the mass of settlement. The liability to
mistake is here rather in the chance that a “ city” of 8,000 inhabitants may not imply a
strictly urban population of those numbers, the municipal limits being sometimes so
extended as to include considerable rural districts. But in New England and some of the
Middle States, the township system is so highly organized and so generally accepted in
popular estimation as sufficient for all the purposes of local administration, that townships
may be found of nine, ten, twelve and even fifteen thousand inhabitants, without any
interior municipal organization. It is evident that many of these are, in all but name,
cities, often more importantly so than some which, from the formation of the national
government, have boasted their Mayors, Aldermen and Sheriffs ; and to omit these from the
tale of cities in an account of the population of the United States, would clearly be an
error. In cases of this kind, discretion has been exercised, and after what seemed a
reasonable deduction, if any were necessary, for the rural parts of the township, the balance
has been treated as a city population.
Again, at several natural centres, are, or in the past have been, groups of cities, one
commonly much larger than any other, perhaps than all the others, which, while legally
distinct, might be regarded as constituting a true unit of residence and industry. Shall
these be taken separately in our account? or aggregated, in disregard of merely political
divisions? It is more difficult to decide this question in undertaking an historical review
like ours, than if we were making up an independent statement for a single period, inas
much as these relations frequently change: two, three or even four cities at one. census
appearing ten years later as one, the growth of city population diminishing the number of
cities. Nor is it always clear, what is to be regarded as a unit of residence and industry.
While it is generally true that the small cities which surround a great one, owe their
importance and even their existence to it, and, therefore, that in annexing them, it is
simply claiming its own, there are instances of cities being closely coterminous, yet each
having a clear raison cTHre of its own, while in more than one case the limits of a modern
city embrace the sites of at least two originally distinct and important centres of popula
tion and trade. The question is quite too large to be discussed here. These points are
mentioned merely to show that no plan of treatment is without its own difficulties. For
several reasons I have decided to follow the record, and at each census to count that as a
distinct city which was so recognized at the time. The only exception is in the case of
Philadelphia, where I follow Mr. De Bow, superintendent of the seventh census, in includ
ing the population of the suburbs, Kensington, Northern Liberties, Moyamensing, &c. &o,
instead of treating these as distinct municipalities.
It will need, therefore, to be bome in mind that, while the determination of new
centres of residence and industry, in the unceasing growth of population, has constantly
tended to increase the number of cities known to the census, there has been a movement,
far less considerable and very irregular, in the other direction, namely, to a reduction in the
number of cities, through annexation and consolidation.
The following Table exhibits the total population of the cities which appear in Table
V. in comparison with the aggregate population at each census of the United States:
TABLE
DATE.
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
i860
1870
Population of
United States.
3,929.214
5,308,483
7,239,881
9,633,822
12,866,020
1 7,069453
23,191,876
31443,321
38,558,371
V.— A.
Population of Cities.
Inhabitants of cities
in each ioo of the total
population.
I 3 M 72
210,873
356,920
475,135
864,509
1,453,994
2,897,586
5,072,256
8,071,875
34
3-9
4-9
4.9
6.7
8-5
*2.5
16.1
20.9
Speaking roundly, it may be said that in 1790, one-thirtieth of the population was
found in cities; in 1800-one-twenty-fifth; in 1810 and also in 1820, one-twentieth; in
1830, one-sixteenth; in 1840 one-twelfth; in 1850, one-eighth; in i860 one-sixth; in
1870 more than one-fifth.
Two things need to be said in explanation of the relations of the tables above to the
maps which show the density of population. The first is that the populations of two or
more cities situated close to each other, have often been combined, and the aggregate thus
obtained will be found represented on the maps by a circle of proportionate size. The scale
of the maps has made it necessary to do this, instead of representing each city separately.
The second is that the deduction of the population of cities sometimes brings a county into
a lower population-group than at a preceding census, notwithstanding an actual increase
of population, in both its rural and its urban parts. Thus, we may suppose a county with
an area of 400 square miles, to have had at i860 a population of 20,000, its shire town
having 6,500 inhabitants. This county would, therefore, if treated as a whole, fall into
Group IV , viz., 45-90 to the square mile. A t 1870, however, we will further suppose the
population to have increased to 24,000, of whom 8,500 are now found in the shire town,
which thereupon becomes a city within our definition, and is excluded from the mass of
population. The county thus sinks into Group III, viz., 18-45 to the square mile. Such
cases are of course few in number, and the presence of the small circle in solid color which
denotes a city on these maps will always suffice, on a careful examination, to correct the
first impression of an absolute loss of population in the county.
C E N T R E O F P O P U L A T IO N .
The “ centre of population" is a theme upon which there has been much speculation
among writers for the public press in the United States; and the subject is deemed to
have enough at once of curious and of serious interest, to justify the introduction of this
feature into the maps which exhibit the Progress of the Nation.
Several different things may be covered by the phrase, “ centre of population;" but
what is commonly intended is the point at which equilibrium would be reached, were the
country taken as a plane surface, itself without weight, but capable of sustaining weight,
and loaded with its inhabitants, in number and position such as they are found at the
period under consideration, each individual being assumed to be of the same gravity as
every other, and consequently to exert pressure on the pivotal point, directly proportioned
to his distance therefrom. It is in this sense that the phrase has been used upon the maps
which show the density of population, in progress from 1790- 187a
In the determination of these successive points, the method taken was as follows: The
population of each county, or smaller subdivision of territory where counties were excep
tionally large or very irregularly populated, was assumed to be concentrated at its geo
graphical centre. The parallel of the 240 N. L a t and the meridian 67th West of Green-
THE
6
PROGRESS
OF T H E
wich were then chosen as convenient lines— being south and east respectively of all the
population of the United States— to which to refer the position of the local centres thus
taken. The distances of these centres north of the former line and west of the latter, were
next ascertained. Distances westward were measured on parallels of latitude, and in
determining them, the centres of all counties lying between the same two successive
degrees of latitude were referred to the parallel of the intermediate half-degree. The
population of each county, or smaller sub-division used, was thereupon multiplied succes
sively into the corresponding distances thus obtained, and the aggregate of all products of
population into distances northward was divided by the aggregate population of the country
to determine the latitude of the centre of population, and the aggregate of all products of
population into distances westward was divided by the same- aggregate population to
determine the longitude of the centre of population.
The centres of population, as located upon the maps, were obtained by the process
described, except those for the sixth and seventh censuses (1840 and 1850) which were
taken from a table and map prepared by Prof J. E. Hilgard of the United States Coast
Survey, and published in Scribner’s Magazine in the year 1872, covering the period
1840-70. Impressed by the coincidence between Prof Hilgard’s figures for i860 and 1870
and those obtained by my own far more laborious process, I determined to adopt, with
due acknowledgment, his figures for 1840 and 1850, thus saving the expense of an inde
pendent computation. The following are Prof Hilgard’s results for
i860 and 1870, compared with those obtained by the treatment of the
N A T IO N — 1790-1870.
pressure at the pivotal point— say, the crossing of the 83d meridian and the 39th parallel—
as forty individuals in Boston.
The following table exhibits in immediate connection the facts detailed above:
TABLE.
POSITION OF
DATE.
N. Lat.
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
i860
1870
39° i 6'.5
390 16.1
39° 11 -5
39 " ° 5'-7
3«3 57-9
39° 02'
38° 59'
39=004
39° I2'
CENTRE OF POPULATION.
W . Long.
76° II .2
7 6 ° 5 6
.5
77° 37 -2
78' 33'
79° 16.9
8o° 18'
8i° 19'
82° 48 .8
8 3 ° 3 5
-7
Approximate location by important towns.
23 miles E. of Baltimore.
18 miles W . of Baltimore.
40 miles N. W. bv W . of Washington.
16 miles N. of Woodstock.
19 miles W. S. W . of Moorefield.
16 miles S. of Clarksburg.
23 miles S. E. of Parkersburg.
20 miles S. of Chillicothe.
48 miles E. by N. of Cincinnati
T o t a l................
Westward move
ment during pre
ceding decade.
41
36
50
39
55
55
81
42
miles.
miles.
miles.
miles.
miles.
miles.
miles.
miles.
399
The following map exhibits to the eye the westward movement of the centre of
population from 1790 to 1870 which has been described in words and figures above:
same quantities, as above described :
Prof. Hilgard, 1870— 390 15' N. L a t.: 83° 39' W. Long.
390 12' N. Lat.: 83° 35'-7 W. Long.
Prof. Hilgard, i860— 390 03' N. Lat.: 82° 50' W. Long.
390 00 4 N. L at.: 82° 48'.8 W . Long.
When it is considered that Prof. Hilgard treated the States as
entire bodies, after deduction of some leading cities, and obtained
his local centres, not as the result of measurements and computa
tions, but by the exercise of a trained judgment, merely, no one who
is familiar with the intrinsic difficulties of such work, and with the
great and often unaccountable diversities of settlement prevailing
throughout the United States, can fail to admire the scope and grasp
of thought and the intimate acquaintance with the histoiy and
present condition of our population, which were exhibited in so justly
seizing the local centres of population for more than forty States and
Territories. I do not regret the more minute and precise but more
laborious and expensive determination of the centres of population
at the remaining censuses; but I certainly should not have under
taken it had Prof. Hilgard already covered the ground.
With so much of explanation, let us trace upon our maps the progress, from decade
to decade, of this most significant point.
A t 1790, we find by our process the centre of population at 390 16'.5 N. Lat. and
76° 11'.2 W. Long., which, from a comparison of the best maps available, would seem to be
about twenty-three miles east of Baltimore. During the decade 1790-1800, it appears to
have moved almost due west to a point about eighteen miles west of the same city, being
in L at 390 16', and Long. 76°56'.5. From 1800 to 1810 it moved westward and slightly
southward to a point about forty miles N. W. by W. from Washington, being in Lat.
39°u'.5and Long. 77°37'.2. From 1810 to 1820.it moved westward and again slightly
southward to a point about sixteen miles north of Woodstock, Va., being in L a t 39°05'.7,
and Long. 78° 33'. From 1820 to 1830, it moved still westward and southward to a point
about nineteen miles W. S. W. of Moorefield, in the present State of West Virginia,
being in Lat. 38° 57 .9 and Long. 790 16 .9. From 1830 to 1840 it moved still westward but
slightly changed direction northward, reaching a point sixteen miles south of Clarksburg,
being in Lat. 39°02’ and Long. 8o° 18'. From 1840 to 1850 it moved westward and slightly
southward again, reaching a point about twenty-three miles southeast of Parkersburg, being
in Lat. 38° 5 9 'and Long. 8i° 19'. From 1850 to i860 it moved westward and slightly
northward, reaching a point twenty miles south of Chillicothe, Ohio; being in Lat. 39°oo'4
and Long. 82°48 .8. From i860 to 1870 it moved westward and still more sharply north
ward, reaching a point about forty-eight miles east by north of Cincinnati.
The closeness with which the centre of population through such rapid westward
movements as have been recorded, has clung to the parallel of the 39th degree, cannot fail
to be noticed. The most northern point reached was at the start in 1790; the most southern
in 1830, the preceding decade having witnessed a rapid development of population in the
southwest in Alabama, Arkansas, Mississippi and Louisiana, and the accession of Florida
to the Union. The extreme variation in latitude has been less than nineteen minutes;
while the eighty years of record have accomplished a movement in longitude of nearly
seven degrees and a half. Assuming the westward movement to have been uniformly
along the parallel of the 39th degree, the westward movement for each decade has been as
follows: 1790 to 1800, forty-one miles; 1800 to 1810, thirty-six miles; 1810 to 1820, fifty
miles; 1820-30, thirty-nine miles; 1830 to 1840, fifty-five miles; 1840 to 1850, fifty-five
miles; 1850 to i860, eighty-one miles; from i860 to 1870, forty-two miles The sudden
access between 1850 and i860 was due to the transfer of a considerable body of population
from the Atlantic to the Pacific coast, twelve individuals in San Francisco exerting as much
Scale o f M iles.
P O P U L A T IO N
AND
R IV E R
SYSTEM S.
I will close this long review of the geographical relations of our population, by exhibit
ing in tabular form, for convenient comparison, the statistics of population at 1870, which
appear upon General Von Steinwahr’s Map (Plates I and II of this Atlas) of the River Sys
tems of the United States.
By that map, the territory of the United States comprises four great river systems,
the Atlantic, the Northern Lake, the Mississippi, and the Pacific systems.
The Atlantic system is arbitrarily divided into a northern and a southern section, by
a line drawn from a point on the coast just above Baltimore, across Maryland and the
extreme southwestern counties of Pennsylvania, to the Alleghanies. This division is made
with reference to a marked change in the conditions of settlement and of industry, which
is noted as occurring in the general neighborhood of the line thus drawn.
The Northern Lake system is, for somewhat similar reasons, divided arbitrarily into
an eastern and a western section, by the prolongation northward of the boundary between
Indiana and Illinois.
The divisions effected in the other systems, for the purposes of this representation, are
mainly natural.
The Mississippi system is divided into the Basin of the Mississippi, which is again
divided as Upper and Lower, by a line drawn between Alton and Cairo; the Basins of the
Ohio, the Missouri, the Red, the Arkansas and the Rio Grande (the portions of the latter
outside the territory of the United States being excluded from the computation as respects
both area and population); the Basin which I will call the Alabama Basin, though
including large portions of Mississippi on the west, and of Georgia and Horida on the
east, embracing the Pearl, Mobile, Chattahooche, Appalachicola and Sawanee Rivers and
their tributaries; and, last,the Basin of Central Texas, embracing all the rivers between the
Rio Grande and the Bayou Teche.
The Pacific system is divided as follows: the Basin of the Columbia; the Basin north
west of the Columbia which I will call the Puget Sound Basin ; the Basin of the Sacra
mento and San Joaquin; the Basin of the Klamath and the Coast Ranges; the Basins
of the Colorado and of the Salinas, and the Basin of Southwestern California embracing the
streams from the Santa Maria to the Mexican boundary.
Table V I I exhibits the populations of the several basins enumerated, as nearly as the
THE
PROGRESS
OF T H E
same can be ascertained, with the approximate area of each as obtained by measurements
with the pianimeter conducted by my able assistant, Mr. Joseph J. Skinner, C. E.
N A T IO N — 179a— 187a
P O P U L A T IO N O F T H E U N IT E D S T A T E S E A C H Y E A R F R O M 1780 TO
1880, W IT H P R O C E S S O F E S T IM A T E A N D IN T E R P O L A T IO N .
BY
T A B L E V II.
Population.
A
S
t l a n t ic
ystem
Total
orth ern
L
ake
S
ystem
. . . .
Total
is s is s ip p i
S
ystem
. . . .
Total
a c if ic
S
ystem
. . . .
Total
e c a p it u l a t io n
73-7
25-
14,207453
304.538
46.6
3.575.721
823,883
82,007
102,332
43-6
8.
4,399,604
X
84,339
23.7
4,179407
795.294
7,806453
1> 24,i 7 1
5
468,298
117,522
5 17,923
1,978,742
723.994
1 79,635
65,646
207,1 I I
52 7,690
92,721
101,334
184,742
x45-990
x78434
23.3
27-3
37-7
2.9
5.1
1.1
2.8
13.6
4.6
19,111.804
1,683,303
xx-3
. . . .
106,718
16,144
219,706
264,386
455,972
23,419
13,216
66,927
9,753
20,046
TABLE
SH O W IN G
45,96o
17,262
210,274
1.2
2.
.6
839,5 !0
854.3 x4
L A T IO N
14,207453
4,399,604
19,1 I 1,804
839,510
304,538
x85,339
1,683,303
854,3 X4
46.6
23-7
1 x-3
.98
38,558,371
3.026494
12.7
.
Atlantic S y s te m .................................
Northern Lake S y s t e m ...................
Mississippi S y s t e m ............................
Pacific S y s t e m .................................
Total
. . . .
In all these successive computations respecting the population of the United States,
Alaska has been excluded inasmuch as no census has ever been taken under national
authority in that remote district.
Indians in tribal relations are not recognized by the census law of 1850, and are, there
fore, not reckoned in the account of population. The principal reservations and ranges of
the several tribes are, however, shown upon the map for 1870— Plates X V I II and XIX .
The following named gentlemen have assisted in the computations required for this
memoir:— H. R. Elliot, A.B.; H. A. Hazen, A.B.; J. O. Maxon, Ph.B., and C. B. Dudley
Ph.D.
The delineation of the groups of population has been mainly the work of my principal
assistant, S. A Galpin, LL.B.
Prof. John E. Clark has kindly assisted me in the resolution of several difficulties
encountered in the course of this compilation.
In connection with the foregoing discussion, the compiler has great pleasure in intro
ducing the following paper by E. B. Elliott, Esq., Chief Clerk of the United States Bureau
of Statistics, read before the American Association for the Advancement of Science, at its
meeting at Hartford in August 1874, and kindly revised by Mr. Elliott for the purposes
of the present publication.
FO R T H E
NUM BERS
179O
S T A T IST IC S.
OF
TH E
P O P U L A T IO N
AT
EACH
YEAR
179O, 1800, l 8 l O
1870 A N D 1880 O N T H E
A S S U M P T IO N
TH AT TH E
C IV IL
W AR
D E R IV E D FROM T H E E N U M E R A T E D N U M B E R S O F T H E Y E A R S
Years.
1780
1 79°
1800
l 8lO
1820
1830
1840
1850
i860
1870
1880
U N IT E D
STATES
CENSUS
i860, BO TH I N C L U S I V E ; T O G E T H E R W IT H E S T IM A T E D PO PU
1780, D E R IV E D FROM T H E N U M B E R S E N U M E R A T E D FO R T H E
A N D 1820; A L SO E S T IM A T E D P O P U L A T IO N FO R T H E Y E A R S
TO
YEARS
.5
.06
.98
THE
FROM T H E Y E A R
6.8
2.4
.6
55,867
35,404
132,770
U. S. B U R E A U O F
he
.
Basin of the C o l u m b i a ...................
Basin of the C olorad o........................
Basin of the Sacramento and San
J o a q u in ..........................................
Basin of the Salinas............................
The Puget Sound B a s i n ...................
Basin of the Klamath and the Coast
R a n g e s .........................................
The Basin of S. W. California . . .
The Great Interior B a sin ...................
R
X
354 X
7
169,121
.
Basin of the Upper Mississippi
. .
Basin of the Lower Mississippi
. .
Basin of the O h i o ............................
Basin of the M is so u ri........................
Basin of the Red
............................
Basin of the Rio Grande
. , . .
Basin of the Arkansas
...................
The Alabama B a sin ............................
The Texas B a sin .................................
P
9,983412
4,224,041
.
E a s t e r n ...............................................
W e s te rn ...............................................
M
Inhabitants to a
square mile.
.
N o r t h e r n ..........................................
Southern
..........................................
N
1
E. B. E L L IO T T ,
first census of the United States was taken in 1790, and a census has been taken
decennially ever since. It is sometimes important to know approximately the probable
number of the population at years intermediate between those when the enumerations
were made, and also, for certain purposes, at each year of the decade just preceding the
taking of the first census in 1790, and of the current decade, that from 1870 to 188a. By
examining the numbers of population reported in the census for each of the years 1790,
1800, 1810 and 1820, the second differences of the series are found not to differ greatly
from each other; and if we suppose the increase of the population between 1780 and 1790
to have followed the same la w as in the thirty years from 1790 to 1820 we may readily
work back to the term of the series for 178a W e also observe that the second differences
derived from the enumerated numbers for the years 1830, 1840, 1850 and i860 are nearly
identical with each other, although larger than the second differences just mentioned for
the earlier years. On the assumption that the series for the years from i860 to 1880, had
there been no civil war or other important disturbance, would have followed the same law
of progression as between 1830 and i860, we may readily find the terms of the estimated
series for 1870 and 188a
T
Area, square miles.
7
Population.
First Differences.
[3,069,597]
3,929,2X4
5,308483
7,239,881
9,658,453
12,866,020
‘ x7,069,453
23,191,876
31,443,321
[41,718,772]
[54,018,229]
HAD
NOT T A K E N
1830,1840, 1850
PLACE,
AND
i860.
Second Differences.
[859,617]
1,379,269
x>93 x.398
2418,572
3.207,567
4,203433
6,122423
8,25x445
[10,275,451]
[12,299,457]
[ 5 x9,652]
552,x29
487,174
788,995
995.866
1,918,990
2,129,022
[2.024.006]
[2.024.006]
In the above table the numbers in brackets are estimated. The other numbers arc
the immediate results of the decennial enumerations. In the column of second differences
the number in brackets at the top, viz. 519,652, is the mean of the two numbers in the
same column which immediately follow, viz. 552,129 and 487,174. In the column of first
differences the number at the top, viz. 859,617, is derived from the number immediately
following (1,379,269) by subtracting therefrom the newly estimated second difference
(^ 19» 52)- I he number at the top of the column headed population (3,069,597) is
5 ^
derived from the number immediately below (3,929,214), by subtracting therefrom the
newly estimated first difference (859,617). The estimated numbers of the population in
this table for the years 1870 and 1880, viz. 41,718,772 and 54,018,229, are derived from the
four preceding values by observing, as already mentioned, that the second differences of
these four numbers (1,918,990 and 2,129,022) are very nearly identical, and assuming their
mean (2,024,006) as the constant second difference in continuing the table. The number
thus estimated for the year 1870, viz. 41,718,772, when compared with the result of the
official enumeration, viz. 38,558,371,shows the estimate, on the assumption that no war had
occurred, to be in excess of the result of official enumeration for that year by 3,160,401. If
we assume the calculated number for the year 1880 (54,018,229) to be in excess of the
probable number for that year by the same amount, our estimate for the year 1880 will be
5°>85 7-828, or, disregarding numbers less than 1,000, we shall have in round numbers for
the estimated population of that year, 50,858,000, which is the number assumed in the
accompanying tables.
W e have now a series of numbers, observed or estimated, at intervals of ten years,
from the year 1780 to the year 1880, both inclusive. It is desired to interpolate numbers
for each year intermediate between these given decennial numbers. This has been readily
accomplished on the assumption that the numbers for the years intermediate between any
two consecutive decennial numbers progressed in conformity to a law of constant second
differences, derived in general from comparison of four consecutive decennial terms.
TABLE
SH O W IN G
CENSUS
TH E
OF TH E
NUM BERS
U N IT E D
OF TH E
STATES
P O P U L A T IO N
FROM
IN C L U S IV E , T O G E T H E R W IT H E S T IM A T E D
1780 A N D I 88a
Years.
Population.
1780
3,070,000
1790
3.929.2x4
1800
l 8 lO
5,308483
7,239,881
1820
9,658453
1830
12,866,020
1840
1850
i860
1870
1880
17,069453
23,191,876
31443,321
38 ,558 ,3 7 x
50,858,000
TH E
ENUM ERATED
YEAR
179O
TO
AT
EACH
TH E YEAR
D E C E N N IA L
1870,
BOTH
N U M B E R S O F T H E P O P U L A T IO N F O R T H E Y E A R S
First Differences.
Second Differences.
Mean of Consecutive
Second Differences.
859,214
x>93 x.398
2418,572
3,207,567
4,203433
6,122423
8 .2 5 x4 4 5
7,115,050
12,299,629
520,055
520,055
552.129
536,092
487,174
5X
9.652
788,995
638,084
995,866
1> 3 7 9 ,2 6 9
89243O
1,918,990
x4 5 7 4 2 8
2,129,022
2,024,006
— *. x36,395
496 ,3 X4
5 .x84,579
2,024,092
5 .x84,579
T H E PROGRESS OF T H E N A T IO N — 1790— 187a
8
In interpolating the numbers for the several years in any decennial group, the onehundredth part of the corresponding mean of the second differences as derived from the
data at decennial intervals (see last column of the immediately preceding table), was taken
as the constant second difference of the new annual series (see last column of the following
table); and the one-tenth part of the corresponding first difference of the numbers at the
decennial periods, less four and one-half times the second difference just described for the
annual interpolation was taken to represent the first difference in effecting the interpola
tion (see the next to the last column of the following table.) These first and second
differences, properly combined with the numbers of population at the decennial periods
readily gave the several annual series desired.
TAB LE SHOW ING FOR D E C E N N IA L GROUPS OF YE A R S, FROM 1780 TO 1880 IN C LU SIVE , TH E
PO PU LATIO N A T T H E COMMENCING Y E A R OF EACH GROUP ; ALSO TH E CORRESPONDING
COM PUTED FIRST D IFFER EN C E AN D SECOND D IFFER EN C E OF TH E SERIES OF Y E A R L Y
NUM BERS COM PRISING SUCH GROUPS.
Decennial Periods
1780 to
1790 to
1800 to
1810 to
1820 to
1830 to
1840 to
1850 to
i860 to
1870 to
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
i860
1870
1880
Population at the com
mencement of the several
decennial periods.
First differences of the
annual numbers to be
interpolated in each of the
several decennial periods
specified.
62,518.925
113,802.76
169,75546
213,14342
280,597.35
354-759-04
521,162.03
802,810.37
620420.86
996,656.845
3,070,000
3.9 29.2 !4
5,308483
7,239,881
9.658453
12,866,020
17,069453
23,191,876
31443,321
38.558,371
Second differences of the ;
annual numbers to be in
terpolated in each of the
several decennial periods
specified.
5,200.55
5.360.92
5. 196.52
6,380.84
8,924.30
14,574.28
20,240.06
4,963.14
20,240.92
51,845.79
From the numbers in this table the interpolated numbers, in the following table of
population by years, were readily obtained; the number in the column of second differences
corresponding to any decennial period in the above table being added successively to the
corresponding number in the column of first differences in the same table; and this
number, with the resulting numbers, in turn added successively to the corresponding number
in the column immediately preceding, headed population.
TAB LE SHOW ING TH E PO PU LATIO N OF TH E U N ITED STATES FOR EACH Y E A R FROM 1780
TO l 88o , TH E NUMBERS NOT TH E RESULTS OF O F F IC IA L ENUM ERATION BEING DERIVED
FROM TH E NUM BERS EN U M ERATED A T TH E SEVER AL D ECEN N IA L CENSUSES.
It will be seen that the numbers within the several decennial periods progress by
constant second differences.
Years.
I 780
1781
1782
M-
..........
Years.
Population.
3.070.000 (estimated.)
3.133.000
3.200.000
“
...
.
1783
1784
1785
Population.
3.273.000 (estimated.)
3.351.000
3435.000
•
Years.
1786
1787
1788
1789
I79O
*79*
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
Population.
3,523,000
3,617,000
3,716,000
3,820,000
3,929,214
4,043,000
4,162,000
4.287,000
4417,000
4,552,000
4,692,000
4,838,000
4,990,000
5,146,000
5,308483
5478,000
5,653,000
5,833,000
6,019,000
6,209,000
6405,000
6,6o6,000
6,812,000
7,023,000
7,239,881
7453,000
7,673,000
7,898,000
8,131,000
8,369,000
8,614,000
8,866,000
9,124,000
9,388,000
9.658453
9,939,000
10,229,000
10,527,000
10,834,000
11,151,000
11476,000
11,810,000
12,153,000
12,505,000
12,866,020
13,221,000
13,590,000
13,974,000
Years.
(estimated.)
u
u
If
(enumerated.)
(estimated.)
u
u
u
u
It
If
it
it
(enumerated.)
(estimated.)
u
If
If
It
it
tt
U
it
(enumerated.)
(estimated.)
if
If
if
M
If
it
If
I
f
^enumerated)
(estimated.)
U
if
if
it
it
if
If
fl
(enumerated.)
(estimated.)
ft
fl
1834
^35
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
i860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
Population.
14,373,000
14,786,000
15,213,000
15,65^,000
16,112,000
16,584,000
17,069453
17,591,000
18,132,000
18,694,000
19,276,000
19,878,000
20,500,000
21,143,000
21,805,000
22489,000
23,191,876
23,995,000
24,802,000
25,615,000
26433,000
27,256,000
28,083,000
28,916,000
29,753,000
30,596,000
31,443,321
32,064,000
32,704,000
33,365,000
34,046,000
34,748,000
35469,000
36,211,000
36.973.000
37.756.000
38,558,371
39,555,000
40,604,000
41,704,000
42,856,000
44,060,000
45,316,000
46,624,000
47,983,000
49,395,000
50,858,000
(estimated.)
tt
u
if
u
11
(enumerated.)
(estimated.)
tt
tt
it
tt
If
If
If
tt
(enumerated.)
estimated.)
11
tt
if
If
a
fl
fl
tt
'enumerated.)
(estimated.)
if
fl
If
If
it
it
it
ll
fenumerated.)
(estimated.)
if
If
1
1
tt
it
•
t
tt
ll
If
o stx
ASS A
?
' \ A
§0
EORgl
X/?
I
!r—
;
\
/
tsj
A it c r n c < c k \w
>
S H O W IN G T U N
ACQUISITION OF TERRITORY
AM )
/V
-------- r#— r
f/
I
o
i
St Elias
ITS DISTHIMTION AMONG POLITICAL DIVISIONS
1776-1874.
S . W. S T O C K IIN <
\
-i____
— :— 5—
ALASKA
MAP
1
0
\ l
_______ iL
L etters refer ft* th e (tescrif)tion of'/otree/s ot'territo ry * to he tim m i
/// th e tu xo m p tn iy r/t// tetteejn v ss
THE PROGRESS OF THE NATION, 1790-1820.
MAPS
R O W IN G , IX FIVE D E G R E E S O F DE>TS m ' . TILE D IS T R IB U T IO N . W IT H IN T H E T E R R IT O R Y
E A S T O F THE 10 0 ™ M E R ID IA N . OF THE
POPULATION OF THE IAITED STATES
( excluding Indians not Taxed.'
Compiled fro m th e R etu rn s o f P opulation at the F irst. S eco n d . Third and Fourth Census
OF T H E
U N IT E D
STATES.
Vy
17 9 0 -18 0 0 -18 10 -18 2 0 .
FRANCIS A. W ALKER.
InJrr
9
2
uJkub ts tkeSq.ViU
t> atuf over
113OD
NOTE
Centre o fPopulation
NOTE
('enter ofPopulation
TIIK PROGRESS OF THE NATION. 1830.
THE PROGRESS OF THE NATION, UMO.
ih ia i
ou
C ia “»
VU »
ritti\ »v
\ o*
t ■_ iS r c f
jjo
A R K S
Ch
o iitf’
SCALE
SCA LK .
( t u t o r X t / i/ u ilt t o t h e S y . J t i i e
f / td tv ' X t t t h t t h to ( h r S y M M r
Iu w
mH ^
>
0
t toul o
rrr
fJi> a n d o v e r ■
t i f ii .v o% e r H(Hh) in h a h U a M o in s u lu i co lo r,
(flitw o u r NOtH) in h a b it a n t * in s o li d co to n
in oirotosproportionate to population
in cirvlc-N p r o p o r tio n a l'o to p o p u k tito tk
M AP
MAP
SHOWING,IN FIVK DEGREES OF DKNSITY.TIIF. DISTHIHITION
SHOWING. IN FIVK DEGREES OF DENSITY,THE DISTHIHITION
W
ITHIN THE TERRITORY
EAST OF THE 100? MERIDIAN,OF THE
EAST
W IN THE TERRITORY
ITH
of THE 100? MERIDIAN,OF THE
POPULATION OF TIIK UNITED STATES
( excluding Indians not Taxed).
Compiled IVoin th e D eturns o f Population at the Fifth Census
OF THE UNITED STATES IH30.
MLATION OF TH UNITED STATES
E
hv J .
a aA
( e x c lu d in g Ind ian s not T ax e d ).
OF THE UNITED STATES
1B40.
9
I1AVA.NA
p, ,- s v____
/ i.
C om piled iVotn Lite R etu rn s o f Population at the Sixili Census
.
BY
FRANCIS A.WALKEH.
N O TH .
'T '
'outre ofPtfm tutw n
FRANCIS A.WAlJvLR .
NOTE
M m Z9
J
7.v“/e.9’»:
■ ( 'entrr o f Population
M 'O H 'M
90
°/9 'W
Determined ty PROF. J.K.UIU 1
AHD,U.S.Coast Sum y
i
TUI'. PKOCIIIESS OK THE NATION 11150
K
i' \
\
v >
NA
5
}
v
PI. XVII
l \j
U
y
J
f
W J
U ____ r ' , r %
/i
m M
Htu
111%
_ I ,
~tu
\A /1
1
LU T
K
,i\r i •u j
*>
r
\\\
n ( | "V - i
I'ruirr 2 uifuib tothr StjMile
90 and over
(itn r (HTr SO(H} inhatH tanJs m s o tu f rotor,
in cirvtrj* prvptw tionatc to p tfx th ito n
MAP
SHOW l.\<; IN KIM ',D E G R E E S O F D E N S IT Y , TH E D IST R IIH 'T IO X
"T T IIIX THE T E R R IT O R Y . FAST OF THE
100"
MERIDIAN.
OF THE
1’OIM I.ATION OI Ti l l ; EXITED S I
excluding' Indians- not taxed .
Compiled from the Returns olTopulalion al Ihe Seventh Census
nr
FRAXCIS A3VAIJ%KR.
N 'O TK
.f /'.jm
/nfuw
,
WSV X.
XI'IS'M'.
D
rtefinine.1 b PRO J.E.H
> F.
IIjGARD
,r.S.Caas« Sun«
THE PROGRESS OK THE NAT ION - 1 8 6 0
PI. XVII a
SCALE
26
Under S mnoh tome SgMite
—
-« • »—* ••
—
90 and ovrr
4 9000
Ittin t HYT
m halH taiU s t/t so h d color,
in e u tie * prvfH iriionalc to population
SHOWING IX FIVK DE G R E ES OF D E N SITY.TH E DISTKIHFTIOX
WITIHX TIIF TERKITORY. EAST OF THE 100™ MERIDIAN.
OF THE
e x c lu d in g In d ian s not ta x ed
Com piled from llie Returns o f Population al (lie Eighth Census
NOTE
t'enter at'Population
39.Q 'jr:
004
S2*4StfHr
Disregarding population
Mod at'WO* die centre
Would, be
85-
IV
PI.XIX.
PLX
VIIL
123*
129*
13
1*
115#-
1U
°
1U9°
h j*
J
103°
M
il*
tor
9*
3
93*
B"
9
7°
3
73*
71«
«*°
47-
! 3 9 -f
K n '
l.itHA b(j
M
S/)
H
ttu
S 'A K P .D
Cruco*
SCALE
MAP
Constitutional ftyMiiafian
l/ndor 2 mhoh tothr StfMile
s h o w i x g i x f iv e d e g r e e s o f d e n s i t y , t h e d i s t r i u t t i o x
WITHIN THE TERRITORY OF THE EXITED STATES,OF THE
i.e.,«vxr hiding Indians not taxed
NOTE
Disregardingpopulation
M s or'W *thr centre
ot
O
(Hu.* orrr
in h a h ila n /.f m s o tu t rotor,
iti tirvir* proportion*Or to population
Mrould ho
led from the Returns of Population at the Ninth* ensus
OF THE EXITED STATES. 1870.
39* 12’ IT.
#3*35.7 'W:
ot'Pcffiliation
*
42
FRANC IS A WALKER.
3 9 ° 12.5'X.
To which is added a sketch of the principal
m W
W
IN D IA N R E S E R V A T IO N S AN D RANGES
from information tiirnished by the Office of Indian Affairs
In*tta n R r sm n to m s
.
121*
.
of date 1871.
o r H un h n tf Uniu n it
119*
115*
u.r
in*
N*
0
97°
nr
K x/dn m i /ion
The .n/notes are p r o p o rtio n a l to th e p o p u la tio n o f'th e States respectively
ir/vesen ted / J S ttth k l in h a b ita n t# to the• si/ in i
Kach sy u a ir is d iv id ed hy v ertica l h o es
into three m ta n y /es. the tet) lep re sen tiiu / th e toreu/n the m u title th e n a tiv e colored
n o il the rn/ht th e n a tiv e w hite p o p u la tio n
t'm h a /'th e la st two recta rn/tes is d iv id e d
to/ u h r m o o to t h o e tr n r h ib if th e p ro p o rtio n o/'etirh etoss o f th e p o p u /n lio n n /orsm teil
horn iw /edirrly w ithin m u l w ithout the M ute it s e lf
The Itmvr p o rtio n s o f these
it etnop Its
th u s ill ru teit represent the n o other n otice to the M ote, the u/tper p o r tio n s irp resen t
the another born in o th er M u les m u t T errito ries o f the /’m oo
Kach .n/aair h a s a
rectaea/te o f ei/iu il hn/ht upon its rn /h t, which e.r/utots in p roportion , the num ber
ofpersons
horn at th e M ote. who have heroine ivsu te/its o f o th er S ta te s
T his rerta/u/te
is tlir u ie tl hy a h o rixo n ta t h u e the, n/y>er /motion re/nrsentiny tutored-, the tower, white
C a u tio n : Cure w ilt in a tew r o se s r e y u ir t to he tnhen in th e u se o f
these tu/ h i t s . where th e n u m b e r o f to ie io u
i
NEV.
H
I
OR.
PRINCIPAL CONSTITUENT ELEMENTS
Mifhr ('alum ! horn in thr State
>
,
P O P U L A T I O N OF EACH STATE,
„
„
out o t' the State,
X utiir White horn in the State
A S FOREIGN,NATIVE COLORED,AND NATIVE W HITE,
h
AND AS BORN W ITH IN OR W ITH OUT
m
out ot ' the State.
TH E STATE OF RESIDEN CE.
ychile'
I.ivi/u/ in other States.
IIv
[folored.
FRANCIS A WAI.KKli
r r c to n a le t o i l w id th sc a r c e ly p e r ce p tib le to th e e y e. tiv i/ i.e e d I n d ia n s
are- in tru d e d in the n o tic e w h ite p o p u la tio n In u d d o r n ia an d M iehii/nn
p
htw uns hurti out o f the TnitrytStatus
TH E
Compiled from Die Returns of Population al the Ninth Census 1870.
or o f co lo red in h a b ita n ts ,
in the S ta te u n ite r r ep resen ta tio n , is so s u n lit u s to rei/m r th e enetosm t
aton e is the dt lie re nee
CHANT
SH O W IN G
istu sc d hy th is trea tm en t / w n ep tth te to th e eye
H
-j—
NEB.
1_
_
F LA
VT.
KAN.
MINN.
ARK.
w m
Kr
>
V -•
'>
f ’ tltr J to thr St/m //rM i/f
n
'•5am/ Mir
MAP
SHOWIXGJX FIVE DEGREES OF DENSITY .THE DISTRIRITIOXOFTHE
WITH IX THE T E R R IT O R Y OF TH E EXITED STATES EAST OF THE 100* MERIDIAN
Compiled from fhe Returns of Population at the Ninth Census
O F THE E X IT E D STATES. 1870.
E x p la n a t io n s .
TJu B lue Lutes u iJ u u te the bountlurtes o f tiren/v* e*trf\jm lutUM i
The Futures in B in e ? H i IB A). / i - ejrpnrxs th e number ot n th a Atfo u ls
to th e X/uu/e M ile found u it hut e,t,/i tfn n jf
The S h ih letl fames ut H hte tMilieule the •m t.ude h u n t o f a /u>/>uhtliou
ofU m rm on r /« the Xfrtattr M i/s
•
T he *k u J m .i /HHuts to n ,m is tire
nruien .t rrkuiI M ere u f s'tm lutu'M o f le s s th.ut 12 to the X fu u ie 2 file
Note The t\,tLU*'nu/ ubru/d in term it betw een the s h tid ed p erfhm s
it M il the tw o t*t‘n e pojH ifaih'n ure JtMthtles.% tin e rn mutmv ertae* hten\*e~s
rn the len.ur* return v in* h it t i l to th e .ym rxenex* I't'v o M m e a t .
PI. X II
X
I****1
*
t 'm/rr / prr t /•///
' / S . \ rtf - < V
\\
*"■*0 *' i _A. \
H
i m
'A; {
m
l
tvv
.
fhfh&Zl
'
i
?wi
s 1"
l
_L
T
MAP
SHOWING THK PROPORTION OF TilK
‘'^*386
Ap||^3B
1* . XXIII
1
-r
'.3
'
8
-
87°
69
79°
H tfJ
STALK
t h t/er 2 to th e Stfu tire Mdo
MAP
SHOWING IX FIVE DEGREES OF DENSITY;THE DISTR1BFTI0X,
WITHIN THE TERRITORY OF THE UNITED STATES EAST OF THE loo™ MERIDIAN
(»F THAT IN>RTK»NoF THE P<)PI LATH)XWHI< 1 IS.IXWH*>LE.()R IX PART,**F
1
F()REIGN PAREXTAC>E.
embracin'! i .t“ all persons bavins laflipr.i>rnm>tlienor both,fbreicn.
Compiled from the Returns of Population at the Ninth Census
FRANCIS A WALKER.
fo t e // should be observed th a t as a rulepersons found nothin the f h i led
states o f foreign birth, were K m ofpsirm ls ,ifs<> Cretan an d hence ,u r included
ui the num bers taken for the com putations for Bus map.
E x p la n a tio n s .
The ft h ie Lines u td tu ife the b*milsla n e s o f itroufvt o f',
The Figures m F lu e 2 tft 111 -by 4 3 er/v rss the nu/n
to the SgUtirr M ile tew id ter/hiri ea*h tfnuif*
The Shtide*! lan es in B lu e unheate the . n tlxu le lim it
o f 2 o r m ore to th e .S g iu m - M ile .
T he shsiduur jh \
regions n/iieh kttve afH 'im h ihon o f'le s s fhsut 2 to t
Xol c The iS i'itsu 'n a t abruf*t m in i'll is bt’tue,rr th.
a m i th e h u e o f no /*yw lali. n are d o u b tless tin e u t mu
m th e len .u K return s, inon le n t to th e s/m rseues* o tse
85'
v
m
5|j£ ^ili m L .
P 3Vu
rrV4
P
'p
-M
J
\
[H
's - 1
v(
[Md*
*y J
.
£V 1m .%r
E H1
1
"
-•
(i '
J rS
W
\_» i
. J j
vAW'/ i /A Hoi T tJ
J
vt
'H&C ) A
dJL
a
lV " v t f
i v\^
i V iA > 1?
»* v»
v“
V F
j
I'lhUr
V y fr*TS
1 ' V-£ !• - x.A
■ M/V
vA
G O a n d o n r
_~3 i l
\ ^
M AP
SHOWING THE PROPORTION TO THE AGGREIATE IMPUTATION
OFPERSONS HAVING ONE OR BOTH
PARENTS OF FOREIGN BIRTH.
Compiled I'roiii tile Returns of Population at tlie Ninth
FRAN CIS AWALKE R .
-IV//-. It Atm M .be ohsrrvrd th a t as a rulr/trrsons found m thin the T nitrJ
■
‘'" - ’rown otrth'W nr hom ofparm tsalsotorn tin sa id h a ltsa rr u itlu d rd
m m e num bers tak n t forth* lom puLittons for tins m an
Explanations.
Thr M ur Linos u u h ,a to th. h*mnJ a n o s ofG roup s o f ,
T kt fu/urrs m M ur
fit I tl 4 .i 4 .i n jn r is H it mini
to t ilt \/u ,u , M ilt tomtit m thut ru th ,/rou/‘
Thr Shadnt Ijnrs in Blur liutitutr
t i l t oulsidr hunt
ot ~ “ f m orr to thr Syuan- M ilt.
T h, shu./mu / «
ny/oirn. n in th hurt < //* * / ,uLilian of loss than J to
/
S o le Thr n i i i t t w / uhru/ti intmir/s httnrm th,
and thr lintol'no/*jHiluli,ir
m thr Crusts rrturns. inriJrnt
d,Hibtlrs.i Jut m / « . ;
/<• thr.VHUsmtss of.tt
a r r
Cen
l
f ’ t//r J to t/tr S r/m /tr M i/r
n
25 m u/ a n r
SHOWING IX FIYK DEGRKF.S OF DENSITY THE DIST1 IBITIOXOFTHE
WITHIN THE TK R K ITO K Y OF TH E UNITED STATES EAST OF THE 100* MERIDIAN
Compiled from tlie Returns oT Population, at the Ninth Census
O F T H E U N IT E D S T A T E S
18
FRAN CIS AWALKE R
F .xp lan d tip n ^ .
T e Blue Lines i/it
h
lit 4 the / n simtaiies of dreu/*xof /J j f* / f i
ite
u ii\
T eF t r s m Blur ? H jft
h uu e
i
/ ; / i
erjmrss the number ofuth
to the M/ a e Mile / u *
t ur
r n ! hithin rath < / u ’
/o/
The Shade*! fo n ts ut B lu e m ilitate the < ish it lim it o f a /*/>•
m
o f ? 4*' m ere to th e Mt/uarr J/t/e.
T he sh a d u ia / w ilts toua.
re4 ions n in th b a te a / I'n u fo tio n o f le s s than 'J to the Sonar,
/
S o l c The *\rasi*'nai ,thru/ft tn te n u l< b th erm the sh a d e*!
a n d th e h u t ofn t/H /m la lion . are d o u b tless d u e /// m u n v ea ses
tn th e Census returns, tn eid eu t to th e .y nirseuess **!settlem en t
PI. XXVI
2
Id D
M AP
SHOWING TIIK PROPORTION OF THE
The tlln . Lull's uiU ii*tte ih t- tKH u,Janes o fO
Tht’ Future* m B lu e ' ' /ft US 4 . i VL/ r.n ttr\s
ft’ th i’ Square M ile totuul * li/iut eaeh <fn>L
The Sim ile*I Line* i// B lu r in J o u le the ou tsi fe haul o f u
o f 2 *v m ore to th e Sqim n Jft/e
T he sJu firmjH
'ints i
n y /on s n ln eh ha ve t//•onu Litton o f le s s th.
X otr TheO uxuuonat ohruf*t niter i»//< hetneert th e s h iiile tl
Iu til the lin e o t no /*y m lu ll on ore J o u M e ss tin e in m a n e ruse*
/// the Census returns. im titlen l to th e s/htrxeness o lse ttlem en t
MAPS
SHOWING TIIK D IST R IR l T IO \W ITH I\ THE TERRITORY OF THE l 'NITER S T A T E S EAST OF T ill: 1 0 0 ™ M E R ID IA N . OF CERTAIN
FOREIGN ELEMENTS OF THE POPULATION.
I. ACCORDING TO THEIR NUMBER TO Till : SQUARE MILE i a b s o l i t e ) ).
U. ACCORDING TO TH EIR PROPORTION TO THE AGGREGATE POPULATION ( r e l a
t i v e
)
Compiled from Ihe Returns o f Rtpulaliou at the Ninth Census1870,
FRANCIS A .WALKER.
PI. XXVII
u i t 1t
k ^ --ST
i5 —
1-4
/ iv v i
tJ a L
,_ *
o
. i "Tp
j 1 ^
KS
1. I R I S H
Absolute
%
£.5 "
i
i
a
j
fr ~
i // *
'•U
'
r^
"
T ~
>‘
I
C ■
'^VH <
rV
1
0
_ to
4. G E R M A N
R e la tiv e
Note
The .Shaded lutes m lit act. indicate the outride lim it o f a population o f 2 or more to the square mile. The shading points towards the regions
which have a population o f less than 2 to the square mile
pi.xxvm
5.-RRITISH AMERICAN
O-BKITISH AMERICAN
A b s o lu te
R e la tiv e
< | K jr ^
s*
»
\
y jr
\2
S
\
{
N fip jg
3 ~ t j
I
,
* j / ^ J ^ 7» f r r i > i
X 44 ■ f
1 ; 1
f i
:
- - - - - -
4
i
\
'
*
j i
V i -
>r — • • f a i r * * s t ' y i . t - : * r
/ ^ X
g « ’
;
V
S
* 2 ^
1
^V
r
A
r
s
*'
■
J
f
A
V \ f r
-
‘Lj
N
^
V -■ -— 'f f l ' f * y
, -•
''^ v ^ *
’
^ j r*>/
V
7r EXELIS Ii A M ) WEL S11
E N G L I S H AN D W E L S H
A b s o lu t e
R e la tiv e
f ruhr^fotki.iyrM
/t
[l* tc 2
U.-SWKDISH
\
AM )
iA
V d rJperrent
ne
«
NORWEGIAN
lOSWEDISH
A b s o lu t e
\
AM )
£ tr ,
.Chusr^
Note: The Shaded Itnes in Blade indirate the outside lim it o fu population o f ? or more to the stptare mile.
trhieh have a population of less than 2 to the square mile
NORWEGIAN
R e la tiv e
JO
V
J
j
*
-*
* *Jr / ‘
J
\h~^ JL
The shading points towards the reruns
■C U
H*frJ
9
9
°
9
7
°
Pl.XXIX
9b *
9°
5
8°
7
91*
81°
79 *
77°
75*
67*
71*
('rid e r J f i r cm t.
Front
to to .
■ te
00
.
te* it/ tii o ve r
MAI
SHOWING
FR ANCIS A WALK FI
Note: fn the construction o f this .Wap the tota l No. o f pontons
IOyeans o f aye and upnartls is com/mrcd nitli the No. o f such
persons who cannot read
E x p la n a t io n s .
T e Blue Mines uidu.itc the ts'unJunes of Oreufs
h
**/ l\jHiluti**n
T * future* m Blue ? FIPS / ; JJ ejjwrss the number ot'inhabitants
h
to the X juare Mile t.uuJ h ithin eueb .//>
»///*
The S h o d sit fames m B lu e m .lu .it. the o u tsid e /unit e»f a p o p u la tio n
o t 2 .w m ere to the S fu a tr M ile
T he shaU out ja u n ts tew. m is the
re*/tens whteh h ove *tp i'p iih itu m < te.% fh.ut l? te the Stp n ur M ile
*/ %
Xotr The t\ e tu * 'n a l abrupt intern its between th e sh*tde*l/ v/V/, */«
•m* l th e h u e *» o . •/%y nd*ili* w ore Jetibtfax.%*lue m h u m **«u ses k* errors
/
in the ten .» retu rn * m n d e n t te th e .y v u sen ess t*t settlem en t.
//*
85"
8*
1
f S.
> y
*
.
NT
i
. s* i
vifl
r5§*
*
W Yvl
y
•^?Y-j
*• *" L'
*
/ fC
rs
■
iW jj( 1n
L
'
r T
i
*— *{ T ?
v"
014
/1
sits
PI. XXXI
CHART
S H O W I N G T H E R A T I O OF
C H U R C H A C C O M M O D A T 10 A
J M ethodist
Rapdist
T O TH E TO TA L PO PU LATIO N OVER 1 0 YEARS O F A G E
ftrsMenan
WITH THE PROPORTION OF SC(H CHURCH ACCOMMODATION FURNISHED B Y E A C H OF
THE LA R G E ST FOUR D EN O M IN ATIO N S WITHIN EACH STATE AND B Y EACH OF
TUF. LA R G E ST EIGHT DENOMINATIONS W ITH IN TH E U N IT E D S T A T E S .
C o m p iled fro m the S o c ia l S ta tistics o f the Ninth Census 1 8 7 0
BY
FRANCIS A W ALKER.
DELAWARE
KANSAS
MICHIGAN
NEW H A M P SH IR E
ALABAMA
FLO RID A
ILLINOIS
KENTUCKY
M INNESOTA
NEW JERSEY
PENNSYLVANIA
V IR G IN IA
ARKANSAS
M AINE
M ISSISSIPPI
NEW
YORK
SOUTH C A R O L IN A
W EST V IR G IN IA
WISCONSIN
M ISSO U R I
NORTH
C A RO LIN A
TENNESSEE
D I S T R I C T or C O L U M B I A
C o n g r e g a t io n a l
Kpisevpml
Lutheran
Christian
L/utch Re/brmed
.\ato The interne squares represent the pn pn rtion o/'the papulation irhteh isprovuhtl /or by the aptpreejale
si/hnys at the ehntehes o/ a ll denominations. T he sh ad ed interval between the inner and outer squares
rdissents the population /brwhieh no cAmvA aram niodaiion is provided Mhere the aggregate chlutA aenonmodatum
epuals ir rarerits thepopulation over JO thus ofage the shaded interval disappears
THE UNITED STA T ES
R om an CtUholie
C A LIF O R N IA
INDIANA
MARYLAND
I'n iversu iist
.M orm on
A l l other Renam e*
n a tio n s
C O N N ECTICU T
IOWA
MASSACHUSETTS
NEBRASKA
OHIO
TEXAS
NORTHWEST TERRITORIES
OREGON
VER MONT
S OUTH W E S T T E R R I T O R I E S
PI. XXXII
CHAKT
SHOWING FOR T IIE I'X IT E D STATES AND FOR EACH STATE.
WITH DLSTIXCTIOX OF SEX. THE RATIO
BETWKKX THi: TOTAL POPULATION OVER lO YEARS OF AGE
AXDTHE NUMBER OF PERSONS HKPORTED AS ENGAGED IN EACH PRINCIPAL CLASS OF
G A I X F C L AM) ALSO -VS
OCCUPATIONS
ATTENDING SCHOOL
FRAXCISA WALKER
.Vote T er t e u sguarrxr p e e t theproportion ot thefHfpulatnm *hirh is turmintedfirms er j / t
h /f r w
e rsn
u tu e !
-
. T JriT i
ru r
-
C onipiled i i*om ihe Kclurns o f Population at the Ninth Census 1870
BY
U gainful u I
I
>
Engagedin dgrimlture.
- JinA ft-itfrsxLSortu n i
-J n u X
H tU it/ thuol
nrus tiitendmy reboot- The sluideti mtentds Itetnmi the innertuul• itersquares
n
nrprrxenf thefw\fnotion of’ hepopulation notso ntrourtted far.
t
T H E UN ITED
DELAWARE
STATES
ALABAMA
FLO RID A
ARKANSAS
CALI F O R N IA
C O N N EC TIC U T
GEO RGIA
ILLINOIS
INDIANA
IOW A
MARYLAND
MASSACHUSETTS
m
rrr^1 1 ’■
. j » i rt; .
KANSAS
KENTUCKY
LOU ISIANA
M AINE
mmm
K ? 1
wwM,
Wmm
\ %
left M■■:ty I
k
km (e
IS y #
mm,
•
M ICHIGAN
M INNESOTA
M ISSISSIPPI
M ISSO U RI
NEBRASKA
NEVADA
VM
/i
vs f
//t
auZ'j
L
NEW H A M PSH IR E
P E N N SY L V A N IA
V IR G IN IA
NEW JERSEY
RHODE
ISLAND
WEST V IR G IN IA
NEW YORK
NORTH C A R O L IN A
OHIO
OREGON
SOUTH C A R O L IN A
TENNESSEE
TEXAS
VERMONT
W ISCONSIN
D I S T R I C T ofC O L U M B I A
NORTHWEST TERRITORIES
S OU T H W E S T T E R R I T O R I E S
Pl.XXXM
^ x.
r. k >
"
M tf
Under O A
A*
W?
i:too
SHOAVIN (
FRANCIS AWALKEI
f ip la n a tio n s .
Lutes uuhi.it,- tile him,tunes oftrr,%
T eRaurex u Blue ? /ft/ft -j 4 j ■ express tit
h
t
t< the X/uurr Mite found H tin* ea.fl ,,r»u >
.
i
/
T e S a e / Lines in Blue im
h h dr
lieu e the ,w/ride
/
of 2 or more to the Srfuanr M e
The sh.tdi
rrytons » fiirh hair It/syitrLitton of less than
^
4
owr
f A
m
1 s 1
,.TT
ft v M
•11
■e h [ ? S ^
k
Y
f i Y»-
•
M
^
l v
I
Rk ~
«*afl
f.HtCt’IYt
1
m
f
tjr
'f
Jr
M AP
SIKAMXGTHE DEGREE OF
CONTRACTED BY STATE
XTY OR MHilflPAI. AITHORITY,
ATTHE CLOSEOKTHE FISCALYEAR NEAREST THE CENSES YEAR
Compilnllnun the StatislHsnf \\Vallh.T;ixali<mand Diblie Imb-blnlness
at llir Nintli Census
OF THE EXITED STATES 1870.
In f IUuf Luifs uuiuuJf thf / . ■ //.A// r . o f (inm/a f t H yu/ntuvi
* //
<
Thf Ihynm m H im :'//•/•'!-t.i -f.i <ijvr-ss th f number ftinhabit,m is
to thf X f mu f M ilf H vnJ »ithui fadk ,/rfny
^ h h a d fil fanes m H lu f uubeatf th f
lim it f t , l y H'ym l,itie n
f t ~ ,tf' tn*'r' ' t f th r "y//,//> J f f lf
T h f sh ,n lin ,i p r in ts tfu ,ir ,h th f
rruum s n/urh h u r r a p y n ln tie n fT tfs s than J t f th. S a n .u r M iI f
X otr T h f th n u tim tii abrupt to h r m li h,-tnferi t h f sh a d ed y v rh en s
1ts/il th f lin e e lite p ,y u i/ ,ilie n .ttr f d iv tb l/esi d u e m m ,tn v ra ses A* fir m s
m th r Census retu rn s in c id e n t t f th e sih in tfn ess e t settlem en t
/
o\
1 l-L,
r
-Jr ^Hc
*
Z fc n j
(¥
f
t'mUr Si fi<r (aptla
$ n
M AP
SHOWINGTHEDEGREE OF
i r u a t U K i M A lt.C U l .\ n OR MUNICIPAL AUTHORITY
WITHIN THE FISCAL YEAR NEAREST THE CENSUS YEAR.
Compiled from the Statistics ofWealth Taxation and Public Indebtedness
at the Ninth Census
OF THE UNITED STATES 1870.
FRANCIS A.WALK El
It
.. m
^
h
- o v e r .
FISCAL CHART
From litb lic Ltuuls
- . /in /,- Stock
n
S H O W I N G T IIE C O U R S E O F T H E P U B L IC D E B T B Y Y E A R S
•
•
(u
storn
s
buret Ttur
»
Outage
*
M iscellaneous
C iv il
■ 11
A N D T H E P R O P O R T I O N OF T O T A L
/ h rsio n s
r~i
F R O M E A C H P R IN C IP A L S O U R C E O F R E V E N U E
Na w
m i
HK CEIPTS
A rm v
w m
1 7 B !) T O 1 8 7 0
T O G E T H E R W I T H T H E P R O P O R T I O N OF T H E T O T A L
In U rn a ! R even u e
*
□
iH
OF T HE I ' M I K I ) S T A T E S
It a lia n s
I I I ] F o re ig n
■ ■ M isce ttan e o n s
EXPENDITURES
■ ■
H
Y
Ih n r i/ n t l o! Pub. Debt.
HH
( om piled frumtheReport o f the Secretwyof theTrensury forflieyen rl872,
h r m iiu n on bub. Debt
■ ■
F O R E A C H P R I N C I P A I .I ) E I » R 'T M E N T O F T H E
A
P U B L I C SERVICE.
I n U r r s f on Pub. Debt.
F R A N C IS A .W A L K E R .
2-P U B LIC D EBT.
I R EVEN U E.
In tm lh o n s a n d tm th.x
f 0 0 ,0 0 0 o m itled /
M I
ay
4
.4
In m ilium s an d trn ths
( oo, OOO imuttfd)
Ja n .l 1791
1792
1793
179-1
1795
1798
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
75.
77.
80.
78.
80
83.
:v E X P E N D I T U R E S
In m t//nmx a n d tr n tll.v
ftnu’oo
<
-il/
3.1
5
2
4
4
7
8
62 1
71
7tt. 4
83. 0
83. O
80. 7
77. 1
86. 4
81*. 3
j
1807 b — G9. 2
4
1808 Y 05. 2
1809 h4 57. O
1810 h-j 53. 2
1811 1
--j 48. O
1812 Y 45. 2
-1
1813 h 56. 0
4
1814 h-4 81. 5
1 8 1 5 /- B 99. 8
1Klb j " B l2 7 . 3
j 123. 5
1817 p
1818 p —f 103. 5
1819
—|95. 5
4
1820 h ■ 91. O
1821 r -H 90. 0
1822 p —j 93. 5
1823 |-H 90. 9
1824 p -4 90. 3
1825 { - ■4 83. 8
1826 h 4 81 0
1827 L 4 74. 0
1828 h 4 67. 5
4 58. 4
1830 V-■ 48. 6
j
1831 \ 39. 1
1
1K12 Fj 24. 3
1833 Ij
7. O
4. 8
1834
1835
0. 0
0. 3
1836
1837
3. 3
10. 4
1838
1839
3. 6
1840
5. 3
1841
13. 6
20 6
.
1842
Ju ly 1 1843
32 7
1844
23. 5
15. 9
1845
1846
15 6
1847 r 1 38. 8
4
1848 h 47. 0
1849 f-4 63 1
1850 |-4 63. 5
1851 r-4 68. 3
1852 4 -j 66. 2
1853 4 -J 59. 8
1854 4-| 42. 2
1855 4J 35. 6
1856 j-4 32. 0
■
1857 hj 28. 7
1858 Y4 14. 9
|
IBS!) 1-k 58. 5
1860 4 4 64. 8
m t i u - - L Ibo^i;
Im
t;
urn
1848
IBID
1850
I HM
1852
1853
1854
1855
IHMi
15
87
1H H
5
THW)
I860
im
u
1882
18B3
i him
imir.
868013- ---773 2
m
titi
m7
u
‘ Fim a) Year ending’ .June 30.
Tile Public Debt ..January-1.18115,was $ 37.
• F is c a l
Year
e n d in g
June
30.
PI. XX w
1868
mi*!)
1 1 (1
17
<
3 APS
1
SHOWING THE HANGE, AND, W ITHIN THE RAN GE, THE DEGREE OF CULTIYAITOX OF CERTAIN PRINCIPAL
CROPS.
Compiled from the Statistics of Agriculture, Ninth
C e n s u s ,1870,
FRAN CIS A.W ALKER
PI. XXXH .
■xustrS
H op
Tobacco
TO BACCO and H OPS
\ol<v M adison Count* ]X Y a n d Je/lersoti a jid Jiich la n d
Counties. tits, produce Ibbacco in a d d itio n to Hops.
Cotter tty
Note In a feu - instances, lin es in preen are run
a rou n d on the space corned Ip-the other color, showing
the cnltm idm i o f both crops in the sam e field
The X ° o f bushels, bales orpoimdi producedin each countyis d iv id e d -1 * brib e Yn ',„ l,„ h n
d
/
o f the product is taken a s the measure o f the importance o f the crop to the county and o f the 'count*-to ,1
,tiu ,,s ' fy th e h .a/A.res of impnnrd land. The tuo quotients are multiplied together, and die square
Note The Shaded Luiesin B la ck inchoate the o u ts a t U m J o f T ^
/X
° 7 ? T i e c o u n t i e s are then groupedby natural gm da hon from lowestto Highest, X°J upun
ill-side lin u t o f a population o f 2 or more to the square, m ile. The shading p o in ts towards the ream n s
which hare a population o f less th a n 2 to the squ a re m ile.
Explanation of Scales
PI. XXXVI a
^ x
____ | <
J
f
i
^
*
f
- <
J L - ^ - "> — “ T X
80
4
/m -iH h St * r iir
lfrU t n ‘m M
/
ir
S -JM)__
.„
.«**> *m. ..„
iwt'-jwi. . .
8-O U tlitr _"
iMin r
T O T A L A G R IC U L T U R A L P R O D U C T IO N
J
' V F 1.*,
T
bSi >v
^!
1
0
3
0
/ru/nS .i/tmrtft/a
Si
- ’ '
S O 30 •
l
*
•
t W• - Sipandinrr •
—-
D A IR Y P R O D U C T S
M APS
OF THE
PACIFIC
E X H IB IT IN G
COAST
V A R IO U S
SUBJECTS
Compiled from the Statistics of the Eighth and Ninth Census
IltlSII-HEIATIVK
SCALE
Umdtr / p er< m t
/-<lar*</'•fte nft
/• // tr
/
d*,a 'A Mr«'
r/ t '- »
p ftx xr
tn x r .
GERMAN-RELATIVE
Xoto
T)u S/uultul Lutes in Black inch cate the outside lim it o f a population o f It or more to the square mile.
The shacluiq points towards the rrqions which haw a population o f less than 2 to the square mile
AN APPROXIMATE LIFE-TABLE FOR THE UN ITED STATES
ON THE BASIS OF THE NINTH CENSUS, 1870.
[PLATES X X X V III-IX ; X L III-IV .]
B Y E. B. E L L IO T T , U. S. B U R E A U O F S T A T IS T IC S .
[/« a U tter to th e S u p erin ten d en t o f th e C en su s, 1872.]
U
n it e d
S
tates
C
C
en su s
OF
tates
C
con stru cted
of
AND
ANNUAL
Ages.
Y cars.
OVER
TH O SE
x
:0
TH E
BY
s h o w in g
AGES
B IR T H S; A N D
d
1870.
d if f e r e n t
IN
A
M EAN
a| | l
«« “ 1
t X €.0
4
a.
Q
x to y
C.
L
n
M
a
A ll
specified
a g es.............. 38,553,210
Unknown ages
5, i 6 i
Q*
M r : y.
t l.
3.
4.
0 to I
I to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
1,100475
1,078,803
t.«43,i 39
1,113,782
1,078,514
110,445
43.663
23.944
14,892
10,269
.17010
.06860
.03550
.02266
.01614
5 to 10
10 to 15
15 to 20
20 tO 25
4,814,7*3
26,329
15,979
20,262
25,988
.00927
.00566
.00850
.01175
4,786,189
4,040,588
3,748,299
491.243
14120
A ll ages..........
« a. rt -a .5 *o
1.
.01241
.01291
.01471
.01558
.01732
.01998
.02561
.03456
.05060
•07195
•11193
•17185
.22256
.26525
•29973
X
3,925,442
3.834,130
3,752,333
3.674,474
3,598.772
39-2
54
45-3
92
492,263
38,558,371
0.0216
49I» 4 =
23
38,5 3 1
5 ,2 0
7 77
4,3
N U M BER OF
X.
47-584
48.290
48.386
OF
105
,
th e
th e
U
n it e d
num ber
of
S U S T A IN E D
BY
1 0 0 ,0 0 0
L IF E .
3.
3,524,518
3,166.954
2,822,159
2,489,305
2,173,260
1,875.498
1,595.772
1,334,147
1,091,134
867,764
665,725
487.254
335,o8 i
211,906
H 9,539
57,58o
22,217
6,254
1,117-7
103.0
3.6
73,179
69,864
67,912
65,083
61,370
57.744
54,143
50,489
44,681
42,606
38,137
33.159
27,616
21,585
15.369
9,544
4,849
1,830
449.6
57-9
29
IOO
l if e
of
4 .
48.163
45-33°
41.556
38.248
35-413
32.480
29-473
26.425
23-374
20.367
17.456
14.695
12.134
9.817
7-778
6.033
4 582
3.416
2.486
1-779
1.260
In column (2) of Table III is shown the number surviving the different ages of life,
out of 100,000 persons bom alive. Thus, out of 100,000 born alive, 69,864 survive age 10;
65,083 survive age 20; 42,606 survive age 50; 9,544 survive age 80; 58 reaching the
advanced age of 100 years. In column (4) of the same table is shown the mean after-life
time, or mean future duration of life corresponding to the different ages specified. Thus,
at birth, the mean future duration of life indicated is 39J years; at age 20, 38J years,
at age 40, nearly 263 years; at age 60, nearly 15 years; and at age 80, about 6 years.
TABLE
r o p o r t io n s
B
orn
S
an d
u r v iv in g
C
IV.
A
e r t a in
com pared
ges
in
D
if f e r e n t
C
o m m u n it ie s ,
.
0.0216
* It is easy to explain the cause o f the wholesale omissions from the returns of deaths in the census, which have been
referred to. T o take the recent census as an example, the census law required the return of all deaths occurring in families
from the ist of June, 1869, to the 31st of May, 1870; in all, twelve months. The enumeration in the course of which this was
to be accomplished began on the 1st of June, 1870, and closed, nominally, on the ist of October, but really about the ist of
January, 1871. Thus, the officers of the census were called upon to recover all the deaths occurring during the census year,
at a distance in time ranging from one day to nineteen months from the dates at which such deaths severally occurred. The
antecedent improbability of success in such an attempt would be of the strongest; while the actual experience of three cen
suses has shown that assistant marshals fall short o f the true number of deaths by not far from 40 per cent, as a rule. In
some cases assistant marshals fail to put the question; in others, heads of families, or persons answering for them, fail to
recall the fact of a death occurring during the year, especially when ten or eleven months have already elapsed since the date
o f death, and the mind, not unnaturally, refers to the event as having taken place a year or longer before. In still another
large number of cases, persons die out o f fa m ilits, which class of cases seems not to have been in contemplation of the
census law, which makes the return of mortality a family return. In still other cases, deaths occur in families, but the very
death itself breaks up the family and scatters the surviving members, leaving no one to report the death in the census. In
still other cases, deaths occur in what are constructively families for the purposes of the census, i. e ., boarding-houses, hotels,
etc., but the common tie of membership or association is here so casual and so slight that the chances are altogether against
the circumstance being retained in memory six or eight months after.
The dimensions attained by the life-insurance interest, within the past few years, make it peculiarly a matter of regret at
the present time that the census should not afford the data for determining with absolute precision and certainty the death-rate
of the country, whether in the aggregate or by classes of the population. This can never be done without a national scheme
of registration, stringently enforced by penalties. Such a scheme, however, does not exist, and is, perhaps, in the nature of
our Government, wholly impracticable. The number o f States which provide for themselves a system of registering births,
deaths, and marriages, will probably increase from decade to decade, while the results of registration will improve steadily
with each year for which the effort is continued, affording thus fuller and better material for correcting errors and supplying
deficiencies in the census statistics ; but it is too much to expect, for many a decade to come, that all the States will join in
efforts to secure exact information of this character— [T he C ompile it]
ss— years.
IOO
100,000
84,468
78,857
76,092
E
b a s is
of
3.
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
4.
4
P
IOO—4I
3.
2
3
TH E
A STA
N U M B E R O F PE R SO N S L IV IN G
P O P U L A T IO N
D U R A T IO N
LX.
th e
ages
A L IV E ; TH E
5
3.
I
rate
IN
ec
a
<
1.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
IOO
Massachusetts, (part
of,) 166 towns,(town
ships,) 18554
<
K
d if f e r e n t
BORN
IO
Qx.
on
Belgium, 1842-1850,
(9 years.) t
O
22,522
19.528
20,090
17.836
16,135
16,123
13.246
15,883
14,459
14,619
11,602
9,592
4.527
1,983
1,327
B IR T H S , A N D
Carlisle, 1842-1850,
(9 years.)
*0
3.075.118
2,562,829
2,314,976
1.939,712
1.578,932
1.367,969
876,552
778,971
484,353
344.358
175,686
94,602
34.475
12,671
7,504
25 to 30
30 to 35
35 to 40
40 to 45
45 to 50
50 to 55
55 to 60
60 to 65
65 to 70
70 to 75
75 to 80
80 to 85
85 to 90
90 to 95
95 and over
for
1.
0
4.
an n u a l
th e
England and Wales,
1838-54, (17 years.)
« s
e $
3.
tates
of
S T A T IO N A R Y
1.
3.
age
S
n it e d
N U M B E R S L IV IN G
United States, census
1870.
M
1
g
s
1
(1
)
&
)
1.
~ GO C
n 0
q.3
t* B S " SI
*3 a. ° 0 .
U
th e
AGES, T H E
con stru cted
FUTU RE
LX
O
S’
■u
of
in t e r v a l s
X
O U rt
-O
,
1 0 0 ,0 0 0
■cgSe
am
«
P* :«,
b a s is
1 0 0 ,0 0 0 A N N U A L
),
n t in u e d
PER SO N S S U R V IV IN G O U T O F
AT
th e
P O P U L A T IO N .
(co
1870,
on
T H E S P E C IF IE D
S U S T A IN E D
SU C H
if e -t a b l e
en su s
for
1 ,0 0 0 A T
P O P U L A T IO N
L
,
s h o w in g
PER
D E A T H S IN
p p r o x im a t e
S
1870,
of
ANNUAL
A
if e -t a b l e
M O R T A L IT Y
T IO N A R Y
I.
en su s,
L
p p r o x im a t e
1
TABLE
A
II.
Mean future duration for
“ expectation ”) of life from
specified ages.
I
TABLE
Proportion born and surviv
ing specified ages; also, an
nual deaths at and
specified ages in a station
ary population sustained
| by roo,ooo annual births.
N compliance with your request to be furnished with a “ life-table,” based on that
portion of the returns of the United States census which purports to show distributed,
according to age, the number of persons living on the first day of June, 1870, and
the number of deaths which occurred during the twelve months which immediately
preceded that date, I have prepared the following analysis and statement.
An important difficulty is encountered, at the outset of an attempt to arrive even
approximately at a table which shall fairly represent the law of mortality obtaining in the
general population, in the fact, manifest on intelligent inspection and confirmed by careful
comparison with other analogous and trustworthy data, that the number of deaths reported
as having occurred in the period above referred to falls far short of the number which
must have taken place*
In conducting the investigation proposed, this deficiency could only be supplied by
resort to a somewhat arbitrary assumption, limited, however, by an investigation of the
rates of mortality relative to population which obtain in other communities, so far as
accessible, and in portions of our own country.
In the construction of the following tables the deficiency in the returns of deaths was
assumed to be forty-one per cent of the full number of deaths which must have taken
place. This assumed deficiency gives a general rate of mortality not differing greatly
from that obtaining in England and Wales, and is also in substantial accord with the
results of observation at different periods in the State of Massachusetts, in our own
country. It is impossible to determine with precision the amount of deficiency in the
return of deaths, but from the results herein computed on the assumption of a deficiency of
forty-one per cent, it is easy to calculate corresponding values which shall conform to the
assumption of any other supposed rate of deficiency.
The distribution of the a^es of the living population, and of the deaths as furnished
by the official returns of the census, although to some extent faulty, yield ratios which,
augmented as above described, have been accepted in the construction of the following
tables as satisfactorily correct
Elliott.
Farr.
Elliott.
Milne.
Elliott.
Elliott.
a.
3.
I.
5.
6.
7.
10,000
7,025
6,623
6,037
5,386
4.463
3.693
2,380
901
115
2
10,039
6,589
6,165
5,641
5,008
4.243
10,000
6,460
6,090
5.642
5,075
3 ,1 4 1
3.643
2,401
953
142
9
10,000
6,912
6,386
5.754
5.130
4.413
3.464
2,185
787
no
5
10,060
6,873
6,437
5.748
5,078
4.409
3.597
2,475
1,059
Il8
2
10,000
6,986
6,508
5,774
5,049
4,261
3.316
2,159
954
183
5.8
—
•
O' w
i
Jh 5
®g
>
>
tr
t
tn
3
M
CL
1,573
444
50
I
4 ,3 9 7
* The numbers in this column, from the age of 20 years to the extreme of old age, are the result of careful adjustment.
The sum of the numbers between the ages of 20 and 45, of 45 and 70, and of 70 and 95, respectively, in the unadjusted series
of Table I (column 4) and in the adjusted series of Table II (column 2\ are identical ; but in the adjusted series of all the
numbers from the age of 20 years to the extreme limit of old age, arc connected by a single exponential law of relation. The
numbers above the age of 20 are left as in Table I, undisturbed.
#
#
f See published proceedings of American Association for the Advancement of Science, at its meeting held in Buffalo,
in 1856.
.
^ See published proceedings of American Association for the Advancement of Science, at its meeting held in Montreal,
in 1857.
AN
2
TABLE
M
ean
F uture
D u ration
of
L
ife
A P P R O X IM A T E
V.
C er tain A
at
L IF E -T A B LE
ges
D if f e r e n t C o m m u n ities,
in
187a
Persons.
O
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
9°
95
OF
A
of
O
ne
D ollar,
OF
1855.
Persons.
Persons.
Persons.
36.7
44-8
37-5
30.6
23.8
17.1
I I .2
74
48
3.0
••••
n n u ities—
payable
S P E C IF IE D
5
2 to 3
3 to 4
p e r c e n t , per
at the
AGE, TH E
0 to I
1 to 2
end
RATE
4
39-8
47-1
399
3+o
27.9
21-3
15.0
94
5-0
2-9
2.3
38.7
48.8
41-5
3+3
27.6
21.1
1+3
9.2
5-5
3-3
3-5
of
OF
annum.
each
year
IN T E R E S T ON
during t h e
IN V E S T M E N T S
PER C E N T . PE R A N N U M .
Males.
Females.
Persons.
O
IO
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
IOO
$12.6
16.0
i +9
14.1
12.9
11.1
9.0
6.6
4-3
24
I.I
$12.7
16.5
*5-5
144
130
II.O
8.6
5-9
36
2.1
1.1
$13.2
16.5
*55
14.6
133
114
9.0
6.2
39
2.2
1.2
$12.6
16.3
153
145
134
* i -7
9-3
6-5
36
2.1
1.0
1
Persons.
1
A ge s— years.
5
_
! 779- ’87-
8 3 9 - ’4 0 - ’ 4 I .
40.9
474
39-9
33-3
26.7
201
13.9
8.7
51
29
2.2
V I.— L i f e A
P E R SO N
B E IN G A SSU M E D A T
Persons.
i
The following table shows, according to the United States census of 1870, the num
bers for each of the first five years of life, and the annual mean of the first two years,
compared with that of the three years next following, the number returned as of unknown
ages (5,161) being proportionately distributed among those of specified ages, the addition
amounting to about 13 for every 10,000 of the population.
A ge in years.
Massachusetts,
(part of,) 1855.
L IF E
alue
8 3 8 - ’ 54-
STATES.
Elliott.
United States
census, 1870.
TABLE
i
3925
45-3
38.2
32-5
264
20.1
147
9.8
6.0
34
2-5
IO
P resent V
Milne.
England a n d
W ales, 1838’54. (17 years.)
h
a
U N IT E D
1
1
be
<
Massachusetts, (part of,)
166 towns,(townships.)
Farr.
Carlisle, 9 years.
Elliott.
Elliott.
England and Wales, 17
years.
m
Prussia, 3 years.
United States census.
CO M P A R E D .
FO R T H E
»
Yearly mean.
1,100,622
1,078,947
1,143,292
1,089,785
1,111,960
1 113.93!
,
1,078,658
From this table it will be seen that the mean of the numbers of the first two years
of life (to wit, 1,089,785) is less by two per cent, than the mean of the numbers of the
three years next following (to wit, 1,111,960).
In England, according to the census of 1861, the mean of the earlier two years (to
wit, 568,380) is in excess of the mean of the three years next following (to wit, 521,340)
by nine per cent.
In France, Italy, and Nonvay the corresponding rates of excess, according to the
censuses of 1861 and 1865, respectively, are ten, seventeen, and fourteen per cent
In the calculated series of numbers for the United States, hereinafter given, the
corresponding rate of excess is from 11 to 12 per cent., manifestly a more probable rate
than that furnished directly by the census.
The following table exhibits by quarters and half-years the number and the monthly
mean of persons returned, under the United States census of 1870, as surviving during
the first year of life, commencing with the month of May, 1870, (the month immediately
preceding the date of the census,) and reckoning backward; and also the number and
monthly mean for the entire second year of life, the number of persons returned as of
unknown ages being proportionally distributed among those of specified ages.
A ges by months.
O to 3 . . .
3 to 6 ----6 to 9 _
_
9 to 1 2 . . . .
o to
6. . . .
6 to 12
N ote .— For explanation of the process by which these adjustments are reached, reference is made to pp. x iv and xv,
Vol. on “ Vital Statistics,” Ninth Census, 1870.
5
Number of persons living for each
annual interval o f age.
o to 12
12 to 24
Months.
May,
1870
April,
1870
March,
1870
February,
1870
January,
1870
December, 1869
November, 1869
October,
1869
September, 1869
August,
1869
J uly,
1869
June,
1869
May back to De
cember inclusive.
December back to
June, inclusive..
Entire year.........
Second year.. . .
Number of persons
surviving.
Monthly mean.
3 5 5 ,1 7 7
118,390
346,188
! 15,396
273,309
91,103
125,948
41,893
1
116,894
701,365
3 9 9 ,2 5 7
1,100,622
66,543
9 1> ' 9
7
89,912
1,078,947
In this connection the Compiler has deemed it desirable to introduce the following
abstract of Mr. Elliott’s letter to the Superintendent of the Census [see Vol. on Vital
Statistics, Ninth Census, pp. 515-31], respecting the distribution of the population at the
earlier years of life. [PI. X X X V III, X X X IX , XL.]
In the examination of the numbers of population returned during the first two years
of life, especially during the latter half of the first year, a very marked irregularity is
observable.
It was desired that the data be so adjusted as to present approximately a correct
exhibit of the distribution of the population of the United States during the first few
years of life, more especially during the first five years. This task was undertaken, with
the following general results:
The calculation is based upon the assumption that in a community comprising a large
population, the number of persons existing within successive equal intervals of age, as a
rule, gradually diminishes with advancing age. Under a strictly accurate census, involving
large numbers, this rule will, in general, be found to hold, not merely with respect to a
stationary population— that is, with respect to a population in which the loss at each
interval of age caused by advancing age, by death, and by emigration, is exactly compen
sated by the gain arising from births, from advancing age, and from immigration, but also
with respect to a population fluctuating by reason of excess or deficiency in the number
of births, as compared with the number of deaths, and by any ordinary excess or
deficiency in the number of immigrants as compared with the number of emigrants.
Inspection of the tabulated returns shows that the numbers purporting to represent
the population at the earlier years of life, especially under the age of five years, do not
conform to this standard, and the deviations are so marked and extreme as to impress the
conviction that they are, to a notable extent, erroneous.
According to the returns, the number under 1 year of age (that is, for the first year
of life) and the number from 1 to 2 (that is, for the second year of life) are each smaller
than the numbers for the third and fourth years of life. From the third year of life
onward, however, the general progress does not conflict with the test above assigned,
the number diminishing by somewhat regular gradations with advancing age.
The irregularity noticeable in the first year of life, and the apparent defect in the
returns of the United States census for the last half of that year, are very marked. During
the first six months, the tabulated number returned is 701,365, being a monthly mean of
116,894, numbers not varying greatly from, but probably in excess of, the actual numbers
within that half-year interval of age. During the last six months of the year the number
returned is 399,257, showing a monthly mean of only 66,543, an incredible falling off of
43 per cent, from the number returned for the first six months.
The number returned during the second year of life is 1,078,947, a monthly mean of
89,912 ; this mean being 35 per cent, in excess of the mean of the preceding six months,
but 2 per cent, less than the mean of the preceding twelve months, and 23 per cent, less
than the mean of the first six months of life.
An important influencing cause of the irregularities is believed to be found in the
fact that, although the enumeration was made with reference to the population as it existed
on the 1st day of June, 1870, yet the actual collection of the facts by the marshals was
extended over a period of several months subsequent to that date, some of the enumera
tions having been made as late as nine months after the date designated by law. Inquiries,
therefore, relative to the month of birth of children under the age of twelve months,
living on the first day of June, 1870, required not unfrequently that investigation be made
relative to the month of birth of children who were, at the date of actual enumeration,
from 16 to 20 months of age. With respect to these more distant months of birth, it is
believed that there was less effort in general by the enumerator to secure the requisite
information, and greater difficulty encountered in successfully conducting the inquiries.
It is earnestly hoped that, in future censuses of the population, the system will be
followed which has proved so successful in England and certain other countries of Europe,
to wit, that of taking the census in one day, or as nearly so as possible, through the instru
mentality of a prior distribution of schedules, to be filled up with reference to a single
night; such schedules to be collected by the enumerators on the following day, or as soon
thereafter as practicable.
It was possible to adjust the irregularities in the data under consideration by one of
two methods— the one based on the assumption that there is no actual deficiency in the
number of persons enumerated, but that the irregularities observed are due exclusively to
an erroneous distribution of the numbers as regards a g e; that there may be, for some
cause, or combination of causes, a general tendency on the part of the enumerators to
record the ages of those under two years, and especially those of the second half of the
first year of life as either less advanced or more advanced than accords with fact The
other method is based on the assumption that the irregularities in question are not to be
wholly accounted for by imperfect distribution as respects age; but that, in addition to a
faulty distribution, there were, with regard to the younger ages, actual deficiencies in the
AN
A P P R O X IM A T E
L IF E -T A B LE
returns, and that some considerable portion of those who were under the age of two years
escaped enumeration.
The latter assumption is deemed the more probable.
An adjustment of the data under the age of five years has, however, been prepared in
accordance with each of these two assumptions, and is herewith presented: the one, on the
assumption that the irregularities in question are due entirely to faults in distribution; the
other, that they are due in part to defective distribution of the numbers returned, and, in
part, to actual omissions.
In the following table the third column exhibits the reported number of the popula
tion in 1870, according to the officially published abstract, the number of persons returned
as of “ Unknown A g e s” being proportionately distributed among those of specified ages.
The fourth and fifth columns give adjusted values, the adjustment being made in
conformity with the rule that the numbers of the population, in equal intervals of age,
diminish gradually with advancing years. In the preparation of the former of these two
columns, there has been no addition from without to supply supposed omissions; but the
average number under the age of 5 years, and also from ages 5 to 25 in this adjusted
column, are retained the same as furnished by the returns. In the second of the adjusted
columns, however, the number expressing the aggregate of the adjusted values, under the
age of five years, has been augmented by an addition of 100,000 to supply supposed
omissions.
TABLE
S
h o w in g
th e
N
um ber
of
P
er so n s
ACCORDING TO THE C E N S U S O F
as
S
of
“ U
p e c if ie d
A ge.
n kn ow n
A
ges
A
g e s
”
s u r v iv in g
w it h in
each
s p e c if ie d
A
g e - i n t e r v a i .,
1 8 7 0 , THE N U M B E R OF PERSONS ( 5 l 6 l )
b e in g
p r o p o r t io n a t e l y
d is t r ib u t e d
am ong
R ETU RN ED
th ose
of
(3 8 ,5 5 3 ,2 10 ).*
P e r io d s o f B i r t h .
A d ju sted .
O bser v ed .
Without addition.
1.
With 100.000added un
der the age of 5 years.
4.
Months.
0 to 1
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
5 to 6
6 to 7
7 to 8
8 to 9
9 to 10
10 to 11
11 to 12
M a y ,.............................1870
A p r il,...........................1870
March........................... 1870
February,..................... 1870
January,....................... 1870
December.................... 1869
November,.................. 1869
October, .........
1869
September....................1869
A ugust......................... 1869
July............................... 1869
June,.............................1869
17 9
1 .0 7
15 3
1 .4 6
122,644
115,168
11 .5 7
40
” 6,513
91,605
93404
88,300
69,688
42469
1 .7 1
39
109,661
106,266
•0 4 ,4 55
103,113
102,021
101,089
100,269
99.534
98,866
98,249
97,678
97443
i ” .3t4
108,169
106,391
105,094
104,016
103,088
102,267
101,527
100,851
100,226
99,643
99.096
* The addition for those of unknown ages is slightly in excess of i j in every 10,000 of the number at specified a g e s ;
more exactly, 0.00013387.
FO R
THE
A ge.
U N IT E D
STATES.
P e r io d s o f B ir t h .
3
A d ju sted .
O bser v ed .
Without addition.
a.
1.
Years.
1
2
3
4
to
tO
to
to
From
May 31
With 100,000 added un
der the age o f 5 years.
4.
5
3.
Average
per month.
June 1
Average
per month.
Average
per month.
2
3
4
5
1869
1868
1867
1866
to
to
to
to
1868 (one year)
1867
1S66
1865
1,078,947
1,143,292
1.113,931
1,078,658
89.912
95.274
92,828
89,888
1,132,498
1.086,707
1.052,799
1/125,102
94.375
90.559
87,733
85,425
1,154,849
1,106,899
1,070,828
1/141,192
96,237
92,242
89,236
86,766
5 to 10
10 to 1$
15 to 20
20 tO 25
1865
i860
1855
1850
to
to
to
to
i860 (five years)
1855
1850
1845
4.815358
4,786.830
4,041,129
3,748,801
80,256
79780
67.352
62480
4,819,822
4,448,765
4,173,668
3,949,863
80,330
74,146
69,561
65,831
4,873,056
4463,086
4,154,678
3,901,298
Si,2i8
74,385
69245
65 022
A ll other ages.
Prior to June r, 1845.
A ll ages.
Fror
May 31
Years.
O to
I
0 to 2
2 tO 5
0 to 5
1870
1870
1868
1870
to
to
to
to
15,650,803
•
15,650,803
38,558,371
38,558,371
15,650,803
38,658,371
June 1
1869 (one year)
1868(two years)
1865(threeyears)
1865 (five years)
1,100,622
2,179.569
3,335.88i
5,515,45°
91.719
9°,8i 5
92,663
91,924
1,218,344
2,350,842
3,164,608
5,515,45°
101,529
97.952
87,906
91.924
1,241,682
2,396.531
3,218,919
5,615450
103474
99.855
89414
93,592
It will be seen, on comparing, at the foot of the preceding table, the observed series
of values (column 3) with the first of the adjusted series of values (column 4), that
17 1> 73 ° f the number of persons reported as surviving in the last three years of the first
2
five-year group are transferred to the first two years of that group, making the entire
number under two years of age, in the adjusted series, 2,350,842 instead of 2,179,569 as in
the observed or unadjusted series.
On comparing the values in the observed series (column 3) of that table with those
in the second series of adjusted values (column 5), it will be seen that the number in the
first two years of life has been augmented by 216,962, 100,000 of which were added from
without for supposed omissions, and the remaining 116,962 transferred from the group of
three years of age next following, the number of persons in the adjusted series, under the
age of two years, thereby becoming 2,396,531 instead of the observed number, 2,179,569.
Each of these adjusted series conforms, as already stated, to the test of progressive
and gradual diminution with advancing years.
The mean annual number of births calculated in accordance with each of these
adjustments (1404,040 according to the first method of adjustment, and 1,408,721 accord
ing to the second method), is somewhat in excess of the mean annual number of survivors
(1,402,730), indicated by the numbers returned for the first six months of life.
N o t e . B y reference to the Volume on Vital Statistics, of the census 1870, pp. 524-531, will be found an appendix to the
letter of Mr. Elliott there published, showing in detail the process of arriving at the adjustments of the population at the
younger years of life. On comparing the tables as now printed with the earlier tables there presented, it will be seen that in
the later tables the numbers at Unknown A ges are distributed proportionately among the different periods of life; while in
the earlier tables they are not so distributed.
THE RELATIONS OF RACE AND NATIONALITY TO MORTALITY
IN THE UNITED STATES."
[PLATE XLTV, Fig. 3.]
B Y T H E C O M P IL E R O F T H E A T L A S .
• This paper is in substance identical with that read by the author before the American Public Health Association at its
meeting in New Y ork in 1873, and published in the Transactions of that year.
II
>3
II
13
28
8
F rench.
4
3
2
6
6
7
3
3
4
3
2
4
5
2
2
5
6
6
3
3
3
3
I
3
5
2
Bright's Disease of the K id n ey s...............................................................
A p o p lexy.........................................................................................................
Cancers........................ .................................................................................
Consum ption..................................................................................................
Rheum atism ...................................................................................................
Paralysis..........................................................................................................
Cerebro-Spinal, Enteric, and Typhus F e v e rs..........................................
Pleurisy and Hydrothorax...........................................................................
Bronchitis...................................................................................................... ..
Small P o x .......................................................................................................
P neum onia.....................................................................................................
Diarrhoea, Dysentery, and E n teritis..........................................................
E ry sip ela s.......................................................................................................
Intermittent and Remittent F ev ers...........................................................
Encephalitis and M eningitis.......................................................................
Scarlet Fever and Diphtheria.....................................................................
M e asles.................................................................... ....................................
Scrofula ...........................................................................................................
Hydrocephalus...............................................................................................
C r o u p ..............................................................................................................
Hooping C o u g h ............. ...............................................................................
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IO O
O
IO O
O
IO O
O
IO O
O
IO O
O
IO O
O
IO O
O
IO O
O
IO O
O
IO O
O
IO O
O
IO O
O
438 253
259 99
253 104
226 108
>93 76
173 7>
144 43
142 54
>37 73
>3> 27
>>7 48
113 44
109 39
96 32
5> >7
8
44
42
7
34 IO
32
9
3
>9
2
>3
93
85
78
59
55
44
48
42
3>
58
33
3>
34
32
>5
>3
IO
7
7
7
3
48
36
30
>9
20
30
13
>4
12
5
>4
>3
>5
8
6
8
5
4
4
3
2
OM
21
ii
-
i i
6
3
3
6
8
2
>3
3
2
3
3
7
3
3
2
3
French.
4
Scotch.
557
735
745
772
805
823
853
857
859
860
881
885
887
902
948
955
957
c)66
968
981
987
E n g l i s h and
Welsh.
35
6?
61
III
157
63
>35
260
90
228
>93
123
36
255
144
27
223
266
.50
>53
>91
Germans.
522
672
684
661
648
760
718
597
769
632
688
762
851
647
804,
928
734
700
918
828
796
Irish.
Special D iseases.
Total Foreign.
Total Native.
I.— B.
Native Colored.
TABLE
5
7
5
4
6
3
5
3
2
1
2
7
3
>5
9
>9
29
30
12
12
Scotch.
A ll Diseases ............................................................................................... IOOO 726 137 863 >34 55 38
General Diseases— A ................................................................................... Icoo 772 >39 911 87 25 29
General Diseases— B ................................................................................ IOOO 662 122 784 214 97 59
Diseases of the Circulatory System......................................................... IOOO 684 96 780 217 94 60
Diseases of the Urinary System and Organs of Generation............. IOOO 599 125 724 274 121 79
Diseases of the Respiratory System....................... ................................. IOOO 711 >79 890 IO9 45 3>
Diseases of the Digestive System
.......................... ...................... IOOO 782 119 9°t| 97 37 27
Diseases of the Organs of Locomotion.................................................. IOOO 796 106 902 95 46 22
Diseases of the Nervous System ............................................................. IOOO 795 108 903 95 36 28
Diseases of the Integumentary S y stem .................................................. IOOO 751 182 933 6 6
27 15
63 34
Conditions not necessarily associated with general or local diseases
IOOO 741 124 865 130
Accidents and Injuries............................................................................... IOOO 582 178 760 222 94 56
Other and Unknow n................................................................................... IOOO 674 227 <)Ol
89 41 22
E n g l i s h and !
Welsh.
Swedes, Norwe
gians,and Danes.
Germans.
Irish.
B
be
<
Total Foreign.
«
be
V
Total Native.
6
G r o u p s o f D is e a s e s .
Native Colored.
I.— A.
Native White.
TABLE
Native W'hite.
T
have been taken for our present consideration. The scale of the diagram will not allow'
the lines representing the Sw'edes, Norwegians, and Danes, the Scotch and the French to
be laid down. These proportions are also, for further convenience of comparison, expressed
in parts of 1000 in the following table, in which the nationalities omitted from the diagram
appear:—
Aggregate.
H E gross incompleteness of the Returns of Deaths, in a census of the United
States, is shown in Mr. Elliott’s paper, “ An approximate Life-table,” etc., which
accompanies Plates X X X V III and X X X IX (Part I I I ) ; and the Compiler has, in
a note to that paper (page i), sought to state the main reasons for the omissions which are
admitted to occur in enumeration.
What, it may be asked, can be the value of statistics confessedly so imperfect ? Can
any deductions be made with confidence from returns of mortality, which omit one-third
or more of the deaths which occurred within the period which the returns profess to
cover ? I shall attempt to answer this question only so far as relates to the immediate
subject of the present discussion, the Relations of Race and Nationality to Mortality in
the United States.
Can we assume that the omissions acknowledged occur so uniformly among the
several races and nationalities represented in a census of the United States, as to allow
conclusions to be founded with assurance upon the relations which are disclosed by the
body of deaths actually reported ?
I answer that the several elements of our population, with respect to race and
nationality, are not so placed that we can assume that error is quite as likely to occur in
the enumeration of one as of another, and consequently that, in covering so large a field,
errors may be relied upon to balance each other, leaving a result of substantial accuracy.
On the contrary, the tendency to omission in the enumeration of deaths varies with the
intelligence of the several communities, the density of settlement, the prevailing occupa
tions of the people, and the habits of life, so far as these affect the permanence of residence.
It is notorious that the several elements of our population are, the country over, variously
placed with reference to these conditions. Hence we may not assume an equal liability to
omission in all. Undoubtedly, some of the elements we are to consider are more con
cerned in the defects of the census law than others; and these differences I believe to be
sufficiently great to invalidate conclusions based on anything like a nice determination of
preponderance in the census statistics of mortality.
To enter into such a discussion of this subject as would serve to establish, even
provisionally,the order in which the several elements sustain loss from the causes indicated ;
much more, to seek to determine the exact degree of such loss within each such element,
would occupy more of space than remains at my disposal. I will, therefore, content
myself with expressing the conviction, arising out of a long and careful examination of
the subject, that in no case, the most extreme, do the proportions disclosed by the census
statistics of mortality by race and nationality depart, as between any one element and
another, to the extent of five per cent, from the real facts of mortality as they existed
during the census year; while in the great majority of cases, one, two, or three per cent,
would amply cover the margin of disturbance due to the causes indicated. If this belief
be correctly founded, the results arrived at in the following discussion may be accepted as
true, for I shall restrict myself at the present time to the exposition of those relations
which are determined by preponderances too large to come within any reasonable limits of
error.
The total number of deaths reported in the census of 1870, when reduced to thou
sandths, was distributed as follows, among the several elements of population which it is
proposed in the present paper to take into account: Native white, 726; native colored,
137; total native, 863 ; total foreign, 134, of which there were, Irish, 55 ; Germans, 38;
English and Welsh, 15; Swedes, Norwegians, and Danes, 4; Scotch, 4; French, 3.
The total population of the United States at the date of the enumeration, when
likewise reduced to thousandths, was distributed as follows: Native white, 730; native
colored, 126; total native, 856; total foreign, 144, of which there were, Irish, 48; Germans,
44; English and Welsh, 16; Swedes, Norwegians, and Danes, 6; Scotch, 4; French, 3.
Comparing, now, the number of deaths returned for each enumerated element of
population, with the number of living inhabitants representing the same, we have the
number of deaths in each to each 1000 living persons, as follows: Native white, 12.7;
native colored, 13.9; total native, 12.9; total foreign, 11.8; Irish, 14.6; Germans, 11;
English and Welsh, 114 ; Swedes, Norwegians, and Danes, 9.2 ; Scotch, 12.5 ; French, 14.
Figure 3, Plate X L I V , exhibits to the eye the proportions above expressed, with
others which are deemed essential or advantageous for the discussion of the relations of
race and nationality to mortality.
The first four vertical lines, counting from the left, relate to the number of living
inhabitants on the 1st of June, 1870, the first representing the aggregate population ; the
second, third, and fourth, the population, respectively, above ten, above twT
enty, and above
thirty years of age. The fifth line represents the aggregate body of deaths reported as
occurring during the census year as above. The group of twelve lines next succeeding
represent the body of deaths occurring within each important group of diseases. The
group of twenty-one lines which complete the diagram represent the body of deaths occurring
within each of the enumerated special diseases or subordinate groups of diseases. The
thirty-eight vertical lines described are crossed by lines which show the division of each
of the thirty-eight subjects represented, among the larger elements of the population which•
12
3
7
9
IO 10
5 22
6
7
5
7
3
3
6
5
3- 4
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
2
4
2
1
I
II
2
3
*
I
I
1
1
I
2
I
* Less than one in each 1000.
W e have previously expressed the belief that the statistics of mortality as reported
in the census approximately represent the facts of mortality throughout the United States,
notwithstanding the considerable omission which is acknowledged to take place in the
aggregate number of deaths. It is a different question, however, whether the facts of
mortality as they exist in the country can, without important corrections, be held to
represent, even approximately, the relations of the several elements of the population, as
respects their vitality or their liability to specific forms of disease. Indeed, examination
will disclose that tw'o very important corrections require to be made before the several
elements of the population can fairly be put in comparison with each other as to their
respective vitality, or their liability to specific forms of disease. It is to the discussion of
these corrections that this paper will be mainly devoted. The necessity of the first
correction is discovered by observing the proportions in which the deaths from childrens
diseases, represented by the seven vertical lines on the extreme right of the diagram, are
divided between the native and the foreign population. The abruptness with which the
lines representing the foreign elements here rise and almost run out at the top of the
figure, w’ould convince the most casual observer, either that the returns of the census are
exceedingly defective in respect to deaths from these diseases, or else that some important
correction requires to be made before the several foreign elements can fairly be brought, in
these respects, into comparison w ith the native white and native colored elements of the
population. Reference to the series of figures on Plate X X X IX , show's that a most
important correction does require to be made on account of
T
he
E x c e s s i v e D is p r o p o r t io n
w it h in
between the
our
F
o r e ig n
N
umber of
P
A
o p u l a t io n
dults and of
C
h ildren
.
Giving our attention first to that disproportion as it exists with reference to children
under ten years of age, w'e have the following facts: Number of children under ten years
of age in each 1,000 of the total population, 268; number of children under ten in each
2
THE
R E L A T IO N S
OF
RACE
AND
N A T IO N A L IT Y
1.000 of the native population, 306 ; number of children under ten in each 1,000 of the
foreign population, 47.
If, now, the liability to death were observed to be the same in each period of life, no
correction on account of this relative deficiency of children of foreign birth would need to
be introduced in a comparison of the grand elements of native and foreign, in respect to
their relative vitality; but if there is observed to be an excessive liability to death at early
ages, we must either eliminate all deaths at such ages before making comparison of these
elements, or we must assume to add to the foreign population a corresponding number of
children and to the foreign deaths a corresponding mortality among such children. As
matter of fact we find that 414 per cent, of the whole body of deaths occur under five
years of age, and 46.7 per cent, under ten years of age, while of the total living inhabitants
only 14.3 per cent were found to be under five years of age, and only 26.8 per cent, under
10 years of age. VoL on “ \ ital Statistics,’ Ninth Census, 1870. C£ PI. X L III.
Let us seek to exclude the deaths occurring under ten years of age. W e do not
know the distribution of the deaths within this period of life betwe?n the native and
foreign elements; but the foreign population under ten is relatively so small that it makes
very little difference in the adult mortality what per cent, be taken (within reasonable
limits) for the unquestionably greater liability to fatal diseases of the children of foreign
birth. If we assume the proportion of deaths to living persons to be greater by 30 per
cent in the foreign than in the native population under ten, and thereupon reject from
consideration a ll deaths occurring in this period of life, we shall have the following
ratios:
Deaths to each 1,000 living inhabitants over ;o years of age:
N
a t iv e
F
o r e ig n
TO
IN
T H E U N IT E D
STATES.
these diseases occur, their share in the mortality from causes of this class is found to be
much greater than their share of the aggregate mortality, being not less than 286 in each
1,000.
O f the deaths from diseases of the digestive system, lastly, not less than 686 occur
under ten years, and the deaths within the foreign population from diseases of this group
sink to 98 in each 1,00a
For the purposes of this comparison, I have also taken nine special diseases or sub
ordinate groups of diseases, in which the proportion of deaths under ten exceeds that of
the general body of deaths. The following table exhibits the proportions maintained in
these cases, the first sum against each title of disease representing the number in each
i.ooo deaths from such cause or causes which occur under ten years of age, the second
sum representing the number in each 1,000 which occur within the foreign populatioa
TABLE
II.
Number under Ten
Years of A ge. in each
1,000 Deaths.
Number within the
Foreign population,
in each 1,000 Deaths
All D iseases............................................................................
467
Small P o x ................................................................................................
B ron ch itis....................... .......................................................................
Diarrhoea, Dysentery, and Enteritis....................................................
134
564
577
761
804
854
906
•32
N am es
............................ 8.84
..................................... 11.2
But this correction on account of the number of children of foreign birth requires to
be made not alone in the aggregate of deaths from all causes as above, but is even more
imperatively demanded in treating of the body of deaths occurring within most special
diseases, and groups of diseases. Thus it is evident that where the distribution by age
and sex of the deaths occurring from any specified disease or group of diseases conforms
substantially to the distribution of the total body of deaths by age and sex, there the
correction already indicated wili serve approximately for such disease or group. But
where diseases or groups of diseases vary widely, as in fact most do, from the type afforded
by the aggregate of deaths from all causes, in respect to the proportion of deaths occurring
under ten years of age, the effect of the deficiency noted in the number of children of
foreign birth will be greater or less, according as such diseases or groups of diseases are
found to be more fatal or less fatal in the early periods of life than are the whole body of
diseases taken together. Thus,referring to the series of figures numbered 2 on FI. X L III,
while of all diseases, 467 deaths in each 1,000 are under ten years of age, of the deaths
from the Febrile Group of General Diseases (General Diseases “ A ”), not less than 603 in
each 1,000 occur under ten years of age. It is evident, therefore, that the share of the
foreign element in the deaths from these diseases should be less than its share in the whole
body of deaths from all diseases; and accordingly we find (PI. X L I V , fig. 3) that, while of
all diseases 134 deaths in each 1,000 occur among the foreign population, only 87 in each
1.000 deaths from this group of diseases occur among the foreign population.
On the other hand, of deaths from the Constitutional Group of General Diseases
(General Diseases “ B "), only 108 in each 1,000 occur under the age of ten years. Now,
as the foreign population consists much more largely than the native of persons within
that period of life, namely, above ten years, in which diseases of this group are found to
be more fatal, we should expect to find the share of the foreign element in deaths from
diseases of this group much greater than their share of the total body of deaths, and of
course much greater still than their share of deaths from General Diseases “ A.” Accord
ingly we find that of 1,000 deaths from diseases of the Constitutional Group, 214 occur
among the foreign population. That, over and above the proper effect of the deficiency
in the foreign children, peculiarities of stock, breeding, and condition may tend to produce
a larger proportion of deaths from the diseases of the Constitutional Group than of the
Febrile Group, among the foreign population, I do not question; but it is evident that the
astonishing disproportion which appears at first sight between the deaths within the foreign
population from these two groups of causes (that is to say, 87 in each 1,000 from the
Febrile Group to 214 in each 1,000 from the Constitutional Group), does not wholly
represent real differences in the liability to peculiar forms of disease, but mainly this
abnormal distribution of the foreign population by periods of life.
Proceeding to examine in the same manner the most important remaining groups of
diseases in this respect, we find that of each 1,000 deaths from all diseases of the Nervous
Group, 591 occur under the age of ten years. Unless, therefore, the foreign population
have some very marked and urgent predisposition to diseases of this class, we should expect
to find their share of this body of deaths less than their share of the aggregate mortality
of the country; and accordingly we find that only 95 in each 1,000 of the deaths from this
group occur in the foreign population.
Strongly contrasted in this respect with the diseases of the nervous system, are the
diseases of the circulatory system, from which only 129 deaths in each 1,000 occur under
ten years of age. Unless there is some marked indisposition of the foreign population to
diseases of this class, we should expect to find their share of this body of deaths far greater
than their share of the deaths from all causes, and slightly greater than their share of the
deaths from General Diseases “ B,” in which, as we have seen, 108 deaths only in each
1.000 are under the age of ten years. The results correspond to the conjecture. O f 1,000
deaths from diseases of the circulatory system, 218 occur within the foreign population.
Again, of the deaths from the diseases of the respiratory system, 503 in each 1,000
are under the age of ten years, and the proportion of deaths from this class of causes
within the foreign population sinks to 109 in each 1,000.
On the other hand, of the deaths from diseases of the urinary system and the organs
of generation, including affections connected with pregnancy, only 40 in each 1,000 occur
under the age of ten years, and as the foreign population consists much more largely than
the native of persons within the period of life within which the great bulk of deaths from
M O R T A L IT Y
of
D is e a s e s -
Diphtheria
.....................................................................................
Scarlet F e v e r .............................................. ............................................
H ydrocephalus........................................................................................
Hooping-Cough .......................... .....................................................
Croup.........................................................................................................
»3 7
i >3
42
1
41
45
32
'3
925
985
988
•9
Now, if the reason of the comparatively small number of deaths occurring within the
foreign population from the above mentioned diseases, is found alone in the deficiency of
foreign children, it is evident that, inasmuch as the proportion of deaths under ten is here
greater than the proportion of deaths under ten from all diseases, the share of the foreign
population in the deaths from each and all such specified causes should be less, and less in
a degree corresponding generally to that excess of the total number of deaths under ten.
If, on the contrary, we find that, as the proportion of deaths under ten increases in respect
to any disease, the share of the foreign population in the whole body of deaths from that
cause remains nearly the same or becomes greater than the share of the foreign population
in the whole body of deaths from all causes, we have a very strong assurance that the
foreign population has a decided liability to this form of disease.
Applying this principle, it will be observed that in eight of these nine cases, the pro
portion of deaths from such causes among the foreign population is less than the proportion
of deaths from all causes within the foreign population. This is as was to be expected,
except upon the assumption that the foreign population had a peculiar predisposition to
such forms of disease. In one case, however, that of bronchitis, while the proportion of
deaths under ten years of age is greater by 110 in each 1,000 than the proportion of the
whole body of deaths, the share of the foreign population in this body of deaths is greater
by three in the 1,000 than its share in the deaths from all causes, proving conclusively the
exceptional tendency of the foreign population to this form of disease in a fatal degree.
In two other cases, namely, those of small-pox and of the group, diarrhoea, dysentery, and
enteritis, while the share of the foreign population in deaths from these causes is less than
its share of deaths from all causes, it is not less in any such degree as to correspond to the
increased proportion of mortality under ten years of age; and I think it, therefore, per
fectly safe to conclude from this exhibit, without further inquiry, that the foreign population
have also a very distinct predisposition to these forms of disease in a fatal degree.
Looking at the six remaining cases in the above table, we can, without deeper inves
tigation, determine certain relations, as, for example, that scarlet fever is relatively more
fatal to the foreign population than measles or diphtheria; but we cannot with assurance
determine as to the comparative mortality of the native and of the foreign populations
from these forms of disease without additional information, which is given in the following
table, the analysis in respect to these diseases being carried down below the period of five
years, the several years under five being taken separately, and the figures relating to each
year under each title of disease being compared with the proportion of the total population
in each such period of life which is of foreign birth, and the figures being also given
separately for each five years upward to twenty.
TABLE
P
e r io d
of
L
if e .
U n d e r 1 .......................
I ....................................
2 ..........................
3 ..........................
4 .............................................
5 to 1 0 ........................
10 to 15 ................
15 to 2 0 ................
Proportion of
Foreign to
Total
Population.
.005
•OIO
015
020
.026
.036
•043
.082
III.
D
Measles.
Diphtheria.
202
241
>36
79
42
104
40
160
.58
126
39
i »7
87
206
53
22
eaths
in
Scarlet
Fever.
each
io o o f r o m
Hydro
cephalus.
103
447
146
l6 l
144
259
99
43
26
•13
HoopingCough.
Croup.
492
23'
■ 18
45 5
■97
>3 °
59
33
52
88
239
56
5*
l8
9
l6
IO
53
65
O
2
Now, since 103 deaths in each 1,000 from scarlet fever, to take an instance from the
above table, occur under the age of one year, and as but .005 of the population \\ ithin that
N A T IO N A L IT Y
M O R T A L IT Y
D is e a s e s .
N u m b e r w it h in th e
F o r e ig n P o p u la t io n
in e a c h 1,000 D e a th s .
P o p u la tio n ..........................................
Consum ption.......................................
Diarrhoea, Dysentery, and Enteritis.
Intermittent and Remittent Fevers. .
Pneum onia...........................................
727
662
763
648
688
127
112
123
256
194
All D isea ses.............................................................................
541
58
he
N orth ern
St a t e s .
T
144
226
114
96
118 |
789
697
847
831
799
14
32
•3
18
27
197
271
140
>5t
>74
776
659
804
782
746
M id d l e
Sta te s.
he
>33
200
102
94
168
9>
> >
4
94
>24
86
T
he
So u t h e r n
St a t e s .
563
537
530
505
475
4>5
400
418
44i
501
22
63
52
54
24
134
C a n c e r s .......................................................................................................
T
Foreign.
am es o f
U n it e d
St a t e s .
he
Foreign.
T
V.
j Native Colored.
N u m b e r u n d e r 20
Y e a r s o f A g e in e a c h
1,000 D e a ih s .
3
Native Colored.
TABLE
IV.
D is e a s e s .
STATES.
Native White.
am es of
U N IT E D
Native White.
N
THE
relation* of these two elements of the population, before comparison is made between the
(aggregate) mortality of the colored and the foreign elements. But it is clear that the
apparent liability of these two elements to certain forms of disease may be very greatly
affected by this complemental location. If there are diseases which especially prevail at
the South, it is to be expected that the colored population, being so largely found within
that section, will suffer more from such diseases than the native white population which is
distributed with greater uniformity over the whole country, and still more, in a high degree,
than the foreign population which is scarcely represented in the lowest group of States
descrilied. On the other hand, the foreign population may, by the mere force of its loca
tion, and not bv any constitutional liability, sustain a greater loss from diseases specially
characteristic of the northern group of States.
Let us compare the mortality from intermittent and remittent fevers with that from
consumption. The population of the northern group of States being 61 per cent, of the
total population of the country, we find 69.5 per cent, of the deaths from consumption
and 30.1 per cent, of the deaths from intermittent and remittent fevers occurring in this
group. The population of the middle group of States being 11.8 per cent, of the total
population of the country, we find 11.9 per cent of the deaths from consumption, and 14.1
per cent, of the deaths from intermittent and remittent fevers occurring within this group.
The population of the southern group of States being 24.6 per cent, of the total popula
tion of the country, we find 16.2 per cent, of the deaths from consumption and 53.7 per
cent, of the deaths from intermittent and remittent fevers occurring within this group.
It is clear, therefore, that the diseases thus taken for comparison are in a high sense
complemental as to their range. There is a middle belt, in which the two are in a degree
found together, a northern group in which the first is found in a very high, and the second
in a very low degree, and a southern group in which these relations are reversed.
It is evident, therefore, that in respect to these diseases, the colored population of the
South ought to be compared with the foreign population of the South, and not with the
foreign population of the whole country; and, on the other hand, the foreign population
of the North ought to be compared with the colored population of the North, and not
with the colored population of the whole country.
I have treated according to this plan four important diseases and subordinate groups
of diseases, which are known to have exceptional relations to temperature,f with the
following results:—
N
TABLE
IN
Foreign.
period of life are of foreign birth, it will follow, if we assume no more than an equal
liability to this disease on the part of this element of the population, that of these 103
deaths, but .515 (fractions being preserved throughout this computation) occur among the
foreign children. A s 146 deaths additional in each 1,000 occur between the ages of one
and two, and as but .01 of the total population within this period are of foreign birth, it
would follow, that of these 146 deaths, but 146 occur among the foreign children. In the
same way we should find that, of the 161 deaths from this cause between the ages of two
and three, but 2415; of the 144 deaths between three and four, but 2.88; of the 113
deaths between four and five, but 2.938; of the 239 deaths between five and ten, but 8.604;
of the 56 deaths between ten and fifteen, but 2408; and of the 16 deaths between fifteen
and twenty, but 1.312 occur among the population of foreign birth, making the propor
tionate share of the foreign population in the 978 deaths enumerated out of each 1,000
from this disease, but 22.532. If we assume the mortality among this element of the
population from this cause to be 30 per cent, greater than that of the native population,
the contribution of foreign children to the 978 deaths which occur under twenty years
out of each 1,000 deaths at all ages from scarlet fever, would still be but 29.6, leaving
even at this extreme assumption, out of each 1,000 deaths from this cause among all
classes not less than 154 deaths among the foreign population above twenty years of age.
But as only 22 deaths in each 1,000 from this cause occur above twenty years of age,
among all classes of the population, and as the foreign element constitutes but 24.6 per
cent, of the total population above twenty, it would follow that their proportional share of
this latter body of deaths would be but 5.412. Hence we must conclude either that the
mortality among the foreign population from this cause under twenty years must be
greater than that of the native population by much more than the 30 per cent, assumed,
or else that the mortality from this cause among the adult foreign population is excessive
in a most extraordinary degree.
Subjecting to the same analysis the figures relating, severally, to the remaining seven
diseases on our list, we have results which appear to establish a mortality among the
foreign population from croup and hydrocephalus, proportionally greater than that of the
native population, while measles, diphtheria, and hooping-cough would seem to be less
fatal to the foreign than to the native population.
On the other hand, there are eight special diseases which may be taken for the
purposes of this comparison, in which the proportion of deaths under twenty is less than
that of the general body of deaths, and the share of the foreign population is accordingly
greater, often in a very important degree, than its share of the aggregate of deaths from all
causes.
The following table exhibits the proportion maintained in these cases, the first sum
against each title of disease representing the number in each 1,000 deaths from such
cause which occur under twenty years of age, the second sum representing the number in
each 1,000 occurring within the foreign population.
TO
Native Colored.
AND
Native White.
RACE
Foreign.
OF
Native Colored.
R E L A T IO N S
Native White.
1 _______
_
THE
*53
59
•74
78
A poplexy......................................................................................................
260
Disease o f the K idneys...........................................................
140
440
C on su m p tion .............................................................................................
•74
226
H y d roth ora x ..............................................................................................
204
I 12
R h e u m a tis m
236
193
247
2 16
B r i g h t ’s
..
.
...............................................................................................................
P leu risy .......................................................................................................
Applying to the above figures a method of analysis similar to that applied to the
figures in Table II I, we seem to establish beyond controversy the excessive fatality among
the foreign population of Bright’s disease of the kidneys, the somewhat greater liability
of this element of the population to deaths from cancers, pleurisy, and apoplexy, and, on
the other hand, their comparative immunity from death from paralysis, rheumatism, and
hvdrothorax. In respect to consumption the foreign population of the country would
seem to stand in about the same relation as the native population within corresponding
periods of life.
A second important correction, however, requires to be introduced before we can
make satisfactory comparison between the reported mortality of the Colored and the
Foreign elements of our population. This correction is on account of
T
he
C
o m plem en tal
L
o c a t io n
of
th ese
T
w o
E
lem en ts
.
Speaking broadly, where the blacks are found in the United States, the foreigners are
not. There are only five (5) States in which the two elements, each in any considerable
degree, are found together. These are Delaware, Kentucky, Maryland, Missouri, and West
Virginia (the District of Columbia falls in this group), with an aggregate population of
4,521,929, of whom 411,558 are foreign, and 599,850 are colored. South and southwest
of these lie eleven (11 ) States, with an aggregate population of 9487,386, of whom
210,684 are foreign, and 3,939,032 are colored. Again, to the north and northwest of the
first mentioned States are eighteen (18) States with an aggregate population of 23,544,365,
of whom 4,626,809 are foreign and 334,653 are colored. The Pacific States and the terri
tories are excluded for the purposes of this comparison. I cannot satisfy myself from the
data given, whether any correction needs to be introduced on account of this complemental
The greater liability of the colored population to malarial than to intestinal diseases
in the northern and in the southern States, with the reversal of this proportion in the
middle group, the high rate of mortality among the colored population from consumption
in the northern States (32 : 14), being rapidly reduced as we pass through the middle belt
(200 : 133) until it falls below average (400 : 415) in the congenial climate of the South ;
the wider liability of the same race to the acuter form of lung disease, not so excessive in
the North, but more fully sustained through the transition southward (27: 14, 168: 133,
501 : 415) ; the increasing fatality of each specified form of disease as the foreign population
moves southward, most marked, however, as is natural, in the case of the two groups of
diseases especially characteristic of the South ; and finally the uniformity with which the
native white population contributes to the mortality from each specified cause in each
section of the country by turns, as contrasted with the fluctuations among the colored and
the foreign elements of the population,— these are the most noticeable features of this table.
As the diseases mentioned are the cause of 32.1 per cent, of all the deaths occurring in
the country, the importance of this discussion of their complemental relation cannot he
exaggerated.
In the use of the above table, it should be noted that while before comparing the
foreign population within any geographical section, with either the native white or the
colored population of that section, the correction heretofore noted as required on account
of the deficiency o f foreign children must be made, the foreign population in one section
may, without any such antecedent correction, be compared with the foreign population of
any other section,£ as the deficiency of foreign children may, for the purposes of so large
a comparison, be assumed to be uniform as between sections.
Such being the readiness and the (comparative) certainty of comparisons between
the several constituents of the foreign population, we present in the following table the
contributions, in parts of 1,000, made by each specified foreign nationality to the total
number of deaths from each enumerated cause, within the total foreign population.
* The correction on account of the deficiency in foreign children must, however, still be carried through in comparisons
between these two elements, as the colored population of the United States is of normal growth, and contains its due propor
tion of persons of the early periods of life.
f The statistical proof that these diseases sustain important relations to temperature, is exhibited graphically in the appro
priate figures in Series No. 2, PI. X L IV .
X The native white and the colored population may be compared with each other in any section, without any important
correction, both elements being of normal growth.
R E L A T IO N S
V I.— A.
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
410
2S2
454
431
442
408
379
477
378
417
282
329
276
279
289
287
280
231
202
236
108
IOI
90
134
108
1 12
121
108
142
160
34
78
2A
18
22
*9
51
28
21
17
27
22
26
26
25
27
28
38
36
27
25
23
23
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
478
424
461
260
251
243
IOI
125
88
12
30
38
32
23
23
27
22
20
English
Swedes,
Total
Irish. Germans.
and
Norwegians,
Foreign.
Welsh. and Danes.
D iseases.
A ll D ise ase s................................................................................
General Diseases— A ...................................................................
General Diseases— B ................................................................
Diseases of the Circulatory System.........................................
Diseases of the Urinary System and Organs of Generation
Diseases of the Respiratoty System.
................................
Diseases of the Digestiye System ..........................................
Diseases of the Organs of Locomotion..................................
Diseases of the Nervous System ..............................................
Diseases of the Integumentary S ystem ..................................
Conditions not necessarily associated with general or local
diseases............................ ........................ .............................
Accidents and Injuries...............................................................
Other and Unknow n...................................................................
TABLE
S p e c ia l
N A T IO N A L IT Y
French.
of
AND
D is e a s e s .
Bright’s Disease of the K id n ey s.............................................
A po p lexy.......................................................................................
Cancers........................................................................... ............
Consum ption................................................................................
Rheum atism ..................................................................................
Paralysis........................................................................................
Cerebro-Spinal, Enteric, and Typhus F e v e rs........................
Pleurisy and Hydrothorax.........................................................
Bronchitis......................................................................................
Small P o x .....................................................................................
P neum onia...................................................................................
Diarrhoea, Dysentery, and E n teritis........................................
E ry sip ela s............................ ........................................................
Intermittent and Remittent F ev ers..........................................
Encephalitis and Meningitis.....................................................
Scarlet Fever and Diphtheria...................................................
M easles................................................................... ..................
S cro fu la ........................................................................................
Hydrocephalus.............................................................................
C r o u p ............................................................................................
Hooping C o u g h ..........................................................................
21
29
27
33
27
22
V I.— B.
English
Swedes,
Total
and
No. wegians,
Foreign. Irish. Germans.
Welsh. and Danes.
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
IOOO
576
381
412
478
392
409
302
380
534
203
413
384
358
328
JI7
84
103
28
28
>3
9
II
4>
24
25
253
*73
3*»2
90
299
228
99
87
>9
441
284
271
36
Il6
118
309
> 33
335
83
121
189
123
30
88
287
277
163
153
254
>75
139
39
II
301
283
240
218
231
366
332
192
no
213
328
307
262
284
41
20
36
16
25
3
29
25
27
66
29
30
44
18
34
38
75
*
34
28
39
113
255
78
> 39
>59
l6l
>5
f>4
178
23
25
68
>7
French.
G roups
RACE
Scotch.
TABLE
OF
Scotch.
THE
4
8
34
39
20
36
26
24
43
31
24
29
28
23
45
21
7
8
26
3>
IO
*'
TO
M O R T A L IT Y
IN
THE
U N ITE D
STATES.
The following appear to be the most noteworthy features of this table:—
Among the Irish, a comparative exemption from all the General diseases of the
Febrile Group, and from diseases of the digestive and nervous systems; and, on the other
hand, a marked liability to General diseases of the Constitutional Group, including con
sumption, but with exception of rheumatism, scrofula, and cancers, and to diseases of the
organs of locomotion and of the urinary system, with extraordinary mortality from
Bright’s disease of the kidneys.
Am ong the Germans, a reduced mortality from General diseases of the Constitutional
Group, and a decided liability to those, especially small-pox, of the Febrile Group (being
an exact reversal of the relations of the Irish thereto); a comparative immunity from
diseases of the organs of locomotion and of the integumentary system, and otherwise a
general evenness in the distribution of the body of deaths among the several groups of
diseases, and through the list of special diseases.
Among the E nglish and Welsh, a liability to the diseases of the nervous, circulatory,
digestive, and integumentary systems contrasted with comparative immunity from General
diseases, both of the Febrile and the Constitutional Groups; of the special diseases,scarlet
fever, diphtheria, hooping-cough, hydrocephalus, croup, erysipelas, apoplexy, and paralysis
being relatively most fatal, and consumption, intermittent and remittent, cerebro-spinal,
enteric, and typhus fevers, bronchitis, and small-pox, least fatal.
Among the Swedes, Norwegians, and Danes, a marked liability to diseases of the
digestive system, especially, dysentery, diarrhoea, and enteritis, and an extraordinary mortality
from General diseases of the Febrile Group, notably measles, scarlet fever, diphtheria, and
typhus, enteric, and cerebro-spinal fevers, with comparative immunity from General diseases
of the Constitutional Group, and from diseases of the circulatory, nervous, urinary, and
integumentary systems, and of the organs of locomotion, the deaths from cancers, apoplexy,
paralysis, bronchitis, hydrocephalus, and Bright’s disease of the kidneys, being remarkably few.
Among the Scotch, an evenness in the distribution of the body of deaths among the
several groups with marked exception only of the diseases of the nervous system and of
the organs of locomotion, the most noticeable exemptions among the special diseases
being small-pox, scrofula, and the fevers; the most noticeable instances of liability, cancers,
paralysis, erysipelas, measles, and hooping-cough.
Among the French, a general evenness in the distribution of the body of deaths
among the several groups of diseases, with somewhat more of irregularity as to the dis
tribution among the special diseases than among the Scotch.
PI. XXXVII
J
a
Y j H 111
S 3
!^
■■
Ir.ta f/ m n , /
FI)OMINATIN<
SHOW INC T1IK LOCAL EXCESS OF MALES OH OF FEMALES
IN THE DISTKIIM 'TIOX OF POPULATION OVER THE TERRITORY
OF THE UNITED STATES EAST OF THE
IOO” M ERIDIAN .
PI. XXXVIII
CHARTS
SHOWING THE DISTRIBUTION BYAGE .A DSEX
N
OFTHE
POPULATION OF THE I'XITED STATES
at the date (^enumeration June 1“
The to ta l num ber o flin r u j Inhabitants m eaih case, as
rrftortedtnthe Census, is reduced to thousandths, an d the
IN THE. AGGREGATE AND WITH DISTINCTION OF RACE COLOR AND NATIVITY FOR TOE UNITED STATES
A DINTH A£G
X
E
REG
STE.VX iS.N
D ATIVEO POBEM FO E C SKTE.X TERPvITO .
R
K R AH
XD
lO
number o f thousandths i f each sear in each decade o f Ifte
The lores! horizontal line represents the number in the
Compiled Inmi theRHumsoi'PimulatianattheXmth Census 1870
BY
FRANCIS AXV.YUvER.
is represented be the distance m easured < the horizontal
w
lin es sereralbr.from the perpendusUsur base line
The M ates are on the left o f Uteperpendicular base lia r
acut the fem ales oil the right .
tin t decade o f life i e, under ten years ot'age and the
highest the number over eu/hty rears.
Tovduch are added lorpurpuses ol comparison certain corresponding figures torlH.VO and I860
prepared tftnlhepoblishfd Statistics of the Seventii anil Eighth Censuses.
The sesc which p rep onderates is shadod.
I .- U N IT E D S T A T E S , I X T H E A G G R E G A T E A N D WITH C E R T A IN DISTINCTIONS FOR 1870 1860 AND 1830.
80
70.80
60.70
50.60
40.50
30.40
20.30
OIS L. I flM
THE UNITED STATES.
10 0
.2
0.10
a s 2 __________________
Aggregate
N a t iv e
80
70.80
60.70
50.60
40.50
30.40
20.30
1870
10.20
0-10
C h in e s e
C ivilised Indian
F o r e i g n W h ite
80
70.80
60_70
50.60
40.50
30,40
20.30
18C>0 *
10.20
0 -1 0
A g g r e g a te
W h ite
C ivilised Indian
80
70.80
60.70
50.60
40.50
30.40
20.30
10 0
.2
0.10
1850 *
W
hite
A g g re g a te
The/xyattain n was not distinguished as natu r or foreign
'hrtabulation byAge a n d Scant the Seventh and Eu/hth Censuses
2. - AGGREGATE POPULATION 1870. BY STA TES AND T E R R IT O R IE S .
80
©s g s s g g
S 8 8 8 S 8 3
7 0 -8 0
0 0 .7 0
8 0 .0 0
4 0 .5 0
3 0 .4 0
2 0 -3 0
—u.
UNITED STA TES
1 0 .2 0
ALABAMA
♦
8 3 8 8 8 8 3 8
ossssgssg
CALIFORNIA
001
001
CONNECTICUT
IOWA
KANSAS
SSSSSSSSg*
IN D IAN A
oisggsssa?
S 3 8 t 8 8 S g »
001
j.0 0 3
00f k
KENTUCKY
LOUISIANA
MAINE
MARYLAND
a u
NEBRASKA
NEVADA
NEW H A M P S H I R E
*o ♦
7 0 .8 0
019 L ~ - \ o n
£.—
.a i t
8 0 .7 0
5 0 .8 0
4 0 .5 0
3 0 .4 0 |
2 0 .3 0
1 0 .2 0
iA S
NEW YORK
NORTH C A R O L I N A
----------------------- .U 2
0.10
OH IO
8 0
70.80
8 0 .7 0
j
5 0 .8 0
4 0 .5 0
3 0 .4 0
2 0 .3 0 !
10.20
TENNESSEE
O. »
TEXAS
S 8 g g S 3 3 S *
opgsssssg
GEORGIA
aj
N EW J E R S E Y
oBijiSSSSS ■
F LO RID A
—
M ISSO U R I
opggsssa?
DELAWARE
000 .000
003j \ooi
rr
010k \tH
A#//
ILLIN O IS
©,s s s e s s a g
s
0.1 0
ARKANSAS
COLORADO
DAKOTA
VERMONT
V IR G I NIA
1
PL XXXIX
3 - N A T I V E P O P U L A T IO N 1870 .
BY S T A T E S AN D T E R R IT O R IE S .
80 ♦
7080
GOTO
oocl
30 60
—\ e t s
4 0.3 0
JO 40
it l J O .
ti
s
10 3 0
.... . a iC T B S re i
/
t »
SL
a io
is *
ARKANSAS
ALABAMA
UNITED S T A T E S *
17*
IT S
ir r
CALIFORNIA
80*
GEORGIA
F L O R I DA
DELAWARE *
CONNECTICUT
80 *
.o o o
Lr
7 0 -8 0
-1—
8 0 -7 0
7080
- OOS
60 70
40 30
40 3 0
JQ 40 I
3 0 40
2O -J0
2QJO j
-----------
1-0
02
1 0 .3 0
O h)
0.10
IN D IAN A
80 ♦
ot
m
ot
m
O O i-O O J
oo
-'-’Jo
ot
o
6 0 .7 0
i
30 60
MARYLAND
M AINE
LOUISIANA
KENTUCKY
70 80
V
aUS
40 30
3 0 -4 0
I 3 0 -3 0
1 0 -3 0
^
0 10
80 ♦
.OOd
oot
ML J ,—_ - o s * L — _1 - -
70 80
30 6 0
J
70 80 [
6070 '
7
30 6 0 j
o
t*
\J
O
----- \ to
a
.a
t*
4030
20-30
1020
i
0.10
it*
NE W H A M P S H I R E
80 •
\o o i
|
7 0-80
O Ofi
o ts>_
60 7 0
|
30 6 0 |
4030 |
____ - - ->>
*
3 0 .4 0
|
30-40
ooo
oot
o ts
8*
0
NEVADA
NEBRASKA
o o t .o o t
GOTO
JJ? 1 1
—
M INNESOTA
M ICHIG AN
MASSACHUSETTS
4 0 30
|
3060
30 6 0
3040 j
A
\
20 30
r .
10 20
■
O 10
H
MO
T
JO S
oot
1—
z
ISO
NORTH CAR O LINA
NEW YORK
80 ♦
MO
PENNSYLVANIA
OREGON
O H IO
it*
__________________
R H O D E ISLAND
2030
77
*
O 10 *
SOUTH
CAROLINA
HO *
oot
m i
6 0 70
-A y r
30-60
A .t t
__
4 0 30
6 0 70
lM #
u
30 6 0
7 0 -8 0
\*ot
mm lo o t
7 0 .8 0
|
10 20
M eZ .
40 30
30 40
3 0 40
2 0 .3 0
2030
10 TO
_______
0 10
«
3 ^ .» i
0 lO
IS 7
T E X A S
80 •
80 *
70 8 0
70 80
60 70
0 0 70 '
30 6 0 |
30 6 0
4 0 .3 0
40 30
o l) 40
3 0 40
30 30
2030 '
10 2 0
10 2 0
O 10
0 10
MONTANA
ID AH O
In the Ignited S ta tes (he fem ales are m t\rrr.*r o f (he m a les am ong (he
native p o p u la tio n , and- tn I)elanm re (he m a le s in eatress ot the fem ales,
but so s lig h tly a s n et (v a llow (he preponderance (o be eaohibited to (he eye
upon (hesettle at'the p resen t c h a r t.
80 *
4 . - F O R E I G N
«* < --O O J
/ »_
70 8 0
P O P U L A T I O N
UTAH
MEXICO
1 8 7 0 .
B Y
S T A T E
S A N D
T E R R I T O R I E S
H
O
oot
o » o L \o o o
6 0 70
NEW
WASH IN G TO N
W YOM I N G
pc
loot
\oio
/^
■ • A o to
ot JL
- A o to
3 0 .6 0
70 8 0
GO 70
30 GO |
...
40 50 I
4 0.3 0
30.40
■
30 40
—
•20.30
/
---r —
- r *
0 10
JO O *
r
## . J-OO
/V
ALABAMA
UNITED S T A T E S
2030
10.20
|10 3 0
#121
CONNECTICUT
CALIFORNIA
ARKANSAS
FLORIDA
DELAWARE
« »vJooo
<
GEORG IA
O 10 I
flo ♦
80 *
7 0 80
7080
6070
8 0 70
3 0 00
|
50 6 0
40 hO
40 30
3 0 .4 0
30 40
2
0
2 0 JO
.» |
lO 2 0
10 2 0
0 .1 0 j
0.10
8•
0
7080
0070
7° 80 ! I
nook
V "
GO 7 0 |J
outL. -14V
o ssJm J
30 GO |
SO 00
40 50 i
40 30
m m o _ ...........
.10.40
y ~ - ~
3 0 .4 0 !
1
2 0 -3 0 I |
10-20 i
oio
Jots
M I C H 1G A N
8070 80
6 0 .7 0
50.00
M INNESOTA
O t O*
O O
O tO
otoL lo ts
MISSISSIPPI
_
os?A.. Q
stspto
ots
MISSOUR1
NEW H A M P S H I R E
NEVADA
NEBRASKA
NEW
JERSEY
80 ♦
m o
O O J jL . A o o *
_\#»#
2 Z IS
O-10 •
I
_ y 4w
o o o OOO
7 0 .8 0 j
0 7 ;|
D0
ooo
\O O T
*0
.......
oIlu.iM > »
uo<•«
40.30
30- 40 |
30 40
—
1 0 .2 0
0
-10?
1020
o tr \
O lt
_
-1 * 0 *
NEW YORK
80*
NORTH
CAROLINA
J o s*
OR EGO N
R H O D E ISLAND
PENNSYLVANIA
SOUTH
CAROLINA
TENNESSEE
ooo _ w
##
oooM
oot
7000
90 7 0
70 8 0
GO- 70 |
O O SSA
SO 6011
-
so eo
40 3 0
3 0 .4 0
j
20-JO j
2 0 30
0.10
60
40 30
\ _
\
40 3 0 i
JO 4<'
__
20 JO ^
--------- — > #
#*
i
1 0 -2 0
0.10
lo 20 :
o io I
; -
2 0 .3 0
80 *
80 *■
ooo
70-80
00 7 0
oo,
GOTO
30 6 0
Vm .
SO 0O
. Xyw
---- _ >
JO 40
7080
■
V
40 50
30 40
203 0
46-30
• «
2030
1020
10 20
Joo*
0 10
D A K O TA
NEW
MEXICO
UTAH
W ASH IN G TO N
o . io
PI. XL
0.
u
#
,
s, V. J it h\
-------—
\'
^ : "^r V \ s ;
St
J
t
X
M^ia
mi
/
45 ♦
!
M
A l a ____J
S L.
m V
V lO 1 A
K>\, \
v.
i— f
j
:t
-
W
i: \
1X 451
I>VX«
Inhabitants ie rath <
tub/ muter oneyear
Vntler .10
Xotr The smaUer the number o f inhabihiii/s ta
eaeh ihi/i/. the buyer the liu ifi Rate. __ ——
__
MAP
SHOWING IN FIVE D E G R E E S OF D EN SIT Y THE
BIRTH RATE
AILING IN THE TERRITORY OF THE I NITED STATES EAST OF THE lOOX" MKRII
SO FARASTHE SAME ISINDICATED BY THE H TH>
A BETWEEN THE T HAL POPULATH)N
<
ANDTHE NUMBEROFCHII.DREN UNDER ONE YEAR OF AGE
SURVIVING AT THE DATE <»F ENUMERATION,JUNE I
Compiled irom the Returns oF Population at the Ninth Census
OF THE UNITED STATES. 1870.
FRANCIS A .WALKER
u
L in t s u u lu u t t th
u r ts m B lu r
? P iP
\ j u t u r M t i t r .'t w J
u lr t l f a n e s in B l u e
m a r r ft* t h e M t/ u ttn
r/wy’u/.,tie
fautm H
/s u
ytsarr Jfi/t
/ h 't i u
P l.X L I
\S ~> A
rs A % JXjfe
/i
M AP
SHOW ING THE PROPORTION OF DEATHS FROM
TO DEATH S FROM ALL CAU S E S
ompiled from the Returns of Mortality at the Ninth C
OF THE UNITED STATES 1870
R x p la ir i«t l i o n s .
Ulus Lutes uuiuate the beustJanes ef Oreu/v
t
, » / I'.f'u/.i/i,u
f / r * ui Mur .’ R . I 4 \ 4.i
u nr
1K .
■ • i /f f u thr tunnbrr r4 luhahtaiUs
r -\ f u a iY M il e t i i u u l u I th in ,< / . / / < //v>/y
<'
SlmJnl l.int .1 in Blur imjuulr thr im
ii.uJr limit
, . / « / , /ii/.itirn
•• ,
,r 111,’ir /<thr ■b i t r Jfi/r
,
' fun
T i \kttJui.i /mints hm.mls thr
/r
• s n/urh Mnr ,t/■./•iilulirn ri'less th.m If tr Mr Sumur J i r
n
//
u>lr T ,\i\uj,mu/ , h u > nitnnils K-hrr.it thr nkaJeJ/mrti
hr
i r / t
, • »«
Ihr hrtr «■ /«.■ / * y ml.ill.it ,irrJ.wMrs.%./nr m m.in
i •,usrx / , . rrr.is
* ’ Owsus ntums.in.iJml
/ , . thrs/nusmrxt oTxrUlnnrnt.
LA.
S '-A^
T /7 7
/
or'
f \i ;; iK
\
1
i
v
!
7 __A
X v \V ^
?
.
lijrtW—t
cS
n V ? iV v
l
S^v 7 /
f*r {.
i
vs
M AP
SHOWING THE PROPORTION OP' DEATHS FROM
MALARIAL D I S E A S E S
TO D EA TH S FROM ALL C A U S E S
Compiled from the Returns of Mortality at the Ninth
OF THE UNITED STATES 1870
F R A N C IS A .W A L K E R
explanations.
T e Blue Lutes uidu.it,- the btnindanes
h
,>/ trreufvt . 7 /’y-uhtfi.-n
T eF fu e m Blue ?//!/!! / / / i - ejjvrss the n m er . ■/ inhabitants
h u rs
u b
t*' the • ^ . e Mile / -wnl mthm eueh tfrou/,
\ uu
*
T e h'h,i,Ini Lutes m Blue indicate the ettlsnie limit of a /xyuilatien
h
et ? i r more te the .'u u r Mile
/ ar
The shaduta joints ten,ails the
returns n huh hare apeimhitien of less H m I te the ■
u
d
'hjinur Mile
X o lc
T occasional abrupt mkmtls betueenthe shaded/mrliens
he
and the hue oliic/syiii/alieir are doubtless doe ut Utaareases hierrors
ill the Census returns nurderr! to the s/nuseness ufsetHernrut.
ensus
PI. XL11I
CHART
S H O W IN G T H E D I S T R TRU TH ).V BY AG E AND S E X
The tota l number of'D eaths in each State or tram each specified
T h e m a les are on the le rl o f the pcrpen d u r/la r base lin e a n d
I) EAT H S
D isease or tirvup u fD isea ses as reported in the Censits is reduced
to thousandths, a n d the num ber o t‘thousandths or ‘ ach seer, in each
e
the fem ales cm the nerht.
The loirest horizontal lin e represents the deaths in the rrrst iteeade,
u nder ten rears or'aae,and the hia hest the deaths leereurhtr rears.
~
•
*
• *
The sejc which preponderates is sh a d ed .
OCCURRING DURING THE CENSUS YEAR.ENDING JUNE 1?T,
compiledfromthe Returns ofMortality at the Ninth Census 18 70.
decade or'life,.is represented bp the distance m easured on the
horizontal lines, serrrallr, rrom the perpendicular base lin e .
BT
FRANC IS A .WALKER
1. FOR THE UNITED STATES AND FOR THE SEVERAL STATES AND TERRITORIES.
80
70.6*1
60.
50.60
4 03 0
J0.4O
2030
10 0
.2
030
ALABAMA
UNITED STATES
ARKANSAS
DELAWARE
CONNECTICUT
CALIFORNIA
F LO R I D A
tHO
003
70 8 0
a ril
M
BS
6 0 70
■•
i.
..
—3 7
,•1
a it
3 0 .4 0
70.80
,<W
3 0 60
4 0 .5 0
3 ♦
0
<7
T
80 ♦
__ _ 02J
.e
"
.v c j
.
60
5030
___ >oj*
4 0.30
asm M
3 0 .4 0
20 JO
2 0 .3 0
1 0 .2 0
0 .1 0
10 0
.2
0
.10
_____
3S
GEORGIA
ILLINOIS
I N DIANA
IOWA
KENTUCKY
KANSAS
o tt
80 ♦
o w l L .oto
7 0.80
6 0 .7 0
\
--- W 7
5 0 .6 0
—
40_50
30.40
0*J
—
mm
20.30
~~
10 0
.2
0
.10
— ____ as
LOU ISIANA
80 *
MAINE
MARYLAND
oot
_#ar
7 0 .8 0
ow l _ « /
034
6 0 70
-■ A -A a / 7
—
—1m §
ooc ooo
m 0**
\
M l
O li\
5 0 -6 0
MICHIGAN
MASSACHUSETTS
MISSISSIPPI
______IW)'
ersetJ
0071 moo
tu sk , « V
-lo ti
MINNESOTA
80
I H H f oss
7 0.80
— - H 0 (U *
____
\oOT
6 0.70
50.60
40.30
30.40
20.30
10 0
.2
0
.10
jg
NEBRASKA
MISSOURI
NEVADA
NEW H A M P S H I R E
NEW
JERSEY
NEW YORK
NORTH
CAROLINA
80
70.80
6 0 .7 0
5 0 .6 0
4 0.50
30.40
2030
~p*
ii> ai
OHIO
OREGON
PENNSYLVANIA
R HO D E ISLAND
o ♦
o
SOUTH
10 0
.2
0
.10
_
CAROLINA-
TEXAS
TENNESSEE
O -- M
U rO
80 ♦
fi'I
70 80
70.8 0
6 0 .7 0
6 0 .7 0
jo no
5 0.60
4 .3
00
\o o o
2o no
40-50
- \o to
JO. 40
3 0 .4 0
2030
10 0
.2
0
.10
1 0 .2 0
0
.10
Ng
a *
VERMONT
an H
i
VIRGINIA
W E S T VIRGINIA
W I S C O N SI N
RO ♦
0 I S T R I C T O F C O L U M B IA
A R 1Z O N A
CO LOR ADO
t'Sf—
80
7 0 .8 0
70.8 0
« 0 .7 0
6 0 .7 0
3 0 .6 0
5 0.80
4 0 . SO
4 0.50
TO 40
3 0 .4 0
2 0 .3 0
2 0 .3 0
10.20
10.20
0
.10
it -
DAK O TA
MONTANA
IDAHO
N EW
MEX ICO
U T A H
0
.10
n ,
WASH IN G TO N
WYOMIN G
2. FOR GROUPS OF DISEASES AND CERTAIN SPECIAL DISEASES .
8♦
0
70 0
.8
60
.70
50 0
.6
40
.50
30.40
O or~ -oa o
0*4 1104
80 ♦
o/om\oo9
171- B \orf
’Li
- K |K| AM
<e
7 0 .0 0
8 0 .7 0
9040
0/4
<m
u
ots B L a 020
*« > E m — \<»*
P is
4 0 .3 0
Q. \ i
rtT
3 0.40
2 0 .3 0
10 0
.2
0
.10
A£$rv»qnte
A ll D iseases
General D iseases A..'Fehnlei
Gen Dis B. (G
onstJtntum
fll
Di s of Nervous Srstem
H is o f Circulatory
S y s te m
Dis. o f R e s p ir a t o r y S y s te m
Dis o f U rin u r y S y s te m
and O rg im * — f t’ ~e n e ra• n
**
—
and
o G — tio
including affection s connected w ith
D is. o f D ig e s t i v e S y s t e m
80 ♦
p n lp u t i i -
7 (LSD
80.70
9040
40.50
30.44)
20 JO
10J0
0
.10
D is .o f O rg a n s o f L o c o m o tio n
80 ♦
7 0 -8 0
Dis. o f Integumentary S ystem
T o t a l, A ccid en ts and Injuries
S m all Pox
K e a s lr s
O f 7 . __ _
003
6 0 .7 0
5 0 .6 0
0 7 t \ _______
40 5 0
# w V _ _
30 40
2 0 .3 0
0 lt\
1 0 .2 0
0 .1 6
•301—
C a n cers
S ca rle t Fever and Diphtheria
C e r e b r o - S p m a l,E it t e n e
an d Typhus F e v e r s
I n te rm itte n t and
R e m itte n t F e v e r s
E r y s ip e la s
H ooping C o u g h
BO ♦
80 ♦
70 8 0
7080
60 70
60.70
3 0 .6 0
50.60
4 0 .3 0
40 50
| JO 40
30.40
20.30
2 0 -3 0
10 0
.2
0
.10
10.20
0
.10
Rheumatism
70 8 0
6 0 .7 0
DiarrhoeaJHuenteiv
and Enteritis
B rig h ts D isea se
S cro fu la
Pneumonia
B ronchitis
-r
t y -
C o n s u m p tic
-'
L
30 60
7
1 .3
00
JO B
3 0 40
o d W
2 0 .3 0
ik
. O J4
10 0
.2
0
.10
n o \
__ v t
Croup
P s r a lv s is
H ydrocephalus
a fo M
J o ss
a r-
Apoplo
***
Encephalitis
and Meningitis
P leu risy
and Hvdrothorax
PI. X L I\
CHART
SH O W IN G THE D IS T R IB U T IO N
Jn th e co n stru ctio n er th e sets ce J io p ra m s n um bered I a n d f , th e
ti* a 2 n u m b er of'den f a
OF TH E
o em m n g d u rin g th e y e a r reported in f a
census, ts red u ced to th o u sa n d th s a n d f a
DEATH S
m em ber or th o u sa n d th s
w tiJun each rrumth i t rep resen ted W th e d ista n ce m e a su re d on th e
OCCURRIXGDrRIXGTHE CENSUS YEAR ENDING JUNE 1 st
hart -um ta l lin ts , sev e ra lly . rhm t f a p e r p e n d ic u la r base lin t
B Y SEX AND MONTH OF D E A TH A XD A C C O R D IN G TO R A C E AND N A T IO N A L IT Y ,
com piled from the R etu rns o f M ortality at th e N in th C en su s U. S.1870
T e nutlet are a the left ef the b se line and the females
h
n
a
<*» the right T eses w i h vrepcnderutes is shaded.
h
hc
F R A N C IS A
W A LK E R .
4
1 . B Y SEX AND MONTH OF DEATH.FOR THE EXITED STATES.VXD FOR THE SEVERAL STATES.VXD TERRITORIES.
•b tU rr •
o z
LOUISIANA
MAI N E
MARYLAND
MASSACHUSETTS
MICHIGAN
MINNESOTA
M ISSISSIPPI
MISSOUR I
N EVADA
N EBRASKA
NEWHAMPSHIRE
NEW J E R S E Y
NEW YORK
January
Febntarr
Marrh
Ffbruary
March
A pril
April
M ar
Mar
Jun e
Judy
August
•'isptember
O dder
th e
in
J u ly
A ugust
September
O d d er
Xovember
Decem ber
X e br
mme
December
NO RTH C A R O L I NA
O H I O
IREGON
PENNSYLVANIA
RHODE ISLAND
S OUTH CAROLINA
TENNESSEE
TEXAS
VERMONT
VIRGINIA
WESTVIRGINIA
W IS C O N S IN
January
February
January
February
March
A p ril
i M ay
Jun e
Jubr
March
June
July
lu a n ti
September
O dder
Scrumb*r
December
August
September
O dder
Xovember
December
D I S T R I C T o r CO LUM BIA
COLORADO
DAKOTA
IDAHO
NEW MEXICO
U T A H
WASHINGTON
2
. HY SEX ANI) MONTH OF DEATH,FOR GROUPS OF DISEASES AND CERTAIN SPKCLVL D IS E A S E S .
January
FVbraary
Ja n u a ry
February
M atch
A p ril
May
June
Ju ly
March
A pril
Ju ly
Au.tu.S
Septem ber
October
Xorrm hrr
Decem ber
August
All Diseases
Septem ber
October
Xovtrnber
December
(ienmil Discuses A.fFebnlrl
GenDis.B iCmstitutional)
Din o f Nervous S ystem
Dis of Cirvulatoiy
System .
Ja n uary
February
M arch
A p ril
May
J n
u e
J u ly
D is.of R espiratory Dis o f T rin a iy System mul() n>unit o f
System
Generation including Affections
connected with IVeenancy
w
ote___ _
^
/
Dis o f D igest ire
S y stem
(us
Dis.oi O rgans ofLocom otion
Dis.of In teg am en tarv
Total Acculnils
anil Injuries
o
. laruuiry
/rAm ary
March
A p ril
M ay
Ju n e
J u (r
A ugust
s,y 7eruh y
*
O d d er
Xorember
December
.luaii. rt
Septem ber
October
X orrm ber
D ecem ber
___ / o h
Sm all Pox
M e a s le s
Cancers
Scarlet Fever and
Diphtheria
Cerehro - Spina 1, Ent eric
andTyphus Fevers
Interm ittent and
Rem ittent F evers
Uoopind ( on Ah
January
F ru ry
eb a
A pril
M ay
•u e
t n
J u ly
A nan s f
SejMember
October
X orrm ber
D ecem ber
Di orrhoe H,pjrsentery
and Enteritis
.1
he
June
J u ly
A u g u st
Septem ber
October
Xt'ormber
D irm b er
'1 ° l t* frt fh ts dra ym en th e v e r tic a l lin n s a resn p p a red
to be draw n downwards through a th rth er d ista n ce o t'
w hich they a p p ea r in th e d ia g ra m a s erw rarrd ■
R h eu m atism
January
February
March
A p r il
March
fo u r arches, m akin g them e.m d ly fence the len g th a t
Erysipelas
3 . B Y RACE AND N ATION ALITY FOR THE UNITED S T A T E S .
P1.X LY .
i- x tF *
7
-
MI O
O
X
( htlrrtoom jo.onodtalhsfrom tillran*\
s
1 1 j
:Y r
S H O W IN G T H E P R O P O R TIO N O F D E A T H S FROM
INTESTINAL D I S E A S E S
TO D E A T H S F R O M A LL C A U S E S
compiled from the Returns of Mortality at the Ninth Census
OF THE UNITED STATES 1870
F R A N C IS A W A LK E R
Explanations.
Ttu Blur lines mduate the boundaries of (rroups o f Imputation
Thefigure* m Blue 11818 4 . 43* ejprrss the number ofinhabitants
6
to the .Squa Mile found within each tfrtiu/.
re
T e .Shadeil Lutes in Blue uuhoate the outside limit of a population
h
of 2 or more to the .Square Jfile The shadma points tow.mis the
regions wineh have apomilation of less th.m 2 to the 'Square /file
Note Theoccasional abrupt intenub between the shaded
portions
and the lute o fnopqiuhition.are doubtless due
m ntanv eases toerrors
in the C n u returns, mordent to the s/Htrseness ofsettlement.
e s s
r*
J
/ \
3
r * ji« -4
;
} J/j
a*y
-
Ntl
-
h
r ^'^yTr
3
■ ■
1
/ ' tr Z O t f t k r r f t / n n /c u r
nf r S w f / f t / a/s r m / n s s
a .14 m
m .*
SHOW ING THK PROPORTION OF DEATHS FROM
<ompiled Vom the Returns of Mortalitv at Ihe Ninth Census
OF
THK EXITED STATES 1870
T y riuiy Lutss uuiuuly t b x / l n . of O a p offipuiatinn
h
hy * i u a y\
r u x
Thefigures m Blue •VIM 4.i 4d express the nun,hi elinhahitojils
to the X/uare Mile teund mthut each < n u
/>p
T e Shaded Lutes u, Blue indicate the autsule haul ,,1'a pepulab.m
h
n*2 m-more te the Square Mile The shaduni /nulls feu.mis the
reefu n , which hare a/mimlatien of less then 2 te the hyiuirr Mile
r s
X o tr
T e tseusumul a
h
hm
/d interntit between the shade.!porheus
and the line elhc ppiilah. n are doubtless due in mane eases to errors
the {'ensue returns incident !e the s/muteness
e l settlement.
in
NUMBER O F B U N D IN THE UNITED STATE S
CH AR T
Explanation-
d id d
iv e lyase a i sexasfollow m m
s
SH O W IN G T H E D I S T R I B U T I O N BY A G E AND SE X
T e trial n m r at' B I IX J) in e c .ftate
h
u hr
*
ah
& r reported in the
C n u is red c d to t e x r t xa dthe n m e at't e s n t sefe c
e s s
ue
h u a dk n
u br
h u a dh
ah
M a le s .
OF
BLINDNESS.
sejr m e c decade re' life, is r p e e t d h t distance m a u e
ah
e r s n e , r he
e s rd
a t e h n m a tines serrmllr. r a the perpendicular b s line
n h e -u t l
em
ae
The m ales a re a the lerf at the h u e lin e, a n d the fem ales an th e n a h t.
T he lam est h a n \ m ta l lin e represents th e fir s t d eca de, u n d er ten erane
ri'aete, a n d th e h ia h e st orrr tme h u n d red rears
PREPARED F O R THE S T A T IS T IC A L A T L A S OF THE EXITED S T M T S
.1
by 1rkd ILWix e s . Sety Illinois State Board of Charities.
T h e sew w hich prep e n d e n t le s is sh a d e d
l e nu d es.
X o.
I*rOwt
Orrr
nx>
~ ____ JBO ..
Between a os top . ........1 5 6
so
tv
7 06
70
SO ___ 1 3 5 3
60
70
. 1 5 5 4 --J070
JO
tk\ . „ i i s a . , —071
40
SO
510
.io
44* ___.1 2 8 6 - — s
m
20
30 ___ J 2 7 8
W
20 ___ 1 3 8 1 . .
r~.drr la _______ ---------5 0 4 - —030 H u ler
N IN T H CEXSE'S 1 8 7 0 .
H in l—
11.341
Xo
JkrCcmt
aos
40
039
20
JO.
IO
SO
la _______ -------- 3 1 5 .
T o ta l
m s
__ 8.972
Blind, of unknown age omitted..)
ME
N H
VT
MASS
R I
CONN
n
r
DEL
NJ
PENN
OHIO
V
UNITED
EASTERN
S T A T E S
INO
J
ILL
IA
KAN
NEB
MICH
MINN
WIS
J
WESTERN
PACIFIC
SOUTHERN
NUMBER OF BLIND IN T11KUNITED STATES,
divided bv nae «nd s e x « s follow H .vix i
CH ART
Kxpl limit inn ■
Mu
ilie
SH O W IN G T H E D I S T R I B U T I O N BY AG E AND S I N
The tr ia l n ttm lrr oC B L I N T) in each .tta/e a s tefto rle d m th e
(en .fl/s ut reduced tc thousandths, and th e n um ber a t' fhou.vam ilks o f each
Between SO*
_______ SO —
Between 1 a
90
a
a
PREPARED FOR THE S T A T IS T IC A L A T L A S OF THE UNITED STATES
b y Fhkd II.Winks . S ecy Illin o is S ta te B oard o f Chain ti e s .
________ 7 0 __
.»
a
C E N S E TS 1 8 6 0 .
fia .
7a
M
J
hc; o
T h e ■ «r ir tu r l foY fH oulora los ia jh a d e d .
EIGH TH
IWCemt
(h e r . too
. too
Orrr
B L IN D N E S S .
seer m each d e ca d e a ' lir e . ts represented hr th e di.etnnce m easured
an the h a n xa n ta ! Itn os. seven/H r. tram th e p erp en d icu la r ha.te lin e
The m ales a re an the le ft at'the base Itn e.a ru i th e fem ales an th e n a h t
The lanes/ lio n \an t a t h u e represents the first d eca de .u n d e r ten rea rs
ri'a a e, a n d th e h ia h e st in rr m e h u n d red rears
..to
HI
7
O SS
1 59
4 2 1
81
JO
lender
T ria l
7 7 :»
■ 98
I
Total
I •• 7
Order
7
0
_
tk
)
to
.JO
aos
.04
1
OSS
0V
4
5.42 1
to
(Blind of unknown, age omitted, j
ME
MASS
VT
R I/on attCn/
CONN
DEL
PENN
f n r tk n )
J
O H IO
v ------EASTERN
IN O
IL L
K AN
V___________
^
MICH
WIS
CAL
MINN
_____ >
-------------------------
WESTERN
J
N C tool n o t . /
T E N N /oos m a im )
ARK
TEX
M IS S (a o tim C w l
ALA
S C
FLA
. Vi
nnhn f
.044
036
PI. XLYIll
NUMBER OF DEAF M UTES IN THE U N ITE D S T A T E S
CH AR T
Explaxuttion
•fandedbraoeandsex as follows viz:
SH O W IN G T H E D I S T R I B U T I O N BY A G E A N D SE X
71 * to ta l
number o /D E A F X iV T E S / n each sta te «<f reported rn th e
( en su s is reduced to theusunJtks a n d ik e num ber tv'tkoasnm dks c t each
Males
DEAF MUTISM.
in tack d eca d e a ' lir e , ts represented Ar Ike distan ce m easured
mi ike h orizon tal lin es serrrailr. rrrvn the perp en d icula r hose lin e
scjt
____ 18
. 1 0
PREPARED FOR THE S T A T IS T IC A L A T L A S OE H R : UNITED STATES
The m ales are an the le i! at the Suse fine a n d Ike fem ales mt the n a k i.
The Invest h o rizo n tal time represents the first decade, under ten rears
b y Fr e d HMix e s . Secy Illin o is
a i’aae. a n d the k ia h est enrr erne hundred rears
T h e se s- n kick p rep on dera tes is sh a d ed
Females
X o.
Jh M
tW r
too ............... . !_
Henrm j*o
JlV ......... 2 .......
SO
__
N IN T H C E N SU S 18 7 0 .
Haler
JO
5
r* x
...... 1 0 8 .
___ 2 9 1 .
ear
. i 2 2 .«.•
40
30
StateBoat'd o f Charities.
tk’
X o.
007
n t
JO
IQ
jo
tk>
------ 56 O. \ . 0 JS
1 0 25 .
__ 3 0 40 . .
..... __ 1 3 8Q ,
Total -- 8 89 5
trs
ms
Under
1C
____
Total
Dt’tif J Cutes a'ujiC/um n iu/e o m itted .
\p*»
097
\p 3 t
K*
07
UNITED
STATES
E R N
oee
002 p e r
00 7 _ fl0
v ;Z
ILL
KAN
NE B
MICH
V "
W ESTER N
—
(M O
KY
W VA
PACIFIC
1
VA
MD
N C
TENN
TEX
ARK
LA
MISS
ALA
FLA
S C
GA
-V
J
SOUTHERN
'
c-
CH ART
.
r.x p ltiiid tio n «
N H R OFDEAF MITES INTHE EXITED STATES
TM E
divided by a£e and sex as follows viz
SHOWING THE DISTRIBU TION BYAGE AND SIX
The total number o iD K A F M U T E S u i each .d a te a s imported in the
C ensus is reduced fo thousandths. and the num ber at' thousandths ofeach
Mal e*
Oe joa
nr
DEAF MUTISM.
sear in each d eca d e os' It Co, is represented In the distan ce m easured
on the h o n ta n ta / lin es, sereraU r, tram the perpen dicular ha.tr line.
Between
so nr
.. OOJ
33
PREPARED FOR ITIF. S T A T IS T IC A L A T L A S OF THE UNITED STATE
The m ales are an the let} at'the base h n e.a n d the fem ales an the n a k i.
The lowest h a riten la / hne represents the first decade, under ten rears
at*age, a n d the h iahest urrr one hundred rents
BO
208
4 2 5.
by RffiDHAViNES, Secy Illinois StatcBourd ofCharities.
The .if.r which prepon derates is sh a d ed
« 37
2 2.
E I G H T H C E N S U S 1IIB0.
F ale*
em
fh
-M
13 7 2
- 003
—0
07
on
x .
Bctn-een v <r too
------------- an----------no
70
so
. ......
1
2
7
fh -M
3
4
8
3
OOt
fhU
-<UJ
aw
0 *4
A*
4 0 9
Under
3 10 8
jo
Total___
7. l o a.
U nder
to
0*4
Trial
5 .6 8 3.
(DeafM utes efunknown. age om itted-)
o unin
cr
UNITED
ME
M ASS
N V O2 uuJ: J
C
I
CONN
N J
DEL
PENN
STATES
EAS TERN
IND
I L L w unJtn
«
KAN
M ICH
CAL
M IN N
W IS
WE S T E R N
MO
'co2 unkn,
KY
MD
:,e * u x in
NC
T E N N < OTJI® i*
ARK
TEX
LA
M 1SS/^ a5ntid
ALA
/ooi unk n )
OHIO.ejiy //
Kf/ ,v
t/c
PI.XI.IX
CHART
Explanation:
XCXABEB o r D ESAKE IX THE r S I T E l) ST A T E S
d m d r tU y a s e a n d s e r a s follow 's v iz
SHOWING THK DISTRIBUTION' BY AGE AND S IX
Thr to ta l num ber o f' I X S A X E
in ra th s ta te a s reportret m th e
( e n s tis is reduced tv thousard ths and th r n u m b er o f thousarndths «*/'rack
Males
INSANITY.
.war m r a t i d re a d s re ' l i f e , is represented hr th r d ista n ce m easured
m the h vrru m ta l lin e s serera lle. ream th r p erp en d iru la r hose lin e
Thr m ales a re am th r le ft o f the b u r h n s a n d th r fem ales m th r rraht.
T h r low est h o n -.o n ta l lin e represents th r first d rea d s, u n d er ten y ea rs
st'a a r, a n d th r h ia h r st arer tmr h u n d red y ea rs
7
0
-------- so ___ 90 __ 20 2
_______ 70 ____ SO't
___ c» ar.
*_
______ so___
PREPARED FOR THE STATISTICAL ATLAS OF THE EXITED STATES
_____ to__ .jb
\
by Frkd ItWlNKS, Secy Illin o is State Board o f Charities.
T h e s e s w hich p rep o n d era tes is sh a d e d
.V
20
N IN T H C E N S E S 1870.
40.
JO.
ip
U nder __10 1 ____
T ota l.
ME
UNITED
N H
VT
CONN
R I
MASS
STATES
Fem ales
Xo.
i\ re r _Ufa____ L _____ i
between p o a too. . .
2 *
N Y
N J
DE L
L
Xo
RrtW
____1 o .
--------- 3
SOS
_ 6 9 2 O f9
_
-.1 5 2 L O
ft
2
3
4
-3
1
__6 7 T—
.1 7 * 6 .
.2 8 1 7 ... art
44
7 15
5 47
6 63-.
042 .
.0 7 4
-4 2 6 L. MLS
.4 5 6 2— -Its
.3 4 3 l _ o e
n
Coder
----I S O ..
1 8 ,0 3 3
Tota l.
Insane of unknown opr omitted.)
PENN
OHIO
_____d
~V"
EASTERN
CHART
kxp Intuit ion •
NTMH HR OF IN SA N E IN THE U N ITED S T A T E S
divided by a4e and sex as follow:; viz
He
id*
SHOWING THE DISTRIBUTION BYAGE AND S IX
The to ta l num ber o t' I N S A X E
tn each .tfa /r a s rep o rted m th e
te n s u s is red u ced tv thousandths an<lthe n um ber m ' fhviLO/miths cf>each
INSANITY.
S lL
H
O
4
1A
.1 2 0
404
Total.
.<e.r in each d eca d e o f' li f e , is represented hr th e d ista n ce m easured
on the h o n xo n ta l lin o s, sererail[r, from th e p erp en d icu la r ha.w lin e .
The m alar are on the le t} ot'the hose lin e, a n d the fem ales on th e n o h t
Ih r low est h o n \o n ta l h u e represents the tint/ d eca d e, tin d er ten yoarv
•4 ape, a n d th r h ta h e sf tn er one h u n d red rears
m
I 5 3 .1
2 4 5.1
.10 2 5
2 4 50
62
65
11 7 6 9
(her.
so r
70
PREBARED FOR THE STATISTICAL ATT A S OF THE UNITED STATES
too
hv R ied KWTn e s , Secy Illinois State Board o f Charities.
T h e s e s ' w hu h fn rp on d e ra te s is s h a d e d .
EI G H T H C E N S U S I860.
Coder
.
6
1
A*
fr r V
Xo
•HU
02
0
0/7
50 3
IN D
12 uni ti.
uo
on
007 Coder'
jo
Total
EASTERN
IL L .ov+unAhJ
I A W la d n j
e
KAN
MICH
OA*U7lJcn
WIS
v —
MINN
OR
V____
CAL «
-
Y
WESTERN
PACIFIC
SOUTHERN
v
m
n
m
‘o s n'n
ou h ^
STATES
007
<J
C
tns
Insane of unknown apt omitted.)
UNITED
Wi
J O --------- 1 _____ 1 5 1 -
unkn
145
1 2 ,1 5 7
0*
3
one
PI. L
CHART
E x p la n atio n
^ m d w lW a s e a n d s e r a s fo llo w s v iz
SHOWING THE DISTRIBU TION BY AGE AND SIN
C m rath state as reported in the
T e total number oT ID TO T J
h
5TJIBER OF ID IO T IC IN THE UNITED ST A T E S
( ensus is reduced io thousardlJb andthe number * ‘t
u hcus
nn* tbsefe c
ah
Hairs
1 I) I () CY.
tx each decade ee' lae. is represented hr the distance measured
nr the hen zemtal lines serrrallr, r m the perpendicular hise line
r m
(W r
Mv
Between *c & loo.
The lowest h o rizo n ta l h n e represents the tirst decade. m uter ten rears
ot uae. a n d the h ia h est oerr *me hundred rears.
■V,-
7O.
45 8
So
fo , .
to
JOl
S*
C
e o l...
JO
30^
io
zo\
Cmder___1 0 _______J_ - .1 IT I
N IN TH CEN SU S 1870.
-
VP
<a»
to
SO
ca
t*
CO
SO
------------ SO------40 ,
J’
V
MS
r ,j ^ -
DEL
IS
1 m
m
1 5R Z. L ah
*
k >_____
Total____ 14 4 7 2
NY
i/tr ll
ihrrloo
60
by btF .l) HMin k s . Secy Illinois StateBoard ofCharities.
The .ie.c which p repon derates is sh a d ed
l* r jf
----------- J*» -__ _ PC __
PREPARED FO R THE S T A T IS T I C S A T L A S OF THE UNITED STATES
The m ales are ,m the le ft oe'the h u e line, a n d the fem ales im the n a h t
Frauds s
-V o.
8 » 2 -.
T o la /._ . 1 0 . 0 3 R
PENN
O H IO
E A S T E RN
SOUTHERN
CHART
K x ,.l u n u t io n •
XT M BER OF IDIOTIC IN THE EXITED STATES
divided b y utfe u iid s e x u s fo llo w s viz
SH O W IN G T H E D I S T R I B U T I O N B Y A G E AND S I N
Ih e to ta l num ber a t' I D I O T / C in each .d a te a.t i t p o tte d /// th e
C en su s is reduce*! to thousandth* a n d th e n um ber at'thoiuan tU hs ofeach
M ale*
I I) I () CY.
.sv c m each d e ca d e oi l i f e , i f represented hr th e d ista n ce rara.-Hired
iw Ihe Hon ton t a t lin e s , seeem lfy , from ih e p erp en d icu la r base lin e
(b r er
B etw een
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
PREPARET) FOR THE S T A T IS T IC A L A T L A S OF TIIE U XITED STATES
t h e m odes a re on the le i} ot'the h is t hn e. a n d the fem ales on th e n a h t
’
The low est h on xo n /a l tin e represents Ihe first d rea d r. u n d er ten rea rs
ot'aae, a n d th e h ia h e st arrr one h um !red rears
by FRf.d R W in e s , Secy Illinois StateBoard ofClmrities.
T h e s e s ' w hich p rep o n d era tes i t sha d ed -.
Female*
N o
E I G H T H C E N S U S 1860.
C o d er
........... ........._ L _
.«*» tr . w n
n o _____A t ________ 3 2
7 0 _____ 8*1
1% 1
SO _____ 7U ______ 3 3 *
3 0 _____ 8 0
.... 0 2 #
4 0 _____ SO
_1 1 ♦ o
1 7 * ft
JO _____ 4 0
t o ____ J O ____ 2 9 H 3
JO _____ t o
..... Z M l
t o _________
1 O O ft
MO
__ _
I tr J t
,o o
. MU
002
ocn
0/8
ittf
/ -M
h
Between SO *
041
m
•m
tie
is f
m t
Cd
n n
Total
Total
( Idiotic o f unknown atfc omitted J
ME
■ o r unJrn.
a
UNITED
N H
VT
MA S S
o z iu ik ii)
N V foot lin k'll)
unkn)
KAN
M IC H
W IS
KY
u um!
h
VA
M D loot unit,
N CfoaiHMth
T E N N oasunkn.,
C AL
OR
MINN
---------- N/--------W E S T E R N
MO
PZN N ruuttfh)
DEL
N
O H I O in tu n k n
V
E AS T E R N
S TATE S
IND
CONN
R I
V '"
J
R A C I F 1C
ARK
T E X (oos u n h h j
SOUTHERN
LA
MI SS
ALA
GA
oezunJtk.}
S C
FLA
<w
Arras of' t(roles proportional.
SeaU tSOO to the strua/r inch
C 1IAKT
S H O W I N G T H E A G O H E G A T E X I’ M H E R O f
U LIND
Km m i l e
iui'liulliiA .
AND TH E P R O P O R T I O N OF M A L E S A N D F E M A L E S ,
W H I T E O R C O L O R E D , N A T I V E OR F O R E I G N
AT THE NINTH CENSUS 1070;
<uul
m s as]
/
,r
also tlie increase since 1860.
P R E PAR E 1 FO RTH E ST A TI ST I CAL AT L AS 0 K TH K 17NITEI) S TATE S
)
6TATCS
by FRED. H. WINKS ServIUinois Slate B oard o f C liun ties.
F«m ulo
(W lu ls )
I .Comparative dew of the distribution of Blindness by sex and nativity in the several States.
( Thf.tr figures trier to the la n te thrure in the le ft ttfgter ren ter j
f ft t
Ml
'
NH
VT
MA S S
R I
CONN
N Y
NJ
DE L
PENN
OHI O
C1 i
f:
,ND
,LL
,A
K ANNE B
MI CN
f
WI S
MINN
MO
i 1 C1
e€'<t> 4
KY
W VA
VA
MO
NC
TE N N
7
/
ARK
T EX
LA
MI SS
ALA
QA
4
b*
SC
FLA,
" V ------------------------------------------ 1
h - 0
OR
CAL
^
-V‘opposite first rathux thru Zero L le/i denotes decrees t/t sector lor Xafite Merles that opposite
‘
>
first radius to right limit Zero, degrees ta sector for Xa/tir Females,etnd that opposite scrota/
radius to right, the sum oTthe degrees tn the two sectors Tar Females, Xahve and Fbrdgn.
II.C om p arative view o f the distribution o f Blindness b v sex an d color.
( These figures refer to the large figure in the right upper corner)
M
ME
NH
VT
MASS
R I
CONN
NY
K ANNEB
It
C C t €5 f *CiCf) 0 0 tr<A,
,
MI CH
WI S
,N
N
MI NN
MO
KY
W VA
VA
MD
NC
TENN
ARK
TEX
LA
MI S S
ALA
OA
€>4.
SC
y
FLA
*0
. OR
CAL
X? opftosite first radius from Zero to left denotes degrees in sector for White Males/that opposite
lirst melius to right from Zero, degrees in sector for Wide Females, and that opposite secorut
radius to right, the sum o/'the degrees tn the two sectors lor Females, fl7i/te and tblored.
Ill -Co mpara t ive view o f the in crease in the 'n u m b er o f the Blind between 18G0 and 1870.
OO 0 O 0 0 O
ME
NH
VT
M ASS
R I
CONN
NY
00 O O
NJ
DEL
PENN
OHIO
------- J
EASTER N
O O ©
I NO
I LL
IA
V ---------------------------- ^
KAN NEB MI CH
O
WIS
0O
MI NN
MO
O
KY
VA
O0 O
NC
O
TENN
0 0 0 0
ARK
TEX
LA
MI S S
O
ALA
O
OA
0
SC
O
o
FLA
OR
CAL
---------------------------- / V -
W E STER N
HI
MD
Inner rt tries represent numbers reported at IStXt, outer atr/es, ratrulers at 1 7
X (1
(hr shotted runs, the tnr/et/se in the intern at.
SOUTHERN
PA Cl FI C
dims ol'lirvtes (nv/H>rtu‘iial
: M W to the st[tutit irn/i,
CHART
S H O W I N G T H E A G G R E G A T E N I'M H E H OF
]) E A F M ITT E S
A N D TH E P R O P O R T I O N OF M A L E S A N D F E M A L E S ,
W H I T E Q R C O L O R E D , N A T IV E OR F O R E I G N .
AT THE NINTH CENSUS 1870,
also the increase si net1 18(»0.
P R E PAR E I) FO R TH E S T A T IS T IC A L ATLAS OF Til E EXIT ED STATE S
bv FRE D. II .WINES Secv.Illinois State B oard o f C h an ties.
I. Comparative view of the distribution of Deaf Mutism by sex and nativity in the several Slates.
(Those flgures refer to the lame rumrr in the let) upper earner, J ■
€
ME
i > 4#5 #
■
■ I*
,.
NH
VT
MASS
R I
CONN
■
N Y
4 i €> €
Mi
NJ
DEL
PENN
OHI O
4 4r t\r r> i « »
I NI
ILL
IA
_ _
_
KAN
NEB
MI CH
WI S
MI NN
_________________ X
V '~
V
MO
KY
W VA
1t1
VA
MD
NO
11 1 **
«
c
TENN
ARK
T EX
LA
MISS
I
ALA
CA
L
*
w
S C
FLA
/ . X fopposite /inf nidius then Zero to left denotes degrees ret senior fir Xa/nv Mates that opposite
fleet radius to right Avert Zero,dearers in sector /or Xa/ur fem ales, and that opposite second,
radius to rufht, the sum at'the degrees ret the tuv sectors /or females, .Votive a n d foreign.
II.Comparative view of the distribution of I)eaf Mutism by sex and color.
I These turnm i rererto the lame tiaair at the rich l igy>cr comer:/
( ) i> * f
ME
N H
VT
MASS
R I
<
*
€
CON N
NY
€
it
NJ
DEL
P ENN
4 t)e\ €>t 4 I i 4i
ILL
OHI O
IA
KAN
NEB
MI CH
WI S
MI NN
M0
KY
W VA
VA
<H ri' f * i f i r ids
MD
N C
TENN
ARK
TEX
LA
MI S S
ALA
CA
SC
FLA
//. X " o/postte ties/ itidrus flvm Zero to le/t denotes degrees in sector tor White Males tjiat opposite
tin t radius to right litvn Zero, degrees in sector lor White females, and that opposite Second
radius to right, the stun ofthe degrees in the /no sectors tor Females, White and Colored.
IFI.Comparatrve view of the in cre a s e in the number of the D eaf Mutes between I860 and 1870.
ME
NH
VT
MA S S
RI
CON N
N- Y
EASTER N
O
I HI O
OODe ®o o @ O O O o O O o o o o o o o
IN 0
ILL
IA
KAN
NEB
MI CH
WI S
MI NN
M 0
K Y
VA
WESTERN
the stuiileil rims, the increase in theintenut
NC
TENN
ARK
-------- >✓ *-------S O UTH E R N
TEX
LA
MI S S
ALA
GA
SC
O
FLA
A
PACIFIC
P1.L1I
H I. Inner envies represent numben rejtorted at tStW, outer a/rles, numbers at /S70.
MD
O
Jnus ot 'tlnirs pngxirtional
Scu!r > f(t In the sgaore inch
$A
C 11A H T
S H O W I N G T H E A G G R E G A T E N I ' M H K K OF
IXSANK
A N l) T H E P R O P O R T I O N O F M A L E S A N D F E M A L E S ,
W H IT E O R C O L O R E D ,N A T I V E O R F O R E IG N .
A T THE NINTH C E N S U S 1 8 7 0 ;
STATES
also the increase since 18(10.
P R E P A R E D FO R TIIE S T A T IS T IC A L AT L A S OF THE UNI TEI>S TATE S
bvFR ED .H .W IN ES SecvIUinois State B oa rd o f Charities.
Fmmlr
While
I.Com parative w e w o f the diatiibutian o f Insanity by sex and nativity in the several States.
/ These figures trier to the large Itpiiir in the led u/fur comer.J
/
ME
NH
VT
MASS
Rl
CONN
N y
NJ
DE L
PENN
OHI O
J
€ 5 4 '4 e j k 4 4
• l ,“ '
I LL
IA
KANNEBMI CH
WIS
i
I I NN
M<
;€ 5 f
KY
W VA
N C
VA
4
a*
« < r <
TENN
ARK
TEX
<
LA
ALA
Q1
Jr
4
M ISS
OA
S C FLA
OR
CAL
-------v --------------------------------------
J. N“o/posite first nut ms then Zen’tofeti denotes degrees in sector for Native Males that opposite
second nidi ns to let), the sum o/'lhe decrees in the tuv sectors tor Mates, Native and Foreign,
Unit opposite til'st nii/uis to right, degrees in sector for Native f/mates
H.Comparative view of the distribution of Insanity by sex and color.
(These figures netir to the targe figure in the right upper comer
U
?
ME
NH
VT
MASS
Rl
CONN
N Y
NJ
DEL
PENN
OH I O
/
a
5
I LL
(i 1b/
IA
KAN NEB MI CH
I
•
WIS
M
t€ € < € ’ f C 4 ’
o
IN
N
•
M
l
•
•
s
KY
W VA
VA
#
'll
•
NC
TENN
«
0
ARK T E X
«
LA
* t! ' * ' < ' H A '
9
«
0
MI SS
ALA
MI S S
ALA
OA
«
SC
T "V ~
II
FLA
y
N?opposite first rtutius tram Zero to lett tienotes degrees in sector for White Mates, that opposite
second radius totetl, the sum o/'the degrees m the tuv sectors tor Mutes, White and Colored,
that opposite first m tints to right, degrees in sector for White femates.
III .Comparative view of’the increase in the number of Insane between I860 and 1 70
8
Ooo
N H
O O O oo o
N C
VT
TENN
ARK T EX
LA
Oo.
OA
S C
FLA
■ "V-------SOUTHERN
III
Inner cartes represent numbers re/x'rted at /Stitt
outer nodes, numbers at IS70, the shutted runs,
the inctruse in the inter)id In Mississiggn the ntimber /r/irted ut ISfiO
OJOOOeds the- number at
i,T7(l in this tuse the inner carte re/ursrnt.r /S7(> anti is stunted the outer arete represents
,
id tilt, amt the rim is letl unshaded
P A C I FI C
.■/mis ot'ti/ctespnyior/iorial
XcaU.ticH' to theapian inch
CHART
S H O W I N G T H E A G G R E G A T E N T M H K R OF
I I) I () T S
AND THE P R O P O R T I O N OF M A L E S AN D F E M A L E S ,
W H IT E O R C O L O R E D , N A T IV E O R F O R E I G N
AT THE NINTH CENSUS 1870;
a l s o th e in o m a s o s in c e U>(>0.
PREPARED FOR THE STATISTICAL ATLAS OK TIIK PXITKDSTATES
by FRE D. II .WINES ServIllinois Slate Board o f Uharities.
I. Comparative view o f the distribution o f Idiotism by sex and nativity in the several States.
( These figures tv/er to the turtle name in the leit uffier inner.)
DEL
OR CAL
PENN
/. N'cppoeite tint nutuis then Zero U
’tef) denotes decrees i/t sector tor Xalnr Mutes, that opposite
tint radius toriaht from Zero,dearres in sector tbr -Value Females, and that opposite second
radius to ni/hl, the sum ot'ttte dee/rees in the two sectors tor Females. Satire and Foreign.
IT.Comparative view of the distribution ofIdiotism by sex and color.
(Those dames rerh-to the hi tar liaure m the npht upper center.)
It. S? opposite first radius from Zero to left denotes degrees in sector lor White Males,that opposite
tint radius to riaht thorn Zero, dee/rees i/l sector for White Ferrates, and that opposite second
radius to rii/ht, the sum o f the da/rres in the tiro sectors tor Females, White and Colored.
m.comparative view of the increase in the number of the Idiotic between 1860 and 1870.
OooooOO
TENN
SOUTHERN
WESTERN
W Lour cirdes represent numbers reported, at I860. outer circles, numbers at 1X the shaded runs,
70,
the increase in the interred, in three cases
ARK
r a Maine, XH.and X C the number repotted at ISfiO
exceeds die number at 1870. in these cases the inner aretes represent 1870and a/r shaded}
the outer circles represent I860 and the runs a/r te/l unshaded.
TEX
LA
M ISS
ALA
GA
O O oo
S C
FLA
OR CAL
PACI FI C
V IT IJ
N J
@FedFRASER